WO2023030196A1 - Device interaction method, electronic device and system - Google Patents

Device interaction method, electronic device and system Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2023030196A1
WO2023030196A1 PCT/CN2022/115212 CN2022115212W WO2023030196A1 WO 2023030196 A1 WO2023030196 A1 WO 2023030196A1 CN 2022115212 W CN2022115212 W CN 2022115212W WO 2023030196 A1 WO2023030196 A1 WO 2023030196A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
control
user
scenario
interface
service
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2022/115212
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
陈绍君
胡建荣
彭峰
熊张亮
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2023030196A1 publication Critical patent/WO2023030196A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • G06F3/0481Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] based on specific properties of the displayed interaction object or a metaphor-based environment, e.g. interaction with desktop elements like windows or icons, or assisted by a cursor's changing behaviour or appearance
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • G06F3/0484Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] for the control of specific functions or operations, e.g. selecting or manipulating an object, an image or a displayed text element, setting a parameter value or selecting a range
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • G06F3/0484Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] for the control of specific functions or operations, e.g. selecting or manipulating an object, an image or a displayed text element, setting a parameter value or selecting a range
    • G06F3/0486Drag-and-drop
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/14Digital output to display device ; Cooperation and interconnection of the display device with other functional units

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the technical field of terminals, and in particular to a device interaction method, electronic device and system.
  • users own more and more smart terminal devices.
  • users often need two or more terminal devices to link or work together to provide certain services and realize certain functions, which can also be called cross-device services.
  • mobile phones and smart screens cooperate to realize video projection; mobile phones share files or pictures with other devices.
  • the same device manufacturer or the same application manufacturer may set different entry points and different trigger methods for different cross-device services. Different device manufacturers or different application manufacturers may also set different entry points and different trigger methods for the same cross-device service. For example, if a user needs to share a picture on electronic device A to electronic device B, the user can select the picture to be shared on electronic device A, click the sharing control, and then electronic device A starts to search for surrounding devices and display a list of devices. Select electronic device B in the device list, and electronic device A can send the selected picture to electronic device B. For another example, the user needs to cast the screen content of electronic device A to electronic device B. The user needs to turn on the wireless function of electronic device A and electronic device B, and then pair and establish a connection. After that, the user opens and casts on electronic device A. For screen-related applications, the screen projection control is operated in the application interface, and then electronic device A sends screen projection data to electronic device B, and electronic device B displays the screen image of electronic device A.
  • This application provides a device interaction method, electronic device and system.
  • the device interaction method provides a unified entrance for the interaction between the core device and multiple associated devices.
  • the hyper terminal system provides the user with One or more scenario-based service options, different scenario-based service options are the entrances of corresponding services in different application scenarios.
  • it can also recommend different atomic service/function combinations to users, as well as recommend collocation equipment, etc.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a device interaction method, the method includes: the first device displays a first interface, the first interface includes a first control and a second control, and the first control is for indicating the first The device option of the device, the second control indicates the device option of the second device, and the second device is a device discovered by the first device.
  • the first device detects a first user operation, and the first user operation is used for the user to associate the first device with the second device.
  • the first device displays a second interface, the second interface displays service options of a first scenario-based service, and the first scenario-based service is a scenario supported by the first device and the second device associated with the first user operation services.
  • the first device detects a second user operation for selecting the first scenario-based service.
  • the first device instructs the second user to operate the running of the first scenario-based service selected.
  • Implementing the method in the first aspect can improve the performance of human-computer interaction. Users can quickly select scene-based services and/or atomized services according to their personal needs. Through the user-selected device combination, the available scene-based services under the device combination are provided in a targeted manner. Service and/or atomic service lists detailed and rich usage scenarios for users, guides users to fully explore more application scenarios by using the functions of HyperTerminal, and achieves the effect of recommending scenario-based services according to device combinations.
  • the second controls are distributed on a circle centered on the first control, and the first control is separated from the second control.
  • the first device is a core device, such as a mobile phone
  • the second device is an associated device, which may be a smart watch, a smart TV, and the like.
  • the positional relationship between the first control and the second control in the first interface may indicate one or more of the following relationships between the first device and the second device: connection relationship, or orientation relationship, or distance relationship, or signal strength relationship.
  • connection relationship or orientation relationship, or distance relationship, or signal strength relationship.
  • the first control is separated from the second control, indicating that the first device is not connected to the second device, and the first control is connected with the second control, indicating that the first device is connected to the second device.
  • the second control is located on the left, or right, or above, or below the first control, respectively indicating that the second device is located on the left, or right, or front, or rear of the first device.
  • the farther the distance between the first control and the second control is the farther the distance between the first device and the second device is indicated, or the weaker the signal between the first device and the second device is, the second The closer the distance between a control and the second control is, the closer the distance between the first device and the second device is, or the stronger the signal between the first device and the second device is.
  • the device connection status icon in the first interface can visually and concisely indicate each device, and display the relationship between the core device and the associated device.
  • the user is easy to operate, the interface is easy to understand, the user interface design is more humanized, and the user experience is good.
  • the first user operation includes an operation in which the second control is selected, or the first control is selected, or the first control and the second control are simultaneously selected.
  • the first user operation is an operation in which the user selects the second control, drags the second control to a designated area in a direction close to the first control, and then releases the operation of the second control.
  • the first user operation is that the user selects the first control and the second control at the same time, and drags the first control and the second control to be close to each other until the distance between the first control and the second control is less than a certain distance, and then releases the first control and the second control.
  • the operation of the second control may be a circular area with the first control as the center and a radius equal to the first radius distance.
  • the first user operation is for the user to select the first control, and drag the first control to move towards the direction close to the second control, until the distance between the first control and the second control is less than a certain distance, release the operation of the first control .
  • the second interface also shows that the first control and the second control are adsorbed together, indicating that the first device and the second device have established a connection and can work together to provide system-level services.
  • the drag-and-drop operation is more in line with the user's operating habits, the user's learning cost is low, and the operation is easy to use.
  • the two device options being attracted together may refer to that the edges of the corresponding icons of the two devices are tangent, or the two device options being adsorbed together may also be that the two device icons are completely or partially overlapped. In this embodiment, no special limitation is imposed on the form of adsorption.
  • the second control in the second interface may have a different form from the second control in the first interface.
  • the smart watch icon 702 that has been connected to a mobile phone to form a hyperterminal can display a distinctive logo, so as to be easily distinguished from the associated device icon in an unconnected state.
  • the smart watch icon 702 is displayed in a dark filled form, indicating that the smart watch is connected to the mobile phone, and the size of the smart watch icon 702 is smaller than the smart watch icon 506 when not connected.
  • the first user operation is an operation in which the user clicks the second control, or simultaneously clicks the first control and the second control.
  • a floating control is displayed on the second interface, the floating control includes a first area, and the first area displays service options of the first scenario-based service.
  • the first user operation may be an operation in which the user presses and holds the second control.
  • the second user operation may be an operation of releasing the second control after the user drags the second control to the first area, or the second user operation is the user dragging the second control through the first area toward a direction close to the first control After moving to the specified area, the operation of the second control is released.
  • the specified area may be a circular area with the first control as the center and a radius equal to the first radius distance.
  • a second user operation includes two functions of associating the second device with the first device and selecting the first scenario-based service, which improves user operation efficiency.
  • the selected device option can change its position along with the track of the user's finger dragging on the screen.
  • This embodiment does not limit the finger movement trajectory when the user drags the device icon, and the user's dragging trajectory may be any curve.
  • the floating control includes multiple circular areas, or multiple rectangular areas, or multiple fan-shaped areas, or multiple fan-shaped ring areas, or multiple circular ring-shaped areas, or multiple polygonal area, etc.
  • the second interface includes the first control.
  • the second interface may also not include the first control.
  • Scenario-based services refer to functional services based on usage scenarios, which are a collection of multiple functions or services that can be provided for a specific scenario.
  • a scene service can be supported by one or more atom services.
  • the service options of the scene-based service displayed on the second interface may be the scene-based service provided by the current hyper terminal system, that is, the combination of the first device and the second device, on the first device or on the second device.
  • a certain scenario-based service may be based on a certain same application, and different devices provide different atomic capabilities under the application service.
  • the scenario-based service is actually provided by the same service provider.
  • both the mobile phone and the smart watch are installed with sports and health applications. Both jump to the outdoor running service in the sports and health application.
  • the smart watch can provide positioning services and statistical user sports data services.
  • the mobile phone can provide services such as displaying the user's movement track.
  • different devices may display different interfaces and provide different services.
  • the first scenario-based service is a scenario-based service queried from a first database, and the first database records one or more scenario-based services supported by one or more device combinations.
  • the device combination includes a device combination formed by a first device and its associated second device.
  • the scenario-based service can be determined by one or more of the following parameters: device type of device combination, device features, product positioning, device usage, environment or scenario of the device, status of the device, recently run applications, etc. Refer to Table 1 in the subsequent examples.
  • the first database can be stored locally or on a cloud server.
  • the first scenario-based service is a scenario-based service queried from a second database
  • the second database records one or more Scenario-based services
  • the atomic service combination includes an atomic service combination composed of atomic capabilities of the first device and its associated second device.
  • the atomic capabilities may include one or more of the following: audio output capabilities, audio input capabilities, display capabilities, camera capabilities, touch input capabilities, and keyboard and mouse input capabilities.
  • the second database can be stored locally or on a cloud server.
  • the audio output capability may include whether the device supports mono or multi-channel, supported sound effects, supported frequency response range, noise reduction capability, audio analysis capability, etc. when the device is playing audio; the audio input capability may include receiving Acoustic range, noise reduction capability, etc.; display capability may include the device’s screen size, display resolution parameters, refresh rate, color expressiveness, etc.; camera capability may include the device’s camera type, shooting pixels, night scene shooting capability, and image adjustment capability, etc.; touch input capability, keyboard and mouse input capability refer to whether the device can support touch input or keyboard and mouse input, etc.
  • the first scenario-based service can calculate the probability of being selected according to one or more of the following parameters: the frequency of the user using the first scenario-based service, the first scenario-based service set by the user
  • the order of the first device and/or the second device is the environment or scene, the state of the first device and/or the second device is in, and the application recently run by the first device and/or the second device.
  • the service option of the first scenario-based service with a higher probability of being selected by the user is recommended and displayed with higher priority.
  • smart TVs have larger screens, which provide users with a better visual viewing experience and are more suitable for watching videos; smart speakers have strong audio output capabilities and better speaker effects. It is more suitable for playing audio; the earphone is small in size, easy to carry, does not need to be placed outside, does not disturb people around, and can also have a noise reduction effect, shielding external environmental noise, suitable for listening to audio in public places, such as talking in public places, listening to music, etc.; Smart watches and smart bracelets can measure the user's exercise data or heart rate and other health information more accurately than mobile phones; laptops have powerful processing capabilities and are more suitable for office work.
  • the device type and device features will not be described in detail here, and the above examples do not limit other embodiments.
  • the option with a high usage rate may be displayed in front according to the statistics of usage frequency of each scenario-based service option by the user within a certain period of time.
  • the certain time can be all the time in history, or a certain period of time, such as the last three months. The higher the historical usage rate of the scenario-based service option, the higher the display.
  • the first device or the second device may report the detected environment of the current device, and sort the scene-based service options according to the environment. If it is detected that the user's environment is outdoors, it will give priority to recommending outdoor related service options, such as outdoor running. If it is detected that the user's environment is indoors, it will give priority to recommending indoor related service options, such as indoor running.
  • This embodiment does not limit the method of detecting the user's environment. For example, the environment can be judged according to the current positioning information of the device; or the camera can be used to collect photos of the current environment, or ultrasonic waves, infrared rays, etc. size to determine the current user's environment.
  • the first device or the second device may also determine the environment or scene where the device is located according to the application recently opened or used by the user, or the currently running application, and then recommend scene-based service options. For example, when a mobile phone and a smart TV form a super terminal, if it is detected that the application currently running on the mobile phone is an office presentation application, then the multi-screen collaborative service option can be recommended first; or, if it is detected that the application currently running on the mobile phone is a video application, then the Recommend home theater service options; or, when it is detected that the webpage browsed by the user is a game-related webpage, preferentially recommend game entertainment-related service options, etc.
  • scenario-based services may also be recommended according to the running state of the device, such as the on-screen or off-screen state. For example, when a mobile phone is connected to a smart TV to form a super terminal, if it is detected that the smart TV is in the on-screen state, then the scene-based service is recommended as screen mirroring; if the smart TV is detected to be off-screen, the scene-based service is recommended as Casting service.
  • the arrangement order of the recommended scene-based services is also different if the layout of the floating control is different. Developers can design the area layout of the floating control according to the user experience.
  • the shape of the floating control is a circular ring or a fan ring, where multiple circular ring areas or fan ring areas respectively indicate multiple first scene-based services.
  • the first scenario-based service indicated by the circular or fan-shaped region close to the center of the circle is a more preferentially recommended scenario-based service.
  • the shape of the floating control is a circle or a rectangle, and the circle or rectangle is divided into four areas, and the orientation of the first quadrant is the area A, the orientation of the second quadrant is area B, the orientation of the third quadrant is area C, and the orientation of the fourth quadrant is area D.
  • the recommended order of scenario-based service options is scenario-based service option A, scenario-based service option B, scenario-based service option C.
  • Scenario-based service option D the areas respectively placed are area B, area A, area C, area D, or area B, area C, area A, area D, or area A, area D, area B, Area C, or area A, area B, area D, area C, or area B, area A, area D, area C, or area A, area B, area C, area D.
  • device options of a third device are also displayed on the second interface, and the third device is a device recommended for evaluating the device use requirements of the first device and its associated second device. This can help users expand more and richer usage scenarios, and better experience the HyperTerminal ecosystem.
  • the third device if the third device is a device discovered by the first device, and the device option of the third device is clicked, the first device displays the service options of the second scenario-based service.
  • the service options of the second scenario-based service may be that some scenario-based service options are added on the basis of the service options of the first scenario-based service, or the service options of the second scenario-based service are re-updated scenario-based services, It is different from the service options of the first scenario-based service. This makes it easy for users to operate.
  • the third device is not a device discovered by the first device, click on the device option of the third device, and the first device can jump to display the fifth interface, such as the fifth interface can be On the purchase interface of the third device, the fifth interface includes multiple item options, the multiple item options come from multiple supply sources, and the multiple item options include item options indicating the third device.
  • the fifth interface may include an introduction to the functions of the third device, an introduction to usage methods, an introduction to matching usage scenarios, etc., so as to provide users with more convenient services.
  • the third device is a device recommended based on one or more parameters: device type, device feature, product positioning, The purpose of the device, the environment or scene where the device is located, the state of the device, the application that has been running recently, or the service of the first scene, or the use scene that can be predicted and expanded, etc.
  • the system can also recommend new devices according to the newly formed hyperterminal. Users can choose to add more devices to form a hyper terminal, making the user use scenarios more abundant. After adding more associated devices, the HyperTerminal can provide more and richer scene-based services, improving the HyperTerminal ecosystem.
  • the first scenario-based service is supported by a first atomic service composition
  • the first atomic service composition includes at least one first service provided by the first device, and/or the second device At least one second service is provided.
  • Atomic service refers to the smallest capability unit that can run independently. It is a concept of abstract encapsulation of a single function/capability. It can be a hardware service or a software service.
  • the first device may display the first atomized service combination on the seventh interface, refer to the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 .
  • the first atomic service combination may be selected by the user, or the first atomic service combination is an atomic service combination determined according to one or more of the following parameters: the device type and device characteristics of the first device and/or the second device, Either the user's commonly used atomic service combination, or the user's default atomic service combination, or the most suitable atomic service combination obtained from the analysis for the first scenario service, or the usage frequency obtained from the server under the first scenario service The highest atomic service portfolio.
  • the first device runs the first scenario-based service, and/or, the second device associated with the first device runs the first scenario-based service.
  • the third interface displayed by the first device running the first scenario-based service is different from the fourth interface displayed by the second device running the first scenario-based service.
  • the fourth interface can be a video or image screen
  • the third interface can be a control video or image screen Display the control interface of the function.
  • the second device can be used in conjunction with the first device, making full use of the characteristics of the device, and providing more convenience to the user.
  • the user may also select the third interface to display the chat interface, and the user uses the first device to chat while using the second device to watch the video.
  • the screen content displayed on the third interface and the fourth interface may be the same. Referring to the embodiment shown in FIG. 19 , both the mobile phone and the TV display the same video screen.
  • the second device is a wearable motion device
  • the third interface can be a picture of a motion track
  • the fourth interface can be a detected user
  • the exercise data includes: exercise speed, exercise distance, exercise time, heart rate.
  • FIG. 8 Reference is made to the embodiment shown in FIG. 8 .
  • the second device can be used in conjunction with the first device, making full use of the characteristics of the device, and providing more convenience to the user. For example, after the user associates the mobile phone with the smart watch, the user puts the mobile phone at home and wears the smart watch for outdoor running.
  • the smart watch has positioning functions and speed measurement functions.
  • the smart watch can continuously upload the positioning information to the cloud server. Send it to the mobile phone, and the user can see his movement track on the mobile phone after returning home.
  • the effects and services triggered may also be different.
  • the first device determines that the screen interface of the first device is projected on the second screen according to the relative position of the second control and the first control when the drag operation is released. The position on the device screen.
  • Embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 15 , 16 , and 17 If the relative position is that the second control is on the left side of the first control, then the screen interface of the first device is projected on the right side of the screen of the second device. If the relative position is that the second control is on the right side of the first control, then the screen interface of the first device is projected on the left side of the screen of the second device. If the relative position is that the second control is in the middle of the first control, then the full screen of the screen interface of the first device is projected on the screen of the second device.
  • different sound channels can be associated with different orientations. Assuming that the user has two or more speakers, the user drags the icon of the first speaker to fit it from the left area of the phone icon and sticks it together, then the first speaker can provide the audio output of the left channel; the user drags The second speaker icon is pasted from the right area of the mobile phone icon and absorbed together, then the second speaker can provide the audio output of the right channel.
  • the arrangement of other multi-channels is the same.
  • the dragging direction is exchanged between the first control and the second control, and the services or interactive functions executed by them may be different.
  • the device as the adsorbing party or as the adsorbed party indicates that the device is the sender or receiver of the data.
  • the data transmission direction is stipulated that the adsorbing device sends data streams to the adsorbed device.
  • the service triggered is to send the file of the second device to the first device; if you press and hold the first control and drag it to attach On the second control, the triggered service is to send the file of the first device to the second device.
  • the scenario-based service triggered by the device option as the absorbing party or the adsorbed party may also be different. For example, if you press and hold the second control and drag it to attach to the first control, the triggered service is to send the file of the second device to the first device, if you press and hold the first control and drag it to attach to the second control , the triggered service is to cast the screen of the first device to the screen of the second device.
  • the method may further include: the first device detects a third user operation acting on the second interface, the third user operation is used to associate the fourth device with the first device, the second The third user operation includes selecting a third control operation indicating a fourth device.
  • the first device displays a sixth interface, the sixth interface displays the first control, the second control, and the third control are adsorbed together, and the sixth interface also displays a third scene-based service option,
  • the third scenario-based service option is determined according to the first device, the second device, and the fourth device, and the third scenario-based service option is different from the first scenario-based service option.
  • the first device detects a fourth user operation, where the fourth user operation includes combining the first control with the second The two controls operate separately.
  • the first device instructs the first scenario-based service selected by the second user operation to stop running.
  • the first device in response to the fourth user operation, stops running the first scenario-based service selected by the second user operation, and/or the second device stops running the service selected by the second user operation.
  • the first scenario-based service in response to the fourth user operation, stops running the first scenario-based service selected by the second user operation, and/or the second device stops running the service selected by the second user operation.
  • the fourth user operation can be for the user to select the second control, and drag the second control to move away from the first control until it moves out of the specified area, and release the second control operate.
  • the second control returns to the position before it is not connected, and the adsorption state is released.
  • the second device is also disconnected from the first device, and the atomization service provided by the first device or the second device is also terminated.
  • the user clicks the second control in the connected state or the user presses and holds the second control and the first control, and drags them in opposite directions to separate them, it can also trigger the disconnection of the first device and the second device Connection means that the second control is separated from the first control on the interface, and the second control returns to the position of the unconnected state.
  • a one-key disconnection control can also be set on the interface of the first device, and clicking the one-key disconnection control can cause all connected associated devices to disconnect from the first device and restore to the first device There is no status of any associated device connection, and the services provided by each associated device will also be terminated.
  • the first device includes any one of the following: a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a portable/non-portable computer, a personal computer, a smart TV, and the like.
  • the second device includes any of the following: mobile phone, tablet computer, portable mobile computer, desktop personal computer, smart speaker, smart watch, smart bracelet, smart TV, earphones, smart glasses, car machine, smart cockpit, game console, running Machines, spinning bikes, weight scales, body fat scales, water heaters, lamps, air conditioners, blood glucose meters, blood oxygen saturation meters, heart rate meters, AR/VR equipment, cloud hosts/cloud servers, smart wearable devices, smart home devices, printers wait.
  • the above-mentioned first scenario-based service may be a printing service
  • the above-mentioned second device is a printer.
  • the first device can display the printing floating control.
  • the above-mentioned printing suspension control can be suspended and displayed on the user interface of the first device.
  • the first device may always display the above-mentioned printing floating control in a floating manner on the user interface.
  • the content displayed on the user interface of the first device is changed, but the printing suspension control can still be suspended and displayed on the user interface. In this way, it is convenient for the user to quickly print the content displayed on the current user interface through the print floating control.
  • the first device detects a fifth user operation on the printing suspension control.
  • the first device may send the first print file to the second device for printing based on the fifth user operation, where the first print file is content displayed on the first device when the first device detects the fifth user operation.
  • the first device may send the second print file to the second print file in response to the operation of the print suspension control.
  • the second device prints.
  • the first device detects a sixth user operation on the printing suspension control.
  • the first device may delete the printing suspension control based on the sixth user operation, and instruct the first scenario-based service to stop running.
  • the user can directly trigger the first device and the second device to stop running the first scene service through the above-mentioned printing suspension control, so that there is no need to return to the above-mentioned first interface to trigger the first device through the above-mentioned first control and second control .
  • the second device stops running the first scenario-based service.
  • the above-mentioned user operations for the first device to cooperate with the printer to provide printing services and user operations for stopping the cooperation between the first device and the printer are relatively simple, which can improve user experience.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a device interaction method.
  • the first device displays the first interface
  • the first interface includes a first control and a second control
  • the first control indicates the device option of the first device
  • the second control indicates the device option of the second device
  • the second device is Devices discovered by the first device.
  • the first device detects a first user operation, and the first user operation is used to associate the first device with the second device.
  • the first device sends a first binding request to the second device according to the first user operation, and receives a first consent message from the second device.
  • the first device displays the second interface according to the first consent message
  • the second interface displays service options of the first scenario-based service
  • the first scenario-based service is a scenario-based service supported by the first device and the second device in cooperation.
  • Implementing the method in the second aspect can improve the performance of human-computer interaction. Users can quickly select scene-based services and/or atomized services according to individual needs, and provide specific scene-based services available under the device combination through the user-selected device combination. Service and/or atomic service lists detailed and rich usage scenarios for users, guides users to fully explore more application scenarios by using the functions of HyperTerminal, and achieves the effect of recommending scenario-based services according to device combinations.
  • the first device may display a connection code setting box according to the first user operation, and the connection code setting box is used to set a connection code for binding between the first device and the second device.
  • the first device receives the first connection code input in the connection code setting box, and sends a first binding request to the second device.
  • the first consent message includes the first connection code.
  • the second device may ask the user whether to allow the second device to cooperate with the first device. If it is detected that the user agrees to the coordinated operation of the second device and the first device, the second device may display a connection code input box to allow the user to input the connection code. When receiving the connection code input by the user in the connection code input box, the second device may send the above-mentioned first consent message. After receiving the first agreement message, the first device may detect whether the connection code contained in the first agreement message is the connection code set in the above connection code setting box. If so, the first device and the second device can complete device binding and establish collaboration, thereby providing users with scenario-based services.
  • device binding may be performed first.
  • the first device can set a connection code
  • the second device can input the connection code for device binding.
  • the above device binding process may ask whether the user to which the second device belongs agrees that the second device cooperates with the first device.
  • the foregoing embodiments can reduce the probability that the user to which the second device belongs is used by another user without consent or knowledge when the user to which the first device belongs is different from the user to which the second device belongs.
  • the above verification process of the connection code can ensure the accuracy of the electronic device that is bound with the first device, and improve user experience.
  • the second controls are distributed on a circle whose center is the first control and whose radius is the first length, and the first control and the second control are separated.
  • the above-mentioned first user operation may be an operation for the user to select the second control, drag the second control to a designated area in a direction close to the first control, and then release the operation of the second control.
  • the first user operation can be that the user selects the first control and the second control at the same time, and drags the first control and the second control to be close to each other until the distance between the first control and the second control is less than a certain distance, and then releases the first control.
  • control and the operation of the second control The specified area may be a circular area with the first control as the center and a radius equal to the first radius distance.
  • the first user operation can be for the user to select the first control, and drag the first control to move towards the direction close to the second control, until the distance between the first control and the second control is less than a certain distance, then release the first control operation.
  • the first control and the second control are also displayed in the second interface.
  • the first control and the second control can be attracted together, indicating that the first device and the second device have established a connection and can work together to provide system-level services.
  • the two device options being attracted together may refer to that the edges of the corresponding icons of the two devices are tangent, or the two device options being adsorbed together may also be that the two device icons are completely or partially overlapped.
  • the above-mentioned first operation conforms to the user's operating habits, the user's learning cost is low, and the operation is easy to use.
  • the first interface further includes a fourth control
  • the fourth control is a device option indicating a fifth device
  • the fifth device is a device discovered by the first device
  • the account associated with the fifth device is associated with the The accounts associated with the first device are the same;
  • the fourth control is distributed on a circle with the first control as the center and a radius of the second length, the first control and the fourth control are separated, and the first length is different from the second length.
  • the account associated with the first device is different from the account associated with the second device, or the second device has no associated account.
  • the device options indicating cross-account devices (or non-account devices) and device options indicating same-account devices can be displayed on circles with different radii centered on the first control. For example, device options indicating devices of the same account may be displayed on a circle. Device options indicating cross-account devices and/or non-account devices may be displayed on another circle. In this way, users can quickly distinguish which devices are their own and which devices belong to other users.
  • the aforementioned device with the same account may refer to a device that is associated with the same account as the first device.
  • the above-mentioned cross-account device may refer to a device with a different account associated with the above-mentioned first device.
  • the aforementioned device without an account may refer to a device without an associated account.
  • the first device may perform device binding with the second device in response to the above-mentioned first operation.
  • the first device and the second device can perform device binding through the above connection code.
  • the first device may display the above connection code setting box, receive the connection code set by the user, and send a binding request to the second device. After receiving the binding request, the second device may ask the user whether to agree to bind the second device with the first device.
  • the second device may display a connection code input box, requiring the user to belong to the connection code that the second device binds with the first device.
  • the second device may send a consent message to the first device.
  • the consent message also includes the connection code received in the connection code input box.
  • the first device may send a binding request to the second device in response to the above-mentioned first user operation.
  • the second device may ask the user whether to agree to bind the second device with the first device. If an operation of agreeing to bind the second device with the first device is detected, the second device may send an approval message to the first device.
  • the first device and the second device may perform device binding. After the first device and the second device have been bound, the first device can directly establish a connection with the second device when receiving the above-mentioned user operation of associating the first device with the second device, and work together to provide scene-based services .
  • the first interface further includes a fifth control
  • the fifth control is a device option indicating a sixth device
  • the sixth device is a device discovered by the first device
  • the fifth control and the fourth control in a separate state.
  • the first device detects a seventh user operation, and the seventh user operation is used to associate the fifth device with the sixth device.
  • the first device instructs the fifth device to request binding with the sixth device, and receives a second consent message for instructing the sixth device to agree to bind with the fifth device.
  • the first device displays the eighth interface according to the second consent message, and in the eighth interface, the fourth control and the fifth control are adsorbed together.
  • the attachment of the fourth control and the fifth control above can indicate that the first device and the second device have established a connection, and can work together to provide system-level services.
  • the core device in the hyperterminal can also respond to user operations to associate other same-account devices in the hyperterminal with cross-account devices, so that the above-mentioned same-account devices and cross-account devices can work together to provide scene-based services .
  • device binding can be performed before the above-mentioned same-account device and cross-account device cooperate to work.
  • the first device detects a user operation acting on the second control, and removes the second control on the first interface.
  • a recycle bin control is further displayed on the first interface.
  • the first device detects a user operation acting on the recycle bin control, and may display a recycle bin list.
  • One or more device options can be included in the Recycle Bin list.
  • the device indicated by the device option in the recycle bin list may be the device indicated by the device option removed from the first interface.
  • the user can view the recycle bin list through the above-mentioned recycle bin control.
  • a device option indicative of a second device may be included in the recycle bin list.
  • the first device may display the second control on the first interface again.
  • the second control in the second interface may have a different expression form from the second control in the first interface.
  • a floating control is displayed on the second interface, the floating control includes a first area, and the first area displays service options of the first scenario-based service.
  • the first user operation may be an operation in which the user presses and holds the second control.
  • the second user operation may be an operation of releasing the second control after the user drags the second control to the first area, or the second user operation is the user dragging the second control through the first area toward a direction close to the first control After moving to the specified area, the operation of the second control is released.
  • the specified area may be a circular area with the first control as the center and a radius equal to the first radius distance.
  • a second user operation includes two functions of associating the second device with the first device and selecting the first scenario-based service, which improves user operation efficiency.
  • the floating control includes multiple circular areas, or multiple rectangular areas, or multiple fan-shaped areas, or multiple fan-shaped ring areas, or multiple circular ring-shaped areas, or multiple polygonal area, etc.
  • the second interface includes the first control.
  • the second interface may also not include the first control.
  • the first device after receiving the first consent message from the second device, the first device may cooperate with the second device to run the first scenario-based service.
  • the first scenario-based service may be the scenario-based service with the highest probability of being selected by the user among the K1 scenario-based services.
  • the above K1 scenario-based service may be a scenario-based service that can be provided by the cooperation of the first device and the second device.
  • the above K1 is a positive integer.
  • the probability of a scenario-based service being selected by the user can be calculated based on one or more of the following parameters: the frequency of users using this scenario-based service, the user-set rate of this scenario-based service Sorting, environment or scene of the first device and/or the second device, state of the first device and/or the second device, applications recently run by the first device and/or the second device.
  • the aforementioned K1 scenario-based services also include a fourth scenario-based service.
  • the above-mentioned second interface may display service options of the fourth scenario-based service. The user can use the service option of the first scenario-based service to adjust the scenario-based service provided by the first device and the second device from the first scenario-based service to the fourth scenario-based service.
  • the first device can cooperate with the second device to directly provide the scenario-based service with the highest probability of being selected by the user according to the user operation associated with the first device and the second device. If the scenario-based service desired by the user is not the scenario-based service with the highest probability of being selected by the user as determined by the first device and the second device, the user can select the scenario-based service he wants through the service options of other scenario-based services.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides an electronic device, and the electronic device may include: a communication device, a display device, a memory, a processor coupled to the memory, multiple application programs, and one or more programs.
  • the communication device is used for communication
  • the display device is used for displaying an interface
  • computer-executable instructions are stored in the memory.
  • the processor executes the instructions, the electronic device can realize any function of the first device in the first aspect.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides an electronic device, and the electronic device may include: a communication device, a display device, a memory, a processor coupled to the memory, multiple application programs, and one or more programs.
  • the communication device is used for communication
  • the display device is used for displaying the interface
  • computer-executable instructions are stored in the memory.
  • the processor executes the instructions, the electronic device can realize any function of the first device in the second aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer storage medium, in which a computer program is stored, and the computer program includes executable instructions, and when executed by a processor, the executable instruction causes the processor to perform the following steps:
  • the methods correspond to the operations provided.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer storage medium, in which a computer program is stored, the computer program includes executable instructions, and when the executable instructions are executed by a processor, the processor executes the following steps: The operations corresponding to the methods provided by the two aspects.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product, which, when the computer program product is run on an electronic device, causes the electronic device to execute any possible implementation manner in the first aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product, which, when the computer program product is run on an electronic device, causes the electronic device to execute any possible implementation manner in the second aspect.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a chip system, which can be applied to electronic equipment, and the chip includes one or more processors, and the processors are used to call computer instructions so that the electronic equipment implements the electronic equipment as described in the first aspect. any possible implementation.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a chip system, which can be applied to electronic devices, and the chip includes one or more processors, and the processors are used to call computer instructions so that the electronic device implements the electronic device as described in the second aspect. any possible implementation.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication system, where the communication system includes a first device and a second device, where the first device implements any possible implementation manner in the first aspect.
  • users can quickly select scenario-based services and/or atomization services according to personal needs, and provide scenario-based services and/or atomization services available under the device combination through the user-selected device combination
  • the service lists detailed and rich usage scenarios for users, guides users to fully explore more application scenarios by using the functions of the HyperTerminal, and realizes the effect of recommending scenario-based services according to device combinations.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of a hardware structure of an electronic device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of the software architecture of the electronic device provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a user interface provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a user interface provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of a user interface provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of a user interface provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of a user interface provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of a user interface provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of the user interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of the user interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 12 is a schematic diagram of the user interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13A is a schematic diagram of the user interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram of the user interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13C is a schematic diagram of the user interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13D is a schematic diagram of the user interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of the user interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of a user interaction interface provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram of a user interaction interface provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram of a user interaction interface provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 18 is a schematic diagram of the user interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 19 is a schematic diagram of the user interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 20 is a flow chart of a device interaction method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram of a functional module provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figures 22A to 22J are schematic diagrams of some user interfaces provided by the embodiments of the present application.
  • 23A to 23D are schematic diagrams of some user interfaces provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Figures 24A to 24D are schematic diagrams of some user interfaces provided by the embodiments of the present application.
  • Figures 25A to 25H are schematic diagrams of some user interfaces provided by the embodiments of the present application.
  • 26A to 26C are schematic diagrams of some user interfaces provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIGS. 27A to 27E are schematic diagrams of some user interfaces provided by the embodiments of the present application.
  • 28A to 28K are schematic diagrams of some user interfaces provided by the embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 29A and Figure 29B are schematic diagrams of some user interfaces provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIGS. 30A to 30C are schematic diagrams of some user interfaces provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • 31A to 31C are schematic diagrams of some user interfaces provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 32A and Figure 32B are schematic diagrams of some user interfaces provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • 33A to 33C are schematic diagrams of some user interfaces provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • 34A to 34O are schematic diagrams of some user interfaces provided by the embodiments of the present application.
  • first and second are used for descriptive purposes only, and cannot be understood as implying or implying relative importance or implicitly specifying the quantity of indicated technical features. Therefore, the features defined as “first” and “second” may explicitly or implicitly include one or more of these features.
  • plurality refers to two or more than two.
  • UI user interface
  • application application, APP
  • operating system operating system
  • user interface is a medium interface for interaction and information exchange between an application program (application, APP) or an operating system (operating system, OS) and a user. Realize the conversion between the internal form of information and the form acceptable to users.
  • the user interface is the source code written in a specific computer language such as java and extensible markup language (XML).
  • the source code of the interface is parsed and rendered on the electronic device, and finally presented as content that can be recognized by the user.
  • the commonly used form of user interface is the graphical user interface (graphic user interface, GUI), which refers to the user interface related to computer operation displayed in a graphical way. It may be text, icons, buttons, menus, tabs, text boxes, dialog boxes, status bars, navigation bars, Widgets, and other visible interface elements displayed on the display screen of the electronic device.
  • GUI graphical user interface
  • a mobile phone and a smart screen when multiple devices work together, only one default service is provided, but one service cannot meet the requirements of diverse scenarios.
  • multi-screen collaborative services can be provided.
  • the cooperation of mobile phones and smart screens can also provide more services, such as services in application scenarios such as home theater, motion-sensing games, and enjoying karaoke.
  • application scenarios such as home theater, motion-sensing games, and enjoying karaoke.
  • there is no entry for service options corresponding to various scenarios on the mobile phone If the user wants to switch to a service in another application scenario, he may need to exit the current interface, open a new application, and enable the corresponding service, which is cumbersome for the user.
  • the present application provides a device interaction method, which can be applied in a communication system composed of multiple devices.
  • the communication system can also be called a hyper terminal or a hyper terminal system.
  • the purpose of this method is to explore a new way of human-computer interaction, provide a more intuitive and convenient device interaction method, meet the user's needs for coordinating multiple devices, and provide users with access to service options corresponding to various scenarios.
  • a plurality of terminal devices may form a "hyper terminal” (or called a hyper terminal system).
  • "Super terminal” refers to the ability to integrate the capabilities of multiple terminals through distributed technology, store them in a virtual hardware resource pool, and provide external services based on the unified management, scheduling, and integration capabilities of each terminal according to business needs. Fast connection, capability mutual assistance, and resource sharing are realized between different terminals.
  • the hyper terminal may include a core device/central device, and a cooperative device/associated device.
  • the core device is the control center of the super terminal system, carrying functions such as device management, service management, and service scheduling.
  • the core device is connected with one or more associated devices to form a HyperTerminal.
  • the associated device may be an electronic device located on the same communication network as the core device (such as a mobile phone), for example, an electronic device located on the same Wi-Fi network.
  • the associated device can also be an electronic device whose login account is the same as the core device login account (such as a Huawei account), or an electronic device whose login account and the core device login account belong to the same group (such as the same family account).
  • the associated device can also be an electronic device that establishes a trusted relationship (or pairing) with the core device in other ways, such as an electronic device that has been paired with Bluetooth, an electronic device that has connected to a hotspot shared by a mobile phone, or a mobile phone that has been connected to the electronic device.
  • the hotspot of the device, or the mobile phone has established a Wi-Fi P2P connection with the electronic device, etc.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific manner of associating the foregoing associated device with the core device.
  • the core device mobile phone and associated device laptop form a super terminal, which can realize the function of projecting the screen of the mobile phone interface to the laptop;
  • the core device mobile phone and related device smart speakers form a super terminal, which can realize the function of mobile phone remote control smart speaker ,etc.
  • hyperterminal is used to collectively refer to a core device and a communication system composed of one or more associated devices that have an associated relationship with the core device. That is, “hyperterminal” is used to describe a collection of electronic devices having the above-mentioned association relationship.
  • the "super terminal” is only an exemplary vocabulary, and it can also be replaced by other words, such as “smart collaboration", “multi-device collaboration”, etc., which does not constitute a specific description of the communication system in the embodiment of the present application. limited. This application also does not impose any limitation on the device types of the core device and associated devices.
  • the electronic device in this application can specifically be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a notebook computer, a personal computer (PC), a smart TV (also called a smart screen, a large screen, etc.), or a smart watch, a smart bracelet, etc.
  • the wearable device is not limited in this application.
  • the mobile phone as the core device/central device, the mobile phone can cooperate with one or more other associated devices (such as laptops, PCs, tablets, smart watches, etc.) to provide consumers with multi-functional, personalized, more interesting and more convenient service.
  • the device interaction method provides a unified entrance for the interaction between the core device and multiple associated devices, that is, the hyper terminal interface, and the user can trigger any two or more electronic devices to form a hyper terminal in the hyper terminal interface. And it can support that when multiple devices initiate collaboration, the HyperTerminal system can judge the usage scenario according to the device type, device characteristics, product positioning, common functions, device status, current running applications, and current device environment of each device. And provide users with one or more scenario-based service options based on usage scenarios. Different scenario-based service options are the entrances of corresponding services in different application scenarios, which solves the problem that users cannot be provided with rich usage scenarios in the case of different device combinations.
  • this application can also recommend different atomic service/function combinations or interactive functions according to different application scenarios or different device types, features, product positioning, etc. option.
  • this application can also recommend matching equipment for users.
  • Implementing the method provided by this application can enhance the performance of human-computer interaction, and users can quickly select scene-based services and/or atomized services according to individual needs, without cumbersome decentralized settings, thus solving the problem of setting interactive functions between electronic devices
  • the distribution of entrances is scattered, the settings are cumbersome, and it is impossible to list rich usage scenarios for users.
  • the available scenario services and/or atomic services under the device combination are provided in a targeted manner, and detailed and rich usage scenarios are listed for the user, guiding the user to use the functions of the hyper terminal to fully explore more application scenarios, realizing the effect of recommending scenario-based services based on device combinations.
  • a more intuitive and concise user interface is presented to the user, the intuitiveness, readability and operability of the user interface are improved, user operations are simplified, and the electronic device can quickly respond to open different application services, thereby improving the user experience.
  • the communication system 10 provided by the embodiment of the present application is introduced below.
  • FIG. 1 shows a communication system 10 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication system 10 includes a plurality of terminal devices, and these terminal devices may include the illustrated mobile phone 101, smart watch 102, notebook computer 103, tablet computer 104, smart bracelet 105, earphone 106, smart TV ( It can also be called a smart screen, a large screen, etc.) 107, a smart speaker 108, etc.
  • these terminal devices may include the illustrated mobile phone 101, smart watch 102, notebook computer 103, tablet computer 104, smart bracelet 105, earphone 106, smart TV ( It can also be called a smart screen, a large screen, etc.) 107, a smart speaker 108, etc.
  • the communication system 10 can also include other types of electronic devices, such as a personal computer (personal computer, PC), desktop computer, laptop computer, handheld computer, augmented reality (augmented reality, AR) equipment, virtual reality (virtual reality, VR) equipment, artificial intelligence (artificial intelligence, AI) equipment, car machine, game machine , treadmill, cloud host/cloud server, other smart wearable devices, etc., can also include Internet of Things (IOT) devices or smart home devices such as smart water heaters, smart lamps, smart air conditioners, smart scales, etc., this The application does not place any restrictions on the type of equipment.
  • a terminal device may also be referred to simply as a terminal, and a terminal device is generally an intelligent electronic device that can provide a user interface, interact with a user, and provide a service function for the user.
  • the mobile phone 101 serves as a central device/core device, and can establish communication connections with other cooperative devices/associated devices to form a "super terminal".
  • Super terminal refers to the ability to integrate the capabilities of multiple terminals through distributed technology, store them in a virtual hardware resource pool, and provide external services based on the unified management, scheduling, and integration capabilities of each terminal according to business needs. Fast connection, capability mutual assistance, and resource sharing are realized between different terminals.
  • the mobile phone 101 and the notebook computer 103 form a super terminal, which can realize the function of projecting the interface of the mobile phone 101 to the notebook computer 103; ,etc.
  • hyperterminal is used to collectively refer to the system composed of the mobile phone 101 as the core device and the associated devices having the above-mentioned association relationship with the mobile phone 101 . That is, “hyperterminal” is used to describe a collection of electronic devices having the above-mentioned association relationship.
  • the "super terminal” is only an exemplary vocabulary, and it can also be replaced by other words, such as “smart collaboration", “multi-device collaboration”, etc., which does not constitute a specific description of the communication system in the embodiment of the present application. limited.
  • the communication connection between each terminal device in the communication system 10 may be a wired connection or a wireless connection, which is not limited in this embodiment. Data or instructions can be transmitted between terminals through the established communication connection.
  • the communication link may be a short-range communication link.
  • a wired connection such as a universal serial bus (uniersalserialbus, USB) connection, a high definition multimedia interface (high definition multimedia interface, HDMI) connection, a display port (display port, DP) connection, and the like.
  • wireless connection such as Bluetooth (bluetooth, BT) connection, wireless fidelity (wi-fidelity, Wi-Fi) connection, hotspot connection, near field communication (near field communication, NFC), ZigBee, etc., to realize the communication between each terminal Communicate without an account or with a different account.
  • the wireless connection is not bound by wires, and the user has a higher degree of freedom of movement.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the type of the communication connection.
  • a Bluetooth (bluetooth, BT) module and/or a wireless local area network (wireless local area networks, WLAN) module may be configured in the terminal device.
  • the Bluetooth module can provide one or more Bluetooth communication solutions including classic Bluetooth (Bluetooth 2.1) or Bluetooth low energy (Bluetooth low energy, BLE), and the WLAN module can provide wireless fidelity point-to-point connections (wireless fidelity peer-to-peer, Wi-Fi P2P), wireless fidelity local area networks (wireless fidelity local area networks, Wi-Fi LAN) or wireless fidelity software access point (wireless fidelity software access point, Wi-Fi softAP)
  • Wi-Fi P2P wireless fidelity point-to-peer
  • Wi-Fi P2P wireless fidelity local area networks
  • Wi-Fi LAN wireless fidelity local area networks
  • Wi-Fi softAP wireless fidelity software access point
  • Wi-Fi P2P refers to allowing devices in a wireless network to connect to each other in a point-to-point manner without going through a wireless router. In the system, it may also be called wireless fidelity direct (Wi-Fi direct). Devices that establish a Wi-Fi P2P connection can exchange data directly through Wi-Fi (must be in the same frequency band) without connecting to a network or hotspot, and realize peer-to-peer communication, such as transferring files, pictures, videos and other data. Compared with Bluetooth, Wi-Fi P2P has the advantages of faster search speed and transmission speed, and longer transmission distance.
  • the communication link can also be a long-distance communication link.
  • each terminal logs in the same account to realize connection and communication through the Internet.
  • Multiple electronic devices in the communication system 10 may also log in to different accounts, but are connected through binding.
  • the mobile phone 101 and the smart watch 102 can log in to different accounts, and the mobile phone 101 binds the smart watch 102 with itself in the device management application, and then connects through the device management application.
  • the communication connection between the mobile phone 101 and the notebook computer 103 may be a combination of multiple connections.
  • the mobile phone 101 or the notebook computer 103 establishes a connection with a router through Wi-Fi to access the network, or communicates with a base station through a cellular signal.
  • a connection is established to access the network, and the mobile phone 101 and the notebook computer 103 can communicate through the network.
  • the mobile phone 101 sends the information to the cloud server through the network, and the cloud server then sends the information to the notebook computer 103 through the network.
  • two terminal devices when two terminal devices are mutually trusted devices, for example, the two terminal devices have been matched or connected before, and when they are to be connected again, the two terminal devices will automatically establish a communication connection, and then For data interaction, the user does not need to manually connect or match again, saving time and effort.
  • Each terminal device in the communication system 10 can carry system, system, operating system, HarmonyOS or other types of operating systems, the operating systems of each terminal device in the communication system 10 may be the same or different, and this application does not limit this.
  • each connected terminal in the communication system 10 is equipped with HarmonyOS, so the communication system 10 may be called a HarmonyOS super virtual device (super virtual device), or a HarmonyOS super terminal.
  • a hyper terminal application is installed on the mobile phone 101 or other terminal devices, which is convenient for users to manage each terminal device.
  • a smart watch can detect the user's motion data, such as the number of steps taken, running time, swimming time, etc., and synchronize the user's motion data to the treadmill and/or mobile phone.
  • treadmills and/or mobile phones can also synchronize detected user data to smart watches.
  • Multiple terminals can be used together to achieve more accurate detection of the user's motion data.
  • the communication system 10 may be based on the currently connected device type and/or device features, product positioning, commonly used functions and other information, or according to the detected environment where the user is currently located, or the operating status of the device, etc. , to analyze the usage scenario of the current user.
  • the communication system 10 can be based on the type of device in the system, device features, product positioning, device usage, collaborative services that the device can provide, the current environment of the device, the operating status of the device, the application recently used by the user, the current One or more scenario-based service options are obtained after comprehensive consideration of running applications, location information input by users, etc., and displayed on the user interface, so that users can quickly start related services or functions.
  • the scenario service providing module may calculate the user's latest use frequency of different collaborative services, or detect the environment where the current device is located, or the user's recently run application, etc. For the probability of each scenario-based service option being selected, the scenario-based service option that is estimated to have a higher probability of being selected is displayed first in the scenario-based service option area.
  • the communication system 10 can also analyze the current scene based on the types of devices that currently make up the system, and list and recommend other devices suitable for the current scene to the user, so as to help the user obtain a better scene experience; Expanded usage scenarios, and then list and recommend other devices to the user. If the user adopts the device recommended by the system, more and richer usage scenarios can be further expanded.
  • the communication system 10 can also be based on the current device combination, the queried atomic services that can be provided by each device, and then based on the scene service actually selected by the user, or based on the user's common service combination, or the user-set
  • the default service combination, or the service combination that is most suitable for the scenario based on life cognition, or the service combination that is most frequently used in the scenario is obtained from the server, etc., and the atomic service combination in the scenario is automatically set, saving the user's cumbersome Choose an action.
  • the communication system 10 can also support the user to personalize the atomic service combination, and the user can manually modify the atomic service combination according to personal preferences or actual conditions, and adjust a certain atomic service to be provided by other devices.
  • the communication system 10 shown in FIG. 1 is only used to assist in describing the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present application, and does not limit other embodiments of the present application.
  • the communication system 10 may include more or fewer terminal devices, and this application does not make any restrictions on the type, quantity, and connection mode of the terminal devices in the communication system 10 .
  • the exemplary electronic device 100 provided by the embodiment of the present application is introduced below.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of a hardware structure of an electronic device 100 provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the exemplary electronic device 100 provided in the embodiment of the present application may be, but not limited to, a mobile phone, a notebook computer, a tablet computer (portable android device, PAD), a smart bracelet, a smart watch, a headset, a personal computer (personal computer, PC), a smart phone TVs, smart speakers, etc., can also be desktop computers, laptop computers, handheld computers, augmented reality (augmented reality, AR) equipment, virtual reality (virtual reality, VR) equipment, artificial intelligence (artificial intelligence, AI) equipment , car machines, game consoles, treadmills, cloud hosts/cloud servers, other smart wearable devices, etc., or Internet of Things (IOT) devices or smart home devices such as smart water heaters, smart lamps, smart air conditioners, smart weight Other types of electronic equipment such as scales, this application does not impose any restrictions on the type of equipment.
  • IOT Internet of Things
  • the structure shown in this embodiment does not constitute a specific limitation on the first device.
  • the electronic device 100 may include more or fewer components than those shown in the illustration, some hardware structures may be added or reduced, some components may be combined, some components may be split, or different components layout.
  • the illustrated components can be realized in hardware, software or a combination of software and hardware.
  • the electronic device 100 may include a processor 110, an external memory interface 120, an internal memory 121, a universal serial bus (universal serial bus, USB) interface 130, a charging management module 140, a power management module 141, a battery 142, and an antenna 1.
  • Antenna 2 mobile communication module 150, wireless communication module 160, audio module 170, speaker 170A, receiver 170B, microphone 170C, earphone jack 170D, sensor module 180, button 190, motor 191, indicator 192, camera 193, display screen 194, and a subscriber identification module (subscriber identification module, SIM) card interface 195, etc.
  • SIM subscriber identification module
  • the sensor module 180 may include a pressure sensor 180A, a gyroscope sensor 180B, an air pressure sensor 180C, a magnetic sensor 180D, an acceleration sensor 180E, a distance sensor 180F, a proximity light sensor 180G, a fingerprint sensor 180H, a temperature sensor 180J, a touch sensor 180K, an ambient light sensor 180L, bone conduction sensor 180M, etc.
  • the processor 110 is generally used to control the overall operation of the electronic device 100 and may include one or more processing units.
  • the processor 110 may include a central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU), an application processor (application processor, AP), a modem processor, a graphics processing unit (graphics processing unit, GPU), an image signal processor ( image signal processor (ISP), video processing unit (video processing unit, VPU), controller, memory, video codec, digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), baseband processor, and/or neural network processing device (neural-network processing unit, NPU), etc.
  • different processing units may be independent devices, or may be integrated in one or more processors.
  • the controller can generate an operation control signal according to the instruction opcode and timing signal, and complete the control of fetching and executing the instruction.
  • Digital signal processors are used to process digital signals. In addition to digital image signals, they can also process other digital signals. For example, when the electronic device 100 selects a frequency point, the digital signal processor is used to perform Fourier transform on the energy of the frequency point.
  • Video codecs are used to compress or decompress digital video.
  • the electronic device 100 may support one or more video codecs.
  • the electronic device 100 can play or record videos in various encoding formats, for example: moving picture experts group (moving picture experts group, MPEG) 1, MPEG2, MPEG3, MPEG4 and so on.
  • MPEG moving picture experts group
  • the NPU is a neural-network (NN) computing processor.
  • NPU neural-network
  • Applications such as intelligent cognition of electronic devices can be realized through NPU, such as: image recognition, face recognition, speech recognition, text understanding, etc.
  • a memory may also be provided in the processor 110 for storing instructions and data.
  • the memory in processor 110 is a cache memory.
  • the memory may hold instructions or data that the processor 110 has just used or recycled. If the processor 110 needs to use the instruction or data again, it can be called directly from the memory. Repeated access is avoided, and the waiting time of the processor 110 is reduced, thus improving the efficiency of the system.
  • processor 110 may include one or more interfaces.
  • the interface may include an integrated circuit (inter-integrated circuit, I2C) interface, an integrated circuit built-in audio (inter-integrated circuit sound, I2S) interface, a pulse code modulation (pulse code modulation, PCM) interface, a universal asynchronous transmitter (universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter, UART) interface, mobile industry processor interface (mobile industry processor interface, MIPI), general-purpose input and output (general-purpose input/output, GPIO) interface, subscriber identity module (subscriber identity module, SIM) interface, and /or universal serial bus (universal serial bus, USB) interface, serial peripheral interface (serial peripheral interface, SPI) interface, etc.
  • I2C integrated circuit
  • I2S integrated circuit built-in audio
  • PCM pulse code modulation
  • PCM pulse code modulation
  • UART universal asynchronous transmitter
  • MIPI mobile industry processor interface
  • GPIO general-purpose input and output
  • subscriber identity module subscriber identity module
  • SIM
  • the I2C interface is a bidirectional synchronous serial bus, including a serial data line (serial data line, SDA) and a serial clock line (derail clock line, SCL).
  • processor 110 may include multiple sets of I2C buses.
  • the processor 110 can be respectively coupled to the touch sensor 180K, the charger, the flashlight, the camera 193 and the like through different I2C bus interfaces.
  • the processor 110 may be coupled to the touch sensor 180K through the I2C interface, so that the processor 110 and the touch sensor 180K communicate through the I2C bus interface to realize the touch function of the electronic device.
  • the I2S interface can be used for audio communication.
  • processor 110 may include multiple sets of I2S buses.
  • the processor 110 may be coupled to the audio module 170 through an I2S bus to implement communication between the processor 110 and the audio module 170 .
  • the audio module 170 can transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the I2S interface.
  • the PCM interface can also be used for audio communication, sampling, quantizing and encoding the analog signal.
  • the audio module 170 and the wireless communication module 160 may be coupled through a PCM bus interface.
  • the audio module 170 can also transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the PCM interface. Both I2S interface and PCM interface can be used for audio communication.
  • the UART interface is a universal serial data bus used for asynchronous communication.
  • the bus can be a bidirectional communication bus. It converts the data to be transmitted between serial communication and parallel communication.
  • a UART interface is generally used to connect the processor 110 and the wireless communication module 160 .
  • the processor 110 communicates with the Bluetooth module in the wireless communication module 160 through the UART interface to realize the Bluetooth function.
  • the audio module 170 can transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the UART interface, so as to realize the function of playing audio.
  • the MIPI interface can be used to connect the processor 110 with peripheral devices such as the display screen 194 and the camera 193 .
  • MIPI interface includes camera serial interface (camera serial interface, CSI), display serial interface (display serial interface, DSI), etc.
  • the processor 110 communicates with the camera 193 through the CSI interface to realize the shooting function of the electronic device.
  • the processor 110 communicates with the display screen 194 through the DSI interface to realize the display function of the electronic device.
  • the GPIO interface can be configured by software.
  • the GPIO interface can be configured as a control signal or as a data signal.
  • the GPIO interface can be used to connect the processor 110 with the camera 193 , the display screen 194 , the wireless communication module 160 , the audio module 170 , the sensor module 180 and so on.
  • the GPIO interface can also be configured as an I2C interface, I2S interface, UART interface, MIPI interface, etc.
  • the USB interface 130 is an interface conforming to the USB standard specification, specifically, it can be a Mini USB interface, a Micro USB interface, a USB Type C interface, and the like.
  • the USB interface 130 can be used to connect a charger to charge the electronic device, and can also be used to transmit data between the electronic device and peripheral devices. This interface can also be used to connect other electronic devices, such as mobile phones, PCs, smart TVs, etc.
  • the USB interface may be USB3.0, which is compatible with high-speed display port (DP) signal transmission, and can transmit video and audio high-speed data.
  • DP high-speed display port
  • the interface connection relationship between the modules shown in the embodiment of the present application is only a schematic illustration, and does not constitute a structural limitation of the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 may also adopt different interface connection manners in the foregoing embodiments, or a combination of multiple interface connection manners.
  • the charging management module 140 is configured to receive a charging input from a charger.
  • the charger may be a wireless charger or a wired charger.
  • the charging management module 140 can receive charging input from the wired charger through the USB interface 130 .
  • the charging management module 140 may receive wireless charging input through a wireless charging coil of the electronic device. While the charging management module 140 is charging the battery 142 , it can also provide power for electronic devices through the power management module 141 .
  • the power management module 141 is used for connecting the battery 142 , the charging management module 140 and the processor 110 .
  • the power management module 141 receives the input from the battery 142 and/or the charging management module 140 to provide power for the processor 110 , the internal memory 121 , the display screen 194 , the camera 193 , and the wireless communication module 160 .
  • the power management module 141 can also be used to monitor parameters such as battery capacity, battery cycle times, and battery health status (leakage, impedance).
  • the power management module 141 may also be disposed in the processor 110 .
  • the power management module 141 and the charging management module 140 can also be set in the same device.
  • the wireless communication function of the electronic device 100 can be realized by the antenna 1 , the antenna 2 , the mobile communication module 150 , the wireless communication module 160 , a modem processor, a baseband processor, and the like.
  • Antenna 1 and Antenna 2 are used to transmit and receive electromagnetic wave signals.
  • Each antenna in electronic device 100 may be used to cover single or multiple communication frequency bands. Different antennas can also be multiplexed to improve the utilization of the antennas.
  • Antenna 1 can be multiplexed as a diversity antenna of a wireless local area network.
  • the antenna may be used in conjunction with a tuning switch.
  • the mobile communication module 150 can provide the second generation (2th generation, 2G) network/third generation (3th generation, 3G) network/fourth generation (4th generation, 4G) network/fifth generation network applied on the electronic device 100. (5th generation, 5G) network and other wireless communication solutions.
  • the mobile communication module 150 may include at least one filter, switch, power amplifier, low noise amplifier (low noise amplifier, LNA) and the like.
  • the mobile communication module 150 can receive electromagnetic waves through the antenna 1, filter and amplify the received electromagnetic waves, and send them to the modem processor for demodulation.
  • the mobile communication module 150 can also amplify the signals modulated by the modem processor, and convert them into electromagnetic waves through the antenna 1 for radiation.
  • At least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 may be set in the processor 110 . In some embodiments, at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 and at least part of the modules of the processor 110 may be set in the same device.
  • a modem processor may include a modulator and a demodulator.
  • the modulator is used for modulating the low-frequency baseband signal to be transmitted into a medium-high frequency signal.
  • the demodulator is used to demodulate the received electromagnetic wave signal into a low frequency baseband signal. Then the demodulator sends the demodulated low-frequency baseband signal to the baseband processor for processing.
  • the low-frequency baseband signal is passed to the application processor after being processed by the baseband processor.
  • the application processor outputs sound signals through audio equipment (not limited to speaker 170A, receiver 170B, etc.), or displays images or videos through display screen 194 .
  • the modem processor may be a stand-alone device.
  • the modem processor may be independent from the processor 110, and be set in the same device as the mobile communication module 150 or other functional modules.
  • the wireless communication module 160 can provide wireless local area networks (wireless local area networks, WLAN) (such as wireless fidelity (Wireless Fidelity, Wi-Fi) network), bluetooth (bluetooth, BT), global navigation satellite, etc. applied on the electronic device 100.
  • System global navigation satellite system, GNSS
  • frequency modulation frequency modulation, FM
  • near field communication technology near field communication, NFC
  • infrared technology infrared, IR
  • the wireless communication module 160 may be one or more devices integrating at least one communication processing module.
  • the wireless communication module 160 receives electromagnetic waves via the antenna 2 , frequency-modulates and filters the electromagnetic wave signals, and sends the processed signals to the processor 110 .
  • the wireless communication module 160 can also receive the signal to be sent from the processor 110 , frequency-modulate it, amplify it, and convert it into electromagnetic waves through the antenna 2 for radiation.
  • the antenna 1 of the electronic device 100 is coupled to the mobile communication module 150, and the antenna 2 is coupled to the wireless communication module 160, so that the electronic device 100 can communicate with the network and other devices through wireless communication technology.
  • the wireless communication technology may include global system for mobile communications (GSM), general packet radio service (general packet radio service, GPRS), code division multiple access (code division multiple access, CDMA), broadband Code division multiple access (wideband code division multiple access, WCDMA), time division code division multiple access (time-division code division multiple access, TD-SCDMA), long term evolution (long term evolution, LTE), BT, GNSS, WLAN, NFC , FM, and/or IR techniques, etc.
  • GSM global system for mobile communications
  • GPRS general packet radio service
  • code division multiple access code division multiple access
  • CDMA broadband Code division multiple access
  • WCDMA wideband code division multiple access
  • time division code division multiple access time-division code division multiple access
  • TD-SCDMA time-division code division multiple access
  • the GNSS may include a global positioning system (global positioning system, GPS), a global navigation satellite system (global navigation satellite system, GLONASS), a Beidou navigation satellite system (beidou navigation satellite system, BDS), a quasi-zenith satellite system (quasi -zenith satellite system (QZSS) and/or satellite based augmentation systems (SBAS).
  • GPS global positioning system
  • GLONASS global navigation satellite system
  • Beidou navigation satellite system beidou navigation satellite system
  • BDS Beidou navigation satellite system
  • QZSS quasi-zenith satellite system
  • SBAS satellite based augmentation systems
  • the electronic device 100 may implement a display function through a GPU, a display screen 194, an application processor, and the like.
  • the GPU is a microprocessor for image processing, and is connected to the display screen 194 and the application processor. GPUs are used to perform mathematical and geometric calculations for graphics rendering.
  • Processor 110 may include one or more GPUs that execute program instructions to generate or change display information.
  • the display screen 194 is used to display images, videos and the like.
  • the display screen 194 includes a display panel.
  • the display panel can be a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light-emitting diode (OLED), an active matrix organic light emitting diode or an active matrix organic light emitting diode (active-matrix organic light emitting diode, AMOLED), flexible light-emitting diode (flex light-emitting diode, FLED), Miniled, MicroLed, Micro-oLed, quantum dot light emitting diodes (quantum dot light emitting diodes, QLED), etc.
  • the electronic device 100 may include 1 or N display screens 194 , where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • the electronic device 100 can realize the shooting function through the ISP, the camera 193 , the video codec, the GPU, the display screen 194 and the application processor.
  • the ISP is used for processing the data fed back by the camera 193 .
  • the light is transmitted to the photosensitive element of the camera through the lens, and the light signal is converted into an electrical signal, and the photosensitive element of the camera transmits the electrical signal to the ISP for processing, and converts it into an image visible to the naked eye.
  • ISP can also perform algorithm optimization on image noise, brightness, and skin color.
  • ISP can also optimize the exposure, color temperature and other parameters of the shooting scene.
  • the ISP may be located in the camera 193 .
  • Camera 193 is used to capture still images or video.
  • the object generates an optical image through the lens and projects it to the photosensitive element.
  • the photosensitive element may be a charge coupled device (CCD) or a complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistor.
  • CMOS complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor
  • the photosensitive element converts the light signal into an electrical signal, and then transmits the electrical signal to the ISP to convert it into a digital image signal.
  • the ISP outputs the digital image signal to the DSP for processing.
  • DSP converts digital image signals into standard RGB, YUV and other image signals.
  • the electronic device 100 may include 1 or N cameras 193 , where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • the camera 193 may include, but not limited to, a traditional color camera (RGB camera), a depth camera (RGB depth camera), a dynamic vision sensor (dynamic vision sensor, DVS) camera, and the like.
  • camera 193 may be a depth camera.
  • the depth camera can collect the spatial information of the real environment.
  • the electronic device 100 can take pictures of users through the camera 193, recognize different users by face, correspondingly enable different user accounts, and store the information of different users in the accounts of different users, which can ensure that the accounts of different users are not confused, and further protect users. data privacy.
  • the camera 193 may collect hand images or body images of the user, and the processor 110 may be configured to analyze the images collected by the camera 193 to recognize hand motions or body motions input by the user.
  • the camera 193 can be used to recognize the user's hand movements to implement user gesture control.
  • the internal memory 121 may be used to store computer-executable program codes including instructions.
  • the processor 110 executes various functional applications and data processing of the electronic device by executing instructions stored in the internal memory 121 .
  • the internal memory 121 may include an area for storing programs and an area for storing data.
  • the stored program area can store an operating system, at least one application program required by a function (such as a sound playing function, an image playing function, etc.) and the like.
  • the storage data area can store data (such as audio data, phone book, etc.) created during the use of the electronic device.
  • the internal memory 121 may be used to store application programs of one or more applications, and the application programs include instructions.
  • the application program When executed by the processor 110, the application program causes the electronic device 100 to generate content for presentation to the user.
  • the application may include an application for managing the electronic device 100, such as a game application, a meeting application, a video application, a desktop application or other applications, and the like.
  • the internal memory 121 may include one or more random access memories (random access memory, RAM) and one or more non-volatile memories (non-volatile memory, NVM).
  • RAM random access memory
  • NVM non-volatile memory
  • Random access memory has the characteristics of fast read/write speed and volatility. Volatile means that once the power is turned off, the data stored in RAM will disappear. Usually, the static power consumption of the random access memory is extremely low, and the operating power consumption is relatively large.
  • the data in RAM is memory data, which can be read at any time and disappears when the power is turned off.
  • Non-volatile memory has the characteristics of non-volatility and stable data storage.
  • Non-volatile means that the stored data will not disappear after the power is turned off, and the data can be saved for a long time without power.
  • the data in NVM includes application data, which can be stored stably in NVM for a long time.
  • Application data refers to the content written during the running of an application or service process, such as photos or videos obtained by a camera application, text edited by a user in a document application, and so on.
  • Random access memory can include static random-access memory (SRAM), dynamic random access memory (DRAM), synchronous dynamic random access memory (synchronous dynamic random access memory, SDRAM), double data rate synchronous Dynamic random access memory (double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory, DDR SDRAM, such as the fifth generation DDR SDRAM is generally called DDR5SDRAM), etc.
  • SRAM static random-access memory
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • SDRAM synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • SDRAM synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • double data rate synchronous Dynamic random access memory double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • DDR SDRAM double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • DDR5SDRAM double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • the non-volatile memory may include magnetic disk storage, flash memory, and the like.
  • the disk storage device is a memory with a disk as the storage medium, which has the characteristics of large storage capacity, high data transmission rate, and long-term storage of stored data.
  • flash memory can include NOR FLASH, NAND FLASH, 3D NAND FLASH, etc.
  • it can include single-level storage cells (single-level cell, SLC), multi-level storage cells (multi-level cell, MLC), triple-level cell (TLC), quad-level cell (QLC), etc.
  • SLC single-level storage cells
  • MLC multi-level storage cells
  • TLC triple-level cell
  • QLC quad-level cell
  • UFS universal flash storage
  • embedded multimedia memory card embedded multi media Card
  • the random access memory can be directly read and written by the processor 110, and can be used to store executable programs (such as machine instructions) of an operating system or other running programs, and can also be used to store data of users and application programs.
  • the non-volatile memory can also store executable programs and data of users and application programs, etc., and can be loaded into the random access memory in advance for the processor 110 to directly read and write.
  • the external memory interface 120 can be used to connect an external non-volatile memory, so as to expand the storage capacity of the electronic device.
  • the external non-volatile memory communicates with the processor 110 through the external memory interface 120 to implement a data storage function. For example, files such as music and video are stored in an external non-volatile memory.
  • the electronic device 100 can implement audio functions through the audio module 170 , the speaker 170A, the receiver 170B, the microphone 170C, the earphone interface 170D, and the application processor. Such as music playback, recording, etc.
  • the audio module 170 is used to convert digital audio information into analog audio signal output, and is also used to convert analog audio input into digital audio signal.
  • the audio module 170 may also be used to encode and decode audio signals.
  • the audio module 170 may be set in the processor 110 , or some functional modules of the audio module 170 may be set in the processor 110 .
  • Speaker 170A also referred to as a "horn" is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals.
  • the electronic device can listen to music through speaker 170A, or listen to hands-free calls.
  • Receiver 170B also called “earpiece” is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals.
  • the electronic device receives a call or a voice message, it can listen to the voice by placing the receiver 170B close to the human ear.
  • the microphone 170C also called “microphone” or “microphone” is used to convert sound signals into electrical signals.
  • the user can put his mouth close to the microphone 170C to make a sound, and input the sound signal to the microphone 170C.
  • the electronic device may be provided with at least one microphone 170C.
  • the electronic device can be provided with two microphones 170C, which can also implement a noise reduction function in addition to collecting sound signals.
  • the electronic device can also be equipped with three, four or more microphones 170C to realize sound signal collection, noise reduction, identify sound sources, and realize directional recording functions, etc.
  • the earphone interface 170D is used for connecting wired earphones.
  • the earphone interface 170D can be a USB interface 130, or a 3.5mm open mobile terminal platform (OMTP) standard interface, or a cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA (CTIA) standard interface.
  • OMTP open mobile terminal platform
  • CTIA cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA
  • the electronic device 100 may include one or more keys 190 , and these keys 190 may control the electronic device 100 and provide a user with access to functions on the electronic device 100 .
  • the key 190 may be in the form of a mechanical case such as a button, a switch, or a dial, or may be a touch or near-touch sensing device (such as a touch sensor).
  • the electronic device 100 can receive key input and generate key signal input related to user settings and function control of the electronic device 100 .
  • the keys 190 may include a power key, a volume key and the like.
  • the motor 191 can generate a vibrating reminder.
  • the motor 191 can be used for incoming call vibration prompts, and can also be used for touch vibration feedback.
  • touch operations applied to different applications may correspond to different vibration feedback effects.
  • the motor 191 may also correspond to different vibration feedback effects for touch operations acting on different areas of the electronic device 100 .
  • Different application scenarios for example: time reminder, receiving information, alarm clock, games, etc.
  • the touch vibration feedback effect can also support customization.
  • the indicator 192 can be an indicator light, which can be used to indicate the charging status, the change of the battery capacity, and can also be used to indicate messages, notifications and the like.
  • the electronic device 100 may also include other input and output interfaces, and other devices may be connected to the electronic device 100 through a suitable input and output interface.
  • Components may include, for example, audio/video jacks, data connectors, and the like.
  • the electronic device 100 is equipped with one or more sensors, including but not limited to a pressure sensor 180A, a gyroscope sensor 180B, an air pressure sensor 180C, a magnetic sensor 180D, an acceleration sensor 180E, a distance sensor 180F, a proximity sensor 180G, a fingerprint sensor 180H, Temperature sensor 180J, touch sensor 180K, ambient light sensor 180L, bone conduction sensor 180M, etc.
  • sensors including but not limited to a pressure sensor 180A, a gyroscope sensor 180B, an air pressure sensor 180C, a magnetic sensor 180D, an acceleration sensor 180E, a distance sensor 180F, a proximity sensor 180G, a fingerprint sensor 180H, Temperature sensor 180J, touch sensor 180K, ambient light sensor 180L, bone conduction sensor 180M, etc.
  • the pressure sensor 180A is used to sense the pressure signal and convert the pressure signal into an electrical signal.
  • pressure sensor 180A may be disposed on display screen 194 .
  • pressure sensors 180A such as resistive pressure sensors, inductive pressure sensors, and capacitive pressure sensors.
  • a capacitive pressure sensor may be comprised of at least two parallel plates with conductive material.
  • the electronic device 100 determines the intensity of pressure according to the change in capacitance.
  • the electronic device 100 detects the intensity of the touch operation according to the pressure sensor 180A.
  • the electronic device 100 may also calculate the touched position according to the detection signal of the pressure sensor 180A.
  • touch operations acting on the same touch position but with different touch operation intensities may correspond to different operation instructions. For example: when a touch operation with a touch operation intensity less than the first pressure threshold acts on the short message application icon, an instruction to view short messages is executed. When a touch operation whose intensity is greater than or equal to the first pressure threshold acts on the icon of the short message application, the instruction of creating a new short message is executed.
  • touch operations acting on the same touch position but with different touch operation durations may correspond to different operation instructions. For example: when a touch operation whose duration is shorter than the first time threshold acts on the pressure sensor 180A, a confirmation instruction is executed. When a touch operation whose duration is greater than or equal to the first time threshold acts on the pressure sensor 180A, a power on/off command is executed.
  • the gyro sensor 180B can be used to determine the motion posture of the electronic device 100 .
  • the angular velocity of the electronic device about three axes may be determined by the gyro sensor 180B.
  • the gyro sensor 180B can be used for image stabilization. For example, when the shutter is pressed, the gyro sensor 180B detects the angle of shaking of the electronic device, calculates the distance that the lens module needs to compensate according to the angle, and allows the lens to counteract the shaking of the electronic device through reverse movement to achieve anti-shake.
  • the gyro sensor 180B can also be used for navigation and somatosensory game scenes.
  • the air pressure sensor 180C is used to measure air pressure.
  • the electronic device 100 calculates the altitude based on the air pressure value measured by the air pressure sensor 180C to assist positioning and navigation.
  • the magnetic sensor 180D includes a Hall sensor.
  • the electronic device 100 may use the magnetic sensor 180D to detect the opening and closing of the flip leather case.
  • the opening and closing of the clamshell can be detected according to the magnetic sensor 180D.
  • features such as automatic unlocking of the flip cover are set.
  • the acceleration sensor 180E can detect the acceleration of the electronic device 100 in various directions (generally three axes). When the electronic device 100 is stationary, the magnitude and direction of gravity can be detected. It can also be used to identify the posture of electronic devices, and can be used in applications such as horizontal and vertical screen switching, pedometers, etc.
  • the distance sensor 180F is used to measure the distance.
  • the electronic device 100 may measure the distance by infrared or laser. In some embodiments, when shooting a scene, the electronic device 100 may use the distance sensor 180F for distance measurement to achieve fast focusing.
  • Proximity light sensor 180G may include, for example, light emitting diodes (LEDs) and light detectors, such as photodiodes.
  • the light emitting diodes may be infrared light emitting diodes.
  • the electronic device 100 emits infrared light through the light emitting diode.
  • Electronic device 100 uses photodiodes to detect infrared reflected light from nearby objects. When sufficient reflected light is detected, it may be determined that there is an object near the electronic device 100 . When insufficient reflected light is detected, the electronic device 100 may determine that there is no object nearby.
  • the electronic device 100 can use the proximity light sensor 180G to detect that the user is holding the electronic device 100 close to the ear to make a call, so as to automatically turn off the screen to save power.
  • the proximity light sensor 180G can also be used in leather case mode, automatic unlock and lock screen in pocket mode.
  • the ambient light sensor 180L is used for sensing ambient light brightness.
  • the electronic device 100 can adaptively adjust the brightness of the display screen 194 according to the perceived ambient light brightness.
  • the ambient light sensor 180L can also be used to automatically adjust the white balance when taking pictures.
  • the ambient light sensor 180L can also cooperate with the proximity light sensor 180G to detect whether the electronic device 100 is in the pocket, so as to prevent accidental touch.
  • the fingerprint sensor 180H is used to collect fingerprints.
  • the electronic device 100 can use the collected fingerprint characteristics to implement fingerprint unlocking, access to application locks, take pictures with fingerprints, answer incoming calls with fingerprints, and the like.
  • the temperature sensor 180J is used to detect temperature.
  • the electronic device 100 uses the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 180J to implement a temperature treatment strategy. For example, when the temperature reported by the temperature sensor 180J exceeds a threshold, the electronic device may reduce the performance of a processor located near the temperature sensor 180J, so as to reduce power consumption and implement thermal protection.
  • the electronic device 100 heats the battery 142 to prevent the electronic device 100 from being shut down abnormally due to the low temperature.
  • the electronic device 100 boosts the output voltage of the battery 142 to avoid abnormal shutdown caused by low temperature.
  • the touch sensor 180K is also called “touch device”.
  • the touch sensor 180K can be disposed on the display screen 194, and the touch sensor 180K and the display screen 194 form a touch screen, also called a “touch screen”.
  • the touch sensor 180K is used to detect a touch operation on or near it.
  • the touch sensor can pass the detected touch operation to the application processor to determine the type of touch event.
  • Visual output related to the touch operation can be provided through the display screen 194 .
  • the touch sensor 180K may also be disposed on the surface of the electronic device 100 , which is different from the position of the display screen 194 .
  • the bone conduction sensor 180M can acquire vibration signals. In some embodiments, the bone conduction sensor 180M can acquire the vibration signal of the vibrating bone mass of the human voice. The bone conduction sensor 180M can also contact the human pulse and receive the blood pressure beating signal. In some embodiments, the bone conduction sensor 180M can also be disposed in the earphone, combined into a bone conduction earphone.
  • the audio module 170 can analyze the voice signal based on the vibration signal of the vibrating bone mass of the vocal part acquired by the bone conduction sensor 180M, so as to realize the voice function.
  • the application processor can analyze the heart rate information based on the blood pressure beating signal acquired by the bone conduction sensor 180M, so as to realize the heart rate detection function.
  • the SIM card interface 195 is used for connecting a SIM card.
  • the SIM card can be connected and separated from the electronic device 100 by inserting it into the SIM card interface 195 or pulling it out from the SIM card interface 195 .
  • the electronic device 100 may support 1 or N SIM card interfaces, where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • SIM card interface 195 can support Nano SIM card, Micro SIM card, SIM card etc. Multiple cards can be inserted into the same SIM card interface 195 at the same time. The types of the multiple cards may be the same or different.
  • the SIM card interface 195 is also compatible with different types of SIM cards.
  • the SIM card interface 195 is also compatible with external memory cards.
  • the electronic device 100 interacts with the network through the SIM card to implement functions such as calling and data communication.
  • the electronic device 100 adopts an eSIM, that is, an embedded SIM card.
  • the eSIM card can be embedded in the electronic device 100 and cannot be separated from the electronic device 100 .
  • the software system of the electronic device 100 may adopt a layered architecture, an event-driven architecture, a micro-kernel architecture, a micro-service architecture, or a cloud architecture.
  • the embodiment of the present invention uses a layered architecture
  • the system is taken as an example to illustrate the software structure of the electronic device 100 .
  • FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the software structure of the electronic device 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • the layered architecture divides the software into several layers, and each layer has a clear role and division of labor. Layers communicate through software interfaces.
  • the The system is divided into four layers, from top to bottom are application layer, application framework layer, Android runtime ( runtime) and system libraries, and the kernel layer.
  • the application layer can consist of a series of application packages.
  • the application package can include applications such as camera, gallery, calendar, call, map, navigation, WLAN, Bluetooth, music, video, and settings.
  • applications such as camera, gallery, calendar, call, map, navigation, WLAN, Bluetooth, music, video, and settings.
  • the font size, thickness and the like can be set in the setting application.
  • the application framework layer provides an application programming interface (application programming interface, API) and a programming framework for applications in the application layer.
  • the application framework layer includes some predefined functions.
  • the application framework layer can include window manager, content provider, view system, phone manager, resource manager, notification manager, etc.
  • a window manager is used to manage window programs.
  • the window manager can get the size of the display screen, determine whether there is a status bar, lock the screen, capture the screen, etc.
  • Content providers are used to store and retrieve data and make it accessible to applications.
  • This data can include videos, images, audio, calls made and received, browsing history and bookmarks, phonebook, etc.
  • the view system includes visual controls, such as controls for displaying text, controls for displaying pictures, and so on.
  • the view system can be used to build applications.
  • a display interface can consist of one or more views.
  • a display interface including a text message notification icon may include a view for displaying text and a view for displaying pictures.
  • Telephony Manager is used to provide communication functions. For example, the management of call status (including connected, hung up, etc.).
  • the resource manager provides various resources for the application, such as localized strings, icons, pictures, layout files, video files, and so on.
  • the notification manager enables the application to display notification information in the status bar, which can be used to convey notification-type messages, and can automatically disappear after a short stay without user interaction.
  • the notification manager is used to notify the download completion, message reminder, etc.
  • the notification manager can also be a notification that appears on the top status bar of the system in the form of a chart or scroll bar text, such as a notification of an application running in the background, or a notification that appears on the screen in the form of a dialog window.
  • prompting text information in the status bar issuing a prompt sound, vibrating the electronic device, and flashing the indicator light, etc.
  • Runtime includes core library and virtual machine. The runtime is responsible for the scheduling and management of the Android system.
  • the core library consists of two parts: one part is the function function that the java language needs to call, and the other part is the core library of Android.
  • the application layer and the application framework layer run in virtual machines.
  • the virtual machine executes the java files of the application program layer and the application program framework layer as binary files.
  • the virtual machine is used to perform functions such as object life cycle management, stack management, thread management, security and exception management, and garbage collection.
  • a system library can include multiple function modules. For example: surface manager (surface manager), media library (Media Libraries), 3D graphics processing library (eg: OpenGL ES), 2D graphics engine (eg: SGL), etc.
  • the surface manager is used to manage the display subsystem and provides the fusion of 2D and 3D layers for multiple applications.
  • the media library supports playback and recording of various commonly used audio and video formats, as well as still image files, etc.
  • the media library can support a variety of audio and video encoding formats, such as: MPEG4, H.264, MP3, AAC, AMR, JPG, PNG, etc.
  • the 3D graphics processing library is used to implement 3D graphics drawing, image rendering, compositing, and layer processing, etc.
  • 2D graphics engine is a drawing engine for 2D drawing.
  • the kernel layer is the layer between hardware and software.
  • the kernel layer includes at least a display driver, a camera driver, an audio driver, and a sensor driver.
  • the software architecture of the electronic device 100 is only an example, and it should be understood that the software architecture shown in the embodiment of the present invention does not constitute a specific limitation to the present application. In some other embodiments of the present application, the software architecture of the electronic device 100 may include more or fewer modules than shown in the figure, or combine some modules, or split some modules, or arrange different architectures.
  • the illustrated components can be realized in hardware, software or a combination of software and hardware.
  • the communication connection may be a USB connection, a Bluetooth connection, a Wi-Fi P2P connection, etc., which is not limited in this embodiment.
  • the mobile phone is used as the core device, and other devices such as smart watches, smart TVs, etc. are connected to the mobile phone as associated devices to form a super terminal.
  • other devices such as smart watches, smart TVs, etc. are connected to the mobile phone as associated devices to form a super terminal.
  • This example does not describe the core device in practical applications. and the device type of the associated device constitute no restrictions.
  • the core device and the associated device may be logged in with the same account or different accounts, which is not limited in this embodiment.
  • the core device is the control center of the super terminal system, carrying functions such as device management, service management, and service scheduling.
  • the associated device may be an electronic device located on the same communication network as the core device (such as a mobile phone), for example, an electronic device located on the same Wi-Fi network.
  • the associated device can also be an electronic device whose login account is the same as the core device login account (such as a Huawei account), or an electronic device whose login account and the core device login account belong to the same group (such as the same family account).
  • the associated device can also be an electronic device that establishes a trusted relationship (or pairing) with the core device in other ways, such as an electronic device that has been paired with Bluetooth, an electronic device that has connected to a hotspot shared by a mobile phone, or a mobile phone that has been connected to the electronic device.
  • the hotspot of the device, or the mobile phone has established a Wi-Fi P2P connection with the electronic device, etc.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific manner of associating the foregoing associated device with the core device.
  • the core device is mainly used as the mobile phone to display the relevant user interface, but this does not constitute a limitation to the present application.
  • the following sample interfaces can also be transferred to other types of devices, as long as they are based on the same inventive idea provided by this application, they are all within the protection scope of this application.
  • each user interface described in the following embodiments of the present application is only an example interface, and does not limit the solution of the present application.
  • different interface layouts may be used in the user interface, more or less controls may be included, and other functional options may be added or reduced, as long as it is based on the same inventive idea provided by this application, it is within the scope of protection of this application Inside.
  • FIG. 4 shows that the user can enter the hyperterminal interface by pulling down the control center interface.
  • the user interface 400 is a schematic diagram of a main interface (or called a main screen interface, etc.) displayed by the mobile phone.
  • the user interface 400 may include a top status bar 401 , a desktop 402 , and a bottom tray bar 403 .
  • the top status bar 401 includes a mobile signal indicator, a wireless network signal indicator, a power indicator, a time indicator and the like. Icons of one or more application programs, application function components, and the like may be displayed on the desktop 402 .
  • the bottom tray bar 403 can display icons of commonly used applications, so that users can quickly open these applications. In the example of the user interface 400 , the bottom tray bar 403 displays icons for phone, text message, address book, and camera applications.
  • the user can call out the control center interface through user operation 404 .
  • the user operation 404 shown in FIG. 4 may be a touch operation in which the user slides down from the top of the display interface. In some other embodiments, the user operation 404 may also be a touch operation in which the user performs an upward slide from the bottom of the display interface.
  • the mobile phone After the mobile phone detects the user operation 404 , it displays the control center interface, as shown in the user interface 410 .
  • Multiple functional controls may be displayed on the user interface 410, or may also be called cards or modules.
  • the setting control 412 can be used for the user to quickly enter the setting interface.
  • the shortcut setting card 413 includes multiple controls, which can be used by the user to quickly turn on/off or adjust corresponding functions, such as quickly turning on/off Wi-Fi network, Bluetooth, mobile network, sound, alarm clock, and quickly adjusting the brightness of the screen display, etc. .
  • One or more icons of devices are displayed in the hyperterminal function card 414, and these devices can include devices that have been connected with the mobile phone to form a hyperterminal, or devices that have not yet established a connection detected by the mobile phone, and devices that have not yet established a connection It may be a device that has been paired before, or a device that has not been paired yet, which is not limited in this embodiment.
  • the music card 415 can display information such as currently played music and singers, and also includes controls such as previous song, play/pause, next song, and song list.
  • the desk lamp shortcut control card 416 can be used for the user to quickly turn on or off the desk lamp.
  • the smart screen shortcut control card 417 can be used for the user to quickly turn on or turn off the smart screen.
  • the user can also enter the hyperterminal interface by selecting the hyperterminal option in the setting page, that is, the user operation 404 can include a series of operations, for example, the user clicks the "settings" application icon on the main interface. , and the operation of selecting the corresponding function option in the "Settings” application interface, etc.
  • the user can also enter the HyperTerminal interface from the negative screen of the mobile phone, pull up the toolbar, pull down the notification bar, pull left/right shortcut icon bar, desktop card or an application (such as a smart home application), etc.
  • the embodiment does not limit the way of entering the hyper terminal interface.
  • Fig. 5 is the device interaction interface related to the HyperTerminal function.
  • the mobile phone can turn on the wireless communication function, search for electronic devices around, and display the names of the electronic devices found in the device list. Then the user selects the electronic device to be interacted with according to the name in the device list, and then initiates a connection to the electronic device.
  • the name of the electronic device displayed in the device list of the mobile phone is usually the type and/or model of the electronic device, such as HUAWEI Vision, HUAWEI MateBook, sometimes two or For two or more electronic devices with the same name, the user cannot determine which electronic device corresponds to each.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a brand-new interactive interface, which can provide users with an easier-to-understand interface and a more humanized and friendly interactive experience, such as the super terminal user interface 500 shown in FIG. 5 .
  • the user interface 500 may display a hyperterminal title bar 501 , a return control 502 for returning to a previous page, a prompt description 503 , a device connection status icon 504 , and the like.
  • the prompt text "drag the device to the local machine to establish collaboration" is displayed.
  • the device connection status diagram 504 may be presented as a circular diagram, and a mobile phone icon 505 is displayed in the center of the device connection status diagram 504, indicating that the core device is a mobile phone.
  • the device icons and names surrounding the mobile phone are the surrounding devices searched by the mobile phone, such as the smart watch icon 506 shown in Figure 5, the Sound X icon, the Vision icon, the FreeBuds icon, the smart bracelet icon, the MatePad icon, and the MateBook icons etc.
  • the layout relationship between the core device and the associated device can be visually indicated.
  • the relative position of the associated device icon and the core device icon displayed in the device connection status diagram 504 can indicate the positional relationship between the associated device and the core device in real space, such as relative orientation information, relative distance information, etc., which is helpful for users Quickly find and distinguish individual electronic devices.
  • the mobile phone searches for two devices named smart watches, and the user can distinguish the device to be selected according to the relative position (relative orientation or distance) of the logo and the mobile phone in the super terminal interface of the mobile phone.
  • smart watch A is located on the left side of the mobile phone
  • smart watch B is located on the right side of the mobile phone.
  • the user can distinguish that the smart watch icon on the left of the mobile phone icon represents smart watch A.
  • the smart watch icon to the right of the phone icon represents smart watch B.
  • the distances between different associated devices and the core device mobile phone may also be different, and the distance between the associated device icon and the core device icon in the interface may indicate the distance in real space Far and near, for example, the farther the associated device is from the core device in the real space, the farther the distance between the associated device icon and the core device icon displayed on the interface will be.
  • This embodiment does not limit the specific technology for realizing this function.
  • the mobile phone can obtain the orientation and the measured distance of the directional information carried by the associated device based on ultra wide band (UWB) technology, and obtain the actual distance between the associated device and the mobile phone.
  • UWB ultra wide band
  • the distance between the icon of the associated device and the icon of the core device in the interface may indicate the signal strength of the associated device detected by the core device, such as the Bluetooth signal strength or the WiFi signal strength. The stronger the signal strength of the associated device, the closer the distance between the associated device icon and the core device icon displayed on the interface.
  • the present application does not limit the layout, expression form and indication meaning of the device connection status diagram 504 .
  • other layouts or presentation forms may also be used to indicate the detected associated devices.
  • the mobile phone can automatically detect surrounding associated devices periodically.
  • the mobile phone can display an interface in the form of a radar scan, indicating that the mobile phone is currently performing detection tasks periodically.
  • the phone can respond to a user action on the refresh control and then detect surrounding associated devices.
  • a mobile phone can use the wireless communication function to broadcast query messages to search for associated devices around the mobile phone. After receiving the query message from the mobile phone, the attached electronic device can return a response message to the mobile phone, and the response message can carry the media access control address (media access control address, MAC address), device type, name, etc. of the electronic device. information.
  • the mobile phone can determine whether the electronic device is associated with the mobile phone according to the response message of the electronic device, that is, whether the electronic device is an associated device of the mobile phone. For example, according to the MAC address of the electronic device carried in the response message, the mobile phone can query the account management server for the account logged in by the electronic device to determine whether the account logged in by the electronic device is the same as the account logged in by the mobile phone, or whether it belongs to the same group. account. Alternatively, the mobile phone may query the router of the Wi-Fi network where the mobile phone is located according to the MAC address of the electronic device carried in the response message, whether the electronic device is located in the same Wi-Fi network as the mobile phone. Or, the mobile phone determines whether the electronic device has established a trusted relationship with the mobile phone according to the historical records stored by itself. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific method for determining the associated device of the mobile phone.
  • the above-mentioned wireless communication functions include but are not limited to WLAN, radio frequency identification (radio frequency identification, REID), Wi-Fi P2P, hotspot, infrared, ultrasonic, Bluetooth, ZigBee, UWB and other wireless communication functions. No limit.
  • the positioning function based on Wi-Fi the positioning function based on Bluetooth iBeacon
  • the positioning function based on UWB etc.
  • the positioning function based on Wi-Fi and the positioning function based on Bluetooth iBeacon can measure the distance between the mobile phone and other electronic devices.
  • the AOA positioning function based on Bluetooth 5.1 and the UWB-based positioning function can measure the distance between the mobile phone and other electronic devices, as well as the direction of other electronic devices relative to the mobile phone.
  • the mobile phone After the mobile phone searches the surrounding associated devices, it can further use the positioning capability of the wireless communication function to measure the relative direction and/or relative distance between the associated device and the mobile phone in real space, and then display the device connection status diagram as shown in Figure 5 Show 504.
  • the layout of the icons (and names) used to represent each electronic device in the device connection state diagram 504 may be consistent with the layout of each electronic device's position in real space. For example, in the embodiment provided by this application, Fig.
  • FIG. 1 shows a plurality of associated devices (such as smart watch 102, notebook computer 103, tablet computer 104, smart bracelet 105, earphone 106, smart TV 107, smart speaker 108) and mobile phone
  • the positional relationship between 101 is in one-to-one correspondence with the layout of each associated device icon and mobile phone icon shown in the device connection state diagram 504 in FIG. 5 .
  • the smart watch 102 is located directly in front of the mobile phone 101 .
  • the device connection status diagram 504 in FIG. 5 shows that the smart watch icon 506 is directly above the mobile phone icon 505 .
  • the associated device icons shown in Figure 5 are floating around the core device, and are not adsorbed, overlapped or attached to the core device icon, indicating that these associated devices have not yet established a connection with the core device. That is to say, in the process of the core device detecting which associated devices are around, the mobile phone and each associated device need to enable the wireless communication function, but it is not required that the mobile phone and each associated device have established a wireless connection.
  • the user wants an associated device and the core device mobile phone to form a hyper terminal to achieve some collaborative functions, in one implementation, the user can select the icon of the associated device on the hyper terminal interface shown in Figure 5, and drag The icon corresponding to the associated device is close to the icon of the core device, refer to the user interface 600 shown in FIG. 6 .
  • the distance between the associated device icon and the core device icon is the first distance.
  • the associated device icon can be adsorbed around the core device icon, refer to the user interface 700 shown in FIG. 7 .
  • a prompt description 602 "smart watch has been selected" may also be displayed to illustrate the selection status of the current user.
  • the smart watch icon 506 When the distance between the smart watch icon 506 and the mobile phone icon 505 is less than or equal to the second distance, or the smart watch icon 506 enters a circular area with the center of the mobile phone icon 505 as the center and a radius of the first radius distance R, the user loosens the Open your finger to display the device connection status diagram 701 shown in FIG.
  • a prompt description 703 "cooperated with the smart watch” may also be displayed to illustrate the current connection status of the hyper terminal.
  • the smart watch has established a connection with the mobile phone before opening the super terminal interface, then when the mobile phone detects that the connection has been established, it will directly display the interface where the smart watch icon 702 is attached to the edge of the mobile phone icon 505, expressing that the smart watch In the situation that the connection has been established with the mobile phone, the user interface 700 shown in FIG. 7 is shown.
  • the device that establishes a communication connection with the mobile phone is not necessarily an associated device that can form a HyperTerminal.
  • the associated device must be a device that can establish a communication connection with the mobile phone.
  • the smart watch icon 702 that has been connected with the mobile phone to form a hyperterminal can display a distinctive logo, which is convenient for distinguishing it from the associated device icon in the unconnected state.
  • the smart watch icon 702 is displayed in a dark filled form, indicating that the smart watch is connected to the mobile phone.
  • the size of the smart watch icon 702 is smaller than that of the smart watch icon 506 when it is not connected.
  • the diameter of the round icon of the smart watch icon 702 is R2 is adsorbed on the edge of the mobile phone icon 505 , and the smart watch icon 702 is tangent to the edge of the mobile phone icon 505 .
  • the two device icons being attracted together may also mean that the two device icons overlap in whole or in part. This embodiment does not limit the form of adsorption.
  • the user wants to detach an associated device from the HyperTerminal system, he can select the associated device icon and drag the associated device icon away from the core device icon when the associated device icon is in the state of adsorption to the core device.
  • the mobile phone detects that the user drags the icon of the associated device away from the icon of the core device for a distance greater than the third distance, when the user releases the finger, the icon of the associated device returns to the position before it was not connected, the adsorption state is released, and the associated device is also disconnected If the connection with the core device is separated from the HyperTerminal system, the service provided by the device in the HyperTerminal will also be terminated.
  • the core device icon remains stationary, and the user selects the associated icon and drags it away from the core device icon for a certain distance, and the two devices can be disconnected.
  • the user can select the associated icon and the core device icon at the same time, press and hold the two icons respectively, and drag the two icons in opposite directions over a certain distance, and the two devices can be disconnected.
  • the associated Device icons can also snap together with core device icons.
  • the user can also drag the icon of the associated device to move away from the icon of the core device for a distance greater than the third distance. To the position before it is not connected, the adsorption state is released, and the associated device is also disconnected from the core device at the same time, and it is separated from the hyperterminal system, and the service provided by the device in the hyperterminal is also terminated.
  • the connection between the associated device and the core device can be triggered, and the interface shows that the associated device icon is attached to the core device icon together.
  • the user clicks an associated device that is in the connected state it can trigger the associated device to disconnect from the core device.
  • the icon of the associated device is separated from the icon of the core device, and the icon of the associated device returns to The location of the unconnected state.
  • the selected device icon can change its position along with the track of the user's finger dragging on the screen.
  • This embodiment does not limit the finger movement trajectory when the user drags the device icon, and the user's dragging trajectory may be any curve.
  • the mobile phone can detect the current association between the associated device icon and the mobile phone. Whether the distance between the icons is less than or equal to a certain distance, such as the second distance, if so, the associated device icon and the mobile phone icon are adsorbed together.
  • the associated device icon moves along with the track of the user's finger.
  • the selected device icon may not change its position along with the dragging track of the user's finger on the screen. For example, when the user selects an associated device icon, and the user slides a finger on the screen for a certain distance or stays on a certain position on the screen for a second preset time, the mobile phone can determine the distance between the current position of the user's finger and the mobile phone icon Whether it is less than or equal to a certain distance, such as the second distance, if so, the associated device icon and the mobile phone icon are attracted together. The associated device icon does not move when the user's finger is moved.
  • the user can also select the icon of the core device to be close to the icon of the associated device, which also triggers the connection of the two devices. For example, if the user holds down the phone icon and drags the phone icon close to the smart watch icon, when the phone icon and the smart watch icon overlap or overlaps, the user releases the finger, and the smart watch icon can also be attached to the phone icon, indicating that The phone is connected to the smart watch and can work together.
  • a one-key disconnection control can also be set on the HyperTerminal interface. Clicking the one-key disconnection control can disconnect all associated devices from the core device, and restore the core device to be independent without any associated device connection. state, the services provided by each associated device will also be terminated.
  • the hyperterminal is not limited to the connection between the associated device and the core device.
  • the user can also connect an associated device with another associated device in the hyperterminal interface to form a hyperterminal. That is to say, the user can connect any two or more devices, and the connected devices are not limited to associated devices or core devices.
  • associated devices, smart speakers and smart TVs can be directly connected to form a super terminal.
  • the hyper terminal system when multiple devices are connected to form a hyper terminal, the hyper terminal system can be based on the currently connected device type and/or device characteristics, or according to the detected environment where the user is currently located, or the device Analyze the current user’s usage scenarios, and further, enumerate the scenario-based services or functions that the HyperTerminal system can provide, and display them on the user interface, so that users can quickly start related services or functions.
  • smart TVs have larger screens, which provide users with a better visual viewing experience and are more suitable for watching videos; smart speakers have strong audio output capabilities and better speaker effects. It is more suitable for playing audio; the earphone is small in size, easy to carry, does not need to be placed outside, does not disturb people around, and can also have a noise reduction effect, shielding external environmental noise, suitable for listening to audio in public places, such as talking in public places, listening to music, etc.; Smart watches and smart bracelets can measure the user's exercise data or heart rate and other health information more accurately than mobile phones; laptops have powerful processing capabilities and are more suitable for office work.
  • the device type and device features will not be described in detail here, and the above examples do not limit other embodiments.
  • the device may also detect the current environment of the user, and analyze the usage scenario of the current user.
  • This embodiment does not limit the method of detecting the user's environment. For example, it can be determined whether the device is indoors or outdoors based on the current location information of the device; or use a camera to collect photos of the current environment, or use ultrasonic waves, infrared rays, etc. The spatial depth or size of the environment to determine whether the current user is indoors or outdoors.
  • the hyperterminal system can be divided into various consumer usage scenarios.
  • the HyperTerminal system can match relevant usage scenarios based on the device type, device features, product positioning, common functions and other information of the devices in the current system.
  • consumer usage scenarios may include the following five categories: mobile office, smart home, audio-visual entertainment, sports and health, and smart travel.
  • classification of consumer usage scenarios is not static, and the hyperterminal system can continuously update, expand or refine more usage scenarios, which are not limited in this embodiment, and can be changed according to actual conditions.
  • the addition of associated devices or functions that have not appeared before may lead to new usage scenarios.
  • adding a smart car as an associated device can form a super terminal with a mobile phone, and then add a mobile phone and a smart car.
  • the scene is an intelligent travel scene.
  • the HyperTerminal system After the HyperTerminal system matches the usage scenario according to the device, it can also analyze and query the scenario-based services and atomized services that the device combination can provide based on the usage scenario.
  • the scenario-based service refers to a functional service based on a usage scenario, which is a collection of multiple functions or services that can be provided for a specific scenario.
  • the atomic service refers to the smallest capability unit that can run independently. It is a concept of abstract packaging of a single function/capability. It can be a hardware service or a software service.
  • a scene service can be supported by multiple atomic services, and an atomic service combination includes atomic services composed of atomic capabilities of multiple devices.
  • the atomic capabilities may include one or more of the following: audio output capabilities, audio input capabilities, display capabilities, camera capabilities, touch input capabilities, keyboard and mouse input capabilities, and the like.
  • the audio output capability may include whether the device supports mono or multi-channel, supported sound effects, supported frequency response range, noise reduction capability, audio analysis capability, etc. when the device is playing audio; the audio input capability may include receiving Acoustic range, noise reduction capability, etc.; display capability may include the device’s screen size, display resolution parameters, refresh rate, color expressiveness, etc.; camera capability may include the device’s camera type, shooting pixels, night scene shooting capability, and image adjustment capability, etc.; touch input capability, keyboard and mouse input capability refer to whether the device can support touch input or keyboard and mouse input, etc.
  • the multi-screen collaborative scene service between the mobile phone and the large screen is supported by the following atomic services: display service, audio input service, audio output service, touch input service, keyboard and mouse input service, camera service, etc.
  • the display service can be provided by the large screen
  • the audio input service can be provided by the mobile phone
  • the audio output service can be provided by the large screen
  • the touch input service can be provided by the mobile phone
  • the keyboard and mouse input service can be provided by the large screen, and so on.
  • scene-based service and atomized service are only words used in this embodiment, and their representative meanings have been recorded in this embodiment, and their names do not constitute any limitation to this embodiment.
  • scenario-based services may also be called scenario-based functions, scenario functions, scenario services, scenario-based services, business functions, and other terms;
  • atomic services may also be called meta-capabilities, atomic capabilities (Ability ), atomic services, functional components, and other nouns.
  • scenario-based services may also be called scenario-based functions, scenario functions, scenario services, scenario-based services, business functions, and other terms
  • atomic services may also be called meta-capabilities, atomic capabilities (Ability ), atomic services, functional components, and other nouns.
  • it is mainly described as "scenario-based service” and "atomized service”.
  • a super terminal composed of a mobile phone and a smart watch can match its usage scenario as a sports and health scene.
  • the super terminal system can query the scene-based services and atomized services that can be provided by the mobile phone + smart watch combination.
  • the combination of mobile phone + smart watch can provide services including: supporting sports services, supporting health services, counting exercise, measuring heart rate, measuring blood oxygen saturation, etc.
  • the scenario-based services recommended for mobile phone + smart watch combinations include: indoor running, outdoor running, heart health, blood oxygen health, etc.
  • the atomic services supported by smart watches including: GPS positioning, sound output, vibration reminder, etc.
  • Table 1 lists the corresponding classification of usage scenarios when the core device is a mobile phone, and some different associated devices form a hyper terminal with the mobile phone, and the scenario-based services that are analyzed and recommended after querying the capabilities of the device. It should be noted that Table 1 only shows the case where the associated device is a single device, but it is not limited thereto. In other embodiments, there are also cases where multiple associated devices and mobile phones form a hyper terminal, for example, the associated device is a smart TV and a smart speaker, and a mobile phone to form a super terminal, and its corresponding execution operations and function descriptions can refer to the foregoing or subsequent embodiments, and will not be repeated here.
  • Scenario-based services can be based on the type of core device and/or associated devices, device usage, user's commonly used collaborative work content, current environment of the device, device operating status, user's recently used applications, currently running applications, etc.
  • Situation, scenario-based service options based on comprehensive statistics.
  • the HyperTerminal can recommend scenario-based services based on device type, product positioning, and device usage. For example, the combination of a mobile phone and a smart watch is often used to count exercise, so the HyperTerminal system is based on the device type, device Uses and common collaborative work content can be classified as sports and health scenarios for the combination of mobile phones and smart watches. Scenario-based service options that can be provided in sports and health scenarios include outdoor running, indoor running, heart health, and vascular health.
  • the probability of each scenario-based service option being selected can be calculated according to the user's recent use frequency or the environment in which the current device is detected.
  • the scenario-based service option area The scenario-based service options that are estimated to have a high probability of being selected are displayed first.
  • the hyper terminal system can display the options with high usage rate in the front according to the usage frequency of various scenario-based service options by users within a certain period of time according to the statistics.
  • the certain time can be all the time in history, or a certain period of time, such as the last three months. The higher the historical usage rate of the scenario-based service option, the higher the display.
  • the core device or the associated device may detect the environment where the current device is located, and sort the scenario-based service options according to the environment. If the core device or associated device detects that the user's environment is outdoors, it will give priority to recommending outdoor-related service options, such as outdoor running. If the core device or associated device detects that the user's environment is indoors, it will give priority to recommending indoor related service options, such as indoor running.
  • This embodiment does not limit the method of detecting the user's environment. For example, the environment can be judged according to the current positioning information of the device; or the camera can be used to collect photos of the current environment, or ultrasonic waves, infrared rays, etc. size to determine the current user's environment.
  • the HyperTerminal system can also determine the environment or scene where the device is located according to the application recently opened or used by the user, or the currently running application, and then recommend scene-based service options. For example, when a mobile phone and a smart TV form a super terminal, if it is detected that the application currently running on the mobile phone is an office presentation application, then the multi-screen collaborative service option can be recommended first; or, if it is detected that the application currently running on the mobile phone is a video application, then the Recommend home theater service options; or, when it is detected that the webpage browsed by the user is a game-related webpage, preferentially recommend game entertainment-related service options, etc.
  • the hyperterminal system can also recommend scene-based services according to the running status of the equipment. For example, when a mobile phone is connected to a smart TV to form a super terminal, if it is detected that the smart TV is in the on-screen state, then the scene-based service is recommended as screen mirroring; if the smart TV is detected to be off-screen, the scene-based service is recommended as Casting service.
  • the hyperterminal system can also recommend scenario-based services according to the atomized services that the device can provide.
  • the user can customize and add scene-based services, for example, the user sets a name for a usage scene and associates the scene with other application services or system services.
  • the newly added scenario-based service is displayed side by side with other scenario-based services on the HyperTerminal interface.
  • the hyperterminal system may comprehensively consider one or more of the above factors and reasonably recommend scene-based service options.
  • the hyper terminal system can be based on the current device combination, the atomized services that can be provided by each device that can be queried, and then according to the scene service actually selected by the user, it can be based on the user's usual service combination, or the default service combination set by the user, or based on life Cognition is the most suitable service combination in this scenario, or the most frequently used service combination in this scenario is obtained from the server, and the atomic service combination in this scenario is automatically set, saving users from tedious selection operations.
  • the atomic service combination is automatically set as follows: the audio output function is provided by the smart TV, the audio input (microphone) function is provided by the mobile phone, and the camera The function is provided by the smart TV, and the display function is provided by the smart TV.
  • the atomic service combination is automatically set as follows: the audio output function is provided by the earphone, and the audio input (microphone) function is provided by the The earphones provide, the camera function is provided by the mobile phone, and the display function is provided by the treadmill.
  • the hyperterminal system can analyze the optimal atomic service combination according to the device characteristics of different device types. For example, a smart TV has a larger screen, and the user has a better viewing experience and is more suitable for watching videos. Then, when a smart TV and a mobile phone form a super terminal, the smart TV is given priority to provide display functions. Smart speakers have strong audio output capabilities, better sound effects, and are more suitable for playing audio. When a smart speaker and a mobile phone form a super terminal, the smart speaker is given priority to provide audio output.
  • the headset is small in size, easy to carry, does not need to be placed outside, does not disturb people around, and can also have a noise reduction effect, shielding external environmental noise, suitable for listening to audio in public places, such as talking in public places, listening to music, etc.
  • a HyperTerminal it is preferred to set the earphone to provide audio output function.
  • Smart watches and smart bracelets can measure the user's exercise data or heart rate and other health information more accurately than mobile phones.
  • smart watches or smart bracelets and mobile phones form a super terminal, the smart watch or smart bracelet is preferred.
  • the acquired motion data; the laptop has powerful processing capability and is more suitable for office work, so when the laptop and mobile phone form a super terminal, the laptop is given priority to provide display functions, keyboard input functions, etc.
  • the device type and device features will not be described in detail here, and the above examples do not limit other embodiments.
  • the hyper terminal supports users to personalize the atomic service combination, and the user can manually modify the atomic service combination according to personal preferences or actual conditions, and adjust a certain atomic service to be provided by other devices. For example, in a multi-screen conference, if the surrounding environment is noisy, the user can change the audio output function provided by the smart TV to the headset.
  • the HyperTerminal system can also analyze the current scene based on the types of devices that currently make up the HyperTerminal system, and list and recommend other devices suitable for the current scene to the user, so as to help the user obtain a better scene experience; Or speculate on more scalable usage scenarios, and then list and recommend other devices to the user. If the user adopts the device recommended by the system, more and richer usage scenarios can be further expanded.
  • a mobile phone when a mobile phone is coordinated with a smart TV, wireless microphones, wireless game controllers and other equipment can be recommended to users, and scene-based services such as karaoke and games can be expanded correspondingly.
  • scene-based services such as karaoke and games
  • the system can also recommend new devices according to the newly formed hyperterminal. Users can choose to add more devices to form a hyper terminal, making the user use scenarios more abundant. After adding more associated devices, the HyperTerminal can provide more and richer scene-based services, improving the HyperTerminal ecosystem.
  • a scene-based service option area 705 can be displayed below the device connection status icon 701.
  • the scene-based service option area In step 705, one or more scenario-based services recommended by the hyperterminal system according to the current device combination are listed.
  • a recommended device area 704 is also displayed, which is used to list devices that can be linked with the current hyperterminal system device to provide users with richer scenarios or better experience, and the user can select according to needs.
  • an atomized service entry option 706 is also displayed. Select the atomized service entry option 706 to display the atomized service combination, and the user can choose the atomized service provider by himself. Refer to the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 .
  • scenario-based service options are displayed in the scenario-based service option area 705, such as outdoor running, indoor running, heart health, and vascular health.
  • scenario-based service option area 705 such as outdoor running, indoor running, heart health, and vascular health.
  • the user can also use a finger to slide left and right on the scene service option area 705 on the screen to view more options that are not displayed.
  • scenario-based service options can be based on the device type of the mobile phone and smart watch, the purpose of the device, the content of the user's common collaborative work, the current environment of the device, the operating status of the device, the application recently used by the user, the currently running application, etc. , the scenario-based service options obtained from comprehensive statistics.
  • the probability of each scene-based service option being selected can be calculated according to the user's recent frequency of use or the environment in which the current device is detected, and the scene-based service options that are estimated to have a high probability of being selected are displayed first in the scene-based service option area 705. Service options.
  • the combination of mobile phones and smart watches is often used to count the amount of exercise.
  • the super terminal system can classify the combination of mobile phones and smart watches as sports and health scenarios based on the device type, device use, and commonly used collaborative work content.
  • the scenario-based service options that can be provided in the sports health scenario include outdoor running, indoor running, heart health, blood vessel health, etc., which are displayed in the scenario-based service option area 705 .
  • the hyper terminal system can display the options with high usage rate in the front according to the usage frequency of various scenario-based service options by users within a certain period of time according to the statistics.
  • the certain time can be all the time in history, or a certain period of time, such as the last three months.
  • the higher the historical usage rate of the scenario-based service option the higher the display. For example, it is obtained that the most frequently used scene service option of the user is outdoor running, followed by indoor running, etc., then in the scene service option area 705, the first displayed scene service option is outdoor running, and the second displayed service option is outdoor running.
  • Scenario-based service options include outdoor running, etc.
  • the mobile phone or the smart watch can detect the environment where the current device is located, and sort the scene-based service options according to the environment. If the mobile phone or smart watch detects that the user's environment is outdoors, then the outdoor running service option is recommended first. If the mobile phone or smart watch detects that the user's environment is indoors, then the indoor running service option is recommended first.
  • This embodiment does not limit the method of detecting the user's environment. For example, it can be determined whether the device is indoors or outdoors based on the current location information of the device; or use a camera to collect photos of the current environment, or use ultrasonic waves, infrared rays, etc. The spatial depth or size of the environment to determine whether the current user is indoors or outdoors.
  • the HyperTerminal system can also determine the environment or scene where the device is located according to the application recently opened or used by the user, or the currently running application, and then recommend scene-based service options. For example, before the user opens the super terminal interface to connect the smart watch and the mobile phone, the application the user runs is a sports and health application, and the service used is the outdoor running sub-service in the sports and health application, then the user connects the smart watch to the mobile phone to form a hyper terminal system , in the scenario-based service option area 705, the first displayed scenario-based service option is outdoor running.
  • the hyper terminal system may comprehensively consider one or more of the above factors and reasonably recommend scene-based service options.
  • a certain scenario-based service may be automatically selected as a default service. For example, setting the first scenario service option in the scenario service option area 705 as a default service, when devices are connected to form a hyper terminal, each device is configured according to the atomic service combination corresponding to the scenario service by default. If the user wants to choose other scenario-based services, he can choose other scenario-based service options. Setting the default scene-based service can facilitate the seamless switching of services on devices and save user operations to a certain extent. For example, when the headset is connected to the mobile phone, the default service setting is that the headset provides audio output and audio input functions.
  • the setting of the default service may be a default service selected by the user, including scenario-based services and/or atomic services.
  • the setting of the default service may also be that the system uses the user's frequently-used services obtained from statistics as the default service, etc. , which is not limited in this embodiment.
  • the scene-based service when the devices are connected to form a hyper terminal, the scene-based service may not be selected first, but one or more scene-based service options are listed. After the user selects a certain scene-based service, the scene The service or the corresponding atomic service switches to the set state.
  • the advantage of this is to fully consider the user's willingness to use, and avoid automatically switching to the wrong service, causing trouble or distress to the user. For example, when connecting a mobile phone to a PC, the user intends to transfer files. If the default service is screen mirroring, the screen of the mobile phone will be mirrored to the PC. At this time, the user needs to switch services, especially if the current PC is being used for other purposes.
  • the screen mirroring service will hinder the display of the presentation document, causing trouble to the user, or the user has private content on the mobile phone and does not want to display it on the PC. If you directly switch to the screen mirroring service, it will cause trouble for the user. Therefore, when the mobile phone is connected to the PC, the scene-based service options can be displayed on the hyperterminal interface, and the user first selects the required scene-based service options and/or atomized service combination options, and then executes switching services.
  • these devices can have the ability or status to perform interactive functions, but this is not limited to the two or more Interaction functions are performed immediately between devices. For example, if the user triggers the audio casting function between the mobile phone and the smart speaker by dragging the device icon. If at this time, the mobile phone does not have an audio playback task or the audio playback task of the mobile phone is suspended, the mobile phone will not immediately send audio data to the smart speaker. However, when the mobile phone has an audio playback task, the mobile phone will send the audio data to be played to the smart speaker, and the smart speaker will play it.
  • the hyperterminal system can analyze the user's usage scene as a sports and health scene based on the current devices that make up the hyperterminal as a mobile phone and a smart watch.
  • the recommended device area 704 can display recommended sports equipment or health monitoring equipment, etc. Such as treadmills, spinning bikes, blood glucose meters, heart rate meters, etc.
  • the device icon in the recommended device area 704 When the user selects (clicks or drags) the device icon in the recommended device area 704, if the device is an associated device detected by the current core device, that is, the device displayed in the device connection status diagram 701, then the device can initiate a connection Join HyperTerminal.
  • the device icon in the recommended device area 704 if the device is not displayed in the device connection status icon 701, it can jump to a page related to the device product, such as introducing the device to the user.
  • Adding these recommended devices can give users a better scene experience, or expand more usage scenarios.
  • the system can also recommend new devices according to the newly formed hyperterminal. Users can choose to add more devices to form a hyper terminal, making the user use scenarios more abundant. For example, a mobile phone is connected to a smart watch to form a hyperterminal. The system recommends devices including a treadmill, and the user then selects the treadmill to connect to the hyperterminal. The system recommends devices including earphones, and the recommended user can listen to music while running. With the addition of more devices, a more complete HyperTerminal ecosystem can be formed.
  • the mobile phone can display the prompt information of the recommended device on the user interface. For example, after detecting that the mobile phone is coordinated with the smart TV, the mobile phone finds that the sound box is also around, so it can display the prompt information, such as "Recommended sound box Sound X Join the hyperterminal, is it allowed?" and give the options "yes” and "no". If the user selects "yes”, the speaker Sound X will be connected to the hyperterminal. If the user selects "no", no other operations will be performed. Or after the prompt message is given, only the option “Yes” will be displayed. If the user selects "Yes”, the speaker Sound X will be connected to the HyperTerminal. If the user does not operate for a certain period of time, such as two seconds, the prompt message will be automatically canceled. , and no other operations are performed.
  • the prompt information such as "Recommended sound box Sound X Join the hyperterminal, is it allowed?" and give the options "yes” and “no”. If the user selects "yes”, the speaker Sound X will be connected
  • the cross-device services or functions that the HyperTerminal can provide include but are not limited to system-level services or functions, and application-level services or functions.
  • system-level services or functions may include but not limited to audio projection, screen projection, etc.
  • application-level services or functions include but not limited to application relay, content sharing, etc.
  • casting sound refers to sending the audio stream played on one electronic device to another electronic device, and the other electronic device plays it.
  • audio projection from a mobile phone to a smart speaker audio projection from a mobile phone to a smart screen with the screen off, screen projection from a mobile phone to a car, etc.
  • Screen projection includes stream projection based on digital living network alliance (DLNA) technology (also known as heterogeneous projection), screen mirroring based on Miracast technology (also known as homologous projection), And screencasting based on other technologies such as AirPlay based.
  • DLNA digital living network alliance
  • Miracast also known as homologous projection
  • Screen projection between a mobile phone and a smart TV/PC/tablet. If the user wants to cast the video or audio played on the mobile phone to other electronic devices, they can perform stream casting. Then, the mobile phone can send the playback address of the video or audio to an electronic device (such as a PC), and the PC plays the corresponding video or audio according to the received playback address. Alternatively, the mobile phone sends the video data or audio data played by itself to the PC, and the PC can directly play the received video data or audio data.
  • DLNA digital living network alliance
  • Miracast also known as homologous projection
  • AirPlay screen projection between a mobile phone and a smart TV/PC/tablet. If
  • the interface displayed on the mobile phone may be different from the content displayed on the PC. If the user wants to cast the display interface on the mobile phone screen to other electronic devices, screen mirroring can be performed. Then, the mobile phone sends the mobile phone interface data to other electronic devices (such as a PC), and the PC displays the mobile phone interface. During the screen casting process, the interface displayed on the mobile phone is the same as that displayed on the PC.
  • Application relay means that one electronic device can relay an application running on another electronic device.
  • Content sharing includes sharing files/photos/videos/audio/text among different electronic devices.
  • application relay between mobile phones and smart TVs/PCs/tablets.
  • the relayed applications are, for example, Changlian application (a video call application), video application, music application, and document application.
  • the devices form a HyperTerminal.
  • the HyperTerminal can judge the usage scenarios based on the device type, device features, product positioning, common functions, device status, current running applications, current device environment, etc., and provide one or more scenarios based on the usage scenarios. service options, atomized service composition options, or interactive function options. Users can quickly select scene-based services and/or atomized services according to their personal needs, without cumbersome decentralized settings. Therefore, it can solve the problem that the settings of interactive functions between electronic devices are scattered and cumbersome, and it is impossible to list rich uses for users. scene problem.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides the scenario-based services and/or atomized services available under the device combination through the user-selected device combination, lists detailed and rich usage scenarios for the user, and guides the user to use the hyper terminal with sufficient functions. Explore more application scenarios and achieve the effect of recommending scenario-based services based on device combinations.
  • the mobile phone when the mobile phone detects that the user clicks and selects the outdoor running option 707 listed in the scene service option area 705 of the user interface 700 , the mobile phone can jump to a page related to outdoor running, as shown in the user interface 800 . Wherein, the outdoor running option 707 can be highlighted when selected.
  • the user interface 800 is a sports and health application page, and you can see that there are sub-options displayed under the sports and health title bar: outdoor running sub-option 801 , indoor running sub-option, heart health sub-option, and vascular health sub-option. Since the user selects the outdoor running option 707 in the user interface 700, the page corresponding to the outdoor running sub-option 801 is currently displayed on the user interface 800, such as a map icon, a user's positioning icon, and a user's exercise route. , Statistical user exercise volume, etc.
  • the smart watch displays an interface related to outdoor running, refer to the smart watch user interface 802 .
  • the user interface 802 of the smart watch may not be consistent with the user interface 800 related to outdoor running of the mobile phone, and exercise data may be shared between the smart watch and the mobile phone.
  • the smart watch user interface 802 can display exercise data such as pace, exercise distance, heart rate, and exercise time detected by the smart watch.
  • Figure 9 shows that the scenario-based service options and recommended devices will change with different device combinations, and the HyperTerminal will provide more suitable scenario-based service options and recommended devices according to different device combinations.
  • the device connection status icon indicates that the mobile phone is connected to the smart TV Vision to form a hyper terminal, and the mobile phone icon and the smart TV Vision icon are adsorbed together in the reference indication area 901, and Under the title of HyperTerminal, it states "Synergy with Vision".
  • the scene-based service option area 903 includes scene-based service options such as multi-screen collaboration, screen extension, multi-screen conference, and somatosensory games.
  • the recommended device area 902 includes device icons for speakers, laptops, and gamepads. The above scenario-based service options and recommended device options are based on the recommended options obtained based on the fact that the devices included in the hyper terminal are mobile phones and Smart TV Vision.
  • the user interface 910 can be displayed.
  • the device connection status icon indicates that the mobile phone is connected to the smart TV Vision and the speaker Sound X to form a super terminal.
  • the HyperTerminal it says "Synergy with Vision and Sound X”.
  • the scene-based service option area 913 includes scene-based service options such as home theater, motion-sensing games, enjoying karaoke, and multi-screen conference.
  • the recommended device area 912 includes device icons for laptops and gamepads.
  • the above scenario-based service options and recommended equipment options are based on the recommended options obtained from the mobile phone, smart TV Vision, and speaker Sound X, which are included in the hyperterminal.
  • the HyperTerminal system can infer that the combination of mobile phone, smart TV Vision, and speaker Sound X is more entertainment-oriented, so it will give priority to recommending entertainment-oriented scene services.
  • one or more atomic service combinations can be displayed, as shown in the user interface 1000 and user interface 1010 shown in Figure 10, and the user can choose different atomic services by different devices supply.
  • a service setting window 1001 is displayed in the user interface 1000, and multiple atomized service options are displayed in the service setting window 1001, such as screen display, sound output, sound input, camera, etc. shown in the user interface 1000.
  • the screen display service/function is provided by the smart TV Vision
  • the sound output service/function is provided by the smart speaker Sound X
  • the sound input service/function is provided by the mobile phone HuaWei P50
  • the camera service/function is provided by the mobile phone HuaWei P50, etc.
  • the option bar 1002 corresponding to the sound output includes a sound output service/function identifier, and the icon and name of the device smart speaker Sound X that currently provides the sound output service/function.
  • the hyper terminal supports users to personalize the atomic service combination, and the user can manually modify the atomic service combination according to personal preferences or actual conditions, and adjust a certain atomic service to be provided by other devices. For example, the user may choose to switch the audio playback service provided by the mobile phone to the audio playback service provided by the smart speaker.
  • the user wants to change the device providing the service, he can click on the control 1003 and the mobile phone can display the user interface 1010 .
  • the option bar 1012 corresponding to the sound output is expanded to display multiple device options, namely the mobile phone HuaWei P50, the smart TV Vision, and the speaker Sound X in the hyperterminal.
  • the user can click the selected control 1013 corresponding to the right side of the device name to confirm that the device provides the sound output service/function.
  • the hyperterminal system can analyze the optimal atomic service combination according to the device characteristics of different device types, and allocate different devices to carry different services.
  • a smart TV, a smart speaker, and a mobile phone form a super terminal.
  • the smart TV has a larger screen, and the user has a better visual viewing experience and is more suitable for watching videos. Therefore, it is preferred to set the smart TV to provide display functions.
  • the smart speaker has strong audio output capability, better speaker effect, and is more suitable for playing audio, so it is preferred to set the smart speaker to provide the audio output function.
  • the mobile phone is relatively light, easy for the user to grasp, and the microphone is convenient for listening to the sound, so it is preferred to set the mobile phone to provide audio input and camera shooting functions.
  • it can also be based on the user's frequently used service combination, or the default service combination set by the user, or the service combination that is most suitable for the scene based on life cognition, or obtain the most frequently used service combination in the scene from the server.
  • Service combination, etc. automatically set the atomic service combination in this scenario, saving users from tedious selection operations.
  • a blank option may also be set in the service setting window 1011, that is, the atomized service is not provided by any device.
  • corresponding prompt information may be displayed on the mobile phone interface to remind the user of the device that can provide the best atomization service, for example, the current speaker is the best device for playing audio.
  • the user when the user completes the setting, the user can slide down the service setting window, and then return to the previous interface.
  • Fig. 11, Fig. 12, Fig. 13A, Fig. 13B, Fig. 13C, and Fig. 13D show other interaction modes and schematic interfaces for selecting scene-based service options.
  • the scene-based service options can be displayed in the form of floating controls, and different scene-based service options correspond to different areas. convenient.
  • the super terminal interface can display a circular floating area 1101 with the mobile phone as the center.
  • the circular floating area 1101 can be divided into multiple areas, and each area corresponds to a A scenario-based service option.
  • the circular floating area 1101 is divided into four areas, corresponding to scene-based service options: outdoor running, indoor running, heart health, and blood vessel health.
  • the user wants to select a scene-based service option, such as the outdoor running service option
  • the user can drag the smart watch icon to the area corresponding to the outdoor running service option, and then drag along the direction inside the area corresponding to the outdoor running service option, close to the
  • the trajectory of the user's finger can refer to the schematic trajectory in the user interface 1100 .
  • the smart watch icon reaches the adsorption area
  • the user releases the finger
  • the circular floating area 1101 does not need to be divided into blocks, and the user will select the same scene-based service when approaching the mobile phone icon from any direction.
  • the selected scene-based service option can be displayed as highlighted, as shown in Figure 11, the area corresponding to the outdoor running service option is displayed as highlighted.
  • One operation in Figure 11 is equivalent to the two operations in Figure 6 and Figure 8, that is, one user operation in Figure 11 includes the two functions of associating the associated device to the core device and selecting the scene-based service, which improves the efficiency of user operations .
  • the scene-based service options displayed in the floating area may also have a recommended order, and this embodiment does not limit the display manner of the recommended order of the scene-based service options.
  • this embodiment does not limit the display manner of the recommended order of the scene-based service options. For example, take four scene-based service options corresponding to four areas as an example. Taking the center as the origin, the first quadrant is called area A, the second quadrant is called area B, the third quadrant is called area C, and the third quadrant is called area C.
  • the four-quadrant orientation is called zone D.
  • the recommended order of scenario-based service options is outdoor running, indoor running, heart health, and vascular health, and the corresponding areas can be area A, area B, area C, and area D; or, area B, area A, area C, area D; or, area B, area C, area A, area D; or, area B, area A, area D, area C; or, area A, area B, area D, area C; or, area B, area C, area D, area A; or, area A, area D, area B, area C; or, area A, area D, area C, area B; etc.
  • this embodiment is not limited, and the details can be determined according to the actual situation Settings, such as settings based on the user's operating habits, common point area, etc.
  • FIG. 12 shows another user interaction operation.
  • the hyper terminal interface can display a circular floating area 1201 centered on the mobile phone, and the circular floating area 1201 can be Divided into multiple areas, each area corresponds to a scenario-based service option.
  • the circular floating area 1201 is divided into four areas, corresponding to scene-based service options: outdoor running, indoor running, heart health, and blood vessel health.
  • the user wants to select a scene-based service option, such as the outdoor running service option
  • the user can drag the smart watch icon to the area corresponding to the outdoor running service option, and then release the finger, which means that the outdoor running service option is selected, and the outdoor running service option is selected.
  • the corresponding service starts, and the mobile phone jumps to display the outdoor running interface shown in the user interface 800 .
  • the trajectory of the user's finger can refer to the schematic trajectory in the user interface 1200 .
  • the circular floating area 1201 does not need to be divided into blocks, and the user drags the device icon to any position in the floating area 1201 and releases the icon to select the same scene-based service.
  • the selected scenario-based service option can be displayed as highlighted, as shown in Figure 12, the area corresponding to the outdoor running service option is displayed as highlighted.
  • this embodiment does not limit the display manner of the recommendation ranking of the scenario-based service options.
  • the interaction mode shown in FIG. 12 is easier for the user to operate, and the probability of wrong selection is lower.
  • FIG. 11 and FIG. 12 are only schematic diagrams. In other embodiments, the areas representing scene-based service options may also be in other forms.
  • the scene-based service option area is a square floating area.
  • the user interface 1300 displays a mobile phone as the center, and a square floating area 1301 is divided into four areas, corresponding to scene-based service options: outdoor running, indoor running, heart health, and blood vessel health.
  • the user wants to choose the outdoor running service, he can drag the smart watch icon to the area corresponding to the outdoor running service option in the interactive mode shown in Figure 11, and then drag along the direction inside the area corresponding to the outdoor running service option, close to the mobile phone icon, when the smart watch icon reaches the adsorption area, the user releases the finger, the service corresponding to the outdoor running starts, and the mobile phone jumps to display the outdoor running interface shown in the user interface 800 .
  • the interaction method shown in Figure 12 can also be used. The user drags the smart watch icon to the area corresponding to the outdoor running service option, and then releases the finger, which means that the outdoor running service option is selected, the service corresponding to outdoor running starts, and the mobile phone jumps.
  • the selected scene-based service option may be highlighted, for example, the area corresponding to the outdoor running service option shown in Figure 13A is highlighted.
  • this embodiment does not limit the display manner of the recommendation ranking of the scenario-based service options.
  • the user interface 1310 shown in FIG. 13B may not display the mobile phone icon in the center, but after the user selects the smart watch icon, the displayed circular floating area 1311 includes only Multiple scenario-based service options.
  • the circular floating area 1311 shown in FIG. 13B is divided into four areas, corresponding to scene-based service options: outdoor running, indoor running, heart health, and blood vessel health.
  • this embodiment does not limit the display manner of the recommendation ranking of the scenario-based service options.
  • the user interface 1320 in Figure 13C shows another display style.
  • the mobile phone displays a circular floating area 1321.
  • the circular floating area 1321 includes a plurality of ring-shaped areas, and each ring The shape area corresponds to a scenario-based service option.
  • the circular floating area 1321 has four circular areas, corresponding to scene-based service options: outdoor running, indoor running, heart health, and blood vessel health.
  • this embodiment does not limit the display manner of the recommendation ranking of the scenario-based service options.
  • the scenario-based service options that are recommended with higher priority are displayed closer to the inner ring.
  • the ring with a smaller diameter is called the inner ring relative to the ring with a larger diameter, or the ring that is closer to the center of the circle is the inner ring.
  • the ring such as the outdoor running service option being the first recommended scenario-based service option, may be displayed in the innermost circle.
  • the indoor running service option is the second recommended scenario-based service option, and is displayed in the circle of the second inner ring.
  • the heart health service option is the third recommended scenario-based service option, displayed in the third inner circle.
  • the vascular health service option is the fourth recommended scenario-based service option, displayed in the outermost circle.
  • the user interface 1330 in Figure 13D shows another display style.
  • the mobile phone displays a fan-shaped floating area 1331.
  • the circular floating area 1331 includes multiple fan-shaped ring areas, and each fan-shaped ring area Corresponds to a scenario-based service option.
  • the fan-shaped floating area 1331 shown in FIG. 13D has four fan-ring areas, corresponding to scene-based service options: outdoor running, indoor running, heart health, and blood vessel health.
  • the user wants to choose the outdoor running service, he can drag the selected smart watch icon to the area corresponding to the outdoor running service option, the area corresponding to the outdoor running service option will be highlighted, and then release the finger, which means that the outdoor running service is selected
  • the service corresponding to outdoor running starts, and the mobile phone jumps to display the outdoor running interface shown in the user interface 800 .
  • the fan-shaped floating area 1331 is a quarter-circle fan-shaped area with the center of the circle as the lower right corner. This is considering that the user often controls the mobile phone with the right hand. For the convenience of the user, this design is more reasonable .
  • the fan-shaped floating area 1331 may also be a quarter-circle fan-shaped area with the center of the circle as the lower left corner, which is convenient for left-handed users to manipulate.
  • the mobile phone can switch different display control styles according to the user's favorite hand as the right hand or left hand, or the mobile phone can determine whether the user is currently using the left hand or the right hand when the user controls the mobile phone, and then confirm the display style of the floating control, etc. .
  • this embodiment does not limit the display manner of the recommendation ranking of the scenario-based service options.
  • the scene-based service options that are recommended with higher priority are displayed closer to the inner ring, which is referred to here as the fan that is closer to the center of the circle.
  • the ring is relatively an inner ring, or the fan ring with a smaller radius is relatively an inner ring.
  • the outdoor running service option is the first recommended scenario-based service option, it may be displayed in the innermost fan ring.
  • the indoor running service option is the second recommended scenario-based service option, which is displayed in the fan ring of the second inner ring.
  • the heart health service option is the third recommended scenario-based service option, which is displayed in the fan ring of the third inner ring.
  • the vascular health service option is the fourth recommended scenario-based service option, displayed in the outermost fan ring.
  • the interactive orientation information can also be used as an input parameter, and the input of different orientation information can correspond to different feedbacks.
  • the user drags the icon of the associated device to attach and absorb it from the left or right side or the middle area of the mobile phone icon, which will produce different effects.
  • the screen of the mobile phone will be projected on the right side of the screen of the associated device; if the user drags the icon of the associated device from the mobile phone If the right area of the icon fits and sticks together, the screen of the mobile phone will be projected on the left side of the screen of the associated device; Cast full screen on the associated device screen.
  • the dragging directions of the attracting device icon and the adsorbed device icon are exchanged, and the service or interactive function performed by them is the same.
  • the service feedback will be different, which is the same as the effect described in the previous embodiment, that is, if the user drags the mobile phone icon Paste from the right area of the associated device icon and stick together, then the mobile phone screen will be projected on the right side of the associated device screen; if the user drags the mobile phone icon to paste it from the left area of the associated device icon, the adsorption together, the screen of the mobile phone will be projected on the left side of the screen of the associated device; if the user drags the icon of the mobile phone to the middle area of the icon of the associated device and snaps them together, the screen of the mobile phone will be projected in full screen on the screen of the associated device .
  • the effect displayed if the user drags the mobile phone icon Paste from the right area of the associated device icon and stick together, then the mobile phone screen will be projected on the right side of the associated device screen; if the
  • different sound channels can be associated with different orientations. Assuming that the user has two or more speakers, the user drags the icon of the first speaker to fit it from the left area of the phone icon and sticks it together, then the first speaker can provide the audio output of the left channel; the user drags The second speaker icon is pasted from the right area of the mobile phone icon and absorbed together, then the second speaker can provide the audio output of the right channel.
  • the arrangement of other multi-channels is the same.
  • the dragging directions of the attracting device icon and the adsorbed device icon are exchanged, and the services or interactive functions executed by them may be different.
  • the device as the adsorbing party or as the adsorbed party indicates that the device is the sender or receiver of the data.
  • the data transmission direction is stipulated that the adsorbing device sends data streams to the adsorbed device.
  • the corresponding service is to send the PC file to the mobile phone; if you press and hold the mobile phone icon and drag to attach to the PC icon, the corresponding The service is to send files from the phone to the PC.
  • the scenario-based services triggered by the device icon as the absorber or the absorber can also be different. For example, if you press and hold the PC icon and drag it to attach to the mobile phone icon, the triggered service is to send the files of the PC to the mobile phone; Screen mirroring to the PC screen.
  • Figure 15, Figure 16, and Figure 17 describe that when the user drags the MateBook icon of the laptop computer close to the icon of the mobile phone to establish a multi-screen collaborative connection, different orientations and different areas will have different adsorption effects.
  • the user drags the MateBook icon of the notebook computer to fit it from the left area 1501 of the mobile phone icon.
  • a prompt " Screen on the right” prompts the user to choose this option to mirror the phone screen on the right side of the laptop screen.
  • the icon of the mobile phone can be attached to the icon of the notebook computer MateBook. It can be seen that, on the laptop computer screen, the mobile phone display interface 1502 is projected on the right side of the laptop computer display interface.
  • the user drags the MateBook icon of the notebook computer to fit it from the right area 1601 of the mobile phone icon.
  • the MateBook icon of the notebook computer is located in the right area 1601, a prompt " Screen on the left”, prompting the user to choose this option to mirror the mobile phone screen on the left side of the laptop screen.
  • the icon of the mobile phone can be attached to the icon of the notebook computer MateBook. It can be seen that, on the laptop computer screen, the mobile phone display interface 1602 will be projected on the left side of the laptop computer display interface.
  • the user drags the icon of the notebook computer MateBook to the middle area 1701 of the mobile phone icon. ", prompting the user to select this option will make the phone fill the full screen and display it on the laptop screen.
  • the icon of the mobile phone can be adsorbed or overlapped with the icon of the notebook computer MateBook. It can be seen that, on the laptop computer screen, the display interface 1702 of the mobile phone will be displayed in full-screen projection on the laptop computer.
  • the contents of the interfaces displayed by the core device and the associated device may be the same or different.
  • the core device and the associated device display different interface content
  • the core device and the associated device can be used together, and the displayed interfaces are related instead of displaying irrelevant content.
  • the mobile phone is connected to the smart TV, and the scene service area displays service options such as multi-screen collaboration, home theater, multi-screen conference, and somatosensory games.
  • the user selects the home theater service option 1801, and the mobile phone and the smart TV can display a page related to the home theater service.
  • the smart TV plays a video, and the video screen is displayed on the interface 1806, and the current application title "Home Theater” is displayed on the top of the video screen, as well as the prompt "This device has been coordinated with HuaWei P50", weather, time wait.
  • the mobile phone user interface 1810 displays the remote control interface of the home theater application.
  • the user interface 1810 displays the title "Home Theater”, a prompt 1802 "This device has been coordinated with Vision, click to remotely control Vision", a remote control operation area 1803, and a switching control 1804 wait.
  • the remote control operation area 1803 can be used for the user to control the smart TV, and can include homepage control, switch control, volume up control, volume down control, return control, menu control, voice control, confirmation control, up, down, left, and right direction controls, etc.
  • the switching control 1804 is used to switch between the video screen and the remote control interface on the mobile phone interface, and the switching control 1804 prompts "switch to the display screen" on the remote control interface.
  • the switching control 1804 prompts “switch to the display screen" on the remote control interface.
  • FIG. 19 when the user clicks on the switch control 1804 , the mobile phone can display a video image 1901 and a switch control 1902 on the user interface 1900 .
  • the switching control 1902 on the video playback interface of the mobile phone prompts “Switch to the remote control interface”. If the user clicks the switching control 1902, the mobile phone can return to display the remote control interface, that is, the user interface 1810 .
  • some functions of the core device can be migrated to the associated device, and the associated device can provide services, and the core device can hide the service in the background and run other applications in the foreground.
  • the core device can hide the service in the background and run other applications in the foreground. For example, after a mobile phone and a smart TV are coordinated, the service of playing video is provided by the smart TV, and the user can hide the service in the background, open the chat application in the foreground, and watch the video while chatting.
  • the user interfaces described above in FIG. 4 to FIG. 19 are only exemplary interfaces for assisting readers in understanding the technical solutions described in the present application, and do not limit the user interfaces in other embodiments of the present application. In other embodiments, more or fewer user interfaces may be added or removed, or more or fewer controls may be added or removed, or different human-computer interaction operations may be designed according to actual conditions, so that the user interface is more suitable for the user experience.
  • the following method embodiments may be applied in a communication system composed of multiple devices, such as the aforementioned communication system 10 .
  • the communication system may also be referred to as a HyperTerminal.
  • These multiple electronic devices can specifically be mobile phones, tablet computers, notebook computers, personal computers (personal computers, PCs), smart TVs (also called smart screens, large screens, etc.), or wearable devices such as smart watches and smart bracelets.
  • Equipment this application does not limit the type of equipment.
  • a communication connection is established between the core device and the associated device, through which communication can be performed to transmit data or instructions.
  • the communication connection may be a wired connection or a wireless connection, or a combination of several connection methods, which is not limited in this embodiment.
  • Each terminal device in the communication system can be equipped with system, system, system, HarmonyOS or other types of operating systems, the operating systems of each terminal device in the communication system may be the same or different, which is not limited in this application.
  • each terminal in the communication system is equipped with HarmonyOS, so the communication system may be called a HarmonyOS super virtual device (super virtual device), or a HarmonyOS super terminal.
  • the core device/central device (such as a mobile phone) is the control center of the hyperterminal system, carrying functions such as device management, service management, and service scheduling, and can be connected with one or more other associated devices (such as a notebook computer, PCs, tablets, smart watches, smart TVs, etc.) to connect and collaborate, to provide users with a variety of scenario-based services and a variety of atomized service combinations.
  • a hyper terminal application is installed on the core device or the associated device, so as to facilitate the user to manage each terminal device in the hyper terminal system.
  • the user can interact on any device installed with the HyperTerminal application.
  • the instructions and data entered by the user in the HyperTerminal application on any device can be transferred to other devices in the HyperTerminal system synchronously.
  • FIG. 20 is a flow chart of the device interaction method provided in this embodiment, which specifically includes the following steps:
  • the first device displays a first interface, where the first interface includes a first control indicating the first device and a second control indicating a second device.
  • the first control is a device option indicating the first device
  • the second control is a device option indicating the second device.
  • the first device may be the aforementioned core device
  • the second device may be the aforementioned associated device
  • the second device is a peripheral device discovered by the first device.
  • the first interface is the hyper terminal interactive interface, and the user can control and manage each device in the hyper terminal system through user operations acting on the first interface.
  • This embodiment does not impose any limitation on the presentation form of the hyper terminal interactive interface. For one form of expression, reference may be made to the embodiment described in FIG. 5 .
  • the first control is an icon indicating the core device, such as the mobile phone icon shown in FIG. 5 .
  • the second control is an icon indicating an associated device, such as the smart watch icon shown in FIG. 5 .
  • a device connection status diagram may be displayed in the hyperterminal interactive interface.
  • the center of the device connection status diagram is a core device icon surrounded by one or more associated device icons.
  • the device connection state diagram may indicate the connection relationship, relative position relationship, signal strength relationship and the like between the core device and the associated device.
  • connection relationship can be referred to as shown in Figure 7.
  • the icon of the mobile phone and the icon of the smart watch are attached together, indicating that the mobile phone and the smart watch are connected and can work together to provide system-level services.
  • the smart bracelet icon is free from the periphery of the mobile phone icon, and is not attached to, overlapped or attached to the mobile phone icon, but separated, indicating that the mobile phone and the smart bracelet have not established a connection.
  • the relative position of the associated device icon and the core device icon displayed in the device connection status diagram may indicate the positional relationship between the associated device and the core device in real space, such as relative orientation information, relative distance information, etc. It is helpful for users to quickly find and distinguish each electronic device.
  • the orientation of the core device and the associated device in the real space is consistent with the orientation of the core device icon and the associated device icon in the device connection status diagram.
  • the farther the associated device is from the core device in the real space the farther the distance between the associated device icon and the core device icon displayed on the interface is.
  • the mobile phone can obtain the orientation and measured distance of the directional information carried by the associated device based on UWB technology, and obtain the spatial mapping relationship between the associated device and the mobile phone in real space.
  • the distance between the icon of the associated device and the icon of the core device in the interface may indicate the signal strength of the associated device detected by the core device, such as the Bluetooth signal strength or the WiFi signal strength. The stronger the signal strength of the associated device, the closer the distance between the associated device icon and the core device icon displayed on the interface.
  • the first device detects a first user operation.
  • the first user operation of selecting the second device can be implemented. This embodiment does not impose any limitation on the specific manner of the first user's operation.
  • the first user operation is for the user to associate the first device with the second device.
  • the first user operation may be a user operation acting on the second control.
  • the user presses and holds the second control and drags the second control close to the first control.
  • the designated area may be a circular area centered on the first control and having a radius of the first radius distance.
  • the user can select the smart watch icon 506 corresponding to the smart watch on the super terminal interface, and drag the smart watch icon 506 close to the mobile phone icon 505, when the smart watch icon 506 and the mobile phone icon 505 When the distance between them is less than or equal to the second distance (R2 as shown in Figure 6), or, when the smart watch icon 506 enters the specified area (in Figure 6, it is an annular area formed by the nearest circle around the mobile phone icon, that is, The mobile phone icon 505 is the center and the radius is a circular area of R), and the user releases the finger to display the device connection status diagram 701 shown in FIG.
  • the selected device icon may change its position along with the trajectory of the user's finger dragging on the screen.
  • This embodiment does not limit the finger movement trajectory when the user drags the device icon, and the user's dragging trajectory may be any curve.
  • the mobile phone can detect the current association between the associated device icon and the mobile phone. Whether the distance between the icons is less than or equal to a certain distance, such as the second distance, if so, the associated device icon and the mobile phone icon are adsorbed together.
  • the associated device icon moves along with the track of the user's finger.
  • the selected device icon may not change its position along with the dragging track of the user's finger on the screen. For example, when the user selects an associated device icon, and the user slides a finger on the screen for a certain distance or stays on a certain position on the screen for a second preset time, the mobile phone can determine the distance between the current position of the user's finger and the mobile phone icon Whether it is less than or equal to a certain distance, such as the second distance, if so, the associated device icon and the mobile phone icon are attracted together. The associated device icon does not move when the user's finger is moved.
  • the first user operation may be that the user clicks the second control in an unconnected state, or clicks the first control and the second control at the same time, which may trigger the connection between the second device and the first device.
  • the interface shows that the icon of the second device is attracted to the icon of the first device.
  • the first user operation may also be a user operation acting on the first control, for example, the user presses and holds the first control and drags the first control close to the second control, and when the first control reaches the specified When releasing the first control in the region, the first control and the second control can also be adsorbed together.
  • the first user operation may also be a user operation of selecting the second control, such as pressing and holding the second control, refer to Figure 11, Figure 12, Figure 13A, Figure 13B, Figure 13C, Figure 13D depicts the embodiment.
  • the first device displays a second interface
  • the second interface displays one or more service options of scenario-based services, where the scenario-based services can be provided by the cooperation of the first device and the second device services.
  • the second interface displays that the first control is connected to the second control.
  • the second control may be displayed on the second interface to be adsorbed together with the first control.
  • the two device icons being attracted together may refer to that the edges of the icons corresponding to the two devices are tangent, or the two device icons being adsorbed together may also refer to that the two device icons are completely or partially overlapped. In this embodiment, no special limitation is imposed on the form of adsorption.
  • the second control in the second interface may have a different form from the second control in the first interface.
  • the smart watch icon 702 that has been connected to a mobile phone to form a hyperterminal can display a distinctive logo, so as to be easily distinguished from the associated device icon in an unconnected state.
  • the smart watch icon 702 is displayed in a dark filled form, indicating that the smart watch is connected to the mobile phone.
  • the size of the smart watch icon 702 is smaller than that of the smart watch icon 506 when it is not connected.
  • the diameter of the round icon of the smart watch icon 702 is R2 is adsorbed on the edge of the mobile phone icon 505 , and the smart watch icon 702 is tangent to the edge of the mobile phone icon 505 .
  • a floating control is displayed on the second interface, and the floating control has one or more areas, and each area corresponds to a scenario-based service option.
  • the floating control is represented as multiple circular areas, or multiple rectangular areas, or multiple fan-shaped areas, or multiple fan-shaped ring areas, or multiple circular ring-shaped areas, or multiple polygonal areas.
  • the first control may or may not be displayed. This embodiment does not limit the layout of the floating control.
  • a floating control is displayed in the second interface.
  • Controls can be divided into one or more areas, each area corresponds to a scene-based service option, and different scene-based service options correspond to different areas. This way of interaction is more interesting, more intuitive, and the interface is more concise.
  • This embodiment does not limit the shape of the floating control, nor does it limit the way of dividing regions.
  • the super terminal interface can display a circular floating area 1101 with the mobile phone as the center.
  • the circular floating area 1101 can be divided into multiple areas, and each area corresponds to A scenario-based service option.
  • the circular floating area 1101 is divided into four areas, corresponding to scene-based service options: outdoor running, indoor running, heart health, and blood vessel health.
  • scenario-based service options are displayed on the second interface, and the scenario-based service mentioned here is a service that can be provided by the first device and the second device in cooperation.
  • the scenario-based service refers to a functional service based on a usage scenario, which is a collection of multiple functions or services that can be provided for a specific scenario.
  • a scene service can be supported by one or more atom services.
  • the service options of the scene-based service displayed on the second interface may be the scene-based service provided by the current hyper terminal system, that is, the combination of the first device and the second device, on the first device or on the second device.
  • a certain scenario-based service may be based on a certain same application, and different devices provide different atomic capabilities under the application service.
  • the scenario-based service is actually provided by the same service provider.
  • both the mobile phone and the smart watch are installed with sports and health applications. Both jump to the outdoor running service in the sports and health application.
  • the smart watch can provide positioning services and statistical user sports data services.
  • the mobile phone can provide services such as displaying the user's movement track.
  • different devices may display different interfaces and provide different services.
  • Scenario-based services can be based on the type of core device and/or associated devices, device features, product positioning, device usage, collaborative services that the device can provide, the current environment of the device, the operating status of the device, and the most recently used Based on the application, the frequency of the user using the scenario-based service, the currently running application, the sorting or default options of the scenario-based service set by the user, etc., the scenario-based service options obtained after comprehensive consideration are displayed on the user interface, which is convenient for the user to quickly Start the related service or function.
  • the service options of the scenario-based service with a higher probability of being selected by the user calculated by the hyperterminal system are recommended and displayed with higher priority.
  • the HyperTerminal can recommend scenario-based services based on device type, product positioning, and device usage. For example, the combination of a mobile phone and a smart watch is often used to count exercise, so the HyperTerminal system is based on the device type, device Uses and common collaborative work content can be classified as sports and health scenarios for the combination of mobile phones and smart watches. Scenario-based service options that can be provided in sports and health scenarios include outdoor running, indoor running, heart health, and vascular health.
  • different device types have different device characteristics.
  • smart TVs have larger screens, which provide users with a better visual viewing experience and are more suitable for watching videos; smart speakers have strong audio output capabilities and better speaker effects. It is more suitable for playing audio; the earphone is small in size, easy to carry, does not need to be placed outside, does not disturb people around, and can also have a noise reduction effect, shielding external environmental noise, suitable for listening to audio in public places, such as talking in public places, listening to music, etc.; Smart watches and smart bracelets can measure the user's exercise data or heart rate and other health information more accurately than mobile phones; laptops have powerful processing capabilities and are more suitable for office work.
  • the device type and device features will not be described in detail here, and the above examples do not limit other embodiments.
  • the probability of each scenario-based service option being selected can be calculated according to the user's recent use frequency of different collaborative services or the environment in which the current device is detected.
  • the scenario-based service options that are estimated to be selected with a higher probability are displayed first.
  • the hyper terminal system can display the options with high usage rate in the front according to the usage frequency of various scenario-based service options by users within a certain period of time according to the statistics.
  • the certain time can be all the time in history, or a certain period of time, such as the last three months. The higher the historical usage rate of the scenario-based service option, the higher the display.
  • the core device or the associated device may detect the environment where the current device is located, and sort the scenario-based service options according to the environment. If the core device or associated device detects that the user's environment is outdoors, it will give priority to recommending outdoor-related service options, such as outdoor running. If the core device or associated device detects that the user's environment is indoors, it will give priority to recommending indoor related service options, such as indoor running.
  • This embodiment does not limit the method of detecting the user's environment. For example, the environment can be judged according to the current positioning information of the device; or the camera can be used to collect photos of the current environment, or ultrasonic waves, infrared rays, etc. size to determine the current user's environment.
  • the HyperTerminal system can also determine the environment or scene where the device is located according to the application recently opened or used by the user, or the currently running application, and then recommend scene-based service options. For example, when a mobile phone and a smart TV form a super terminal, if it is detected that the application currently running on the mobile phone is an office presentation application, then the multi-screen collaborative service option can be recommended first; or, if it is detected that the application currently running on the mobile phone is a video application, then the Recommend home theater service options; or, when it is detected that the webpage browsed by the user is a game-related webpage, preferentially recommend game entertainment-related service options, etc.
  • the hyperterminal system can also recommend scene-based services according to the running status of the equipment. For example, when a mobile phone is connected to a smart TV to form a super terminal, if it is detected that the smart TV is in the on-screen state, then the scene-based service is recommended as screen mirroring; if the smart TV is detected to be off-screen, the scene-based service is recommended as Casting service.
  • the HyperTerminal system may include a first database, the first database records one or more scenario-based services supported by one or more device combinations, the device combination includes the first device and The associated second device constitutes a device combination, and the first scenario-based service is a scenario-based service queried from the first database.
  • the first database can be stored locally or on a cloud server.
  • the scenario-based service is determined by one or more of the following parameters: device type of device combination, device features, product positioning, device usage, environment or scenario of the device, status of the device, recently run applications, etc.
  • the hyperterminal system may include a second database, the second database records one or more scenario-based services supported by one or more atomic service combinations, and the first scenario-based service is Scenario-based services queried from the second database.
  • the second database can be stored locally or on a cloud server.
  • the atomic service combination includes an atomic service combination composed of atomic capabilities of the first device and its associated second device.
  • the atomic capability includes one or more of the following: audio output capability, audio input capability, display capability, camera capability, touch input capability, keyboard and mouse input capability, etc.
  • the audio output capability may include whether the device supports mono or multi-channel, supported sound effects, supported frequency response range, noise reduction capability, audio analysis capability, etc.
  • the audio input capability may include receiving Acoustic range, noise reduction capability, etc.
  • display capability may include the device’s screen size, display resolution parameters, refresh rate, color expressiveness, etc.
  • camera capability may include the device’s camera type, shooting pixels, night scene shooting capability, and image adjustment capability, etc.
  • touch input capability, keyboard and mouse input capability refer to whether the device can support touch input or keyboard and mouse input, etc.
  • the layouts of the floating controls are different, and the sequence of the recommended scene-based services is also different.
  • the shape of the floating control is circular or fan-shaped, where multiple circular areas or fan-shaped areas respectively indicate multiple scene-based services, the closer to the center of the circle
  • the scene-based service indicated by the ring-shaped area or fan-shaped area of is the recommended scene-based service with higher priority.
  • the shape of the floating control is a circle or a rectangle, and the circle or rectangle is divided into four areas, and the orientation of the first quadrant is the area A, the orientation of the second quadrant is area B, the orientation of the third quadrant is area C, and the orientation of the fourth quadrant is area D.
  • the recommended order of scenario-based service options is scenario-based service option A, scenario-based service option B, scenario-based service option C.
  • Scenario-based service option D the areas respectively placed are area B, area A, area C, area D, or area B, area C, area A, area D, or area A, area D, area B, Area C, or area A, area B, area D, area C, or area B, area A, area D, area C, or area A, area B, area C, area D.
  • scenario-based service options are not static, and the hyper terminal system can continuously update, expand or refine more scenario-based service options, which are not limited in this embodiment, and can be changed according to actual conditions.
  • the user can customize and add scene-based services, for example, the user sets a name for a usage scene and associates the scene with other application services or system services.
  • the newly added scenario-based service option is displayed in parallel with other scenario-based service options on the HyperTerminal interface.
  • the hyperterminal system may comprehensively consider one or more of the above factors and reasonably recommend scene-based service options.
  • a certain scenario-based service when the devices are connected to form a hyper terminal, a certain scenario-based service may be automatically selected as a default service. For example, set the first-ranked scenario-based service option in the scenario-based service option area as the default service.
  • each device When devices are connected to form a hyper terminal, each device will be configured according to the atomic service combination corresponding to the scenario-based service by default. If the user wants to choose other scenario-based services, he can choose other scenario-based service options. Setting the default scene-based service can facilitate the seamless switching of services on devices and save user operations to a certain extent. For example, when the headset is connected to the mobile phone, the default service setting is that the headset provides audio output and audio input functions.
  • the setting of the default service may be a default service selected by the user, including scenario-based services and/or atomic services.
  • the setting of the default service may also be that the system uses the user's frequently-used services obtained from statistics as the default service, etc. , which is not limited in this embodiment.
  • the scene-based service when the devices are connected to form a hyper terminal, the scene-based service may not be selected first, but one or more scene-based service options are listed. After the user selects a certain scene-based service, the scene The service or the corresponding atomic service switches to the set state.
  • the advantage of this is to fully consider the user's willingness to use, and avoid automatically switching to the wrong service, causing trouble or distress to the user. For example, when connecting a mobile phone to a PC, the user intends to transfer files. If the default service is screen mirroring, the screen of the mobile phone will be mirrored to the PC. At this time, the user needs to switch services, especially if the current PC is being used for other purposes.
  • the screen mirroring service will hinder the display of the presentation document, causing trouble to the user, or the user has private content on the mobile phone and does not want to display it on the PC. If you directly switch to the screen mirroring service, it will cause trouble for the user. Therefore, when the mobile phone is connected to the PC, the scene-based service options can be displayed on the hyperterminal interface, and the user first selects the required scene-based service options and/or atomized service combination options, and then executes switching services.
  • these devices can have the ability or status to perform interactive functions, but this is not limited to the two or more Interaction functions are performed immediately between devices. For example, if the user triggers the audio casting function between the mobile phone and the smart speaker by dragging the device icon. If at this time, the mobile phone does not have an audio playback task or the audio playback task of the mobile phone is suspended, the mobile phone will not immediately send audio data to the smart speaker. However, when the mobile phone has an audio playback task, the mobile phone will send the audio data to be played to the smart speaker, and the smart speaker will play it.
  • a recommended associated device may also be displayed, which may also be called a third device.
  • the HyperTerminal system can also analyze the current scenario based on the type of devices currently forming the HyperTerminal system, device features, product positioning, device usage, device environment or scene, device status, and recently running applications, and list recommendations to users. Other devices suitable for the current scene to help users obtain a better scene experience; or speculate on more scalable usage scenarios, and then list and recommend other devices to the user. If the user adopts the device recommended by the system, it can further expand more, Richer usage scenarios.
  • the third device is a device discovered by the first device, and the device option of the third device is clicked, and the first device displays the service options of the second scenario-based service.
  • the service options of the second scenario-based service may be that some scenario-based service options are added on the basis of the service options of the first scenario-based service, or the service options of the second scenario-based service are re-updated scenario-based services, It is different from the service options of the first scenario-based service.
  • the third device is not the device discovered by the first device. Click the device option of the third device, and the first device will jump to display the fifth interface.
  • the fifth interface can be the purchase interface of the third device, and the fifth interface includes A plurality of item options, the plurality of item options come from multiple sources, the plurality of item options includes an item option indicative of a third device.
  • a mobile phone when a mobile phone is coordinated with a smart TV, wireless microphones, wireless game controllers and other equipment can be recommended to users, and scene-based services such as karaoke and games can be expanded correspondingly.
  • scene-based services such as karaoke and games
  • the system can also recommend new devices according to the newly formed hyperterminal. Users can choose to add more devices to form a hyper terminal, making the user use scenarios more abundant. After adding more associated devices, the HyperTerminal can provide more and richer scene-based services, improving the HyperTerminal ecosystem.
  • the hyperterminal system can analyze the user's usage scene as a sports and health scene based on the current devices that make up the hyperterminal as a mobile phone and a smart watch.
  • the recommended device area 704 can display recommended sports equipment or health monitoring equipment, etc. Such as treadmills, spinning bikes, blood glucose meters, heart rate meters, etc.
  • the device icon in the recommended device area 704 if the device is an associated device detected by the current core device, that is, the device displayed in the device connection status diagram 701, then the device can initiate a connection Join HyperTerminal.
  • the device icon in the recommended device area 704 When the user selects (clicks or drags) the device icon in the recommended device area 704, if the device is not displayed in the device connection status icon 701, it can jump to a page related to the device product, such as introducing the device to the user.
  • the first device detects a second user operation for selecting the first contextualized service, and the first contextualized service instructs the first device to provide the first service, and/or the second device to provide the second service.
  • the first scenario-based service corresponds to a first atomized service combination, and the first atomized service combination provides at least one first service for the first device, and/or at least one second service for the second device.
  • a scene service can be supported by one or more atom services.
  • Atomic service refers to the smallest capability unit that can run independently. It is a concept of abstract encapsulation of a single function/capability. It can be a hardware service or a software service.
  • the second user operation may be that the user clicks on the first scenario-based service option.
  • the second user operation may be that the user drags the second control to the area corresponding to the first scene-based service option, and then releases it; the second user operation may also be that the user drags the second control to correspond to the service option of the first scene-based service area close to the first device icon etc.
  • the aforementioned floating control may include a first area, and the first area displays service options of the first scenario-based service.
  • the second user operation is the operation of releasing the second control after the user drags the second control to the first area, or the second user operation is the user dragging the second control through the first area and moving towards the direction close to the first control After arriving at the specified area, release the operation of the second control.
  • the specified area can be a circular area with the first control as the center and a radius equal to the first radius distance.
  • the user can drag the smart watch icon to the area corresponding to the outdoor running service option, and then select the service option via the outdoor running service option.
  • the corresponding area is close to the direction of the mobile phone icon, and the trajectory of the user's finger can refer to the schematic trajectory in the user interface 1100 .
  • the smart watch icon reaches the adsorption area, the user releases the finger, the service corresponding to the outdoor running starts, and the mobile phone jumps to display the outdoor running interface shown in the user interface 800 .
  • the circular floating area 1101 does not need to be divided into blocks, and the user will select the same scene-based service when approaching the mobile phone icon from any direction.
  • the user can drag the smart watch icon to the area corresponding to the outdoor running service option, and then release the finger , which means that the outdoor running service option is selected, the service corresponding to the outdoor running is started, and the mobile phone jumps to display the outdoor running interface shown in the user interface 800 .
  • the trajectory of the user's finger can refer to the schematic trajectory in the user interface 1200 .
  • the circular floating area 1201 does not need to be divided into blocks, and the user drags the device icon to any position in the floating area 1201 and releases the icon to select the same scene-based service.
  • the interaction mode shown in FIG. 12 is easier for the user to operate, and the probability of wrong selection is lower.
  • the hyper terminal system can be based on the current device combination, the atomized services that can be provided by each device that can be queried, and then based on the scene service actually selected by the user, or based on the user's usual service combination, or the default service combination set by the user, or based on the life Cognition is the most suitable service combination in this scenario, or the most frequently used service combination in this scenario is obtained from the server, and the atomic service combination in this scenario is automatically set, saving users from tedious selection operations.
  • the atomic service combination is automatically set as follows: the audio output function is provided by the smart TV, the audio input (microphone) function is provided by the mobile phone, and the camera The function is provided by the smart TV, and the display function is provided by the smart TV.
  • the atomic service combination is automatically set as follows: the audio output function is provided by the earphone, and the audio input (microphone) function is provided by the The earphones provide, the camera function is provided by the mobile phone, and the display function is provided by the treadmill.
  • the hyperterminal system can analyze the optimal atomic service combination according to the device characteristics of different device types. For example, a smart TV has a larger screen, and the user has a better viewing experience and is more suitable for watching videos. Then, when a smart TV and a mobile phone form a super terminal, the smart TV is given priority to provide display functions. Smart speakers have strong audio output capabilities, better sound effects, and are more suitable for playing audio. When a smart speaker and a mobile phone form a super terminal, the smart speaker is given priority to provide audio output.
  • the headset is small in size, easy to carry, does not need to be placed outside, does not disturb people around, and can also have a noise reduction effect, shielding external environmental noise, suitable for listening to audio in public places, such as talking in public places, listening to music, etc.
  • a HyperTerminal it is preferred to set the earphone to provide audio output function.
  • Smart watches and smart bracelets can measure the user's exercise data or heart rate and other health information more accurately than mobile phones.
  • smart watches or smart bracelets and mobile phones form a super terminal, the smart watch or smart bracelet is preferred.
  • the acquired motion data; the laptop has powerful processing capability and is more suitable for office work, so when the laptop and mobile phone form a super terminal, the laptop is given priority to provide display functions, keyboard input functions, etc.
  • the device type and device features will not be described in detail here, and the above examples do not limit other embodiments.
  • the hyper terminal supports users to personalize the atomic service combination, and the user can manually modify the atomic service combination according to personal preferences or actual conditions, and adjust a certain atomic service to be provided by other devices. For example, in a multi-screen conference, if the surrounding environment is noisy, the user can change the audio output function provided by the smart TV to the headset.
  • the first device displays the first atomic service combination on the seventh interface, the first atomic service combination is selected by the user, or the first atomic service combination is determined according to one or more of the following parameters Service combination: the device type and device characteristics of the first device and/or the second device, or the atomic service combination commonly used by the user, or the default atomic service combination set by the user, or the analyzed service that is most suitable for the first scenario Atomic service combination, or the most frequently used atomic service combination obtained from the server under the first scenario service.
  • Service combination the device type and device characteristics of the first device and/or the second device, or the atomic service combination commonly used by the user, or the default atomic service combination set by the user, or the analyzed service that is most suitable for the first scenario Atomic service combination, or the most frequently used atomic service combination obtained from the server under the first scenario service.
  • one or more atomic service combinations may be displayed, as shown in the user interface 1000 and the user interface 1010 shown in FIG. 10, Users can choose different atomic services to be provided by different devices.
  • scene-based service and atomized service are only words used in this embodiment, and their representative meanings have been recorded in this embodiment, and their names do not constitute any limitation to this embodiment.
  • scenario-based services may also be called scenario-based functions, scenario functions, scenario services, scenario-based services, business functions, and other terms;
  • atomic services may also be called meta-capabilities, atomic capabilities (Ability ), atomic services, functional components, and other nouns.
  • scenario-based services may also be called scenario-based functions, scenario functions, scenario services, scenario-based services, business functions, and other terms
  • atomic services may also be called meta-capabilities, atomic capabilities (Ability ), atomic services, functional components, and other nouns.
  • it is mainly described as "scenario-based service” and "atomized service”.
  • the first device and/or the second device runs the first scenario-based service, that is, the first device runs the first service, and/or the second device runs the second service.
  • the first device may directly notify the second device to run the atomized service corresponding to the first scenario-based service through the communication connection.
  • the first device may send an instruction to notify the operation of the first scenario-based service to the cloud server, or the first device may report the instruction or message obtained by itself or its own running status to the cloud server, Then the cloud server generates an instruction to run the first scenario-based service, and sends it to the second device.
  • the second device runs the atomized service indicated by the first scenario-based service.
  • the third interface displayed by the first device running the first scenario-based service may be different from or the same as the fourth interface displayed by the second device running the first scenario-based service.
  • the first scenario-based service is a motion monitoring service
  • the second device is a wearable motion device
  • the third interface can be a picture of a motion track
  • the fourth interface can be the detected motion data of the user
  • the motion data can be Including: exercise speed, exercise distance, exercise time, heart rate, etc.
  • the mobile phone when the mobile phone detects that the user clicks and selects the outdoor running option 707 listed in the scene service option area 705 in the user interface 700 , the mobile phone can jump to an outdoor running related page, as shown in the user interface 800 .
  • the user interface 800 is a sports and health application page, and you can see that there are sub-options displayed under the sports and health title bar: outdoor running sub-option 801 , indoor running sub-option, heart health sub-option, and vascular health sub-option.
  • the page corresponding to the outdoor running sub-option 801 is currently displayed on the user interface 800, such as a map icon, a user's positioning icon, and a user's exercise route. , Statistical user exercise volume, etc.
  • the smart watch displays an interface related to outdoor running, refer to the smart watch user interface 802 .
  • the user interface 802 of the smart watch may not be consistent with the user interface 800 related to outdoor running of the mobile phone, and exercise data may be shared between the smart watch and the mobile phone.
  • the smart watch user interface 802 can display exercise data such as pace, exercise distance, heart rate, and exercise time detected by the smart watch.
  • the first scenario-based service is a screen projection service
  • the second device is a large-screen device
  • the fourth interface is a video or image screen
  • the third interface is to control the video or image The control interface of the screen display function.
  • the screen content displayed on the third interface and the fourth interface may be the same.
  • both the mobile phone and the TV display the same video screen.
  • a second control may be displayed that is adsorbed together with the first control.
  • the two device icons being attracted together may refer to that the edges of the icons corresponding to the two devices are tangent, or the two device icons being adsorbed together may also refer to that the two device icons are completely or partially overlapped.
  • no special limitation is imposed on the form of adsorption.
  • the device connection status icon area on the hyperterminal page shows that the smart watch icon is attached to the mobile phone icon, indicating that the smart watch has established a connection with the mobile phone and can work together.
  • the resulting effects and triggered services may also be different.
  • the first device determines the position of the screen interface of the first device on the screen of the second device according to the relative position of the second control and the first control when the drag operation is released.
  • the first device determines the position of the screen interface of the first device on the screen of the second device according to the relative position of the second control and the first control when the drag operation is released.
  • the screen interface of the first device is projected on the right side of the screen of the second device; if the relative position is that the second control is on the right side of the first control, then The screen interface of the first device is projected on the left side of the screen of the second device; if the relative position is that the second control is in the middle of the first control, then the full screen of the screen interface of the first device is projected on the screen of the second device.
  • the user wants to detach an associated device from the HyperTerminal system or end the service, he can operate the fourth user operation on the HyperTerminal interface under the condition that the icon of the associated device is attached to the core device.
  • the fourth user operation includes Operation of the first control separately from the second control. For example, select the second control, and drag the second control to move away from the first control until it moves out of the specified area, then release the operation of the second control.
  • the user can select the associated device icon and drag the associated device icon away from the core device icon.
  • the mobile phone detects that the user drags the icon of the associated device away from the icon of the core device for a distance greater than the third distance, when the user releases the finger, the icon of the associated device returns to the position before it was not connected, the adsorption state is released, and the associated device is also disconnected If the connection with the core device is separated from the HyperTerminal system, the service provided by the device in the HyperTerminal will also be terminated. Or, when the user clicks an associated device that is in the connected state, or the user presses an associated device icon and a core device icon, and drags them in opposite directions to separate them, the associated device and the core device can be triggered.
  • Disconnection means that the icon of the associated device is separated from the icon of the core device on the interface, and the icon of the associated device returns to the unconnected state.
  • a one-key disconnection control can also be set on the HyperTerminal interface. Clicking the one-key disconnection control can disconnect all associated devices from the core device, and restore the core device to be independent without any associated device connection. state, the services provided by each associated device will also be terminated.
  • the hyperterminal is not limited to the connection between the associated device and the core device.
  • the user can also connect an associated device with another associated device in the hyperterminal interface to form a hyperterminal. That is to say, the user can connect any two or more devices, and the connected devices are not limited to associated devices or core devices.
  • associated devices, smart speakers and smart TVs can be directly connected to form a super terminal.
  • the first device detects a third user operation acting on the second interface, the third user operation is used to associate the fourth device with the first device, and the third user operation includes selecting the third user operation indicating the fourth device.
  • Three control operation In response to the third user operation, the first device displays a sixth interface, the sixth interface displays the first control, the second control, and the third control are adsorbed together, and the sixth interface also displays a third scene-based service option, The third scenario-based service option is determined according to the first device, the second device, and the fourth device, and the third scenario-based service option is different from the first scenario-based service option. Referring to the embodiment shown in FIG. 9 , details are not repeated here.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a unified entrance for the interaction between the core device and multiple associated devices, that is, the hyper terminal interface, and the user can trigger any two or more electronic devices in the hyper terminal interface to form a hyper terminal .
  • the HyperTerminal can judge the usage scenarios based on the device type, device features, product positioning, common functions, device status, current running applications, current device environment, etc., and provide one or more scenarios based on the usage scenarios. service options, atomized service composition options, or interactive function options. Users can quickly select scene-based services and/or atomized services according to their personal needs, without cumbersome decentralized settings. Therefore, it can solve the problem that the settings of interactive functions between electronic devices are scattered and cumbersome, and it is impossible to list rich uses for users. scene problem.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides the scenario-based services and/or atomized services available under the device combination through the user-selected device combination, lists detailed and rich usage scenarios for the user, and guides the user to use the hyper terminal with sufficient functions. Explore more application scenarios and achieve the effect of recommending scenario-based services based on device combinations.
  • FIG. 21 shows functional modules of the communication system 10 .
  • the communication system 10 may include a device combination generating module 2101, a scenario service decision module 2102, a scenario service providing module 2103, an atomic service providing module 2104, and the like.
  • the communication system 10 may also be called a hyper terminal, and the hyper terminal may include a core device and one or more associated devices.
  • the hyper terminal may include a core device and one or more associated devices.
  • the device combination generation module 2101 can be used for the combination of the core device and the associated device in the hyper terminal, etc., including realizing the discovery of the surrounding associated devices by the core device, and indicating the positional relationship or signal strength between the associated device and the core device on the interface Relationships, etc., as well as functions such as connecting core devices and associated devices.
  • a hyper terminal interface may be displayed on the core device, and the discovered surrounding associated devices may be displayed on the hyper terminal interface.
  • the user can drag the associated device icon close to the core device icon, and when reaching the specified area, the associated device icon can be attached to the edge of the core device icon, indicating that the core device has established a connection with the associated device.
  • the scene service decision module 2102 can be used to base on the currently connected device type and/or device features, product positioning, common functions and other information, or according to the detected environment where the user is currently in, or the operating status of the device, etc., Analyze current user usage scenarios.
  • Scenario service decision module 2102 can classify multiple consumer usage scenarios.
  • consumer usage scenarios may include the following five categories: mobile office, smart home, audio-visual entertainment, sports and health, and smart travel.
  • the classification of consumer usage scenarios is not static, and the scenario service decision module 2102 can continuously update, expand or refine more usage scenarios, which are not limited in this embodiment, and can be changed according to actual conditions. For example, the addition of associated devices or functions that have not appeared before may lead to new usage scenarios.
  • the scene service providing module 2103 is used to, when multiple devices are connected, according to the device type, device characteristics, product positioning, device usage, collaborative service that the device can provide, the current environment of the device, the device One or more scenario-based service options based on comprehensive consideration of running status, recently used applications by users, currently running applications, location information input by users, etc., and displayed on the user interface, so that users can quickly start related services or function.
  • the scenario service providing module 2103 may detect the environment where the current device is located, or the application recently run by the user, etc. The probability of each scenario-based service option being selected is calculated, and the scenario-based service option that is estimated to have a higher probability of being selected is displayed first in the scenario-based service option area.
  • the scenario-based service options are not static, and the scenario-based service providing module 2103 can continuously update, expand or refine more scenario-based service options, which are not limited in this embodiment, and can be changed according to actual conditions.
  • the user can customize and add scene-based services, for example, the user sets a name for a usage scene and associates the scene with other application services or system services. The newly added scenario-based service option is displayed in parallel with other scenario-based service options on the HyperTerminal interface.
  • the scenario service providing module 2103 may comprehensively consider one or more of the above factors, and reasonably recommend scenario-based service options.
  • the scenario service providing module 2103 may also be used to recommend associated devices.
  • the scene service providing module 2103 can analyze the current scene based on the types of devices that currently make up the hyper terminal system, and list and recommend other devices suitable for the current scene to the user, so as to help the user obtain a better scene experience; or speculate more scalable usage Scenarios, and then list and recommend other devices to the user. If the user adopts the device recommended by the system, more and richer usage scenarios can be further expanded.
  • the atomic service providing module 2104 can be used to provide atomized services based on the current device combination and each device that can be queried, and then based on the scene service actually selected by the user, or based on the user's common service combination, or the default service set by the user Combination, or the service combination that is most suitable for the scenario based on life cognition, or the service combination that is most frequently used in the scenario is obtained from the server, etc., and the atomic service combination in the scenario is automatically set, saving the user from tedious selection operations .
  • Atomic service refers to the smallest capability unit that can run independently. It is a concept of abstract encapsulation of a single function/capability. It can be a hardware service or a software service.
  • the atomic service providing module 2104 supports users to personalize the atomic service combination, and the user can manually modify the atomic service combination according to personal preference or actual situation, and adjust a certain atomic service to be provided by other devices. For example, in a multi-screen conference, if the surrounding environment is noisy, the user can change the audio output function provided by the smart TV to the headset.
  • the electronic devices that can be added to the HyperTerminal may include: devices with the same account, devices with different accounts, and devices without accounts.
  • the aforementioned device with the same account may include an electronic device whose login account is the same as the login account of the core device of the hyper terminal.
  • the accounts logged into Zhang San's mobile phone and Zhang San's tablet computer are the same account, that is, Zhang San's account.
  • Zhang San's tablet computer can join the hyperterminal as a device with the same account.
  • the device with the same account may also include an electronic device that is paired with the core device of the hyper terminal and associated with the login account on the core device.
  • some electronic devices (such as earphones, smart watches, smart bracelets, etc.) do not have the ability to independently log in to an account.
  • the user can pair the above-mentioned electronic device through a mobile phone (or an electronic device such as a tablet computer capable of independently logging in to an account), thereby associating the above-mentioned electronic device with the account registered on the mobile phone, so as to facilitate the control and management of the above-mentioned electronic device through the mobile phone.
  • the aforementioned pairing method may include Bluetooth pairing, Wi-Fi pairing, and the like.
  • Zhang San's headset does not have the ability to independently log in to the account.
  • Zhang San's mobile phone is paired with Zhang San's headset.
  • Zhang San's headset is associated with the login account on Zhang San's mobile phone (that is, Zhang San's account). That is, Zhang San's earphone may be an electronic device managed under Zhang San's account.
  • Zhang San's earphone can be added to the hyperterminal as a device with the same account.
  • the above-mentioned cross-account device may include an electronic device whose login account is different from the login account of the core device of the hyper terminal.
  • the login account on Zhang San's mobile phone is Zhang San's account.
  • the login account on Li Si's tablet computer is Li Si's account.
  • Zhang San's mobile phone login account is different from Li Si's tablet computer login account.
  • Li Si's tablet computer can join the hyperterminal as a cross-account device.
  • the above-mentioned cross-account device may also include an electronic device associated with an account through pairing with other electronic devices, and the associated account is different from the login account of the core device of the HyperTerminal.
  • the login account on Li Si's mobile phone is Li Si's account.
  • Li Si's earphone is paired with Li Si's mobile phone, thereby being associated with Li Si's account.
  • the core device of the hyperterminal is Zhang San's mobile phone (the login account is Zhang San's account)
  • Li Si's earphone can be added to the hyperterminal as a cross-account device.
  • the aforementioned device without an account may be an electronic device without a login account and no associated account. After other electronic devices (such as mobile phones, tablet computers, etc.) establish a communication connection with the above-mentioned unaccounted devices, they can cooperate with the above-mentioned unaccounted devices to provide users with scene-based services.
  • the aforementioned device without an account may be equivalent to a public device. For example, there is no login account in the printer, and there is no associated account. In the case that the core device of the hyperterminal is Zhang San's mobile phone (the login account is Zhang San's account), the printer can be added to the hyperterminal as a device without an account.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the types of the above-mentioned same-account device, cross-account device, and non-account device.
  • device binding may be performed first.
  • the core device of the hyper terminal may request to be bound with the above-mentioned cross-account device.
  • the core device can be bound with the above-mentioned cross-account device, so that the above-mentioned cross-account device can join the hyperterminal.
  • the HyperTerminal can use the above-mentioned cross-account devices to provide users with scenario-based services.
  • the user to which the above-mentioned cross-account device belongs is usually not the same user as the user to which the core device of the HyperTerminal belongs. If the user who belongs to the core device wants to use the above-mentioned cross-account device to provide scenario-based services, he needs to obtain the consent of the user who belongs to the cross-account device. Then, when the above-mentioned cross-account device is added to the hyperterminal, the core device can perform device binding with the above-mentioned cross-account device to request the user to which the cross-account device belongs to agree that the user to which the core device belongs to use the cross-account device. This can reduce the situation that the user who belongs to the cross-device account does not agree or know that his electronic device is used by other users, and improves the user experience.
  • the above-mentioned device binding process may not be performed.
  • the user to which the above-mentioned device with the same account belongs is usually the same user as the user to which the core device of the hyper terminal belongs. If the user who belongs to the core device wants to use other devices of his own to cooperate with the core device, he can use the method shown in Figure 5 to Figure 8 to enable the core device to cooperate with the device with the same account to provide scene-based services. In this way, the user uses his or her multiple electronic devices to cooperate without device binding. This can simplify the user's operation of using the HyperTerminal to provide scene-based services and improve the user experience.
  • the above-mentioned unaccounted device joins the hyperterminal, and device binding may be performed, or device binding may not be performed.
  • the following specifically introduces a scenario in which an electronic device joins a hyper terminal and performs device binding provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • 22A to 22H exemplarily show schematic diagrams of scenarios where an electronic device joins a hyperterminal and performs device binding.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a user interface 2210 .
  • the electronic device 100 is taken as an example for illustration. Not limited to mobile phones, the electronic device 100 may also be other types of electronic devices (such as tablet computers, notebook computers, etc.).
  • the user interface 2210 reference may be made to the introduction of the aforementioned user interface 500 shown in FIG. 5 .
  • the user interface 2210 may include a device connection status icon 2211 and an adding control 2212 .
  • the device connection status icon 2211 may include a mobile phone icon 505 .
  • the mobile phone icon 505 may indicate that the core device is a mobile phone, that is, the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic devices represented by the device icons and names surrounding the mobile phone icon 505 may be the electronic devices searched by the electronic device 100 . For example, the Sound X icon in the device connection status icon 2211, the FreeBuds icon of Zhang San, the MatePad icon of Zhang San, and the MateBook icon of Zhang San.
  • the name of the electronic device may be account name + type and/or model of the electronic device.
  • other electronic devices search for the electronic device, they can display the name of the electronic device.
  • the type of electronic device is MatePad.
  • An account is registered on the electronic device, and the account name is "Zhang San”.
  • the name of the electronic device may be Zhang San's MatePad.
  • the electronic device 100 searches for the electronic device, it may display the icon of Zhang San's MatePad and the name of the electronic device "Zhang San's MatePad" in the device connection status diagram 2211 shown in FIG. 22A .
  • the name of the electronic device may be noted by the user.
  • the user can manage the electronic device paired with the electronic device 100 through the electronic device 100 , for example, modify the name of the electronic device paired with the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 is paired with an earphone.
  • the user can modify the name of the headset to Zhang San's FreeBuds through the electronic device 100 .
  • the icon of Zhang San's FreeBuds and the name of the electronic device "Zhang San's FreeBuds" can be displayed in the device connection status diagram 2211 shown in FIG. 22A .
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the method for determining the name of the electronic device.
  • the add control 2212 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to search for other electronic devices. For example, electronic devices located around the electronic device 100, electronic devices that are connected and communicate through the Internet, and so on.
  • the electronic devices represented by the device icons around the mobile phone icon 505 may include devices with the same account, cross-account devices bound with the electronic device 100 , and devices without accounts. That is to say, the user can directly realize the cooperative work between the electronic device represented by the device icon and the electronic device 100 by dragging the device icon around the mobile phone icon 505 close to the mobile phone icon 505 .
  • the electronic device 100 may search for electronic devices whose device icons are not displayed in the device connection state illustration 2211 in response to an operation acting on the add control 2212 . For example, a cross-account device, a non-account device, etc. that have not completed device binding with the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 may display the device list 2213 in FIG. 22B on the user interface 2210 .
  • the device identifications of the electronic devices searched by the electronic device 100 may be displayed in the device list 2213, so that the user may select an electronic device among them for device binding.
  • the device identification of the electronic device in the device list 2213 may include a device icon and a device name.
  • the device list 2213 may include a smart bracelet ID 2213B, a Vision ID 2213C, Li Si's MatePad ID 2213D, and Li Si's FreeBuds ID 2213E.
  • the device identifier of any one of the above electronic devices may be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to perform device binding with this electronic device.
  • a search control 2213A and a cancel control 2213F may also be included in the device list 2213 .
  • the search control 2213A can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to continue searching for other electronic devices.
  • the cancel control 2213F can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to cancel displaying the device list 2213 .
  • the electronic device 100 may display the connection code setting box 2214 and the input keyboard 2215 shown in FIG. 22C . in:
  • connection code setting box 2214 can be used to set the connection code for device binding between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device named Li Si's MatePad.
  • a connection code setup box 2214 may contain setup prompts.
  • the setting prompt can be, for example, a text message: to connect to Li Si's MatePad, please key in the connection code verified on the other party's device.
  • the connection code setup box 2214 may also include a cancel control 2214A and an OK control 2214B.
  • the cancel control 2214A can be used to cancel the device binding between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device named Si Li's MatePad.
  • the determination control 2214B can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to send a binding request for device binding to the electronic device named Li Si's MatePad.
  • the input keyboard 2215 can be used for the user to input the connection code in the connection code setting box 2214 .
  • the input keyboard 2215 may include number input keys, letter input keys, character input keys and the like. That is, the connection code may contain one or more of the following: numbers, letters, characters, and so on.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the content of the connection code.
  • the connection code can consist of 6 digits: 710710.
  • the electronic device 100 may send a binding request for device binding to the electronic device 200 in response to the operation on the determination control 2214B.
  • the electronic device 200 may be the above-mentioned electronic device named Li Si's MatePad.
  • a communication connection may be established between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 .
  • the electronic device 100 may display a waiting prompt box 2216 .
  • the waiting prompt box 2216 may be used to prompt the user to wait for the consent of the user to which the electronic device 200 belongs before adding the electronic device 200 to the core device as a hyper terminal of the electronic device 100 .
  • the waiting prompt box 2216 may contain a text prompt: waiting for the other party to agree. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the content in the waiting prompt box 2216 .
  • the electronic device 200 may display a binding prompt box 2221 shown in FIG. 22D.
  • the binding prompt box 2221 can be used to prompt the user that the electronic device 100 requests to add the electronic device 200 to the hyperterminal, so that the electronic device 200 can provide scene-based services in the hyperterminal, and ask the user whether to agree.
  • the binding prompt box 2221 may include a reject control 2221A and an agree control 2221B.
  • the rejection control 2221A can be used to reject the electronic device 200 from joining the hyper terminal whose core device is the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 200 may send a rejection message to the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 may prompt the user that the electronic device 200 refuses to join the HyperTerminal.
  • the consent control 2221B can be used to agree that the electronic device 200 joins the core device as the hyper terminal of the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 200 may display a connection code input box 2222 shown in FIG. 22E.
  • the connection code input box 2222 may be used to enter a connection code.
  • connection code input in the connection code input box 2222 is 710710, which is the same as the connection code set in the connection code setting box 2214 shown in FIG. 22C.
  • the electronic device 200 may transmit a consent message to the electronic device 100.
  • the connection code entered in the connection code input box 2222 may be included in the above-mentioned consent message.
  • the electronic device 100 may verify whether the connection code included in the consent message is correct.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 2210 shown in FIG. 22F .
  • the electronic device 100 may display a MatePad icon 2211A of Li Si in the device connection state illustration 2211 of the user interface 2210 .
  • Li Si's MatePad icon 2211A may represent an electronic device named Li Si's MatePad, that is, the electronic device 200 .
  • the electronic device 100 can display the identification of the electronic device 200 in the device connection status icon 2211 , so that the user can quickly cooperate with the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 .
  • the operating electronic device 100 may display the user interface 2210 shown in FIG. 22H in response to dragging the MtaPad icon 2211A of Johnny's icon 2211A close to the phone icon 505 .
  • John's MtaPad icon may be displayed on user interface 2210 in the style of icon 2211B.
  • the MtaPad icon of Li Si can be adsorbed on the edge of the mobile phone icon 505 .
  • the user interface 2210 may include a prompt description 2217 "Already coordinated with Li Si's MatePad".
  • the above prompt description 2217 may prompt the user that the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 are currently connected and can work together to provide the user with scene-based services.
  • the user interface 2210 shown in FIG. 22H may also include a recommended device area 2218A, a scene-based service option area 2218B, and an atomized service entry option 2219 .
  • the recommended device area 2218A can be used to list the devices that can be linked with the hyperterminal formed by the currently coordinated devices (such as the hyperterminal composed of the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 ) to bring richer scenarios or better experience to the user.
  • the scenario-based service option area 2218B can be used to list one or more scenario-based services recommended by the hyper terminal according to the current device combination.
  • the scenario-based services that can be provided by the mobile phone and Li Si's MatePad (i.e. tablet computer) working together include: multi-screen collaboration, camera collaboration, multi-screen conference, screen expansion, etc.
  • the atomic service entry option 2219 can be used to display the atomic service combination, and the user can choose the atomic service provider by himself.
  • the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 work together to provide a scene-based service.
  • the hyperterminal with the electronic device 100 as the core device can join the cross-account electronic device.
  • the user to whom the electronic device 100 belongs can not only use his own electronic device to perform collaborative work, but also use his own electronic device to perform collaborative work with other users' electronic devices, thereby enjoying more convenient and rich scene-based services.
  • the user can request cross-account devices to complete device binding by setting a connection code, so as to establish a connection relationship that can work together.
  • FIG. 22I and FIG. 22J exemplarily show a unified entry for interaction between electronic devices in some hyperterminals.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a user interface 2210 .
  • User interface 2210 may include a device connection status icon 2231 .
  • Device icons of one or more electronic devices may be displayed in the device connection state diagram 2231 .
  • cell phone icon 505 may represent the core device of the hyper terminal, that is, the electronic device 100 .
  • the device connection status diagram 2231 may also include device icons of electronic devices searched by the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 may display the device icon of the device with the same account on a circle with the mobile phone icon 505 as the center and a radius of A2.
  • Zhang San's MateBook icon Zhang San's MatePad icon, and Zhang San's FreeBuds icon.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the device icon of the cross-account device and the device icon of no account on a circle with the mobile phone icon 505 as the center and a radius of A3.
  • the above distance A3 may be greater than the distance A2.
  • the device icon of the electronic device When the device icon of the electronic device is dragged to a circular area centered on the mobile phone icon 505 and the radius is A1, the user releases the finger, the icon of the electronic device can be attached to the mobile phone icon 505, and the electronic device can be connected to the mobile phone icon 505.
  • Devices 100 cooperate.
  • the above-mentioned distance A1 may be smaller than the distance A2.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a user interface 2210 .
  • the user interface 2210 may include a device connection status icon 2211 and a display area 2232 for devices with different accounts.
  • the above non-same-account device display area 2232 may be used to display device icons of cross-account devices and device icons of non-account devices. For example, Li Si's FreeBuds icon, Li Si's MataPad icon, smart watch icon and so on.
  • the electronic devices represented by the device icons in the device display area 2232 of the non-same account may all be searched by the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 can connect the two devices according to the operation of dragging the device icon in the device connection status diagram 2211 to a distance less than a preset distance from the device icon in the device display area 2232 of the non-same account. Icon snapping. Wherein, the electronic devices respectively represented by the two device icons can establish collaboration to provide scene-based services. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 can connect the two devices according to the operation of dragging the device icon in the device display area 2232 of the non-same account to a distance less than the preset distance from the device icon in the device connection status icon 2211. Icon snapping. Wherein, the electronic devices respectively represented by the two device icons can establish collaboration to provide scene-based services.
  • the user can drag the device icon in the device connection status icon 2211 close to the device icon in the device display area 2232 of the non-same account, so that the two device icons are attracted, and the electronic devices represented by the two device icons respectively establish collaboration.
  • the user can also drag the device icon in the device display area 2232 of the non-same account close to the device icon in the device connection status icon 2211, so that the two device icons are attracted, and the electronic devices represented by the two device icons establish collaboration.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the expression form of the unified entry for interaction between electronic devices in the hyper terminal.
  • the electronic device 100 may also display the core device and associated devices of the HyperTerminal in other presentation forms.
  • the electronic devices represented by the device icons in the device connection status diagram 2211 shown in FIG. 22A may also include: cross-account devices searched by the electronic device 100 and not yet bound to the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 may perform device binding with the above-mentioned cross-account device whose device binding has not been completed. Then, the electronic device 100 and the cross-account device can work together to provide scene-based services.
  • FIG. 23A to FIG. 23D exemplarily show schematic diagrams of scenarios in which an electronic device joins a hyperterminal and performs device binding.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 2210 as shown in FIG. 23A .
  • the user interface 2210 may include a device connection status icon 2211 .
  • a device connection status icon 2211 For the device connection state diagram 2211, reference may be made to the introduction of the foregoing embodiments, and details are not repeated here.
  • Li Si's MatePad icon 2311 may represent an electronic device named Li Si's MatePad, such as the electronic device 200 shown in FIG. 22D above.
  • the account registered on the electronic device 200 may be, for example, the account of Li Si, which is different from the account registered on the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 can search for the electronic device 200 , so that Li Si's MatePad icon 2311 is displayed in the device connection state diagram 2211 .
  • the electronic device 100 is not bound to the electronic device 200 .
  • the user interface 2210 may also include an add control 2212 .
  • the electronic device 100 can search for more electronic devices for the user to choose to join the HyperTerminal.
  • the electronic device 100 in response to the operation of coordinating the electronic device 200 with the electronic device 100 , for example, the operation of dragging Lisi's MtaPad icon 2311 close to the mobile phone icon 505 , the electronic device 100 can perform device binding with the electronic device 200 .
  • the electronic device 100 can perform device binding with the electronic device 200 .
  • the electronic device 100 may first determine whether the electronic device 200 is a cross-account device. When it is determined that the electronic device 200 is a cross-account device, the electronic device 100 may determine whether the electronic device 200 has been bound with the electronic device 100 . If it is determined that the electronic device 200 is not bound to the electronic device 100 , the electronic device 100 may be bound to the electronic device 200 .
  • the electronic device 100 may display Li Si's MtaPad icon in the style of the icon 2312 shown in FIG. 23B.
  • the icon 2312 is different from the MtaPad icon 2311 of Li Si, so that it is convenient for the user to distinguish which electronic devices have established connections with the electronic device 100 that can work together.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a connection code setting box 2313 and an input keyboard 2314 for the user to input a device binding connection with the electronic device 100 code.
  • a connection code setting box 2313 for the user to input a device binding connection with the electronic device 100 code.
  • FIGS. 22C to 22E For an implementation of device binding between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200, reference may be made to the embodiments described in FIGS. 22C to 22E. I won't go into details here.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 2210 shown in FIG. 23D .
  • the user interface shown in FIG. 23D may refer to the aforementioned user interface shown in FIG. 22H. I won't go into details here.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the device icon of the searched electronic device in the device connection status diagram 2211 according to a preset rule. For example, the number of device icons displayed in the device connection status icon 2211 is limited. The electronic device 100 may be sorted according to the following priorities: same-account device>non-account device>cross-account device, select the electronic device with higher priority to display the device icon in the device connection status icon 2211 . For another example, the number of device icons displayed in the device connection status icon 2211 is limited. The electronic device 100 may select an electronic device that is close to the electronic device 100 to display a device icon in the device connection status diagram 2211 according to the distance between the searched electronic device and the electronic device 100 .
  • the number of device icons displayed in the device connection status icon 2211 is limited.
  • the electronic device 100 may select an electronic device with a high signal strength to display a device icon in the device connection status diagram 2211 according to the level of the signal strength corresponding to the searched electronic device.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the above preset rules for displaying device icons in the device connection status icon 2211 .
  • the electronic device 100 can identify the searched electronic devices (such as account devices, bound cross-account devices, unbound cross-account devices, and no-account devices). Displayed around the core device icon of HyperTerminal. In this way, the user can quickly establish a connection relationship between different electronic devices for collaborative work by dragging and dropping the device icon.
  • the electronic device represented by the dragged device icon includes an unbound cross-account device
  • the electronic device 100 may establish a binding relationship with the above-mentioned unbound electronic device, so as to establish a cooperative working connection relationship.
  • the user to which the electronic device 100 belongs can not only use his own electronic device to perform collaborative work, but also use his own electronic device to perform collaborative work with other users' electronic devices, thereby enjoying more convenient and rich scene-based services.
  • the process of binding the core device to the hyperterminal can be simplified.
  • electronic device 200 and electronic device 100 have performed device binding.
  • electronic device 100 and electronic device 200 can mutually verify each other's identities and complete the device binding without requiring the user to Enter the connection code for device binding again.
  • the above method can simplify the user operation of adding the electronic device to the hyperterminal again, facilitate the user to quickly use the scene-based service provided by the hyperterminal, and improve the user experience.
  • FIG. 24A to FIG. 24D exemplarily show schematic diagrams of scenarios in which an electronic device joins a hyperterminal and performs device binding.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a user interface 2210 .
  • the user interface 2210 reference may be made to the introduction of the foregoing embodiment described in FIG. 22A.
  • user interface 2210 may include device connection status illustration 2211 .
  • a MatePad icon 2411 of Li Si Surrounding the mobile phone icon 505 in the device connection status icon 2211 , there may be a MatePad icon 2411 of Li Si and a FreeBuds icon 2412 of Li Si.
  • Si Li's MatePad icon 2411 may represent an electronic device named Si Li's MatePad, such as the electronic device 200 shown in FIG. 22D .
  • the login account on the electronic device 200 may be Li Si's account, which is different from the login account on the electronic device 100 represented by the mobile phone icon 505 .
  • Johnny's FreeBuds icon 2412 may represent an electronic device named Johnny's FreeBuds.
  • the electronic device named Li Si's FreeBuds may be an electronic device associated with Li Si's account.
  • the above-mentioned MatePad electronic device named as Li Si and the electronic device named as Li Si's FreeBuds can both be cross-account devices whose core device is the hyper terminal of the electronic device 100 .
  • the device icons of cross-account devices that have been device-bound with the electronic device 100 and the device icons of cross-account devices that have not been device-bound with the electronic device 100 may have different representation forms.
  • an electronic device named as Li Si's MatePad (hereinafter referred to as Li Si's MatePad) was once bound to the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device named Li Si's FreeBuds (hereinafter referred to as Li Si's FreeBuds) has not been bound to the electronic device 100 .
  • Lisi's MatePad icon 2411 may be displayed in a dark filled form as shown in FIG. 24A .
  • John's FreeBuds icon 2412 may be displayed in a light filled form as shown in FIG. 24A .
  • the different presentation forms of the above-mentioned device icons can facilitate the user to distinguish which cross-account devices have been bound with the electronic device 100 and which cross-account devices have not been bound with the electronic device 100 .
  • the cross-account device joins the hyperterminal of the electronic device 100 as the core device for the first time, and the cross-account device and the electronic device 100 can perform device binding as shown in FIGS. 22C to 22E .
  • the cross-account device and the electronic device 100 may store each other's device identifiers.
  • the electronic device 100 and the above-mentioned cross-account device can use the above-mentioned device identification to verify each other's identities and complete device binding. That is to say, when the user adds a cross-account device that has joined the HyperTerminal to the HyperTerminal again, there is no need to set the connection code for device binding again.
  • Li Si's MatePad that is, the electronic device 200
  • the electronic device 100 can send a message to the electronic device.
  • 100 Send a bind request requesting a bind.
  • the binding request may include a device identity for authentication.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the user interface shown in FIG. 24C to remind the user that cooperation with the electronic device 200 needs to wait for the consent of the user to which the electronic device 200 belongs.
  • the electronic device 200 can determine that it has completed device binding with the electronic device 200 through the connection code according to the device identification in the binding request.
  • the electronic device 200 may also display the user interface 2220 shown in FIG. 24C to ask the user whether to agree to the user to which the electronic device 100 belongs to use the electronic device 200 for collaborative work.
  • the user interface 2220 shown in FIG. 24C reference may be made to the introduction of the user interface 2220 shown in FIG. 22D. I won't go into details here.
  • the electronic device 200 may send a consent message to the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 can add the electronic device 200 to the HyperTerminal, so as to establish a cooperative connection with the electronic device 200 and provide the user with scenario-based services.
  • the electronic device 100 can display the user interface 2210 shown in FIG. 24D for the user to control and manage the scenario-based services provided by the cooperative work between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 .
  • the user interface 2210 shown in FIG. 24D may refer to the user interface 2210 described above in FIG. 22H . I won't go into details here.
  • the user to which the electronic device 100 belongs may be different from the user to which the electronic device 200 belongs.
  • the electronic device 200 once joined the hyperterminal whose core device is the electronic device 100 if the user of the electronic device 100 wants to use the electronic device 200 for collaborative work again, the consent of the user who belongs to the electronic device 200 should still be obtained. This can reduce the situation that the user who belongs to the cross-device account has his own electronic device used by other users without consent or knowledge.
  • the cross-account device added to the HyperTerminal is paired with other electronic devices, thereby associating the account logged in on the paired electronic device.
  • the electronic device 100 can complete the device binding between the above-mentioned cross-account device and the electronic device 100 through the electronic device paired with the above-mentioned cross-account device.
  • FIG. 25A to FIG. 25F exemplarily show schematic diagrams of scenarios in which an electronic device joins a hyperterminal and performs device binding.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a user interface 2210 .
  • the user interface 2210 may include a device connection status icon 2211 .
  • the device icons displayed around the mobile phone icon 505 include Li Si's FreeBuds icon 2511 .
  • Li Si's FreeBuds icon 2511 may represent an electronic device named Li Si's FreeBuds (hereinafter referred to as Li Si's FreeBuds).
  • Li Si's FreeBuds can be paired with an electronic device whose login account is Li Si's account, such as Li Si's mobile phone.
  • the above-mentioned account number of Li Si is different from the account number registered on the electronic device 100 . That is, Li Si's FreeBuds can be used as a cross-account device to join the hyperterminal whose core device is the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 can perform device binding with Li Si's FreeBuds.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a connection code setting box 2513 and an input keyboard 2514 shown in FIG. 25B for the user to set a connection code for device binding.
  • the user interface shown in FIG. 25B above reference may be made to the introduction of the user interface shown in FIG. 22C above. I won't go into details here.
  • the electronic device 100 may send a binding request for device binding to Li Si's FreeBuds, and display the user interface 2210 shown in FIG. 25C .
  • Johnny's FreeBuds are paired with electronic device 300 .
  • the aforementioned electronic device 300 may be, for example, Li Si's mobile phone.
  • the account registered on the electronic device 300 may be Li Si's account.
  • Li Si's FreeBuds can send the binding request to the electronic device 300 .
  • the electronic device 300 may display the user interface 2520 shown in FIG. 25D.
  • the user interface 2520 may include a binding prompt box 2521 .
  • the binding prompt box 2521 may include a reject control 2521A and an agree control 2521B.
  • For the binding prompt box refer to the aforementioned binding prompt box 2221 shown in FIG. 22D .
  • the electronic device 300 may display the connection code input box 2522 shown in FIG. 25E for the user to input the connection code for device binding between Li Si's FreeBuds and the electronic device 100 .
  • the connection code entry box 2522 may include a determination control 2522A.
  • For the connection code input box 2522 refer to the aforementioned connection code input box 2222 shown in FIG. 22E.
  • connection code input in the connection code input box 2522 is 710710, which is the same as the connection code set in the connection code setting box 2513 shown in FIG. 25B.
  • the electronic device 300 may send a consent message to the electronic device 100 through Li Si's FreeBuds.
  • the connection code entered in the connection code input box 2522 may be included in the above-mentioned consent message.
  • the electronic device 100 may verify whether the connection code included in the consent message is correct.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 2210 shown in FIG. 25F . In the user interface shown in FIG.
  • Li Si's FreeBuds icon 2512 can be adsorbed on the mobile phone icon 505 .
  • the Li Si's FreeBuds icon 2512 may be different from the Li Si's FreeBuds icon 2511 shown in FIG. 25A , so that the user can easily distinguish whether Li Si's FreeBuds has been coordinated with the electronic device 100 .
  • the user interface 2210 shown in FIG. 25F may also include a prompt description 2531 "cooperated with Li Si's FreeBuds".
  • the above prompt description 2531 can prompt the user that the current electronic device 100 and Li Si's FreeBuds have established a communication connection that can work together, so as to provide the user with scene-based services.
  • the user interface 2210 shown in FIG. 25F may also include a scene-based service option area 2532 and an atomized service entry option 2533 .
  • the scenario-based service option area 2532 can be used to list one or more scenario-based services recommended by the hyperterminal composed of currently coordinated devices (such as the hyperterminal composed of the electronic device 100 and Li Si's FreeBuds) according to the current device combination .
  • the scenario-based services that the mobile phone and Li Si's FreeBuds can work together include: audio sharing and audio playback.
  • the above-mentioned audio sharing can be used to share one or more channels of audio played by the electronic device 100 to Li Si's FreeBuds.
  • Li Si's FreeBuds can play the audio shared by the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 can continue to play the shared audio while sharing the audio.
  • the above audio delivery can be used to deliver one or more channels of audio played by the electronic device to Li Si's FreeBuds.
  • Li Si's FreeBuds can play the audio delivered by the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 puts the audio onto Li Si's FreeBuds, it may no longer play the above-mentioned put audio.
  • the above-mentioned device binding can be completed through the electronic device paired with the cross-account device, so that the cross-account device can join the core device It is the hyper terminal of the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device paired with the above-mentioned cross-account device can better remind the user that the cross-account device belongs to that there are other users who want to use the cross-account device for collaborative work.
  • the electronic device paired with the above-mentioned cross-account device can facilitate the user to confirm whether the cross-account device agrees to join the hyperterminal.
  • the electronic device paired with the cross-account device is also paired with other electronic devices.
  • the above-mentioned other electronic devices may also display a message inviting the above-mentioned cross-account device to join the HyperTerminal for device binding.
  • the electronic device 100 may send a binding request for device binding to the FreeBuds of the cross-account device Li Si.
  • Li Si's FreeBuds are bound to the electronic device 300 .
  • the above-mentioned electronic device 300 may be Li Si's mobile phone.
  • the electronic device paired with the electronic device 300 may include the smart watch shown in FIG. 25G in addition to Li Si's FreeBuds mentioned above.
  • the smart watch may be Li Si's smart watch.
  • Li Si's FreeBuds can send the binding request from the electronic device to the electronic device 300 .
  • the electronic device 300 may display the aforementioned binding prompt box 2521 shown in FIG.
  • the electronic device 300 may also send the binding request to the smart watch paired with itself.
  • the smart watch may display user interface 2520 shown in Figure 25G.
  • the user interface 2520 can be used to prompt the user that Zhang San's mobile phone (that is, the electronic device 100) requests to use Li Si's FreeBuds so that Li Si's FreeBuds can provide scene-based services in the hyperterminal, and ask the user whether to agree.
  • the user interface 2520 may include a reject control 2521 and an agree control 2522 .
  • the rejection control can be used to reject Li Si's FreeBuds from joining the hyperterminal whose core device is the electronic device 100 .
  • the consent control 2522 can be used to agree that Li Si's FreeBuds joins the core device as the hyper terminal of the electronic device 100 .
  • smart watch may display user interface 2530 shown in Figure 25H.
  • the user interface 2530 may be used to input a connection code for completing device binding with the electronic device 100 .
  • User interface 2530 may include an OK control 2531 .
  • the smart watch when a connection code (such as 710710) is input on the user interface 2530, in response to the operation on the confirmation control 2531, the smart watch can send a consent message to Li Si's FreeBuds.
  • the above-mentioned consent message may be sent to Li Si's FreeBuds through the electronic device 300 .
  • Li Si's FreeBuds can send the consent message to the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 and Li Si's FreeBuds can complete device binding.
  • the user can use the above electronic device 300 or the above smart watch to complete the device binding between the electronic device 100 and Li Si's FreeBuds.
  • FIG. 26A to FIG. 26C exemplarily show schematic diagrams of scenarios in which an electronic device joins a hyperterminal and performs device binding.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a user interface 2210 .
  • the user interface 2210 reference may be made to the introduction of the aforementioned user interface 2210 shown in FIG. 26A. I won't go into details here.
  • the electronic device 100 can perform device binding with Li Si's FreeBuds.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the binding prompt box 2611 shown in FIG. 26B , and send a device binding message to Li Si's FreeBuds. The binding request.
  • the binding prompt box 2611 can be used to prompt the user to perform operations on Li Si's FreeBuds to complete device binding with Li Si's FreeBuds.
  • the binding prompt box 2611 may contain a text prompt: It has been requested to establish a cooperative connection with Li Si's FreeBuds, and the establishment of the cooperative connection can be completed after the other party agrees, and the other party agrees to press and hold the earphone handle of the left earphone/right earphone.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the prompt content in the binding prompt box 2611.
  • Li Si's FreeBuds can send a consent message to the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 2210 shown in FIG. 26C .
  • FIG. 26C For the user interface 2210 shown in FIG. 26C, reference may be made to the introduction of the user interface 2210 shown in FIG. 25F. I won't go into details here.
  • Li Si's FreeBuds when receiving the binding request sent by the above-mentioned electronic device 100, Li Si's FreeBuds can prompt the user electronic device 100 to request device binding with Li Si's FreeBuds through voice playback, light flashing, etc. And the user operations required to complete the device binding.
  • the device binding process shown in FIG. 26A to FIG. 26C may be a process in which Li Si's FreeBuds joins the HyperTerminal again and binds with the electronic device 100 . It can be seen that the device binding process shown in FIGS. 26A to 26C is simpler than the device binding process shown in FIGS. 25A to 25F .
  • the device binding can be performed according to the process shown in Figure 25A-25F, so that the electronic device 100 and Li Si's FreeBuds can more accurately verify each other's identities through the connection code , reducing the possibility of device binding errors.
  • the device connection status diagram 2211 shown in FIG. 22A can provide a unified entry for interaction between multiple electronic devices, which is convenient for users to use different electronic devices for collaborative work.
  • the user may also remove one or more device icons in the device connection status diagram 2211 according to his needs.
  • the following introduces a scenario of stopping the cooperative work between electronic devices and removing the electronic devices from the HyperTerminal provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 27A to FIG. 27E exemplarily show a schematic diagram of a scene where the cooperation among electronic devices is stopped and the electronic device is removed from the HyperTerminal.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a user interface 2210 .
  • Li Si's FreeBuds icon 2512 is attached to the mobile phone icon 505, which may indicate that Li Si's FreeBuds and the electronic device 100 have established a connection relationship capable of working together.
  • the electronic device 100 can move the position of Li Si's FreeBuds icon 2512 according to the continuous operation on Li Si's FreeBuds icon 2512 .
  • the electronic device 100 may display Li Si's FreeBuds icon 2512 according to the position indicated by the above operation.
  • the electronic device 100 may also display a delete control 2711 on the user interface 2210 .
  • the delete control 2711 can be used to remove the device icon dragged to the location of the delete control 2711 from the device connection status icon 2211 .
  • the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 2210 shown in FIG. 27B .
  • the aforementioned release of Li Si's FreeBuds icon 2512 may indicate that the finger operating on Li Si's FreeBuds icon 2512 leaves the screen of the electronic device 100 .
  • the device icon of Si Li's FreeBuds can change from Si Li's FreeBuds icon 2512 to Si Li's FreeBuds icon 2511 .
  • Li Si's FreeBuds icon 2512 can be attached to the mobile phone icon 505, which can indicate that Li Si's FreeBuds and the electronic device 100 have been coordinated to provide users with scene-based services.
  • Li Si's FreeBuds icon 2511 is not attached to the mobile phone icon 505, which may indicate that Li Si's FreeBuds has not been coordinated with the electronic device 100 yet.
  • Li Si's FreeBuds has cooperated with the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 shares the audio to Li Si's FreeBuds.
  • Li Si's FreeBuds can play the audio shared by the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 may stop coordinating with Doe's FreeBuds.
  • the electronic device 100 can stop sharing the audio to Li Si's FreeBuds.
  • the user can stop the cooperative work between the electronic devices by moving the Li Si's FreeBuds icon away from the mobile phone icon 505 .
  • the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 2210 shown in FIG. 27E . Wherein, the electronic device 100 may remove the device icon of Li Si's FreeBuds from the device connection status icon 2211 . It is also in time that users can remove electronic devices incorporated into HyperTerminal from HyperTerminal.
  • the user to which the cross-account device belongs can stop the cross-account device from cooperating with other electronic devices in the hyper terminal, and remove the cross-account device from the hyper terminal. removed from the terminal.
  • the following describes another scenario of stopping the collaboration between electronic devices and removing the electronic devices from the HyperTerminal provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 28A-FIG. 28E exemplarily show a schematic diagram of a scene where the cooperation among electronic devices is stopped and the electronic device is removed from the HyperTerminal.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a user interface 2210 .
  • the user interface 2210 reference may be made to the introduction of the aforementioned user interface shown in FIG. 25F.
  • Li Si's FreeBuds icon 2512 is attached to the mobile phone icon 505, which may indicate that Li Si's FreeBuds and the electronic device 100 have been coordinated.
  • Li Si's FreeBuds is a cross-account device in the hyper terminal whose core device is the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 300 may display a user interface 2810 .
  • the above-mentioned electronic device 300 may be an electronic device paired with the above-mentioned Li Si's FreeBuds.
  • electronic device 300 may be a mobile phone.
  • the account of Li Si can be registered in the electronic device 300 .
  • the user interface 2810 may be a device interaction interface related to the hyperterminal function of the electronic device 300 as the core device.
  • User interface 2810 may include device connection status icon 2811 .
  • the device connection status diagram 2811 may be presented as a donut diagram.
  • a mobile phone icon 2801 may be displayed in the center of the device connection status icon 2811 .
  • the mobile phone icon 2801 may indicate that the core device is a mobile phone, that is, the electronic device 300 .
  • the mobile phone icon 2801 may be surrounded by device identifications of electronic devices searched by the electronic device 300 .
  • the device identification of the electronic device may include a device icon and a device name.
  • surrounding the mobile phone icon 2801 may include: Si Li's FreeBuds icon 2811A, a Vision icon, a smart watch icon, Si Li's MateBook icon, Si Li's MatePad icon, and the like.
  • the above-mentioned Li Si's FreeBuds icon 2811A may represent Li Si's FreeBuds.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 2810 shown in FIG. 28D .
  • Li Si's FreeBuds can establish a connection relationship capable of cooperating with the electronic device 300, and stop the cooperating work with the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 28A.
  • the device icon of Li Si's FreeBuds when attached to the mobile phone icon 2801 , can display the expression form shown in FIG. 2811B of Li Si's FreeBuds icon 2811B.
  • the adsorption between Li Si's FreeBuds icon 2811B and the mobile phone icon 2801 may indicate that Li Si's FreeBuds and the electronic device 300 have been coordinated.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 2210 shown in FIG. 28E.
  • Li Si's FreeBuds icon 2511 is not attached to the mobile phone icon 505 . That is, the collaborative work between the electronic device 100 and Li Si's FreeBuds has stopped. Comparing Fig. 28A and Fig. 28E, it can be seen that after the process of coordinating Lisi's FreeBuds with electronic device 300 as shown in Fig. 28B-Fig. terminal.
  • the electronic device 100 may also display a prompt message to remind the user that Li Si's FreeBuds has stopped cooperating.
  • Li Si's FreeBuds cooperates with the electronic device 100 , and Li Si's FreeBuds can play audio shared by the electronic device 100 .
  • Li Si's FreeBuds receives the execution of coordinating with the electronic device 300 that is paired with it.
  • Li Si's FreeBuds can stop cooperating with the electronic device 100 and instead cooperate with the electronic device 300 .
  • Li Si's FreeBuds can stop playing the audio shared by the electronic device 100 and play the audio delivered by the electronic device 300 .
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the above user operation for stopping the coordination between the electronic device and other electronic devices in the hyper terminal.
  • the electronic device 300 may display a control for stopping the cooperation between Li Si's FreeBuds and the electronic device 100 . In this way, the user to whom Li Si's FreeBuds belongs can stop other users from using their own headphones for collaborative work.
  • the user can actively add his own electronic device to other users' hyperterminals as a cross-account device.
  • users can use their own electronic devices to cooperate with other users' electronic devices.
  • Li Si can request to add his earphone as a cross-account device to the HyperTerminal of Zhang San's mobile phone as the core device.
  • Li Si's earphone can cooperate with Zhang San's mobile phone.
  • Zhang San's mobile phone can share the audio to Li Si's earphone.
  • Li Si can listen to the audio shared from Zhang San's mobile phone through his earphone.
  • the electronic device 300 may display a user interface 2810 .
  • the user interface 2810 may include a device connection status icon 2811 and a display area 2821 for devices with different accounts.
  • a mobile phone icon 2801 may be displayed in the device connection status icon 2811 .
  • the mobile phone icon 2801 may represent the core device of the hyper terminal, that is, the electronic device 300 .
  • the account for logging in to Li Si in the electronic device 300 is taken as an example for illustration. That is, the electronic device 300 may be Li Si's mobile phone.
  • the device connection status diagram 2811 may also include device icons of devices with the same account that are searched by the electronic device 300 .
  • the non-same-account device display area 2821 can be used to display device icons of cross-account devices and device icons of non-account devices searched by one or more electronic devices 300 .
  • Zhang San's MateBook icon, Zhang San's MatePad icon, and Zhang San's P50 icon 2822 may represent an electronic device named Zhang San's P50, and the electronic device may be the aforementioned electronic device 100 . That is, the electronic device 100 may be Zhang San's mobile phone.
  • the electronic device 300 can instruct Li Si's FreeBuds to perform device binding with the electronic device 100 .
  • the user to which Li Si's FreeBuds belongs (such as Li Si) is different from the user to which the electronic device 100 belongs (such as Zhang San).
  • the electronic device 300 instructs Li Si's FreeBuds to cooperate with the electronic device 100, and needs to ask the user to whom the electronic device 100 belongs whether to agree. That is to say, before Li Si's FreeBuds and the electronic device 100 establish cooperation, the device can be bound first.
  • the electronic device 300 may display the connection code setting box 2831 and the input keyboard 2832 shown in FIG. 28G .
  • the connection code setting box 2831 can be used to set the connection code for device binding between Li Si's FreeBuds and the electronic device 100 .
  • the input keyboard 2832 can be used for the user to input the connection code in the connection code setting box 2831 .
  • the electronic device 300 may send a binding request to the electronic device 100 in response to an operation acting on a control determined in the connection code setting box 2831 .
  • the binding request can be used to instruct Li Si's FreeBuds to request cooperation with the electronic device 100 .
  • the above binding request may be sent to the electronic device 100 through Li Si's FreeBuds.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the binding prompt box 2833 shown in FIG. 28H .
  • the binding prompt box 2833 may refer to the aforementioned binding prompt box 2221 shown in FIG. 22D .
  • the electronic device 100 may display the connection code input box 2834 shown in FIG. 28I.
  • the connection code input box 2834 may refer to the connection code input box 2222 shown in FIG. 22E.
  • the electronic device 100 may send a consent message to the electronic device 300 in response to the operation of the control determined in the connection code input box 2834 .
  • the consent message may include the connection code (such as 710710) entered in the connection code input box 2834 .
  • the electronic device 300 may verify whether the connection code in the consent message is the same as the connection code set in the connection code setting box 2831 shown in FIG. 28G . If they are the same, the electronic device 300 may instruct Li Si's FreeBuds to cooperate with the electronic device.
  • Li Si's FreeBuds When Li Si's FreeBuds cooperate with the electronic device 100, the electronic device 100 can display the user interface 2210 shown in Figure 28J, and the electronic device 300 can display the user interface 2810 shown in Figure 28K.
  • Li Si's FreeBuds icon is attached to the mobile phone icon 505 .
  • Li Si's FreeBuds icon 2823 is attached to Zhang San's P50 icon 2822 .
  • the electronic device 100 can respond to the action of acting on the icon of Li Si's FreeBuds shown in FIG. 28J , dragging the icon of Li Si's FreeBuds to separate from the mobile phone icon 505, and stop the electronic device 100 and Li Si's FreeBuds synergy.
  • the electronic device 300 may respond to the operation of dragging Li Si's FreeBuds icon to separate from Zhang San's P50 icon 2822 acting on Li Si's FreeBuds icon shown in FIG. Li Si's FreeBuds collaboration.
  • the cross-account device joins the hyperterminal, either by the core device of the hyperterminal inviting the cross-account device to join, or by applying for cross-account device to join.
  • the core device of the hyperterminal invites the cross-account device to join
  • the core device may ask the cross-account device whether to agree to join the hyperterminal.
  • the cross-account device can ask the core device whether to allow the cross-account device to join the HyperTerminal.
  • one electronic device can work cooperatively with multiple electronic devices at the same time.
  • the aforementioned FreeBuds of Li Si can also cooperate with the electronic device 300 while cooperating with the electronic device 100 .
  • Li Si's FreeBuds can include two earphones (left earphone and right earphone).
  • One earphone in Li Si's FreeBuds can play audio from the electronic device 100 .
  • another earphone in Li Si's FreeBuds can play audio from the electronic device 300 .
  • a printer can be added to different hyperterminals at the same time. This one printer can receive printing requests from multiple electronic devices, and provide corresponding printing services for the multiple electronic devices.
  • the cross-account devices may stop coordinating with other electronic devices in the hyperterminal at any time in response to user operations.
  • the coordinated electronic devices in the hyperterminal with the above-mentioned electronic device 100 as the core device include the above-mentioned FreeBuds of Li Si.
  • Li Si's FreeBuds can play audio from the electronic device 100 .
  • Li Si's FreeBuds can stop playing audio in response to an operation acting on the Freebuds to stop playing.
  • Li Si's FreeBuds can also receive a stop coordination instruction sent by an electronic device (such as Li Si's mobile phone) that is paired with him, and exit the above-mentioned hyper terminal according to the stop coordination instruction, and stop coordinating with the electronic device 100 . That is to say, when Li Si's FreeBuds joins the HyperTerminal as a cross-account device and cooperates with other electronic devices in the HyperTerminal, the user to which Li Si's FreeBuds belongs can take back Li Si's FreeBuds at any time and stop other users from using their own. Electronic equipment.
  • an electronic device such as Li Si's mobile phone
  • a device without an account may only join one HyperTerminal at a time, and cooperate with one electronic device.
  • the unaccounted device may send a waiting message to the device that sent the aforementioned collaboration request.
  • the waiting message can be used to remind the user that the device without an account has been occupied and can only be used after the cooperation of other users is completed.
  • the electronic device 100 can record the electronic device removed from the HyperTerminal in the device recycle bin. In this way, the user can view the electronic device that he has removed from the HyperTerminal in the device recycle bin, and can add the removed electronic device to the HyperTerminal again.
  • the following introduces a scenario of managing a hyperterminal provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 29A and FIG. 29B exemplarily show a schematic diagram of a scene for managing a hyperterminal.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a user interface 2210 .
  • the user interface 2210 may include a device recycle bin control 2901 .
  • the electronic device 100 may display a recycle bin list 2902 shown in FIG. 29B.
  • the recycle bin list 2902 can be used to display icons of devices removed from the device connection status diagram 2211 , so that the user can check which electronic devices he has removed.
  • the electronic device 100 may remove Li Si's FreeBuds icon from the device connection status icon 2211 according to the aforementioned operations shown in FIG. 27D . Then, the electronic device 100 may display Li Si's FreeBuds icon in the above-mentioned recycle bin list 2902 .
  • the recycle bin list 2902 may include an icon of John's FreeBuds 2902A, a restore control 2902B.
  • Li Si's FreeBuds icon 2902A may represent Li Si's FreeBuds.
  • the restore control 2902B can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to add Lisi's FreeBuds to the core device as the hyperterminal of the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 may display an icon of Li Si's FreeBuds in the device connection status illustration 2211 .
  • the recycle bin list 2902 may also include device icons of other electronic devices and corresponding restore controls.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the method for displaying electronic equipment in the above-mentioned recycle bin list.
  • electronic devices may be represented only by device names in the recycle bin list.
  • the electronic device 100 may no longer display the device icon of the electronic device in the device connection state diagram 2211 . That is, the device icon of the electronic device in the recycle bin list 2902 can be displayed in the device connection status icon 2211 again.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the device identifier of the electronic device in the device connection status diagram 2211 again.
  • the device binding process between the electronic device 100 and the cross-account device can refer to the process shown in FIGS. 24A-24D . It can be understood that the cross-account devices in the recycle bin list 2902 have been bound with the electronic device 100 once. The user can add the cross-account device in the recycle bin list 2902 to the hyperterminal without setting the connection code. This can simplify the user's operation of adding cross-account devices in the recycle bin list 2902 to the hyperterminal, and improve user experience.
  • the embodiment of the present application uses a cross-account device as an example to illustrate the device binding process of an electronic device joining the hyperterminal and the process of removing the electronic device from the hyperterminal.
  • Other electronic devices such as devices without an account, can also be bound with the core device of the hyper terminal when joining the hyper terminal, and the binding process can refer to the introduction of the foregoing embodiments.
  • FIG. 30A to FIG. 30C exemplarily show the scenario of managing hyperterminals.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a user interface 3010 .
  • the user interface 3010 may be a control center interface of the electronic device 100 .
  • the user interface 3010 may include a hyperterminal function card 3011 .
  • One or more device icons of electronic devices may be displayed in the hyperterminal function card 3011 .
  • the above one or more electronic devices may be searched by the electronic device 100 .
  • the hyperterminal function card 3011 may also include a setting control 3012 .
  • the setting control 3012 can be used to open the setting interface of the hyper terminal.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 3020 shown in FIG. 30B.
  • the user interface 3020 is the setting interface of the hyper terminal.
  • the user interface 3020 may include a hyperterminal entry 3021 , a video introduction 3022A, a usage prompt 3022B, a local control 3023 , and a same-account device control 3024 . in:
  • the hyperterminal entry 3021 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to provide a unified entry for interaction between the core device in the hyperterminal and multiple associated devices. For example, in response to an operation on the hyperterminal entry 3021, the electronic device 100 may display the aforementioned user interface shown in FIG. 22A.
  • the video introduction 3022A may include videos for introducing the functions and usage methods of the HyperTerminal. This can improve users' awareness of HyperTerminal and help users use HyperTerminal better.
  • the usage prompt 3022B may include text information for introducing the functions and usage methods of the HyperTerminal, so as to help the user understand the HyperTerminal.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the content in the usage prompt 3022B.
  • the local control 3023 can be used to view related device information of the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 may be a core device of a hyper terminal.
  • the electronic device 100 may be a mobile phone modeled as Hua Wei P50.
  • the login account on the electronic device 100 may be 123xxxxxx.
  • the above-mentioned model and login account of the electronic device 100 are only exemplary descriptions, and should not be construed as limiting the present application.
  • the electronic device 100 can also display more related device information of the electronic device 100.
  • the same-account device control 3024 can be used to view electronic devices with the same account as the electronic device 100 (ie, the core device) in the HyperTerminal.
  • the account registered on the electronic device 100 may be Zhang San's account.
  • the accounts logged in on Zhang San's MateBook and Zhang San's MatePad are both Zhang San's accounts.
  • Zhang San's MateBook and Zhang San's MatePad may be devices with the same account in the hyper terminal whose core device is the electronic device 100 .
  • the same-account device control 3024 may include the device identifier of Zhang San's MateBook and the device identifier of Zhang San's MatePad.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a device management interface.
  • the device management interface can facilitate the user to manage the electronic device whose login account (or associated account) is Zhang San's account, such as removing the electronic device from the HyperTerminal, canceling the association of the electronic device with Zhang San's account, and so on.
  • User interface 3020 may also contain more content.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 3020 shown in FIG. 30C .
  • the user interface 3020 may further include a shared device control 3025 , a cross-account device control 3026 , a binding control 3027 , and a more setting control 3028 . in:
  • Shared devices control 3025 can be used to view family group devices, shared devices.
  • the aforementioned family group device may be an electronic device located in the same family group as the electronic device 100 .
  • the above-mentioned shared device may be an electronic device jointly managed and controlled by multiple electronic devices including the electronic device 100 .
  • the MatePad icon in the shared device control 3025 shown in FIG. 30C may represent a family group device, and the MateBook icon may represent a shared device.
  • the aforementioned family group devices and shared devices can all be associated devices in the HyperTerminal, and can cooperate with other electronic devices in the HyperTerminal.
  • the electronic device 100 in response to manipulation of the shared device control 3025, may display a user interface of a smart living application.
  • the above-mentioned smart life application program may be an APP for managing the above-mentioned family group equipment and shared equipment.
  • a cross-account device control 3026 can be used to view cross-account devices.
  • Li Si's FreeBuds and Li Si's MatePad which are cross-account devices, are both bound to the electronic device 100 , and a hyperterminal whose core device is the electronic device 100 is added.
  • the electronic device 100 may display Si Li's FreeBuds icon and Si Li's MatePad icon in the cross-account device control 3026 .
  • the cross-account device control 3026 may also include an unbinding control.
  • the unbinding control can be used to contact the device binding relationship between the corresponding electronic device and the electronic device 100 . When unbinding, the relevant electronic device can exit the core device as the hyper terminal of the electronic device 100 .
  • the binding control 3027 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to search for other electronic devices and perform device binding.
  • the more setting control 3028 may include service flow recommendation options and multi-device task center options.
  • the above-mentioned service flow recommendation option can be used to turn on or turn off the function of recommending scene-based services that can be provided by the coordinated electronic devices in the hyperterminal.
  • the HyperTerminal can, according to the device type, device features, product positioning, device usage, collaborative services that the device can provide, the current environment of the device, the operating status of the device, One or more scenario-based service options based on comprehensive consideration of the user's recently used applications, currently running applications, and location information input by the user, and displayed on the user interface, so that users can quickly start related services or functions.
  • the above multi-device task center option can be used to enable or disable the function of distributing atomized services provided by the coordinated electronic devices in the hyperterminal.
  • the hyperterminal may display an option for selecting an atomized service on the user interface according to the atomized service that can be provided by each electronic device in the hyperterminal. In this way, the user can choose which electronic device provides the atomization service in the scenario-based service provided by the hyper terminal according to the needs.
  • the user interface 3020 may also include more or less controls for managing the HyperTerminal.
  • the layout of the user interface 3020 is only an exemplary description of the embodiment of the application, and should not limit the application.
  • the electronic device 100 can provide rich management controls to facilitate the user to manage the hyperterminal and provide the user with an experience of using the hyperterminal.
  • the core device of the hyperterminal can provide one or more options of scene-based services for users to choose.
  • One or more of the above scenario-based services can be based on the device type, device features, product positioning, device usage, device-provided collaborative services, device current environment, device operating status, user recent Based on comprehensive consideration of the applications used, currently running applications, and location information input by the user.
  • the aforementioned coordinated electronic devices may provide corresponding scenario-based services according to the option of the scenario-based service selected by the user. For the above specific scenarios, reference may be made to the scenarios shown in FIGS. 6 to 8 .
  • the multiple electronic devices can directly provide a scenario-based service.
  • This scenario-based service can be based on the device type, device features, product positioning, device usage, device-provided collaborative services, current environment of the device, device operating status, and recently used applications of the electronic device that the HyperTerminal uses. , the currently running application, the location information input by the user, etc., and comprehensively consider the scenario-based services that the user most likely needs.
  • the following introduces a scenario of collaboration between electronic devices in a hyper terminal provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 31A to FIG. 31C exemplarily show schematic diagrams of scenarios of collaboration between electronic devices in a hyper terminal.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a user interface 2210 .
  • the user interface 2210 may include a device connection status icon 2211 .
  • a mobile phone icon 505 and Zhang San's MatePad icon 3111 may be displayed in the device connection status icon 2211 .
  • the electronic device 100 can cooperate with the electronic device named Zhang San's MatePad (hereinafter referred to as Zhang San's MatePad).
  • Zhang San's MatePad the electronic device 100 may comprehensively consider the scenario-based services most likely to be required by the user for collaboration between the electronic device 100 and Zhang San's MatePad, for example, multi-screen collaborative services.
  • the electronic device 100 and Zhang San's MatePad can cooperate to provide a multi-screen collaborative service.
  • the electronic device 100 may also display the user interface 2210 shown in FIG. 31B.
  • Zhang San's MatePad icon 3112 is attached to the mobile phone icon 505 , which may indicate that Zhang San's MatePad and the electronic device 100 have cooperated.
  • the user interface 2210 shown in FIG. 31B may also include a service settings control 3114 .
  • the electronic device 100 may display a service selection box 3115 shown in FIG. 31C.
  • the service selection box 3115 can be used for the user to select the scenario-based service provided by Zhang San's MatePad and the electronic device 100 in cooperation.
  • the service selection box 3115 may include a multi-screen collaboration option 3115A and a camera collaboration option 3115B.
  • An option in the service selection box 3115 being selected may indicate that the scenario-based service corresponding to this option is the scenario-based service provided by Zhang San's MatePad and the electronic device 100 .
  • the multi-screen collaborative service is the scenario-based service that the user most likely needs when Zhang San's MatePad cooperates with the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 can provide multi-screen collaborative service with Zhang San's MatePad.
  • the multi-screen collaboration option 3115A in the service selection box 3115 is selected. If the scene service required by the user is not a multi-screen collaborative service, the user can adjust the scene service provided by the electronic device 100 and Zhang San's MatePad through the options in the service selection box 3115 . For example, the user may select the above-mentioned camera cooperation option 3115B, so that the electronic device 100 and Zhang San's MatePad provide the camera cooperation service.
  • the HyperTerminal can predict the scenario-based services required by the user, and directly provide the predicted scenario-based services after detecting the user's operation of triggering the electronic device to establish a coordinated connection. In this way, the user can quickly make the electronic devices cooperate to provide the services they need by pulling and closing the device icons. If what the user needs is not the scenario-based service provided by the hyper terminal according to the prediction, the user can also adjust the service provided by the electronic device cooperation.
  • FIG. 32A and FIG. 32B exemplarily show a schematic diagram of a scene where electronic devices in a hyper terminal cooperate.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a user interface 3010 .
  • the hyperterminal function card 3011 in the user interface 3010 may include device icons of one or more electronic devices. For example, Zhang San's MateBook icon 3011A, Zhang San's MatePad icon, Zhang San's FreeBuds icon, and Sound X icon.
  • the device icon of an electronic device in the hyperterminal function card 3011 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to cooperate with this electronic device.
  • the electronic device 100 in response to an operation on Zhang San's MateBook icon 3011A, such as a touch operation, the electronic device 100 can cooperate with Zhang San's MateBook.
  • the electronic device 100 can predict the scenario-based services (such as multi-screen collaborative services) that the user may most likely need when using the electronic device 100 to cooperate with Zhang San's MateBook.
  • the electronic device 100 cooperates with Zhang San's MateBook to provide the above-mentioned predictive scenario-based service.
  • the electronic device 100 can display the user interface 3010 shown in FIG. 32B .
  • a MateBook icon 3011B of Zhang San and a collaborative prompt control 3011C may be displayed in the hyperterminal function card 3011 .
  • the presentation forms of Zhang San's MateBook icon 3011B and Zhang San's MateBook icon 3011A shown in FIG. 32A may be different.
  • Zhang San's MateBook icon 3011B may be displayed in a dark filled form. This can be conveniently used to distinguish among the device icons presented by the hyperterminal function card 3011 , which device icons correspond to electronic devices that are coordinating with other electronic devices in the hyperterminal.
  • the collaboration prompt control 3011C may also prompt the user that Zhang San's MateBook is cooperating with the electronic device 100 .
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the expression form of the device icon in the hyper terminal function card 3011 .
  • the user wants to adjust the service provided by Zhang San's MateBook in cooperation with the electronic device 100, he can open the device interaction interface related to the hyperterminal function through the hyperterminal function card (refer to the user interface 2210 shown in FIG. 22A above. ). Then, the user adjusts the service provided by Zhang San's MateBook and the electronic device 100 on the device interaction interface related to the hyper terminal function.
  • the user can quickly trigger the electronic device interaction in the hyper terminal on the control center interface of the electronic device 100 , thereby providing scenario-based services.
  • the above-mentioned operation of triggering the cooperation of the electronic devices in the hyperterminal is simple and convenient, which can improve the user's experience of interacting with multiple electronic devices.
  • FIG. 33A to FIG. 33C exemplarily show schematic diagrams of scenarios of cooperation of electronic devices in a hyper terminal.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a user interface 3010 .
  • the hyper terminal function card 3011 in the user interface 3010 may include a Mate 40 icon 3011D.
  • the Mate 40 icon 3011D may represent an electronic device named Mate 40 (hereinafter referred to as Mate 40).
  • the electronic device 100 may display a service selection box 3311 shown in FIG. 33B .
  • the service selection box 3311 can be used for the user to select the scenario-based services that Mate 40 and the electronic device 100 can provide in cooperation.
  • the service selection box 3311 may include a camera cooperation option 3311A and a microphone cooperation option 3311B.
  • the option of the scenario-based service included in the service selection box 3311 may be determined according to the atomized service of the electronic device 100 and the Mate40.
  • the service selection box 3311 may also include more or less options.
  • the electronic device 100 and the Mate 40 in response to the operation of the camera coordination option 3311A, can cooperate to provide a camera coordination service. For example, the electronic device 100 can call the Mate 40 to turn on the camera to collect images.
  • the electronic device 100 can display a user interface 3010 as shown in FIG. 33C.
  • a Mate 40 icon 3011E and a cooperative prompt control 3011F can be displayed in the hyperterminal function card 3011.
  • the representation forms of the Mate 40 icon 3011E and the Mate 40 icon 3011D shown in FIG. 33A may be different.
  • the Mate 40 icon 3011E can be displayed in a dark filled form.
  • the above-mentioned cooperation prompt control 3011F can be used to prompt the user that the Mate 40 is cooperating with the electronic device 100.
  • the user can quickly trigger the electronic device interaction in the hyper terminal on the control center interface of the electronic device 100 , thereby providing scenario-based services.
  • the scenario-based service provided by the electronic device in the hyper terminal may be selected by the user.
  • the operation of triggering the coordination of the electronic devices in the hyper terminal is simple and convenient, which can improve the user's experience of interacting with multiple electronic devices.
  • the printer can join HyperTerminal.
  • the electronic device 100 may cooperate with the printer, and use the printer to print the file.
  • FIG. 34A to FIG. 34O exemplarily show a schematic diagram of scenarios where a hyperterminal uses a printer to provide collaborative services.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a user interface 2210 .
  • the electronic device 100 may display the device icon of the searched electronic device in the device connection state illustration 2211 of the user interface 2210 .
  • the electronic device 100 may search for an electronic device named PixLab X1 printer (hereinafter referred to as PixLab X1 printer).
  • a PixLab X1 printer icon 3401 may be displayed in the device connection status icon 2211.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the print setting option box 3402 in FIG. 34B .
  • the setting option box 3402 may contain one or more setting options for instructing the printer to print the file. For example, number of copies option, print area option, printing paper single/double sided option, printing paper landscape/vertical option, printing paper size option, page margin option, etc.
  • the above-mentioned number of copies option can be used to set the number of copies that the printer prints for the received file that needs to be printed.
  • the print area option can be used to set the area to be printed in the file.
  • the area to be printed can be the entire document, or it can be the first page of a document.
  • the Print Paper Single/Double Sided option can be used to set whether to print on one side or two sides.
  • the Print Paper Landscape/Portrait option can be used to set whether to print in landscape or portrait orientation on the paper.
  • the Print Paper Size option can be used to set the size of the paper used for printing. For example, the size of the paper is A3, A4, and so on.
  • the page margin option can be used to set the margins of the printed content on the paper.
  • the setting options box 3402 may also contain more or fewer options.
  • the electronic device 100 can display the user interface 2210 shown in FIG. 34C.
  • the PixLab X1 printer icon 3402 is attached to the mobile phone icon 505, which may indicate that the PixLab X1 printer and the electronic device 100 have been coordinated.
  • the representation of the PixLab X1 printer icon 3402 may be different from the representation of the aforementioned PixLab X1 printer icon 3401 shown in FIG. 34A .
  • the PixLab X1 printer icon 3402 may appear as a dark fill.
  • the user interface 2210 may also include a printing hover 3405 .
  • Print control 3405A may be included in print hover 3405 .
  • the print control 3405A can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to send the print file to the PixLab X1 printer for printing.
  • the printing floating ball 3405 can be suspended on the top layer of the user interface.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the display shown in FIG. 34D Print levitation ball 3406.
  • the expression form of printing floating ball 3405 and printing floating ball 3406 may be different.
  • printed hover 3406 may be displayed with less transparency than printed hover 3405, with a portion of printed hover 3405 hidden. That is to say, when the user has not used the cooperative service provided by the PixLab X1 printer and the electronic device 100 for a long time, the above-mentioned printed floating ball can still be suspended on the user interface, but the transparency of the display and the display area occupied can be reduced. Thereby reducing the impact of the user using other controls in the user interface.
  • the printing floating ball can continuously float on the user interface.
  • the user may open a user interface on the electronic device 100 displaying files to be printed.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 3410 shown in FIG. 34E.
  • the user interface 3410 may be a user interface of a gallery application.
  • the user interface 3410 may include a picture 3411.
  • a print hover 3406 may be suspended over the user interface 3410 .
  • the electronic device 100 may display the printing floating ball 3407 shown in FIG. 34F.
  • the above-mentioned printing suspension ball 3406 may be equivalent to shrinking the suspension ball, that is, it is obtained by shrinking the above-mentioned printing suspension ball 3405 shown in FIG. 34C .
  • the above-mentioned printed floating ball 3407 may be equivalent to unfolding the floating ball, that is, it is obtained by expanding the printed floating ball 3405 .
  • print hover 3407 may contain print control 3405A.
  • the printing floating ball 3407 may also include a text prompt "click the control on the left to print", to remind the user how to use the printing floating ball 3407.
  • the electronic device 100 can send the file currently displayed on the user interface 3410 (ie, the picture 3411 ) to the PixLab X1 printer for printing.
  • the electronic device 100 can display the printing floating ball 3408 shown in FIG. 34G .
  • Print control 3405A may also be included in print hover 3408 .
  • the text prompt "printing, click to view the printing task" contained in the printing floating ball 3408 is different from the text prompt in the printing floating ball 3407.
  • the text prompt in the printing floating ball 3408 can prompt the user how to use the printing floating ball to check the printing task. It can be understood that, when there is no printing task between the electronic device 100 and the PixLab X1 printer, the electronic device 100 can display the printing floating ball 3407 shown in FIG. 34F above.
  • the electronic device 100 can display the printing floating ball 3408 shown in FIG. 34G above.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the expression forms of printing the floating ball under the above-mentioned different situations.
  • the expression form of printing the floating ball can also be the same.
  • the user can view different pictures through a user operation of sliding left or right on the user interface 3410 .
  • the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 3410 shown in FIG. 34H.
  • a picture 3412 may be displayed on the user interface 3410 .
  • the electronic device 100 can send the file (ie, the picture 3412) currently displayed on the user interface to the PixLab X1 printer for printing.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a print job list 3413 as shown in FIG. 34J .
  • the print task list 3413 may include a file name 3414 , a print status 3415 , a file name 3416 , and a pause control 3417 .
  • the file name 3414 may be, for example, cat.jpg, which may represent a print job for printing the picture 3411 shown in FIG. 34F.
  • the print status 3415 can be used to reflect the status of the print job corresponding to the file name 3414 .
  • the printing status 3415 can be completed, which can indicate that the PixLab X1 printer has completed printing the above picture 3411.
  • the file name 3416 may be, for example, dog.jpg, which may represent a print job for printing the picture 3412 shown in FIG. 34H.
  • the pause control 3417 may indicate that the print task corresponding to the file name 3416 is being printed but not yet completed.
  • the pause control 3417 can be used to pause the print job corresponding to the file name 3416 .
  • the electronic device 100 may send an instruction to the PixLab X1 printer to pause printing the picture 3412.
  • the electronic device 100 can change the above pause control 3417 to the control shown in the print state 3415 to remind the user that the PixLab X1 printer has completed printing the above picture 3412.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the implementation method for the electronic device 100 and the PixLab X1 printer to cooperate to provide printing services.
  • the electronic device 100 in response to the operation on the print control 3405A, can send the file currently displayed on the user interface to the PixLab X1 printer for printing.
  • the above-mentioned files displayed on the current user interface are not limited to pictures, but may also be text-type documents, tables, and the like.
  • the electronic device 100 may perform a screenshot operation on the currently displayed user interface, and send the file obtained by the screenshot operation to the PixLab X1 printer for printing.
  • the user can stop the electronic device 100 from cooperating with the PixLab X1 printer by dragging the PixLab X1 printer icon 3403 away from the phone icon 505 in the user interface shown in FIG. 34C .
  • the user can also stop the electronic device 100 from cooperating with the PixLab X1 printer by printing the floating ball as described above.
  • the electronic device 100 in response to an operation on the printing floating ball 3408, such as a long press operation, the electronic device 100 can move and print on the user interface according to the finger movement track when the user drags the printing floating ball 3408. levitate ball.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the printed floating ball 3409 shown in FIG. 34L.
  • the printed floating ball 3409 and the printed floating ball 3408 may have different expressions.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the delete control 3431 shown in FIG. 34L on the user interface 3410 .
  • the electronic device 100 may stop the cooperation between the electronic device 100 and the PixLab X1 printer, and cancel the display of the printing floating ball on the user interface.
  • the electronic device 100 may obtain a printable file on the currently displayed user interface. If there is no printable file on the currently displayed user interface, the electronic device 100 may prompt the user that there is no printable content on the current page.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a user interface 3440 .
  • the user interface 3440 may be a desktop of the electronic device 100 .
  • a print floating ball 3407 is suspended on the user interface 3440 .
  • the electronic device 100 may display a prompt box 3441 as shown in FIG. 34O.
  • the prompt box 3441 may be used to prompt that there is no printable file on the user interface 3440 and the print operation cannot be performed.
  • the prompt box 3441 may include a print reminder control 3442 .
  • the above-mentioned printing notice control 3442 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to display the precautions for printing with the PixLab X1 printer, so as to help the user understand how to use the printing service provided by the electronic device 100 and the PixLab X1 printer.
  • the embodiment of this application does not limit the content contained in the prompt box 3441.
  • the PixLab X1 printer before the PixLab X1 printer cooperates with the electronic device 100, it can be bound with the electronic device 100 first.
  • the electronic device 100 before the PixLab X1 printer cooperates with the electronic device 100, it can be bound with the electronic device 100 first.
  • the above device binding process reference may be made to the introduction of the aforementioned embodiments related to device binding. I won't go into details here.
  • the printer can join the hyperterminal and cooperate with other electronic devices in the hyperterminal to provide users with printing services.
  • the above method can facilitate the user to quickly coordinate the electronic device 100 with the printer.
  • the user can browse and search for files to be printed, and realize fast printing through the above-mentioned printing floating ball.
  • the above-mentioned user operation for printing is simple and convenient, which can improve the user experience of using the printer for collaboration.
  • the user can also quickly stop the coordination between the electronic device 100 and the printer through the printing suspension ball.
  • the term “when” may be interpreted to mean “if” or “after” or “in response to determining" or “in response to detecting".
  • the phrases “in determining” or “if detected (a stated condition or event)” may be interpreted to mean “if determining" or “in response to determining" or “on detecting (a stated condition or event)” or “in response to detecting (a stated condition or event)”.
  • all or part of them may be implemented by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof.
  • software When implemented using software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions according to the embodiments of the present application will be generated in whole or in part.
  • the computer can be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server or data center Transmission to another website site, computer, server, or data center by wired (eg, coaxial cable, optical fiber, DSL) or wireless (eg, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) means.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer, or a data storage device such as a server or a data center integrated with one or more available media.
  • the available media may be magnetic media (eg, floppy disk, hard disk, magnetic tape), optical media (eg, DVD), or semiconductor media (eg, solid state hard disk), etc.
  • the processes can be completed by computer programs to instruct related hardware.
  • the programs can be stored in computer-readable storage media.
  • When the programs are executed may include the processes of the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the aforementioned storage medium includes: ROM or random access memory RAM, magnetic disk or optical disk, and other various media that can store program codes.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Human Computer Interaction (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • User Interface Of Digital Computer (AREA)

Abstract

The present application discloses a device interaction method, an electronic device and a system. The present application provides a unified ingress for the interaction between a core device and multiple associated devices. When multiple devices initiate a connection, a hyperterminal system provides a user with one or more scenario-based service options. Different scenario-based service options are ingresses of corresponding services in different application scenarios. In addition, different atomic service/function combinations are recommended to users, as well as matching devices and the like. By implementing the method provided in the present application, users may quickly select scenario-based services and/or atomic services according to personal needs. Scenario-based services and/or atomic services available under a device combination are targetedly provided by means of a user-selected device combination. Detailed and rich usage scenarios are listed for the users, and the users are guided to fully explore more application scenarios by using the functions of a hyperterminal, thereby achieving the effect of recommending scenario-based services according to device combinations.

Description

一种设备交互方法、电子设备及系统A device interaction method, electronic device and system
本申请要求于2021年08月31日提交中国专利局、申请号为202111016484.5、申请名称为“一种设备交互方法、电子设备及系统”的中国专利申请的优先权,以及要求于2022年3月18日提交中国专利局、申请号为202210270366.5、申请名称为“一种设备交互方法、电子设备及系统”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of the Chinese patent application with the application number 202111016484.5 and the application name "A Device Interaction Method, Electronic Device and System" submitted to the China Patent Office on August 31, 2021, and the request is filed in March 2022 The priority of a Chinese patent application with application number 202210270366.5 and application title "A Device Interaction Method, Electronic Device and System" submitted to the China Patent Office on the 18th, the entire contents of which are incorporated by reference in this application.
技术领域technical field
本申请涉及终端技术领域,尤其涉及一种设备交互方法、电子设备及系统。The present application relates to the technical field of terminals, and in particular to a device interaction method, electronic device and system.
背景技术Background technique
随着消费升级,用户拥有的智能终端设备的数量越来越多。在一些使用场景中,用户常常需要两个或两个以上的终端设备联动或协同工作以提供某些服务、实现某些功能,也可称之为跨设备业务。例如手机和智慧屏协同实现视频投屏;手机向其他设备分享文件或图片等。As consumption upgrades, users own more and more smart terminal devices. In some usage scenarios, users often need two or more terminal devices to link or work together to provide certain services and realize certain functions, which can also be called cross-device services. For example, mobile phones and smart screens cooperate to realize video projection; mobile phones share files or pictures with other devices.
通常来说,同一设备厂商或者同一个应用厂商对于不同的跨设备业务可能设置不同的入口,以及不同的触发方式。不同设备厂商或者不同应用厂商对于同一个跨设备业务也可能设置不同的入口,以及不同的触发方式。例如,用户需要将电子设备A上的图片分享给电子设备B,用户可以在电子设备A上选中待分享的图片,点击分享控件,然后电子设备A开始搜索周围的设备并显示设备列表,用户在该设备列表中选择电子设备B,电子设备A就可以将选中的图片发送给电子设备B了。再例如,用户需要将电子设备A的屏幕内容投屏到电子设备B上,用户需要开启电子设备A和电子设备B的无线功能,然后配对,建立连接,之后用户在电子设备A上打开与投屏相关的应用,在该应用界面中操作投屏控件,然后电子设备A向电子设备B发送投屏数据,电子设备B显示电子设备A的屏幕镜像。Generally speaking, the same device manufacturer or the same application manufacturer may set different entry points and different trigger methods for different cross-device services. Different device manufacturers or different application manufacturers may also set different entry points and different trigger methods for the same cross-device service. For example, if a user needs to share a picture on electronic device A to electronic device B, the user can select the picture to be shared on electronic device A, click the sharing control, and then electronic device A starts to search for surrounding devices and display a list of devices. Select electronic device B in the device list, and electronic device A can send the selected picture to electronic device B. For another example, the user needs to cast the screen content of electronic device A to electronic device B. The user needs to turn on the wireless function of electronic device A and electronic device B, and then pair and establish a connection. After that, the user opens and casts on electronic device A. For screen-related applications, the screen projection control is operated in the application interface, and then electronic device A sends screen projection data to electronic device B, and electronic device B displays the screen image of electronic device A.
由上可见,开启多个设备协同工作的时候,用户操作繁琐,入口分布零散,人机交互性能不佳,用户体验差。It can be seen from the above that when multiple devices are enabled to work together, the user operation is cumbersome, the entrances are scattered, the human-computer interaction performance is poor, and the user experience is poor.
发明内容Contents of the invention
本申请提供了一种设备交互方法、电子设备及系统,该设备交互方法提供了核心设备与多个关联设备之间交互的统一入口,在多个设备发起连接的时候,超级终端系统给用户提供一个或多个场景化服务选项,不同场景化服务选项为不同应用场景下对应的服务的入口。另外还可以给用户推荐不同原子化服务/功能组合,以及推荐搭配设备等。This application provides a device interaction method, electronic device and system. The device interaction method provides a unified entrance for the interaction between the core device and multiple associated devices. When multiple devices initiate a connection, the hyper terminal system provides the user with One or more scenario-based service options, different scenario-based service options are the entrances of corresponding services in different application scenarios. In addition, it can also recommend different atomic service/function combinations to users, as well as recommend collocation equipment, etc.
上述目标和其他目标将通过独立权利要求中的特征来达成。进一步的实现方式在从属权利要求、说明书和附图中体现。The above and other objects are achieved by the features in the independent claims. Further implementations are presented in the dependent claims, the description and the drawings.
第一方面,本申请实施例提供了一种设备交互方法,该方法包括:第一设备显示第一界面,该第一界面包括第一控件和第二控件,该第一控件为指示该第一设备的设备选项,该第二控件为指示第二设备的设备选项,该第二设备是该第一设备发现的设备。第一设备检测到第一用户操作,该第一用户操作用于用户关联该第一设备和该第二设备。第一设备显示第二界面,该第二界面中显示有第一场景化服务的服务选项,该第一场景化服务是第一用户操作所关联的第一设备和第二设备所协同支持的场景化服务。第一设备检测到选择第一场景化服 务的第二用户操作。第一设备指示第二用户操作选中的第一场景化服务的运行。In a first aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a device interaction method, the method includes: the first device displays a first interface, the first interface includes a first control and a second control, and the first control is for indicating the first The device option of the device, the second control indicates the device option of the second device, and the second device is a device discovered by the first device. The first device detects a first user operation, and the first user operation is used for the user to associate the first device with the second device. The first device displays a second interface, the second interface displays service options of a first scenario-based service, and the first scenario-based service is a scenario supported by the first device and the second device associated with the first user operation services. The first device detects a second user operation for selecting the first scenario-based service. The first device instructs the second user to operate the running of the first scenario-based service selected.
实施第一方面的方法,可以提高人机交互性能,用户可以根据个人需求快捷选择场景化服务和/或原子化服务,通过用户选定设备组合,针对性提供了该设备组合下可用的场景化服务和/或原子化服务,给用户列举了详尽、丰富的使用场景,引导用户使用超级终端的功能充分的探索更多的应用场景,实现了按设备组合推荐场景化服务的效果。Implementing the method in the first aspect can improve the performance of human-computer interaction. Users can quickly select scene-based services and/or atomized services according to their personal needs. Through the user-selected device combination, the available scene-based services under the device combination are provided in a targeted manner. Service and/or atomic service lists detailed and rich usage scenarios for users, guides users to fully explore more application scenarios by using the functions of HyperTerminal, and achieves the effect of recommending scenario-based services according to device combinations.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,在第一界面中,第二控件分布在以第一控件为中心的圆周上,第一控件与第二控件为分开状态。参考图5所示的示例,第一设备为核心设备,如手机,第二设备为关联设备,可以为智能手表、智能电视等设备。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, in the first interface, the second controls are distributed on a circle centered on the first control, and the first control is separated from the second control. Referring to the example shown in FIG. 5 , the first device is a core device, such as a mobile phone, and the second device is an associated device, which may be a smart watch, a smart TV, and the like.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,第一界面中第一控件与第二控件的位置关系可以指示第一设备与第二设备之间的以下一项或多项关系:连接关系,或方位关系,或距离关系,或信号强弱关系。其中,第一控件与第二控件分开,指示第一设备与第二设备未连接,第一控件与第二控件相连,指示第一设备与第二设备已连接。和/或,第二控件位于第一控件的左边,或右边,或上边,或下边,分别指示第二设备位于第一设备的左方,或右方,或前方,或后方。和/或,第一控件与第二控件之间的距离越远,指示第一设备与第二设备之间的距离越远,或者,第一设备与第二设备之间的信号越弱,第一控件与第二控件之间的距离越近,指示第一设备与第二设备之间的距离越近,或者,第一设备与第二设备之间的信号越强。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, the positional relationship between the first control and the second control in the first interface may indicate one or more of the following relationships between the first device and the second device: connection relationship, or orientation relationship, or distance relationship, or signal strength relationship. Wherein, the first control is separated from the second control, indicating that the first device is not connected to the second device, and the first control is connected with the second control, indicating that the first device is connected to the second device. And/or, the second control is located on the left, or right, or above, or below the first control, respectively indicating that the second device is located on the left, or right, or front, or rear of the first device. And/or, the farther the distance between the first control and the second control is, the farther the distance between the first device and the second device is indicated, or the weaker the signal between the first device and the second device is, the second The closer the distance between a control and the second control is, the closer the distance between the first device and the second device is, or the stronger the signal between the first device and the second device is.
该第一界面中的设备连接状态图示可以形象、简洁的指示各个设备,以及展示核心设备与关联设备的关系,用户操作方便,界面易懂,用户界面设计更加人性化,用户体验佳。The device connection status icon in the first interface can visually and concisely indicate each device, and display the relationship between the core device and the associated device. The user is easy to operate, the interface is easy to understand, the user interface design is more humanized, and the user experience is good.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,第一用户操作包括第二控件被选中,或第一控件被选中,或所示第一控件和第二控件同时被选中的操作。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, the first user operation includes an operation in which the second control is selected, or the first control is selected, or the first control and the second control are simultaneously selected.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,第一用户操作为用户选中第二控件,并拖拽第二控件向着靠近第一控件的方向移动到指定区域后,释放第二控件的操作。或者第一用户操作为用户同时选中第一控件和第二控件,并拖拽第一控件和第二控件互相贴近,直至第一控件和第二控件的距离小于一定距离,然后释放第一控件和第二控件的操作。该指定区域可以为以第一控件为中心,半径为第一半径距离的圆形区域。或者第一用户操作为用户选中第一控件,并拖拽第一控件向着靠近第二控件的方向移动,直到第一控件和第二控件之间的距离小于一定距离后,释放第一控件的操作。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, the first user operation is an operation in which the user selects the second control, drags the second control to a designated area in a direction close to the first control, and then releases the operation of the second control. Or the first user operation is that the user selects the first control and the second control at the same time, and drags the first control and the second control to be close to each other until the distance between the first control and the second control is less than a certain distance, and then releases the first control and the second control. The operation of the second control. The specified area may be a circular area with the first control as the center and a radius equal to the first radius distance. Or the first user operation is for the user to select the first control, and drag the first control to move towards the direction close to the second control, until the distance between the first control and the second control is less than a certain distance, release the operation of the first control .
第二界面还显示有第一控件与第二控件吸附在一起,表示第一设备与第二设备已建立连接,可以协同工作提供系统级服务。参考图6、图7所示的实施例。该拖拽操作更符合用户的操作习惯,用户学习成本低,操作易上手。两个设备选项吸附在一起可以指两个设备对应的图标的边缘相切,或者,两个设备选项吸附在一起也可以是指这两个设备图标全部或部分重叠在一起。本实施例对吸附的表现形式不作特殊限制。The second interface also shows that the first control and the second control are adsorbed together, indicating that the first device and the second device have established a connection and can work together to provide system-level services. Referring to the embodiment shown in Fig. 6 and Fig. 7 . The drag-and-drop operation is more in line with the user's operating habits, the user's learning cost is low, and the operation is easy to use. The two device options being attracted together may refer to that the edges of the corresponding icons of the two devices are tangent, or the two device options being adsorbed together may also be that the two device icons are completely or partially overlapped. In this embodiment, no special limitation is imposed on the form of adsorption.
在一些实施例中,第二界面中的第二控件可能与第一界面中的第二控件的表现形式有所区别。例如,在图7中,已与手机连接形成超级终端的智能手表图标702可以显示有区别度的标识,便于与未连接状态的关联设备图标区分。如智能手表图标702显示为深色填充形式,指示智能手表与手机处于连接状态,其他还有智能手表图标702的大小小于未连接时的智能手表图标506。In some embodiments, the second control in the second interface may have a different form from the second control in the first interface. For example, in FIG. 7 , the smart watch icon 702 that has been connected to a mobile phone to form a hyperterminal can display a distinctive logo, so as to be easily distinguished from the associated device icon in an unconnected state. For example, the smart watch icon 702 is displayed in a dark filled form, indicating that the smart watch is connected to the mobile phone, and the size of the smart watch icon 702 is smaller than the smart watch icon 506 when not connected.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,第一用户操作为用户点击第二控件,或同时点击第一控件和第二控件的操作。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, the first user operation is an operation in which the user clicks the second control, or simultaneously clicks the first control and the second control.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,第二界面中显示有悬浮控件,该悬浮控件包括第一区域,该第一区域显示第一场景化服务的服务选项。第一用户操作可以为用户按住第二控件的 操作。第二用户操作可以为用户拖拽第二控件至第一区域后,释放第二控件的操作,或者,第二用户操作为用户拖拽第二控件经由第一区域,向着靠近第一控件的方向移动到指定区域后,释放第二控件的操作,该指定区域可以为以第一控件为中心,半径为第一半径距离的圆形区域。参考图11、图12、图13A、图13B、图13C、图13D所描述的实施例。在本实施例中,一个第二用户操作包括了将第二设备关联至第一设备和选择第一场景化服务这两个功能,提高了用户操作效率。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, a floating control is displayed on the second interface, the floating control includes a first area, and the first area displays service options of the first scenario-based service. The first user operation may be an operation in which the user presses and holds the second control. The second user operation may be an operation of releasing the second control after the user drags the second control to the first area, or the second user operation is the user dragging the second control through the first area toward a direction close to the first control After moving to the specified area, the operation of the second control is released. The specified area may be a circular area with the first control as the center and a radius equal to the first radius distance. Embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 11, 12, 13A, 13B, 13C, and 13D. In this embodiment, a second user operation includes two functions of associating the second device with the first device and selecting the first scenario-based service, which improves user operation efficiency.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,被选中的设备选项可以随着用户手指在屏幕上拖动的轨迹而变化位置。本实施例不限定用户拖动设备图标时的手指运动轨迹,用户拖动轨迹可以是任意曲线。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, the selected device option can change its position along with the track of the user's finger dragging on the screen. This embodiment does not limit the finger movement trajectory when the user drags the device icon, and the user's dragging trajectory may be any curve.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,该悬浮控件包括多个圆形区域,或者多个矩形区域,或者多个扇形区域,或者多个扇环形区域,或者多个圆环形区域,或者多个多边形区域等。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, the floating control includes multiple circular areas, or multiple rectangular areas, or multiple fan-shaped areas, or multiple fan-shaped ring areas, or multiple circular ring-shaped areas, or multiple polygonal area, etc.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,第二界面中包括第一控件。第二界面中也可以不包括第一控件。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, the second interface includes the first control. The second interface may also not include the first control.
场景化服务指的是基于使用场景的功能性服务,是可以针对某个特殊场景提供的多个功能或服务的集合。一个场景化服务可以由一个或多个原子化服务支持。在第二界面上显示的场景化服务的服务选项,可以为当前超级终端系统,即第一设备和第二设备的设备组合所能提供的场景化服务,在第一设备上或第二设备上已经安装、部署有这些场景化服务对应的原子能力。Scenario-based services refer to functional services based on usage scenarios, which are a collection of multiple functions or services that can be provided for a specific scenario. A scene service can be supported by one or more atom services. The service options of the scene-based service displayed on the second interface may be the scene-based service provided by the current hyper terminal system, that is, the combination of the first device and the second device, on the first device or on the second device The atomic capabilities corresponding to these scenario-based services have been installed and deployed.
在一些实施例中,某个场景化服务可以是基于某个相同应用,不同设备在该应用服务下提供不同原子能力。该场景化服务其实是由同一个服务商提供,例如,图8所示的示例中,手机和智能手表都安装有运动健康应用,用户在选择户外跑步的场景化服务选项后,手机和智能手表都跳转到运动健康应用中的户外跑步服务,智能手表可以提供定位服务、统计用户运动数据服务等,智能手表可以将用户数据上传至应用服务器,应用服务器再将用户数据同步下发给手机,手机可以提供显示用户的运动轨迹的服务等。对于同一个场景化服务,即使使用同一个客户端,不同设备显示的界面、提供的服务也可以不同。In some embodiments, a certain scenario-based service may be based on a certain same application, and different devices provide different atomic capabilities under the application service. The scenario-based service is actually provided by the same service provider. For example, in the example shown in Figure 8, both the mobile phone and the smart watch are installed with sports and health applications. Both jump to the outdoor running service in the sports and health application. The smart watch can provide positioning services and statistical user sports data services. The mobile phone can provide services such as displaying the user's movement track. For the same scenario-based service, even if the same client is used, different devices may display different interfaces and provide different services.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,第一场景化服务是从第一数据库中查询到的场景化服务,该第一数据库记录了一个或多个设备组合所支持的一个或多个场景化服务,该设备组合包括第一设备和其关联的第二设备构成的设备组合。其中,该场景化服务可以通过以下一项或多项参数确定:设备组合的设备类型、设备特征、产品定位、设备用途、设备所处环境或场景、设备所处状态、最近运行的应用等。参考后续实施例中的表一。该第一数据库可以存储在本地或云服务器上。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, the first scenario-based service is a scenario-based service queried from a first database, and the first database records one or more scenario-based services supported by one or more device combinations. service, the device combination includes a device combination formed by a first device and its associated second device. The scenario-based service can be determined by one or more of the following parameters: device type of device combination, device features, product positioning, device usage, environment or scenario of the device, status of the device, recently run applications, etc. Refer to Table 1 in the subsequent examples. The first database can be stored locally or on a cloud server.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,第一场景化服务是从第二数据库中查询到的场景化服务,该第二数据库记录了一个或多个原子化服务组合所支持的一个或多个场景化服务,该原子化服务组合包括第一设备和其关联的第二设备所具有的原子能力构成的原子化服务组合。其中,原子能力可以包括以下一项或多项:音频输出能力、音频输入能力、显示能力、摄像能力、触控输入能力、键鼠输入能力。该第二数据库可以存储在本地或云服务器上。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, the first scenario-based service is a scenario-based service queried from a second database, and the second database records one or more Scenario-based services, the atomic service combination includes an atomic service combination composed of atomic capabilities of the first device and its associated second device. The atomic capabilities may include one or more of the following: audio output capabilities, audio input capabilities, display capabilities, camera capabilities, touch input capabilities, and keyboard and mouse input capabilities. The second database can be stored locally or on a cloud server.
举例说明,音频输出能力可以包括该设备在播放音频时,支持单声道或者多声道,支持的音效,可支持的频响范围,降噪能力,音频解析能力等;音频输入能力可以包括收声范围、降噪能力等;显示能力可以包括该设备的屏幕大小,显示分辨率参数,刷新率,色彩表现力等;摄像能力可以包括该设备的摄像头类型,拍摄像素,拍摄夜景能力,图像调整能力等;触控输入能力、键鼠输入能力指该设备是否可以支持触控输入或者键鼠输入等。For example, the audio output capability may include whether the device supports mono or multi-channel, supported sound effects, supported frequency response range, noise reduction capability, audio analysis capability, etc. when the device is playing audio; the audio input capability may include receiving Acoustic range, noise reduction capability, etc.; display capability may include the device’s screen size, display resolution parameters, refresh rate, color expressiveness, etc.; camera capability may include the device’s camera type, shooting pixels, night scene shooting capability, and image adjustment capability, etc.; touch input capability, keyboard and mouse input capability refer to whether the device can support touch input or keyboard and mouse input, etc.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,第一场景化服务可以根据以下一项或多项参数计算被选中的概率:用户使用第一场景化服务的频率,用户设定的第一场景化服务的排序,第一设备和/或第二设备所处环境或场景,第一设备和/或第二设备所处状态,第一设备和/或第二设备最近运行的应用。被用户选中概率越高的第一场景化服务的服务选项,越优先推荐显示。In combination with the first aspect, in some embodiments, the first scenario-based service can calculate the probability of being selected according to one or more of the following parameters: the frequency of the user using the first scenario-based service, the first scenario-based service set by the user The order of the first device and/or the second device is the environment or scene, the state of the first device and/or the second device is in, and the application recently run by the first device and/or the second device. The service option of the first scenario-based service with a higher probability of being selected by the user is recommended and displayed with higher priority.
举例说明,不同的设备类型具有不同的设备特征,例如智能电视具有较大的屏幕,用户视觉观看体验较好,更适合观看视频;智能音箱具有较强的音频输出能力,扬声效果较好,更适合播放音频;耳机体积小,易携带,无需外放,不打扰周围人,还可以具有降噪效果,屏蔽外界环境噪音,适合在公共场合收听音频,如在公共场合通话、听音乐等;智能手表、智能手环可以相比于手机更精确的测量用户的运动数据或心率等其他健康信息;笔记本电脑处理能力强大,更适合办公。这里不再赘述设备类型及设备特征,以上示例说明不对其他实施例构成限制。For example, different device types have different device characteristics. For example, smart TVs have larger screens, which provide users with a better visual viewing experience and are more suitable for watching videos; smart speakers have strong audio output capabilities and better speaker effects. It is more suitable for playing audio; the earphone is small in size, easy to carry, does not need to be placed outside, does not disturb people around, and can also have a noise reduction effect, shielding external environmental noise, suitable for listening to audio in public places, such as talking in public places, listening to music, etc.; Smart watches and smart bracelets can measure the user's exercise data or heart rate and other health information more accurately than mobile phones; laptops have powerful processing capabilities and are more suitable for office work. The device type and device features will not be described in detail here, and the above examples do not limit other embodiments.
在一些实施例中,在列出场景化服务选项时,可以根据统计到的用户在一定时间对各项场景化服务选项的使用频率,靠前显示高使用率的选项。一定时间可以是历史所有时间,也可以是某个时间段,如最近三个月。场景化服务选项历史使用率越高,显示越靠前。In some embodiments, when listing the scenario-based service options, the option with a high usage rate may be displayed in front according to the statistics of usage frequency of each scenario-based service option by the user within a certain period of time. The certain time can be all the time in history, or a certain period of time, such as the last three months. The higher the historical usage rate of the scenario-based service option, the higher the display.
在另一些实施例中,第一设备或第二设备可以上报检测到当前设备所处的环境,根据所处的环境排序场景化服务选项。如果检测到用户所处环境为户外,那优先推荐户外相关服务选项,如户外跑步。如果检测到用户所处环境为室内,那优先推荐室内相关服务选项,如室内跑步。本实施例对检测用户所处环境的方式不作限制,例如可以根据设备当前的定位信息判断所处环境;或者使用摄像头采集当前所处环境的照片,或使用超声波、红外线等采集当前空间的纵深或大小,以判断当前用户所处环境。In some other embodiments, the first device or the second device may report the detected environment of the current device, and sort the scene-based service options according to the environment. If it is detected that the user's environment is outdoors, it will give priority to recommending outdoor related service options, such as outdoor running. If it is detected that the user's environment is indoors, it will give priority to recommending indoor related service options, such as indoor running. This embodiment does not limit the method of detecting the user's environment. For example, the environment can be judged according to the current positioning information of the device; or the camera can be used to collect photos of the current environment, or ultrasonic waves, infrared rays, etc. size to determine the current user's environment.
在另一些实施例中,第一设备或第二设备还可以根据用户最近打开或使用的应用,或者当前运行的应用,确定设备所处的环境或场景,进而推荐场景化服务选项。例如,手机与智能电视组成超级终端的情况下,检测到手机当前运行的应用为办公演示应用,则可以优先推荐多屏协同服务选项;或者,检测到手机当前运行的应用为视频应用,则优先推荐家庭影院服务选项;或者,当检测到用户浏览网页为游戏相关的网页时,优先推荐游戏娱乐相关的服务选项等。In some other embodiments, the first device or the second device may also determine the environment or scene where the device is located according to the application recently opened or used by the user, or the currently running application, and then recommend scene-based service options. For example, when a mobile phone and a smart TV form a super terminal, if it is detected that the application currently running on the mobile phone is an office presentation application, then the multi-screen collaborative service option can be recommended first; or, if it is detected that the application currently running on the mobile phone is a video application, then the Recommend home theater service options; or, when it is detected that the webpage browsed by the user is a game-related webpage, preferentially recommend game entertainment-related service options, etc.
在其他一些实施例中,还可以根据设备的运行状态,如亮屏或灭屏状态,推荐场景化服务。例如,当手机与智能电视连接组成超级终端时,如果检测到智能电视处于亮屏状态,则优先推荐场景化服务为屏幕镜像,如果检测到智能电视处于灭屏状态,则优先推荐场景化服务为投音服务。In some other embodiments, scenario-based services may also be recommended according to the running state of the device, such as the on-screen or off-screen state. For example, when a mobile phone is connected to a smart TV to form a super terminal, if it is detected that the smart TV is in the on-screen state, then the scene-based service is recommended as screen mirroring; if the smart TV is detected to be off-screen, the scene-based service is recommended as Casting service.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,在本实施例中,悬浮控件的布局不同,其推荐场景化服务的排列顺序也会不同。开发人员可以根据用户使用体验设计悬浮控件的区域布局。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, in this embodiment, the arrangement order of the recommended scene-based services is also different if the layout of the floating control is different. Developers can design the area layout of the floating control according to the user experience.
可选的,参考图13C、图13D所示的实施例,悬浮控件的形状为圆环形或扇环形,其中多个圆环形区域或扇环形区域分别指示多个第一场景化服务,越靠近圆心的圆环形区域或扇环形区域所指示的第一场景化服务为更优先推荐的场景化服务。Optionally, referring to the embodiments shown in FIG. 13C and FIG. 13D , the shape of the floating control is a circular ring or a fan ring, where multiple circular ring areas or fan ring areas respectively indicate multiple first scene-based services. The first scenario-based service indicated by the circular or fan-shaped region close to the center of the circle is a more preferentially recommended scenario-based service.
可选的,参考图11、图12、图13A、图13B所示的实施例,悬浮控件的形状为圆形或矩形,该圆形或矩形被分为四个区域,第一象限方位为区域A,第二象限方位为区域B,第三象限方位为区域C,第四象限方位为区域D,场景化服务选项的推荐顺序为场景化服务选项A、场景化服务选项B、场景化服务选项C、场景化服务选项D,分别放置的区域为区域B、区域A、区域C、区域D,或者为区域B、区域C、区域A、区域D,或者为区域A、区域D、区域B、区域C,或者为区域A、区域B、区域D、区域C,或者为区域B、区域A、区域D、 区域C,或者为区域A、区域B、区域C、区域D。Optionally, referring to the embodiments shown in FIG. 11, FIG. 12, FIG. 13A, and FIG. 13B, the shape of the floating control is a circle or a rectangle, and the circle or rectangle is divided into four areas, and the orientation of the first quadrant is the area A, the orientation of the second quadrant is area B, the orientation of the third quadrant is area C, and the orientation of the fourth quadrant is area D. The recommended order of scenario-based service options is scenario-based service option A, scenario-based service option B, scenario-based service option C. Scenario-based service option D, the areas respectively placed are area B, area A, area C, area D, or area B, area C, area A, area D, or area A, area D, area B, Area C, or area A, area B, area D, area C, or area B, area A, area D, area C, or area A, area B, area C, area D.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,第二界面中还显示有第三设备的设备选项,该第三设备是评估第一设备和其关联的第二设备的设备使用需求而推荐的设备。这样可以帮助用户扩充更多、更丰富的使用场景,更好的体验超级终端生态系统。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, device options of a third device are also displayed on the second interface, and the third device is a device recommended for evaluating the device use requirements of the first device and its associated second device. This can help users expand more and richer usage scenarios, and better experience the HyperTerminal ecosystem.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,如果该第三设备是第一设备发现的设备,点击该第三设备的设备选项,第一设备显示第二场景化服务的服务选项。其中,第二场景化服务的服务选项可能是在第一场景化服务的服务选项基础上新增了一些场景化服务选项,或者,第二场景化服务的服务选项是重新更新的场景化服务,与第一场景化服务的服务选项不同。这样用户操作便捷。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, if the third device is a device discovered by the first device, and the device option of the third device is clicked, the first device displays the service options of the second scenario-based service. Among them, the service options of the second scenario-based service may be that some scenario-based service options are added on the basis of the service options of the first scenario-based service, or the service options of the second scenario-based service are re-updated scenario-based services, It is different from the service options of the first scenario-based service. This makes it easy for users to operate.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,如果该第三设备不是第一设备发现的设备,点击该第三设备的设备选项,第一设备可以跳转显示第五界面,如第五界面可以是第三设备的购买界面,第五界面包括多个物品选项,多个物品选项来自于多个提供源,多个物品选项包括指示第三设备的物品选项。第五界面可以包括第三设备的功能介绍、使用方法介绍、搭配使用场景介绍等,这样可以给用户提供更便利的服务。In combination with the first aspect, in some embodiments, if the third device is not a device discovered by the first device, click on the device option of the third device, and the first device can jump to display the fifth interface, such as the fifth interface can be On the purchase interface of the third device, the fifth interface includes multiple item options, the multiple item options come from multiple supply sources, and the multiple item options include item options indicating the third device. The fifth interface may include an introduction to the functions of the third device, an introduction to usage methods, an introduction to matching usage scenarios, etc., so as to provide users with more convenient services.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,该第三设备是基于一项或多项参数而推荐的设备:第一设备和/或其关联的第二设备的设备类型、设备特征、产品定位、设备用途、设备所处环境或场景、设备所处状态、最近运行的应用,或者第一场景化服务,或者预测可拓展的使用场景等。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, the third device is a device recommended based on one or more parameters: device type, device feature, product positioning, The purpose of the device, the environment or scene where the device is located, the state of the device, the application that has been running recently, or the service of the first scene, or the use scene that can be predicted and expanded, etc.
在加入一个推荐设备后,系统还可以根据新组成的超级终端推荐新的设备。用户可以选择加入更多的设备组成超级终端,使得用户使用场景更为丰富。加入了更多关联设备后,超级终端可提供的场景化服务也会更多、更丰富,完善超级终端的生态系统。After adding a recommended device, the system can also recommend new devices according to the newly formed hyperterminal. Users can choose to add more devices to form a hyper terminal, making the user use scenarios more abundant. After adding more associated devices, the HyperTerminal can provide more and richer scene-based services, improving the HyperTerminal ecosystem.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,第一场景化服务由第一原子化服务组合支持运行,第一原子化服务组合包括第一设备提供的至少一个第一服务,和/或第二设备提供的至少一个第二服务。原子化服务指的是可独立运行的最小能力单元,是对单一功能/能力进行抽象封装的概念,可以是硬件服务,也可以是软件服务。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, the first scenario-based service is supported by a first atomic service composition, and the first atomic service composition includes at least one first service provided by the first device, and/or the second device At least one second service is provided. Atomic service refers to the smallest capability unit that can run independently. It is a concept of abstract encapsulation of a single function/capability. It can be a hardware service or a software service.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,第一设备可以在第七界面上显示第一原子化服务组合,参考图10所示的实施例。第一原子化服务组合可以由用户选择,或者第一原子化服务组合是根据以下一项或多项参数确定的原子化服务组合:第一设备和/或第二设备的设备类型、设备特征,或者用户常用的原子化服务组合,或者用户设定默认的原子化服务组合,或者分析得到的最适合第一场景化服务的原子化服务组合,或者从服务器获取到第一场景化服务下使用频率最高的原子化服务组合。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, the first device may display the first atomized service combination on the seventh interface, refer to the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 . The first atomic service combination may be selected by the user, or the first atomic service combination is an atomic service combination determined according to one or more of the following parameters: the device type and device characteristics of the first device and/or the second device, Either the user's commonly used atomic service combination, or the user's default atomic service combination, or the most suitable atomic service combination obtained from the analysis for the first scenario service, or the usage frequency obtained from the server under the first scenario service The highest atomic service portfolio.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,第一设备运行第一场景化服务,和/或,与第一设备关联的第二设备运行第一场景化服务。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, the first device runs the first scenario-based service, and/or, the second device associated with the first device runs the first scenario-based service.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,第一设备运行第一场景化服务所显示的第三界面与第二设备运行第一场景化服务所显示的第四界面不同。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, the third interface displayed by the first device running the first scenario-based service is different from the fourth interface displayed by the second device running the first scenario-based service.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,若第一场景化服务为投屏服务,第二设备为大屏设备,第四界面可以为视频或图像画面,第三界面可以为控制视频或图像画面显示功能的控制界面。参考图18所示的实施例。这样可以使第二设备与第一设备搭配使用,充分利用设备特性,给用户提供更多的方便。当然,用户也可以选择第三界面显示聊天界面,用户边使用第一设备聊天,边使用第二设备看视频。可选的,第三界面和第四界面显示的画面内容可以相同,参考图19所示的实施例,手机和电视都显示相同的视频画面。In combination with the first aspect, in some embodiments, if the first scenario-based service is a projection service, the second device is a large-screen device, the fourth interface can be a video or image screen, and the third interface can be a control video or image screen Display the control interface of the function. Reference is made to the embodiment shown in FIG. 18 . In this way, the second device can be used in conjunction with the first device, making full use of the characteristics of the device, and providing more convenience to the user. Certainly, the user may also select the third interface to display the chat interface, and the user uses the first device to chat while using the second device to watch the video. Optionally, the screen content displayed on the third interface and the fourth interface may be the same. Referring to the embodiment shown in FIG. 19 , both the mobile phone and the TV display the same video screen.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,若第一场景化服务为运动监测服务,第二设备为可穿戴运动设备,第三界面可以为运动轨迹的画面,第四界面可以为检测到的用户的运动数据,运动数据包括:运动速度、运动距离、运动时间、心率。参考图8所示的实施例。这样可以使第二设备与第一设备搭配使用,充分利用设备特性,给用户提供更多的方便。例如用户将手机与智能手表关联后,用户将手机放在家里,佩戴智能手表去户外跑步,智能手表具备定位功能,以及测速功能等,智能手表可以将定位信息不断上传给云服务器,云服务器再下发给手机,用户回家之后可以在手机看到自己的运动轨迹。In combination with the first aspect, in some embodiments, if the first scenario-based service is a motion monitoring service, the second device is a wearable motion device, the third interface can be a picture of a motion track, and the fourth interface can be a detected user The exercise data includes: exercise speed, exercise distance, exercise time, heart rate. Reference is made to the embodiment shown in FIG. 8 . In this way, the second device can be used in conjunction with the first device, making full use of the characteristics of the device, and providing more convenience to the user. For example, after the user associates the mobile phone with the smart watch, the user puts the mobile phone at home and wears the smart watch for outdoor running. The smart watch has positioning functions and speed measurement functions. The smart watch can continuously upload the positioning information to the cloud server. Send it to the mobile phone, and the user can see his movement track on the mobile phone after returning home.
用户拖拽第二控件从不同方位、不同区域向第一控件吸附,产生的效果、触发的服务也可能不同。When the user drags the second control to attract it to the first control from different directions and areas, the effects and services triggered may also be different.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,在投屏场景下,第一设备根据释放拖拽操作时,第二控件与第一控件的相对位置,确定第一设备的屏幕界面投屏在第二设备屏幕中的位置。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, in the screen projection scenario, the first device determines that the screen interface of the first device is projected on the second screen according to the relative position of the second control and the first control when the drag operation is released. The position on the device screen.
参考图15、图16、图17所描述的实施例。如果该相对位置为第二控件在第一控件的左侧,那么第一设备的屏幕界面投屏在第二设备屏幕中的右侧。如果该相对位置为第二控件在第一控件的右侧,那么第一设备的屏幕界面投屏在第二设备屏幕中的左侧。如果该相对位置为第二控件在第一控件的中间,那么第一设备的屏幕界面全屏投屏在第二设备屏幕上。Embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 15 , 16 , and 17 . If the relative position is that the second control is on the left side of the first control, then the screen interface of the first device is projected on the right side of the screen of the second device. If the relative position is that the second control is on the right side of the first control, then the screen interface of the first device is projected on the left side of the screen of the second device. If the relative position is that the second control is in the middle of the first control, then the full screen of the screen interface of the first device is projected on the screen of the second device.
在另一个示例中,对于音频设备,如音箱,耳机等,从不同方位吸附可以关联不同声道。假设用户有两个及以上的音箱,用户拖动第一个音箱图标从手机图标的左边区域贴合过去,吸附在一起,那么该第一个音箱可以提供左声道的音频输出;用户拖动第二个音箱图标从手机图标的右边区域贴合过去,吸附在一起,那么该第二个音箱可以提供右声道的音频输出。其他多声道的布置同理。In another example, for audio devices, such as speakers and earphones, different sound channels can be associated with different orientations. Assuming that the user has two or more speakers, the user drags the icon of the first speaker to fit it from the left area of the phone icon and sticks it together, then the first speaker can provide the audio output of the left channel; the user drags The second speaker icon is pasted from the right area of the mobile phone icon and absorbed together, then the second speaker can provide the audio output of the right channel. The arrangement of other multi-channels is the same.
在另一些实施例中,第一控件和第二控件之间互换拖拽方向,其执行的服务或交互功能可能不同。如数据的传输方向不同,设备作为吸附方或者作为被吸附方指示了该设备是数据的发送方或者接收方,如规定数据传输方向为吸附方设备向被吸附方设备发送数据流。举例说明,在分享文件时,如果按住第二控件并拖拽吸附到第一控件上,触发的服务是将第二设备的文件发送给第一设备,如果按住第一控件并拖拽吸附到第二控件上,触发的服务是将第一设备的文件发送给第二设备。In some other embodiments, the dragging direction is exchanged between the first control and the second control, and the services or interactive functions executed by them may be different. If the data transmission direction is different, the device as the adsorbing party or as the adsorbed party indicates that the device is the sender or receiver of the data. For example, the data transmission direction is stipulated that the adsorbing device sends data streams to the adsorbed device. For example, when sharing a file, if you press and hold the second control and drag it to attach to the first control, the service triggered is to send the file of the second device to the first device; if you press and hold the first control and drag it to attach On the second control, the triggered service is to send the file of the first device to the second device.
在另一些实施例中,设备选项作为吸附方或被吸附方其触发的场景化服务也可以不同。举例说明,如果按住第二控件并拖拽吸附到第一控件上,触发的服务是将第二设备的文件发送给第一设备,如果按住第一控件并拖拽吸附到第二控件上,触发的服务是将第一设备的屏幕投屏到第二设备的屏幕上。In some other embodiments, the scenario-based service triggered by the device option as the absorbing party or the adsorbed party may also be different. For example, if you press and hold the second control and drag it to attach to the first control, the triggered service is to send the file of the second device to the first device, if you press and hold the first control and drag it to attach to the second control , the triggered service is to cast the screen of the first device to the screen of the second device.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,该方法还可以包括:第一设备检测到作用于第二界面上的第三用户操作,第三用户操作用于关联第四设备和第一设备,第三用户操作包括选中指示第四设备的第三控件操作。响应于第三用户操作,第一设备显示第六界面,第六界面中显示有第一控件、第二控件、第三控件吸附在一起,第六界面中还显示有第三场景化服务选项,第三场景化服务选项是根据第一设备、第二设备和第四设备确定的,第三场景化服务选项与第一场景化服务选项不同。参考图9所示的实施例。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, the method may further include: the first device detects a third user operation acting on the second interface, the third user operation is used to associate the fourth device with the first device, the second The third user operation includes selecting a third control operation indicating a fourth device. In response to the third user operation, the first device displays a sixth interface, the sixth interface displays the first control, the second control, and the third control are adsorbed together, and the sixth interface also displays a third scene-based service option, The third scenario-based service option is determined according to the first device, the second device, and the fourth device, and the third scenario-based service option is different from the first scenario-based service option. Reference is made to the embodiment shown in FIG. 9 .
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,在第一设备运行第二用户操作选中的第一场景化服务之后,第一设备检测到第四用户操作,第四用户操作包括将第一控件与第二控件分开的操作。响应于第四用户操作,第一设备指示第二用户操作选中的第一场景化服务停止运行。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, after the first device runs the first scenario-based service selected by the second user operation, the first device detects a fourth user operation, where the fourth user operation includes combining the first control with the second The two controls operate separately. In response to the fourth user operation, the first device instructs the first scenario-based service selected by the second user operation to stop running.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,响应于第四用户操作,第一设备停止运行第二用户操作选中的第一场景化服务,和/或,第二设备停止运行第二用户操作选中的第一场景化服务。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, in response to the fourth user operation, the first device stops running the first scenario-based service selected by the second user operation, and/or the second device stops running the service selected by the second user operation. The first scenario-based service.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,第四用户操作可以为用户选中第二控件,并拖拽第二控件向着远离第一控件的方向移动,直到移动出指定区域后,释放第二控件的操作。该第二控件回到未连接之前的位置,解除吸附状态,该第二设备同时也断开与第一设备的连接,第一设备或第二设备所提供的原子化服务也随之终止。或者,当用户点击处于已连接状态的第二控件,或者,用户按住第二控件和第一控件,朝着相反方向拖拽,使其分开,也可以触发第一设备和第二设备断开连接,在界面上表现为第二控件与第一控件分开,该第二控件回到未连接状态的位置。In combination with the first aspect, in some embodiments, the fourth user operation can be for the user to select the second control, and drag the second control to move away from the first control until it moves out of the specified area, and release the second control operate. The second control returns to the position before it is not connected, and the adsorption state is released. At the same time, the second device is also disconnected from the first device, and the atomization service provided by the first device or the second device is also terminated. Or, when the user clicks the second control in the connected state, or the user presses and holds the second control and the first control, and drags them in opposite directions to separate them, it can also trigger the disconnection of the first device and the second device Connection means that the second control is separated from the first control on the interface, and the second control returns to the position of the unconnected state.
在一些实施例中,第一设备的界面上也可以设置一键断开控件,点击该一键断开控件,可以使得全部已连接的关联设备与第一设备断开连接,恢复到第一设备独立暂无任何关联设备连接的状态,各个关联设备提供的服务也随之终止。In some embodiments, a one-key disconnection control can also be set on the interface of the first device, and clicking the one-key disconnection control can cause all connected associated devices to disconnect from the first device and restore to the first device There is no status of any associated device connection, and the services provided by each associated device will also be terminated.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,第一设备包括以下任意一项:手机、平板电脑、便携式/非便携式电脑、个人计算机、智能电视等。第二设备包括以下任意一项:手机、平板电脑、便携式移动电脑、台式个人电脑、智能音箱、智能手表、智能手环、智能电视、耳机、智能眼镜、车机、智能座舱、游戏机、跑步机、动感单车、体重秤、体脂秤、热水器、灯具、空调、血糖仪、血氧饱和仪、心率仪、AR/VR设备、云主机/云服务器、智能可穿戴设备、智能家居设备、打印机等。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, the first device includes any one of the following: a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a portable/non-portable computer, a personal computer, a smart TV, and the like. The second device includes any of the following: mobile phone, tablet computer, portable mobile computer, desktop personal computer, smart speaker, smart watch, smart bracelet, smart TV, earphones, smart glasses, car machine, smart cockpit, game console, running Machines, spinning bikes, weight scales, body fat scales, water heaters, lamps, air conditioners, blood glucose meters, blood oxygen saturation meters, heart rate meters, AR/VR equipment, cloud hosts/cloud servers, smart wearable devices, smart home devices, printers wait.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,上述第一场景化服务可以为打印服务,上述第二设备为打印机。当第一设备和第二设备协同,运行上述第一场景化服务,第一设备可以显示打印悬浮控件。上述打印悬浮控件可以悬浮显示在第一设备的用户界面上。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, the above-mentioned first scenario-based service may be a printing service, and the above-mentioned second device is a printer. When the first device and the second device cooperate to run the above-mentioned first scene-based service, the first device can display the printing floating control. The above-mentioned printing suspension control can be suspended and displayed on the user interface of the first device.
也即是说,在第一设备运行上述第一场景服务的期间内,第一设备可以始终在用户界面上悬浮显示上述打印悬浮控件。其中,第一设备的用户界面上显示的内容改变,但打印悬浮控件仍可悬浮显示在用户界面上。这样可以方便用户通过打印悬浮控件快速打印当前用户界面上显示的内容。That is to say, during the period when the first device is running the first scene service, the first device may always display the above-mentioned printing floating control in a floating manner on the user interface. Wherein, the content displayed on the user interface of the first device is changed, but the printing suspension control can still be suspended and displayed on the user interface. In this way, it is convenient for the user to quickly print the content displayed on the current user interface through the print floating control.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,第一设备检测到对打印悬浮控件的第五用户操作。第一设备可以基于第五用户操作将第一打印文件发送给第二设备进行打印,第一打印文件是第一设备检测到第五用户操作时显示在第一设备上的内容。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, the first device detects a fifth user operation on the printing suspension control. The first device may send the first print file to the second device for printing based on the fifth user operation, where the first print file is content displayed on the first device when the first device detects the fifth user operation.
在一些实施例中,当第一设备用户界面上显示的内容从上述第一打印文件变化为第二打印文件,第一设备可以响应于对打印悬浮控件的操作,将第二打印文件发送给第二设备进行打印。In some embodiments, when the content displayed on the user interface of the first device changes from the first print file to the second print file, the first device may send the second print file to the second print file in response to the operation of the print suspension control. The second device prints.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,第一设备检测到对打印悬浮控件的第六用户操作。第一设备可以基于第六用户操作删除打印悬浮控件,并指示第一场景化服务停止运行。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, the first device detects a sixth user operation on the printing suspension control. The first device may delete the printing suspension control based on the sixth user operation, and instruct the first scenario-based service to stop running.
可以看出,用户可以直接通过上述打印悬浮控件来触发第一设备和第二设备停止运行第一场景化服务,从而无需返回上述第一界面通过上述第一控件和第二控件来触发第一设备、第二设备停止运行第一场景化服务。It can be seen that the user can directly trigger the first device and the second device to stop running the first scene service through the above-mentioned printing suspension control, so that there is no need to return to the above-mentioned first interface to trigger the first device through the above-mentioned first control and second control . The second device stops running the first scenario-based service.
上述第一设备协同打印机提供打印服务的用户操作,以及停止第一设备和打印机协同的用户操作均比较简单,可以提高用户的使用体验。The above-mentioned user operations for the first device to cooperate with the printer to provide printing services and user operations for stopping the cooperation between the first device and the printer are relatively simple, which can improve user experience.
第二方面,本申请实施例提供了一种设备交互方法。其中,第一设备显示第一界面,第一界面包括第一控件和第二控件,第一控件为指示第一设备的设备选项,第二控件为指示第二设备的设备选项,第二设备是第一设备发现的设备。第一设备检测到第一用户操作,第一用户操作用于关联第一设备和第二设备。第一设备根据第一用户操作,向第二设备发送第一绑定请求,并接收到第二设备的第一同意消息。第一设备根据第一同意消息显示第二界面, 第二界面中显示有第一场景化服务的服务选项,第一场景化服务是第一设备和第二设备协同支持的场景化服务。In a second aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a device interaction method. Wherein, the first device displays the first interface, the first interface includes a first control and a second control, the first control indicates the device option of the first device, the second control indicates the device option of the second device, and the second device is Devices discovered by the first device. The first device detects a first user operation, and the first user operation is used to associate the first device with the second device. The first device sends a first binding request to the second device according to the first user operation, and receives a first consent message from the second device. The first device displays the second interface according to the first consent message, and the second interface displays service options of the first scenario-based service, and the first scenario-based service is a scenario-based service supported by the first device and the second device in cooperation.
实施第二方面的方法,可以提高人机交互性能,用户可以根据个人需求快捷选择场景化服务和/或原子化服务,通过用户选定设备组合,针对性提供了该设备组合下可用的场景化服务和/或原子化服务,给用户列举了详尽、丰富的使用场景,引导用户使用超级终端的功能充分的探索更多的应用场景,实现了按设备组合推荐场景化服务的效果。Implementing the method in the second aspect can improve the performance of human-computer interaction. Users can quickly select scene-based services and/or atomized services according to individual needs, and provide specific scene-based services available under the device combination through the user-selected device combination. Service and/or atomic service lists detailed and rich usage scenarios for users, guides users to fully explore more application scenarios by using the functions of HyperTerminal, and achieves the effect of recommending scenario-based services according to device combinations.
结合第二方面,在一些实施例中,第一设备可以根据第一用户操作,显示连接码设置框,连接码设置框用于设置第一设备和第二设备进行绑定的连接码。第一设备接收到在连接码设置框中输入的第一连接码,并向第二设备发送第一绑定请求。其中,第一同意消息中包含第一连接码。With reference to the second aspect, in some embodiments, the first device may display a connection code setting box according to the first user operation, and the connection code setting box is used to set a connection code for binding between the first device and the second device. The first device receives the first connection code input in the connection code setting box, and sends a first binding request to the second device. Wherein, the first consent message includes the first connection code.
在一些实施例中,上述第二设备接收到上述第一绑定请求之后,第二设备可以询问用户是否同意第二设备与第一设备协同。若检测到用户同意第二设备与第一设备协同的操作,第二设备可以显示连接码输入框,让用户输入连接码。当接收到用户在连接码输入框输入的连接码,第二设备可以发送上述第一同意消息。第一设备接收到第一同意消息之后,可以检测第一同意消息中包含的连接码是否是上述连接码设置框中设置的连接码。若是,第一设备和第二设备可以完成设备绑定,建立协同,从而为用户提供场景化服务。In some embodiments, after the second device receives the first binding request, the second device may ask the user whether to allow the second device to cooperate with the first device. If it is detected that the user agrees to the coordinated operation of the second device and the first device, the second device may display a connection code input box to allow the user to input the connection code. When receiving the connection code input by the user in the connection code input box, the second device may send the above-mentioned first consent message. After receiving the first agreement message, the first device may detect whether the connection code contained in the first agreement message is the connection code set in the above connection code setting box. If so, the first device and the second device can complete device binding and establish collaboration, thereby providing users with scenario-based services.
由上述实施例可知,第一设备与第二设备运行第一场景服务之前,可以先进行设备绑定。在上述设备绑定的过程中,第一设备可以设置连接码,第二设备可以输入用于进行设备绑定的连接码。上述设备绑定的过程可以询问第二设备所属的用户是否同意第二设备与第一设备协同。上述实施例可以减少在第一设备所属的用户与第二设备所属的用户不同的情况下,第二设备所属的用户在不同意或不知情时,自己的电子设备被其它用户使用的概率。并且,上述连接码的验证过程可以确保与第一设备进行设备绑定的电子设备的准确性,提高用户的使用体验。It can be seen from the foregoing embodiments that before the first device and the second device run the first scene service, device binding may be performed first. During the above device binding process, the first device can set a connection code, and the second device can input the connection code for device binding. The above device binding process may ask whether the user to which the second device belongs agrees that the second device cooperates with the first device. The foregoing embodiments can reduce the probability that the user to which the second device belongs is used by another user without consent or knowledge when the user to which the first device belongs is different from the user to which the second device belongs. Moreover, the above verification process of the connection code can ensure the accuracy of the electronic device that is bound with the first device, and improve user experience.
结合第二方面,在一些实施例中,在第一界面中,第二控件分布在以第一控件为中心,半径为第一长度的圆周上,第一控件与第二控件为分开状态。With reference to the second aspect, in some embodiments, in the first interface, the second controls are distributed on a circle whose center is the first control and whose radius is the first length, and the first control and the second control are separated.
上述第一用户操作可以为用户选中第二控件,并拖拽第二控件向着靠近第一控件的方向移动到指定区域后,释放第二控件的操作。或者,第一用户操作可以为用户同时选中第一控件和第二控件,并拖拽第一控件和第二控件互相贴近,直至第一控件和第二控件的距离小于一定距离,然后释放第一控件和第二控件的操作。该指定区域可以为以第一控件为中心,半径为第一半径距离的圆形区域。或者,第一用户操作可以为用户选中第一控件,并拖拽第一控件向着靠近第二控件的方向移动,直到第一控件和第二控件之间的距离小于一定距离后,释放第一控件的操作。The above-mentioned first user operation may be an operation for the user to select the second control, drag the second control to a designated area in a direction close to the first control, and then release the operation of the second control. Or, the first user operation can be that the user selects the first control and the second control at the same time, and drags the first control and the second control to be close to each other until the distance between the first control and the second control is less than a certain distance, and then releases the first control. control and the operation of the second control. The specified area may be a circular area with the first control as the center and a radius equal to the first radius distance. Or, the first user operation can be for the user to select the first control, and drag the first control to move towards the direction close to the second control, until the distance between the first control and the second control is less than a certain distance, then release the first control operation.
在一些实施例中,上述第二界面中还显示有第一控件和第二控件。在第二界面中,第一控件和第二控件可以吸附在一起,表示第一设备与第二设备已建立连接,可以协同工作提供系统级服务。两个设备选项吸附在一起可以指两个设备对应的图标的边缘相切,或者,两个设备选项吸附在一起也可以是指这两个设备图标全部或部分重叠在一起。In some embodiments, the first control and the second control are also displayed in the second interface. In the second interface, the first control and the second control can be attracted together, indicating that the first device and the second device have established a connection and can work together to provide system-level services. The two device options being attracted together may refer to that the edges of the corresponding icons of the two devices are tangent, or the two device options being adsorbed together may also be that the two device icons are completely or partially overlapped.
上述第一操作符合用户的操作习惯,用户学习成本低,操作易上手。The above-mentioned first operation conforms to the user's operating habits, the user's learning cost is low, and the operation is easy to use.
结合第二方面,在一些实施例中,第一界面还包括第四控件,第四控件为指示第五设备的设备选项,第五设备是第一设备发现的设备,第五设备关联的账号与第一设备关联的账号相同;第四控件分布在以第一控件为中心,半径为第二长度的圆周上,第一控件与第四控件为分开状态,第一长度与第二长度不同。With reference to the second aspect, in some embodiments, the first interface further includes a fourth control, the fourth control is a device option indicating a fifth device, the fifth device is a device discovered by the first device, and the account associated with the fifth device is associated with the The accounts associated with the first device are the same; the fourth control is distributed on a circle with the first control as the center and a radius of the second length, the first control and the fourth control are separated, and the first length is different from the second length.
结合第二方面,在一些实施例中,第一设备关联的账号与第二设备关联的账号不同,或者,第二设备无关联的账号。With reference to the second aspect, in some embodiments, the account associated with the first device is different from the account associated with the second device, or the second device has no associated account.
由上述实施例可知,指示跨账号设备(或者无账号设备)的设备选项与指示同账号设备的设备选项可以显示在以第一控件为中心,半径不同的圆周上。例如,指示同账号设备的设备选项可以显示在一个圆周上。指示跨账号设备和/或无账号设备的设备选项可以显示在另一个圆周上。这样,用户可以快速分辨出哪些设备是自己的,哪些设备是其它用户的。It can be seen from the above embodiments that the device options indicating cross-account devices (or non-account devices) and device options indicating same-account devices can be displayed on circles with different radii centered on the first control. For example, device options indicating devices of the same account may be displayed on a circle. Device options indicating cross-account devices and/or non-account devices may be displayed on another circle. In this way, users can quickly distinguish which devices are their own and which devices belong to other users.
上述同账号设备可以指与上述第一设备关联的账号相同的设备。上述跨账号设备可以指与上述第一设备关联的账号不同的设备。上述无账号设备可以指没有关联账号的设备。The aforementioned device with the same account may refer to a device that is associated with the same account as the first device. The above-mentioned cross-account device may refer to a device with a different account associated with the above-mentioned first device. The aforementioned device without an account may refer to a device without an associated account.
在一些实施例中,在上述第二设备是跨账号设备或者是无账号设备的情况下,第一设备可以响应于上述第一操作,与第二设备进行设备绑定。其中,若第一设备与第二设备首次进行设备绑定,第一设备与第二设备可以通过上述连接码进行设备绑定。示例性地,第一设备可以显示上述连接码设置框,接收到用户设置的连接码,并向第设备发送绑定请求。第二设备接收到上述绑定请求,可以询问用户是否同意第二设备与第一设备绑定。若检测到同意第二设备与第一设备绑定的操作,第二设备可以显示连接码输入框,要求用户属于第二设备与第一设备绑定的连接码。当接收到在连接码输入框输入的连接码,第二设备可以向第一设备发送同意消息。该同意消息中还包含在上述连接码输入框中接收到连接码。第一设备与第二设备非首次(如第二次、第三次等)进行设备绑定时的用户操作可以比上述首次进行设备绑定时的用户操作更简单。示例性地,在第一设备和第二设备曾经进行过设备绑定的情况下,第一设备可以响应于上述第一用户操作向第二设备发送绑定请求。当接收到上述绑定请求,第二设备可以询问用户是否同意第二设备与第一设备绑定。若检测到同意第二设备与第一设备绑定的操作,第二设备可以向第一设备发送同意消息。In some embodiments, in the case that the above-mentioned second device is a cross-account device or a non-account device, the first device may perform device binding with the second device in response to the above-mentioned first operation. Wherein, if the first device and the second device perform device binding for the first time, the first device and the second device can perform device binding through the above connection code. Exemplarily, the first device may display the above connection code setting box, receive the connection code set by the user, and send a binding request to the second device. After receiving the binding request, the second device may ask the user whether to agree to bind the second device with the first device. If the operation of agreeing to bind the second device with the first device is detected, the second device may display a connection code input box, requiring the user to belong to the connection code that the second device binds with the first device. When receiving the connection code input in the connection code input box, the second device may send a consent message to the first device. The consent message also includes the connection code received in the connection code input box. User operations when the first device is bound to the second device for a non-first time (such as the second, third time, etc.) may be simpler than the above-mentioned user operations when the device is bound for the first time. Exemplarily, in the case that the first device and the second device have performed device binding, the first device may send a binding request to the second device in response to the above-mentioned first user operation. When receiving the above-mentioned binding request, the second device may ask the user whether to agree to bind the second device with the first device. If an operation of agreeing to bind the second device with the first device is detected, the second device may send an approval message to the first device.
在一些实施例中,在首次接收到上述关联第一设备和第二设备的第一用户操作的情况下,第一设备和第二设备可以进行设备绑定。在第一设备和第二设备进行过设备绑定之后,第一设备再次接收到上述关联第一设备和第二设备的用户操作时,可以直接与第二设备建立连接,协同工作提供场景化服务。In some embodiments, when the above-mentioned first user operation of associating the first device and the second device is received for the first time, the first device and the second device may perform device binding. After the first device and the second device have been bound, the first device can directly establish a connection with the second device when receiving the above-mentioned user operation of associating the first device with the second device, and work together to provide scene-based services .
结合第二方面,在一些实施例中,第一界面还包括第五控件,第五控件为指示第六设备的设备选项,第六设备是第一设备发现的设备,第五控件与第四控件为分开状态。第一设备检测到第七用户操作,第七用户操作用于关联第五设备和第六设备。第一设备根据第七用户操作,指示第五设备请求与第六设备进行绑定,并接收到用于指示第六设备同意与第五设备绑定的第二同意消息。第一设备根据第二同意消息显示第八界面,在第八界面中,第四控件与第五控件吸附在一起。With reference to the second aspect, in some embodiments, the first interface further includes a fifth control, the fifth control is a device option indicating a sixth device, the sixth device is a device discovered by the first device, and the fifth control and the fourth control in a separate state. The first device detects a seventh user operation, and the seventh user operation is used to associate the fifth device with the sixth device. According to the seventh user operation, the first device instructs the fifth device to request binding with the sixth device, and receives a second consent message for instructing the sixth device to agree to bind with the fifth device. The first device displays the eighth interface according to the second consent message, and in the eighth interface, the fourth control and the fifth control are adsorbed together.
上述第四控件和第五控件吸附在一起可以表示第一设备与第二设备已建立连接,可以协同工作提供系统级服务。The attachment of the fourth control and the fifth control above can indicate that the first device and the second device have established a connection, and can work together to provide system-level services.
由上述实施例可知,超级终端中的核心设备还可以响应于用户操作,将超级终端中的其它同账号设备与跨账号设备关联,使得上述同账号设备与跨账号设备可以协同工作提供场景化服务。其中,上述同账号设备与跨账号设备进行协同工作之前可以先进行设备绑定。It can be seen from the above embodiments that the core device in the hyperterminal can also respond to user operations to associate other same-account devices in the hyperterminal with cross-account devices, so that the above-mentioned same-account devices and cross-account devices can work together to provide scene-based services . Wherein, before the above-mentioned same-account device and cross-account device cooperate to work, device binding can be performed first.
结合第二方面,在一些实施例中,第一设备检测到作用在第二控件的用户操作,在第一界面移除第二控件。With reference to the second aspect, in some embodiments, the first device detects a user operation acting on the second control, and removes the second control on the first interface.
结合第二方面,在一些实施例中,上述第一界面中还显示有回收站控件。第一设备检测到作用在回收站控件上的用户操作,可以显示回收站列表。回收站列表中可包含一个或多个设备选项。回收站列表中设备选项指示的设备可以是从上述第一界面中被移除的设备选项指 示的设备。示例性地,当用户在第一界面移除上述第二控件,用户可以通过上述回收站控件查看回收站列表。回收站列表中可包含指示第二设备的设备选项。其中,响应于对回收站列表中指示第二设备的设备选项的操作,第一设备可以再次在第一界面上显示第二控件。With reference to the second aspect, in some embodiments, a recycle bin control is further displayed on the first interface. The first device detects a user operation acting on the recycle bin control, and may display a recycle bin list. One or more device options can be included in the Recycle Bin list. The device indicated by the device option in the recycle bin list may be the device indicated by the device option removed from the first interface. Exemplarily, when the user removes the above-mentioned second control on the first interface, the user can view the recycle bin list through the above-mentioned recycle bin control. A device option indicative of a second device may be included in the recycle bin list. Wherein, in response to operating the device option indicating the second device in the recycle bin list, the first device may display the second control on the first interface again.
结合第二方面,在一些实施例中,第二界面中的第二控件可能与第一界面中的第二控件的表现形式有所区别。With reference to the second aspect, in some embodiments, the second control in the second interface may have a different expression form from the second control in the first interface.
结合第二方面,在一些实施例中,第二界面中显示有悬浮控件,该悬浮控件包括第一区域,该第一区域显示第一场景化服务的服务选项。第一用户操作可以为用户按住第二控件的操作。第二用户操作可以为用户拖拽第二控件至第一区域后,释放第二控件的操作,或者,第二用户操作为用户拖拽第二控件经由第一区域,向着靠近第一控件的方向移动到指定区域后,释放第二控件的操作,该指定区域可以为以第一控件为中心,半径为第一半径距离的圆形区域。参考图11、图12、图13A、图13B、图13C、图13D所描述的实施例。在本实施例中,一个第二用户操作包括了将第二设备关联至第一设备和选择第一场景化服务这两个功能,提高了用户操作效率。With reference to the second aspect, in some embodiments, a floating control is displayed on the second interface, the floating control includes a first area, and the first area displays service options of the first scenario-based service. The first user operation may be an operation in which the user presses and holds the second control. The second user operation may be an operation of releasing the second control after the user drags the second control to the first area, or the second user operation is the user dragging the second control through the first area toward a direction close to the first control After moving to the specified area, the operation of the second control is released. The specified area may be a circular area with the first control as the center and a radius equal to the first radius distance. Embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 11, 12, 13A, 13B, 13C, and 13D. In this embodiment, a second user operation includes two functions of associating the second device with the first device and selecting the first scenario-based service, which improves user operation efficiency.
结合第二方面,在一些实施例中,该悬浮控件包括多个圆形区域,或者多个矩形区域,或者多个扇形区域,或者多个扇环形区域,或者多个圆环形区域,或者多个多边形区域等。With reference to the second aspect, in some embodiments, the floating control includes multiple circular areas, or multiple rectangular areas, or multiple fan-shaped areas, or multiple fan-shaped ring areas, or multiple circular ring-shaped areas, or multiple polygonal area, etc.
结合第二方面,在一些实施例中,第二界面中包括第一控件。第二界面中也可以不包括第一控件。With reference to the second aspect, in some embodiments, the second interface includes the first control. The second interface may also not include the first control.
结合第二方面,在一些实施例中,第一设备接收到第二设备的第一同意消息之后,可以与第二设备协同,运行第一场景化服务。其中,第一场景化服务可以是K1项场景化服务中,被用户选中概率最高的场景化服务。上述K1项场景化服务可以是第一设备和第二设备协同能够提供的场景化服务。上述K1为正整数。K1项场景化服务中,一项场景化服务被用户选中的概率可以根据以下一项或多项参数计算:用户使用这一项场景化服务的频率、用户设定的这一项场景化服务的排序、第一设备和/或第二设备所处环境或场景、第一设备和/或第二设备所处状态、第一设备和/或第二设备最近运行的应用。上述K1项场景化服务还包括第四场景化服务。上述第二界面可显示有第四场景化服务的服务选项。用户可以利用上述第一场景化服务的服务选项将第一设备和第二设备协同提供的场景化服务,从上述第一场景化服务调整为第四场景化服务。With reference to the second aspect, in some embodiments, after receiving the first consent message from the second device, the first device may cooperate with the second device to run the first scenario-based service. Wherein, the first scenario-based service may be the scenario-based service with the highest probability of being selected by the user among the K1 scenario-based services. The above K1 scenario-based service may be a scenario-based service that can be provided by the cooperation of the first device and the second device. The above K1 is a positive integer. Among K1 scenario-based services, the probability of a scenario-based service being selected by the user can be calculated based on one or more of the following parameters: the frequency of users using this scenario-based service, the user-set rate of this scenario-based service Sorting, environment or scene of the first device and/or the second device, state of the first device and/or the second device, applications recently run by the first device and/or the second device. The aforementioned K1 scenario-based services also include a fourth scenario-based service. The above-mentioned second interface may display service options of the fourth scenario-based service. The user can use the service option of the first scenario-based service to adjust the scenario-based service provided by the first device and the second device from the first scenario-based service to the fourth scenario-based service.
由上述实施例可知,第一设备可以根据关联第一设备和第二设备的用户操作,与第二设备协同,直接提供用户选中概率最高的场景化服务。若用户需要的场景化服务不是上述第一设备和第二设备确定出的用户选中概率最高的场景化服务,用户可以通过其它场景化服务的服务选项选择自己想要的场景化服务。It can be known from the above embodiments that the first device can cooperate with the second device to directly provide the scenario-based service with the highest probability of being selected by the user according to the user operation associated with the first device and the second device. If the scenario-based service desired by the user is not the scenario-based service with the highest probability of being selected by the user as determined by the first device and the second device, the user can select the scenario-based service he wants through the service options of other scenario-based services.
第三方面,本申请实施例提供了一种电子设备,该电子设备可以包括:通信装置、显示装置、存储器以及耦合于存储器的处理器,多个应用程序,以及一个或多个程序。通信装置用于通信,显示装置用于显示界面,存储器中存储有计算机可执行指令,处理器执行指令时使得电子设备可以实现如第一方面中第一设备所具有的任一功能。In a third aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides an electronic device, and the electronic device may include: a communication device, a display device, a memory, a processor coupled to the memory, multiple application programs, and one or more programs. The communication device is used for communication, the display device is used for displaying an interface, and computer-executable instructions are stored in the memory. When the processor executes the instructions, the electronic device can realize any function of the first device in the first aspect.
第四方面,本申请实施例提供了一种电子设备,该电子设备可以包括:通信装置、显示装置、存储器以及耦合于存储器的处理器,多个应用程序,以及一个或多个程序。通信装置用于通信,显示装置用于显示界面,存储器中存储有计算机可执行指令,处理器执行指令时使得电子设备可以实现如第二方面中第一设备所具有的任一功能。In a fourth aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides an electronic device, and the electronic device may include: a communication device, a display device, a memory, a processor coupled to the memory, multiple application programs, and one or more programs. The communication device is used for communication, the display device is used for displaying the interface, and computer-executable instructions are stored in the memory. When the processor executes the instructions, the electronic device can realize any function of the first device in the second aspect.
第五方面,本申请实施例提供了一种计算机存储介质,该存储介质中存储有计算机程序,该计算机程序包括可执行指令,该可执行指令当被处理器执行时使该处理器执行如第一方面 所提供的方法对应的操作。In a fifth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer storage medium, in which a computer program is stored, and the computer program includes executable instructions, and when executed by a processor, the executable instruction causes the processor to perform the following steps: In one aspect, the methods correspond to the operations provided.
第六方面,本申请实施例提供了一种计算机存储介质,该存储介质中存储有计算机程序,该计算机程序包括可执行指令,该可执行指令当被处理器执行时使该处理器执行如第二方面所提供的方法对应的操作。In a sixth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer storage medium, in which a computer program is stored, the computer program includes executable instructions, and when the executable instructions are executed by a processor, the processor executes the following steps: The operations corresponding to the methods provided by the two aspects.
第七方面,本申请实施例提供了一种计算机程序产品,当计算机程序产品在电子设备上运行时,使得电子设备执行如第一方面中任一可能的实现方式。In a seventh aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product, which, when the computer program product is run on an electronic device, causes the electronic device to execute any possible implementation manner in the first aspect.
第八方面,本申请实施例提供了一种计算机程序产品,当计算机程序产品在电子设备上运行时,使得电子设备执行如第二方面中任一可能的实现方式。In an eighth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product, which, when the computer program product is run on an electronic device, causes the electronic device to execute any possible implementation manner in the second aspect.
第九方面,本申请实施例提供了一种芯片系统,该芯片系统可以应用于电子设备,该芯片包括一个或多个处理器,处理器用于调用计算机指令以使得电子设备实现如第一方面中任一可能的实现方式。In the ninth aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a chip system, which can be applied to electronic equipment, and the chip includes one or more processors, and the processors are used to call computer instructions so that the electronic equipment implements the electronic equipment as described in the first aspect. any possible implementation.
第十方面,本申请实施例提供了一种芯片系统,该芯片系统可以应用于电子设备,该芯片包括一个或多个处理器,处理器用于调用计算机指令以使得电子设备实现如第二方面中任一可能的实现方式。In the tenth aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a chip system, which can be applied to electronic devices, and the chip includes one or more processors, and the processors are used to call computer instructions so that the electronic device implements the electronic device as described in the second aspect. any possible implementation.
第十一方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信系统,该通信系统包括第一设备和第二设备,其中,第一设备实现如第一方面中任一可能的实现方式。In an eleventh aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication system, where the communication system includes a first device and a second device, where the first device implements any possible implementation manner in the first aspect.
实施本申请提供的上述方面,用户可以根据个人需求快捷选择场景化服务和/或原子化服务,通过用户选定设备组合,针对性提供了该设备组合下可用的场景化服务和/或原子化服务,给用户列举了详尽、丰富的使用场景,引导用户使用超级终端的功能充分的探索更多的应用场景,实现了按设备组合推荐场景化服务的效果。Implementing the above aspects provided by this application, users can quickly select scenario-based services and/or atomization services according to personal needs, and provide scenario-based services and/or atomization services available under the device combination through the user-selected device combination The service lists detailed and rich usage scenarios for users, guides users to fully explore more application scenarios by using the functions of the HyperTerminal, and realizes the effect of recommending scenario-based services according to device combinations.
附图说明Description of drawings
图1为本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统的示意图;FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图2为本申请实施例提供的电子设备的硬件结构示意图;FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of a hardware structure of an electronic device provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图3为本申请实施例提供的电子设备的软件架构示意图;FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of the software architecture of the electronic device provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图4为本申请实施例提供的用户界面示意图;FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a user interface provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图5为本申请实施例提供的用户界面示意图;FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a user interface provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图6为本申请实施例提供的用户界面示意图;FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of a user interface provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图7为本申请实施例提供的用户界面示意图;FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of a user interface provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图8为本申请实施例提供的用户界面示意图;FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of a user interface provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图9为本申请实施例提供的用户界面示意图;FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of a user interface provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图10为本申请实施例提供的用户界面示意图;FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of the user interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图11为本申请实施例提供的用户界面示意图;FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of the user interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图12为本申请实施例提供的用户界面示意图;Fig. 12 is a schematic diagram of the user interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图13A为本申请实施例提供的用户界面示意图;FIG. 13A is a schematic diagram of the user interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图13B为本申请实施例提供的用户界面示意图;FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram of the user interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图13C为本申请实施例提供的用户界面示意图;FIG. 13C is a schematic diagram of the user interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图13D为本申请实施例提供的用户界面示意图;FIG. 13D is a schematic diagram of the user interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图14为本申请实施例提供的用户界面示意图;FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of the user interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图15为本申请实施例提供的用户交互界面示意图;FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of a user interaction interface provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图16为本申请实施例提供的用户交互界面示意图;FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram of a user interaction interface provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图17为本申请实施例提供的用户交互界面示意图;FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram of a user interaction interface provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图18为本申请实施例提供的用户界面示意图;Figure 18 is a schematic diagram of the user interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图19为本申请实施例提供的用户界面示意图;Fig. 19 is a schematic diagram of the user interface provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图20为本申请实施例提供的一种设备交互方法的流程图;FIG. 20 is a flow chart of a device interaction method provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图21为本申请实施例提供的一种功能模块示意图;FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram of a functional module provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图22A~图22J为本申请实施例提供的一些用户界面示意图;Figures 22A to 22J are schematic diagrams of some user interfaces provided by the embodiments of the present application;
图23A~图23D为本申请实施例提供的一些用户界面示意图;23A to 23D are schematic diagrams of some user interfaces provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图24A~图24D为本申请实施例提供的一些用户界面示意图;Figures 24A to 24D are schematic diagrams of some user interfaces provided by the embodiments of the present application;
图25A~图25H为本申请实施例提供的一些用户界面示意图;Figures 25A to 25H are schematic diagrams of some user interfaces provided by the embodiments of the present application;
图26A~图26C为本申请实施例提供的一些用户界面示意图;26A to 26C are schematic diagrams of some user interfaces provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图27A~图27E为本申请实施例提供的一些用户界面示意图;Figures 27A to 27E are schematic diagrams of some user interfaces provided by the embodiments of the present application;
图28A~图28K为本申请实施例提供的一些用户界面示意图;28A to 28K are schematic diagrams of some user interfaces provided by the embodiments of the present application;
图29A和图29B为本申请实施例提供的一些用户界面示意图;Figure 29A and Figure 29B are schematic diagrams of some user interfaces provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图30A~图30C为本申请实施例提供的一些用户界面示意图;30A to 30C are schematic diagrams of some user interfaces provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图31A~图31C为本申请实施例提供的一些用户界面示意图;31A to 31C are schematic diagrams of some user interfaces provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图32A和图32B为本申请实施例提供的一些用户界面示意图;Figure 32A and Figure 32B are schematic diagrams of some user interfaces provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图33A~图33C为本申请实施例提供的一些用户界面示意图;33A to 33C are schematic diagrams of some user interfaces provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图34A~图34O为本申请实施例提供的一些用户界面示意图。34A to 34O are schematic diagrams of some user interfaces provided by the embodiments of the present application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
下面将结合附图对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行清楚、详尽地描述。其中,在本申请实施例的描述中,除非另有说明,“/”表示或的意思,例如,A/B可以表示A或B;文本中的“和/或”仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application will be described clearly and in detail below in conjunction with the accompanying drawings. Among them, in the description of the embodiments of this application, unless otherwise specified, "/" means or means, for example, A/B can mean A or B; "and/or" in the text is only a description of associated objects The association relationship of indicates that there may be three kinds of relationships, for example, A and/or B may indicate: A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, and B exists independently.
以下,术语“第一”、“第二”仅用于描述目的,而不能理解为暗示或暗示相对重要性或者隐含指明所指示的技术特征的数量。由此,限定有“第一”、“第二”的特征可以明示或者隐含地包括一个或者更多个该特征,另外,在本申请实施例的描述中,“多个”是指两个或多于两个。Hereinafter, the terms "first" and "second" are used for descriptive purposes only, and cannot be understood as implying or implying relative importance or implicitly specifying the quantity of indicated technical features. Therefore, the features defined as "first" and "second" may explicitly or implicitly include one or more of these features. In addition, in the description of the embodiments of the present application, "plurality" refers to two or more than two.
本申请以下实施例中的术语“用户界面(user interface,UI)”,是应用程序(application,APP)或操作系统(operating system,OS)与用户之间进行交互和信息交换的介质接口,它实现信息的内部形式与用户可以接受形式之间的转换。用户界面是通过java、可扩展标记语言(extensible markup language,XML)等特定计算机语言编写的源代码,界面源代码在电子设备上经过解析,渲染,最终呈现为用户可以识别的内容。用户界面常用的表现形式是图形用户界面(graphic user interface,GUI),是指采用图形方式显示的与计算机操作相关的用户界面。它可以是在电子设备的显示屏中显示的文本、图标、按钮、菜单、选项卡、文本框、对话框、状态栏、导航栏、Widget等可视的界面元素。The term "user interface (UI)" in the following embodiments of the present application is a medium interface for interaction and information exchange between an application program (application, APP) or an operating system (operating system, OS) and a user. Realize the conversion between the internal form of information and the form acceptable to users. The user interface is the source code written in a specific computer language such as java and extensible markup language (XML). The source code of the interface is parsed and rendered on the electronic device, and finally presented as content that can be recognized by the user. The commonly used form of user interface is the graphical user interface (graphic user interface, GUI), which refers to the user interface related to computer operation displayed in a graphical way. It may be text, icons, buttons, menus, tabs, text boxes, dialog boxes, status bars, navigation bars, Widgets, and other visible interface elements displayed on the display screen of the electronic device.
随着消费升级,用户拥有的智能终端设备的数量越来越多。在一些使用场景中,用户常常需要两个或两个以上的终端设备联动或协同工作以提供某些服务、实现某些功能,也可称 之为跨设备业务。例如手机和智慧屏协同实现视频投屏;手机向其他设备分享文件或图片等。实际应用中会发现,开启多个设备协同工作的时候,用户操作繁琐,入口分布零散,人机交互性能不佳,用户体验差。As consumption upgrades, users own more and more smart terminal devices. In some usage scenarios, users often need two or more terminal devices to link or work together to provide certain services and realize certain functions, which can also be called cross-device services. For example, mobile phones and smart screens cooperate to realize video projection; mobile phones share files or pictures with other devices. In practical applications, it will be found that when multiple devices are turned on to work together, the user operation is cumbersome, the entry distribution is scattered, the human-computer interaction performance is not good, and the user experience is poor.
在一些实现方式中,当多个设备进行协同工作的时候,只提供一种默认服务,但是一种服务已经无法满足多样化场景的需求。如手机和智慧屏协同时,可以提供多屏协同服务。但是手机和智慧屏协同还可以提供更多种的服务,如家庭影院、体感游戏、畅享K歌等应用场景下的服务,而手机上没有提供多种场景对应的服务选项的入口。如果用户想切换使用其他应用场景的服务,可能需要退出当前界面,打开新的应用程序,开启对应的服务,用户操作繁琐。In some implementations, when multiple devices work together, only one default service is provided, but one service cannot meet the requirements of diverse scenarios. For example, when a mobile phone and a smart screen are coordinated, multi-screen collaborative services can be provided. However, the cooperation of mobile phones and smart screens can also provide more services, such as services in application scenarios such as home theater, motion-sensing games, and enjoying karaoke. However, there is no entry for service options corresponding to various scenarios on the mobile phone. If the user wants to switch to a service in another application scenario, he may need to exit the current interface, open a new application, and enable the corresponding service, which is cumbersome for the user.
本申请提供了一种设备交互方法,该设备交互方法可应用在多个设备组成的通信系统中,在一些实施例中,该通信系统也可称为超级终端或超级终端系统。该方法的目的是探索全新的人机交互方式,提供更直观、更便利的设备交互方式,承载用户的对于协同多个设备的需求,为用户提供多种场景对应的服务选项的入口。The present application provides a device interaction method, which can be applied in a communication system composed of multiple devices. In some embodiments, the communication system can also be called a hyper terminal or a hyper terminal system. The purpose of this method is to explore a new way of human-computer interaction, provide a more intuitive and convenient device interaction method, meet the user's needs for coordinating multiple devices, and provide users with access to service options corresponding to various scenarios.
在本申请以下各实施例中,多个终端设备可以组成“超级终端”(或称超级终端系统)。“超级终端”指的是通过分布式技术将多个终端的能力进行整合,存放在一个虚拟的硬件资源池里,根据业务需求统一管理、调度和整合各个终端的能力,来对外提供服务,使得不同终端之间实现快速连接、能力互助、资源共享。In the following embodiments of the present application, a plurality of terminal devices may form a "hyper terminal" (or called a hyper terminal system). "Super terminal" refers to the ability to integrate the capabilities of multiple terminals through distributed technology, store them in a virtual hardware resource pool, and provide external services based on the unified management, scheduling, and integration capabilities of each terminal according to business needs. Fast connection, capability mutual assistance, and resource sharing are realized between different terminals.
超级终端中可以包括核心设备/中心设备,和,协同设备/关联设备。核心设备是超级终端系统的控制中心,承载设备管理、服务管理、服务调度等功能。核心设备与一个或多个关联设备连接,组成超级终端。关联设备可以是与核心设备(如手机)位于同一通信网络的电子设备,例如,位于同一个Wi-Fi网络的电子设备。关联设备还可以是其登录账号与核心设备登录账号为同一账号(如华为账号)的电子设备,或者是其登录账号与核心设备登录账号属于同一群组(如同一家庭账号)的电子设备。关联设备还可以是通过其他方式与核心设备建立可信关系(或称配对)的电子设备,如,已配对蓝牙的电子设备,连接过手机分享的热点的电子设备,或者,手机连接过该电子设备的热点,又或者,手机与该电子设备建立过Wi-Fi P2P连接等。本申请实施例对上述关联设备与核心设备的具体关联方式不作限定。The hyper terminal may include a core device/central device, and a cooperative device/associated device. The core device is the control center of the super terminal system, carrying functions such as device management, service management, and service scheduling. The core device is connected with one or more associated devices to form a HyperTerminal. The associated device may be an electronic device located on the same communication network as the core device (such as a mobile phone), for example, an electronic device located on the same Wi-Fi network. The associated device can also be an electronic device whose login account is the same as the core device login account (such as a Huawei account), or an electronic device whose login account and the core device login account belong to the same group (such as the same family account). The associated device can also be an electronic device that establishes a trusted relationship (or pairing) with the core device in other ways, such as an electronic device that has been paired with Bluetooth, an electronic device that has connected to a hotspot shared by a mobile phone, or a mobile phone that has been connected to the electronic device. The hotspot of the device, or the mobile phone has established a Wi-Fi P2P connection with the electronic device, etc. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific manner of associating the foregoing associated device with the core device.
不同关联设备与核心设备连接并协同工作,可以对应实现不同功能。例如,核心设备手机和关联设备笔记本电脑组成超级终端,可以实现将手机界面投屏到笔记本电脑上的投屏功能;核心设备手机与关联设备智能音箱组成超级终端,可以实现手机遥控智能音箱的功能,等等。Different associated devices are connected to the core device and work together to achieve different functions. For example, the core device mobile phone and associated device laptop form a super terminal, which can realize the function of projecting the screen of the mobile phone interface to the laptop; the core device mobile phone and related device smart speakers form a super terminal, which can realize the function of mobile phone remote control smart speaker ,etc.
需要说明的是,在本申请以下实施例中,用“超级终端”来统称核心设备,以及与核心设备具有关联关系的一个或多个关联设备共同组成的通信系统。即,“超级终端”用于表述具有上述关联关系的电子设备的集合。可以理解的,该“超级终端”仅为示例性说明词汇,也可以替换表达为其他词汇,如“智慧协同”、“多设备协同”等,这并不构成对本申请实施例中通信系统的具体限定。本申请也不对核心设备和关联设备的设备类型作任何限制。It should be noted that, in the following embodiments of the present application, "hyperterminal" is used to collectively refer to a core device and a communication system composed of one or more associated devices that have an associated relationship with the core device. That is, "hyperterminal" is used to describe a collection of electronic devices having the above-mentioned association relationship. It can be understood that the "super terminal" is only an exemplary vocabulary, and it can also be replaced by other words, such as "smart collaboration", "multi-device collaboration", etc., which does not constitute a specific description of the communication system in the embodiment of the present application. limited. This application also does not impose any limitation on the device types of the core device and associated devices.
本申请中的电子设备具体可以为手机、平板电脑、笔记本电脑、个人计算机(personal computer,PC)、智能电视(也可称为智慧屏、大屏等),或智能手表、智能手环等可穿戴设备,本申请对此不作限制。如,以手机为核心设备/中心设备,手机可以与其他一个或多个关联设备(如笔记本电脑、PC、平板电脑、智能手表等)配合为消费者提供多功能、个性化、更有趣、更便利的服务。The electronic device in this application can specifically be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a notebook computer, a personal computer (PC), a smart TV (also called a smart screen, a large screen, etc.), or a smart watch, a smart bracelet, etc. The wearable device is not limited in this application. For example, with the mobile phone as the core device/central device, the mobile phone can cooperate with one or more other associated devices (such as laptops, PCs, tablets, smart watches, etc.) to provide consumers with multi-functional, personalized, more interesting and more convenient service.
该设备交互方法提供了核心设备与多个关联设备之间交互的统一入口,即超级终端界面,用户可以在超级终端界面中触发任两个或两个以上的电子设备组成超级终端。并且可以支持在多个设备发起协同的时候,超级终端系统根据各个设备的设备类型、设备特征、产品定位、常用功能、设备状态、当前运行应用、当前设备所处环境等情况,判断使用场景,并基于使用场景给用户提供一个或多个场景化服务选项。不同场景化服务选项为不同应用场景下对应的服务的入口,解决在不同设备组合情况下无法给用户提供丰富的使用场景的问题。本申请除了支持电子设备为用户智能推荐多种应用场景对应的场景化服务选项,还可以根据不同的应用场景或不同设备的类型、特征、产品定位等推荐不同原子化服务/功能组合或交互功能选项。另外还可以为了扩展更多用户体验更佳的场景,为用户推荐搭配设备等。The device interaction method provides a unified entrance for the interaction between the core device and multiple associated devices, that is, the hyper terminal interface, and the user can trigger any two or more electronic devices to form a hyper terminal in the hyper terminal interface. And it can support that when multiple devices initiate collaboration, the HyperTerminal system can judge the usage scenario according to the device type, device characteristics, product positioning, common functions, device status, current running applications, and current device environment of each device. And provide users with one or more scenario-based service options based on usage scenarios. Different scenario-based service options are the entrances of corresponding services in different application scenarios, which solves the problem that users cannot be provided with rich usage scenarios in the case of different device combinations. In addition to supporting electronic devices to intelligently recommend scene-based service options corresponding to various application scenarios for users, this application can also recommend different atomic service/function combinations or interactive functions according to different application scenarios or different device types, features, product positioning, etc. option. In addition, in order to expand more scenarios with better user experience, it can also recommend matching equipment for users.
实施本申请提供的方法,可以增强人机交互性能,用户可以根据个人需求快捷选择场景化服务和/或原子化服务,无需繁琐的分散设置,由此,可以解决电子设备间的交互功能的设置入口分布零散,设置繁琐,无法给用户列举丰富的使用场景的问题。通过用户选定设备组合,针对性提供了该设备组合下可用的场景化服务和/或原子化服务,给用户列举了详尽、丰富的使用场景,引导用户使用超级终端的功能充分的探索更多的应用场景,实现了按设备组合推荐场景化服务的效果。并且,给用户展现更直观、更简洁的用户界面,提高用户界面的直观性、易读性和易操作性,简化用户操作,电子设备可以快速响应打开不同的应用服务,提高了用户体验。Implementing the method provided by this application can enhance the performance of human-computer interaction, and users can quickly select scene-based services and/or atomized services according to individual needs, without cumbersome decentralized settings, thus solving the problem of setting interactive functions between electronic devices The distribution of entrances is scattered, the settings are cumbersome, and it is impossible to list rich usage scenarios for users. Through the device combination selected by the user, the available scenario services and/or atomic services under the device combination are provided in a targeted manner, and detailed and rich usage scenarios are listed for the user, guiding the user to use the functions of the hyper terminal to fully explore more application scenarios, realizing the effect of recommending scenario-based services based on device combinations. Moreover, a more intuitive and concise user interface is presented to the user, the intuitiveness, readability and operability of the user interface are improved, user operations are simplified, and the electronic device can quickly respond to open different application services, thereby improving the user experience.
下面介绍本申请实施例提供的通信系统10。The communication system 10 provided by the embodiment of the present application is introduced below.
图1示出了本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统10。FIG. 1 shows a communication system 10 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
如图1所示,该通信系统10包括多个终端设备,这些终端设备可以包括图示的手机101、智能手表102、笔记本电脑103、平板电脑104、智能手环105、耳机106、智能电视(又可称为智慧屏、大屏等)107、智能音箱108等,除了图1所示的上述设备,通信系统10中还可以包括其他类型的电子设备,比如还可以包括个人计算机(personal computer,PC)、桌面型计算机、膝上型计算机、手持计算机、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)设备、虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)设备、人工智能(artificial intelligence,AI)设备、车机、游戏机、跑步机、云主机/云服务器、其他智能穿戴设备等,还可以包括物联网(internet of things,IOT)设备或智能家居设备如智能热水器、智能灯具、智能空调、智能体重秤等等,本申请对设备类型不作任何限制。在本实施例中,终端设备也可简称为终端,终端设备通常是可以提供用户界面、可以与用户交互、为用户提供业务功能的智能电子设备。As shown in FIG. 1, the communication system 10 includes a plurality of terminal devices, and these terminal devices may include the illustrated mobile phone 101, smart watch 102, notebook computer 103, tablet computer 104, smart bracelet 105, earphone 106, smart TV ( It can also be called a smart screen, a large screen, etc.) 107, a smart speaker 108, etc. In addition to the above-mentioned devices shown in FIG. 1, the communication system 10 can also include other types of electronic devices, such as a personal computer (personal computer, PC), desktop computer, laptop computer, handheld computer, augmented reality (augmented reality, AR) equipment, virtual reality (virtual reality, VR) equipment, artificial intelligence (artificial intelligence, AI) equipment, car machine, game machine , treadmill, cloud host/cloud server, other smart wearable devices, etc., can also include Internet of Things (IOT) devices or smart home devices such as smart water heaters, smart lamps, smart air conditioners, smart scales, etc., this The application does not place any restrictions on the type of equipment. In this embodiment, a terminal device may also be referred to simply as a terminal, and a terminal device is generally an intelligent electronic device that can provide a user interface, interact with a user, and provide a service function for the user.
在通信系统10中,手机101作为中心设备/核心设备,可以与其他协同设备/关联设备建立通信连接,组成“超级终端”。“超级终端”指的是通过分布式技术将多个终端的能力进行整合,存放在一个虚拟的硬件资源池里,根据业务需求统一管理、调度和整合各个终端的能力,来对外提供服务,使得不同终端之间实现快速连接、能力互助、资源共享。例如,手机101和笔记本电脑103组成超级终端,可以实现将手机101界面投屏到笔记本电脑103上的投屏功能;手机101与智能音箱108组成超级终端,可以实现手机101遥控智能音箱108的功能,等等。In the communication system 10, the mobile phone 101 serves as a central device/core device, and can establish communication connections with other cooperative devices/associated devices to form a "super terminal". "Super terminal" refers to the ability to integrate the capabilities of multiple terminals through distributed technology, store them in a virtual hardware resource pool, and provide external services based on the unified management, scheduling, and integration capabilities of each terminal according to business needs. Fast connection, capability mutual assistance, and resource sharing are realized between different terminals. For example, the mobile phone 101 and the notebook computer 103 form a super terminal, which can realize the function of projecting the interface of the mobile phone 101 to the notebook computer 103; ,etc.
需要说明的是,在本申请以下实施例中,用“超级终端”来统称手机101作为核心设备,以及与手机101具有上述关联关系的关联设备共同组成的系统。即,“超级终端”用于表述具有上述关联关系的电子设备的集合。可以理解的,该“超级终端”仅为示例性说明词汇,也可以替换表达为其他词汇,如“智慧协同”、“多设备协同”等,这并不构成对本申请实施例 中通信系统的具体限定。It should be noted that, in the following embodiments of the present application, "hyperterminal" is used to collectively refer to the system composed of the mobile phone 101 as the core device and the associated devices having the above-mentioned association relationship with the mobile phone 101 . That is, "hyperterminal" is used to describe a collection of electronic devices having the above-mentioned association relationship. It can be understood that the "super terminal" is only an exemplary vocabulary, and it can also be replaced by other words, such as "smart collaboration", "multi-device collaboration", etc., which does not constitute a specific description of the communication system in the embodiment of the present application. limited.
通信系统10中各个终端设备之间的通信连接可以是有线连接或无线连接,本实施例不作限制。各个终端之间可以通过建立的通信连接传输数据或指令。The communication connection between each terminal device in the communication system 10 may be a wired connection or a wireless connection, which is not limited in this embodiment. Data or instructions can be transmitted between terminals through the established communication connection.
该通信连接可以为近距离通信连接。比如有线连接,如通用串行总线(uniersalserialbus,USB)连接、高清多媒体接口(high definition multimedia interface,HDMI)连接、显示接口(display port,DP)连接等。或者无线连接,如蓝牙(bluetooth,BT)连接、无线保真(wir eless fidelity,Wi-Fi)连接、热点连接、近场通信(near field communication,NFC)、ZigBee等,实现各个终端之间在无账号或异账号情况下通信。无线连接没有连线束缚,用户活动自由度更高。本申请实施例对通信连接的类型不作限制。终端设备中可以配置有蓝牙(bluetooth,BT)模块和/或无线局域网络(wireless local area networks,WLAN)模块。其中,蓝牙模块可以提供包括经典蓝牙(蓝牙2.1)或蓝牙低功耗(bluetooth low energy,BLE)中一项或多项蓝牙通信的解决方案,WLAN模块可以提供包括无线保真点对点连接(wireless fidelity peer-to-peer,Wi-Fi P2P)、无线保真局域网(wireless fidelity local area networks,Wi-Fi LAN)或无线保真软件接入点(wireless fidelity software access point,Wi-Fi softAP)中一项或多项WLAN通信的解决方案。在一些实施例中,Wi-Fi P2P是指允许无线网络中的设备无需通过无线路由器即可以点对点形式相互连接,在
Figure PCTCN2022115212-appb-000001
系统中又可称为无线保真直连(wireless fidelity direct,Wi-Fi direct)。建立Wi-FiP2P连接的设备之间可以在不连接网络或热点的情况下,直接通过Wi-Fi(必须处于同一频段)进行数据交换,实现点对点的通信,如传输文件、图片、视频等数据。相对于蓝牙,Wi-Fi P2P具有搜索速度和传输速度更快、传输距离更远等优点。
The communication link may be a short-range communication link. For example, a wired connection, such as a universal serial bus (uniersalserialbus, USB) connection, a high definition multimedia interface (high definition multimedia interface, HDMI) connection, a display port (display port, DP) connection, and the like. Or wireless connection, such as Bluetooth (bluetooth, BT) connection, wireless fidelity (wi-fidelity, Wi-Fi) connection, hotspot connection, near field communication (near field communication, NFC), ZigBee, etc., to realize the communication between each terminal Communicate without an account or with a different account. The wireless connection is not bound by wires, and the user has a higher degree of freedom of movement. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the type of the communication connection. A Bluetooth (bluetooth, BT) module and/or a wireless local area network (wireless local area networks, WLAN) module may be configured in the terminal device. Among them, the Bluetooth module can provide one or more Bluetooth communication solutions including classic Bluetooth (Bluetooth 2.1) or Bluetooth low energy (Bluetooth low energy, BLE), and the WLAN module can provide wireless fidelity point-to-point connections (wireless fidelity peer-to-peer, Wi-Fi P2P), wireless fidelity local area networks (wireless fidelity local area networks, Wi-Fi LAN) or wireless fidelity software access point (wireless fidelity software access point, Wi-Fi softAP) One or more WLAN communication solutions. In some embodiments, Wi-Fi P2P refers to allowing devices in a wireless network to connect to each other in a point-to-point manner without going through a wireless router.
Figure PCTCN2022115212-appb-000001
In the system, it may also be called wireless fidelity direct (Wi-Fi direct). Devices that establish a Wi-Fi P2P connection can exchange data directly through Wi-Fi (must be in the same frequency band) without connecting to a network or hotspot, and realize peer-to-peer communication, such as transferring files, pictures, videos and other data. Compared with Bluetooth, Wi-Fi P2P has the advantages of faster search speed and transmission speed, and longer transmission distance.
该通信连接还可以为远距离通信连接。比如各个终端登录同一个账号从而通过互联网Internet实现连接并通信。通信系统10中的多个电子设备也可以登录不同账号,但通过绑定的方式进行连接。例如,手机101和智能手表102可以登录不同的账号,手机101在设备管理应用中,将智能手表102和本身进行绑定,之后通过该设备管理应用来连接。The communication link can also be a long-distance communication link. For example, each terminal logs in the same account to realize connection and communication through the Internet. Multiple electronic devices in the communication system 10 may also log in to different accounts, but are connected through binding. For example, the mobile phone 101 and the smart watch 102 can log in to different accounts, and the mobile phone 101 binds the smart watch 102 with itself in the device management application, and then connects through the device management application.
此外,通信系统10中的多个终端设备也可以结合上述任意几种方式来连接并通信,本申请实施例对此不做限制。例如,手机101与笔记本电脑103之间的通信连接可以是多个连接组合而成,比如,手机101或笔记本电脑103通过Wi-Fi与路由器建立连接,从而接入网络,或通过蜂窝信号与基站建立连接,从而接入网络,手机101与笔记本电脑103可以通过网络进行通信。如手机101通过网络将信息发送至云端服务器上,云端服务器再将信息通过网络发送给与笔记本电脑103。In addition, multiple terminal devices in the communication system 10 may also be connected and communicate in combination with any of the above methods, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application. For example, the communication connection between the mobile phone 101 and the notebook computer 103 may be a combination of multiple connections. For example, the mobile phone 101 or the notebook computer 103 establishes a connection with a router through Wi-Fi to access the network, or communicates with a base station through a cellular signal. A connection is established to access the network, and the mobile phone 101 and the notebook computer 103 can communicate through the network. For example, the mobile phone 101 sends the information to the cloud server through the network, and the cloud server then sends the information to the notebook computer 103 through the network.
在一些实施例中,当两个终端设备互为可信设备时,比如该两个终端设备在之前进行匹配或连接过,待再次连接时,这两个终端设备将会自动建立通信连接,然后进行数据交互,无需用户手动再次进行连接或匹配的操作,省时省力。In some embodiments, when two terminal devices are mutually trusted devices, for example, the two terminal devices have been matched or connected before, and when they are to be connected again, the two terminal devices will automatically establish a communication connection, and then For data interaction, the user does not need to manually connect or match again, saving time and effort.
通信系统10中的各终端设备上可以搭载
Figure PCTCN2022115212-appb-000002
系统、
Figure PCTCN2022115212-appb-000003
系统、
Figure PCTCN2022115212-appb-000004
Figure PCTCN2022115212-appb-000005
系统、HarmonyOS或者其他类型的操作系统,通信系统10中的各个终端设备的操作系统可以相同也可以不同,本申请对此不作限制。在一些实施例中,通信系统10中相连接的各个终端均搭载有HarmonyOS,那么该通信系统10可以称为HarmonyOS超级虚拟终端(super virtual device),亦可称为HarmonyOS超级终端。
Each terminal device in the communication system 10 can carry
Figure PCTCN2022115212-appb-000002
system,
Figure PCTCN2022115212-appb-000003
system,
Figure PCTCN2022115212-appb-000004
Figure PCTCN2022115212-appb-000005
operating system, HarmonyOS or other types of operating systems, the operating systems of each terminal device in the communication system 10 may be the same or different, and this application does not limit this. In some embodiments, each connected terminal in the communication system 10 is equipped with HarmonyOS, so the communication system 10 may be called a HarmonyOS super virtual device (super virtual device), or a HarmonyOS super terminal.
在一些实施例中,手机101或其他终端设备上安装有超级终端应用,方便用户对各个终端设备进行管理。In some embodiments, a hyper terminal application is installed on the mobile phone 101 or other terminal devices, which is convenient for users to manage each terminal device.
例如,智能手表可以检测用户的运动数据,如走路步数,跑步时长,游泳时长等,并将 用户的运动数据同步给跑步机和/或手机。同样的,跑步机和/或手机也可以将检测到的用户数据同步给智能手表。多个终端配合使用可以实现对用户的运动数据更为准确的检测。For example, a smart watch can detect the user's motion data, such as the number of steps taken, running time, swimming time, etc., and synchronize the user's motion data to the treadmill and/or mobile phone. Similarly, treadmills and/or mobile phones can also synchronize detected user data to smart watches. Multiple terminals can be used together to achieve more accurate detection of the user's motion data.
在本实施例中,通信系统10可以基于当前已经连接的设备类型和/或设备特征、产品定位、常用功能等信息,或者根据所检测到用户当前所处的环境,或者设备的运行状态等情况,分析当前用户的使用场景。In this embodiment, the communication system 10 may be based on the currently connected device type and/or device features, product positioning, commonly used functions and other information, or according to the detected environment where the user is currently located, or the operating status of the device, etc. , to analyze the usage scenario of the current user.
在本实施例中,通信系统10可以根据系统中的设备类型、设备特征、产品定位、设备用途、设备可以提供的协同服务、设备当前所处环境、设备运行状态、用户最近使用的应用、当前运行应用、用户操作输入的方位信息等情况,综合考量得出的一个或多个场景化服务选项,并在用户界面上予以显示,方便用户快速启动相关服务或功能。In this embodiment, the communication system 10 can be based on the type of device in the system, device features, product positioning, device usage, collaborative services that the device can provide, the current environment of the device, the operating status of the device, the application recently used by the user, the current One or more scenario-based service options are obtained after comprehensive consideration of running applications, location information input by users, etc., and displayed on the user interface, so that users can quickly start related services or functions.
在一些实施例中,在列出场景化服务选项时,场景服务提供模块可以根据用户最近对不同协同服务的使用频率,或者检测当前设备所处的环境,或者用户最近运行的应用等情况,计算各场景化服务选项被选择的概率,在场景化服务选项区域中优先靠前显示推测被选择概率大的场景化服务选项。In some embodiments, when listing the scenario-based service options, the scenario service providing module may calculate the user's latest use frequency of different collaborative services, or detect the environment where the current device is located, or the user's recently run application, etc. For the probability of each scenario-based service option being selected, the scenario-based service option that is estimated to have a higher probability of being selected is displayed first in the scenario-based service option area.
在一些实施例中,通信系统10还可以基于当前组成系统的设备的类型,分析当前场景,向用户列举推荐适合当前场景的其他设备,以帮助用户获取更好的场景体验;或者推测更多可扩充的使用场景,然后向用户列举推荐其他设备,假如用户采用系统推荐的设备,可以进一步地扩充更多、更丰富的使用场景。In some embodiments, the communication system 10 can also analyze the current scene based on the types of devices that currently make up the system, and list and recommend other devices suitable for the current scene to the user, so as to help the user obtain a better scene experience; Expanded usage scenarios, and then list and recommend other devices to the user. If the user adopts the device recommended by the system, more and richer usage scenarios can be further expanded.
在一些实施例中,通信系统10还可以基于当前设备组合、查询到的各个设备可提供的原子化服务,再根据用户实际选择的场景化服务,或基于用户常用服务组合,或者用户设定的默认服务组合,或者基于生活认知最适合该场景下的服务组合,或者从服务器获取到该场景下使用频率最多的服务组合等,自动设置该场景下的原子化服务组合,省去用户繁琐的选择操作。通信系统10还可以支持用户个性化设定原子化服务组合,用户可以根据个人喜好或实际情况手动修改原子化服务组合,将某个原子化服务调整为其他设备提供。In some embodiments, the communication system 10 can also be based on the current device combination, the queried atomic services that can be provided by each device, and then based on the scene service actually selected by the user, or based on the user's common service combination, or the user-set The default service combination, or the service combination that is most suitable for the scenario based on life cognition, or the service combination that is most frequently used in the scenario is obtained from the server, etc., and the atomic service combination in the scenario is automatically set, saving the user's cumbersome Choose an action. The communication system 10 can also support the user to personalize the atomic service combination, and the user can manually modify the atomic service combination according to personal preferences or actual conditions, and adjust a certain atomic service to be provided by other devices.
具体实施例的说明请结合后述实施例理解。Please understand the description of specific embodiments in conjunction with the following embodiments.
需要说明的是,图1所示的通信系统10仅用于辅助描述本申请实施例提供的技术方案,并不对本申请其他实施例构成限制。在实际业务场景中,通信系统10中可以包括更多或更少的终端设备,本申请对通信系统10中的终端设备类型、终端设备数量、连接方式等不作任何限定。It should be noted that the communication system 10 shown in FIG. 1 is only used to assist in describing the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present application, and does not limit other embodiments of the present application. In an actual business scenario, the communication system 10 may include more or fewer terminal devices, and this application does not make any restrictions on the type, quantity, and connection mode of the terminal devices in the communication system 10 .
下面介绍本申请实施例提供的示例性电子设备100。The exemplary electronic device 100 provided by the embodiment of the present application is introduced below.
图2为本申请实施例提供的电子设备100的硬件结构示意图。本申请实施例提供的示例性电子设备100可以但不限于是手机、笔记本电脑、平板电脑(portable android device,PAD)、智能手环、智能手表、耳机、个人计算机(personal computer,PC)、智能电视、智能音箱等,还可以为桌面型计算机、膝上型计算机、手持计算机、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)设备、虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)设备、人工智能(artificial intelligence,AI)设备、车机、游戏机、跑步机、云主机/云服务器、其他智能穿戴设备等,或者是物联网(internet of things,IOT)设备或智能家居设备如智能热水器、智能灯具、智能空调、智能体重秤等其他类型的电子设备,本申请对设备类型不作任何限制。FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of a hardware structure of an electronic device 100 provided in an embodiment of the present application. The exemplary electronic device 100 provided in the embodiment of the present application may be, but not limited to, a mobile phone, a notebook computer, a tablet computer (portable android device, PAD), a smart bracelet, a smart watch, a headset, a personal computer (personal computer, PC), a smart phone TVs, smart speakers, etc., can also be desktop computers, laptop computers, handheld computers, augmented reality (augmented reality, AR) equipment, virtual reality (virtual reality, VR) equipment, artificial intelligence (artificial intelligence, AI) equipment , car machines, game consoles, treadmills, cloud hosts/cloud servers, other smart wearable devices, etc., or Internet of Things (IOT) devices or smart home devices such as smart water heaters, smart lamps, smart air conditioners, smart weight Other types of electronic equipment such as scales, this application does not impose any restrictions on the type of equipment.
可以理解的是,本实施例示意的结构并不构成对第一设备的具体限定。在本申请另一些实施例中,电子设备100可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件,可以增加或减少部分硬件结构,或者组合某些部件,或者拆分某些部件,或者不同的部件布置。图示的部件可以以硬件,软 件或软件和硬件的组合实现。It can be understood that, the structure shown in this embodiment does not constitute a specific limitation on the first device. In other embodiments of the present application, the electronic device 100 may include more or fewer components than those shown in the illustration, some hardware structures may be added or reduced, some components may be combined, some components may be split, or different components layout. The illustrated components can be realized in hardware, software or a combination of software and hardware.
参考图2,电子设备100可以包括处理器110,外部存储器接口120,内部存储器121,通用串行总线(universal serial bus,USB)接口130,充电管理模块140,电源管理模块141,电池142,天线1,天线2,移动通信模块150,无线通信模块160,音频模块170,扬声器170A,受话器170B,麦克风170C,耳机接口170D,传感器模块180,按键190,马达191,指示器192,摄像头193,显示屏194,以及用户标识模块(subscriber identification module,SIM)卡接口195等。其中传感器模块180可以包括压力传感器180A,陀螺仪传感器180B,气压传感器180C,磁传感器180D,加速度传感器180E,距离传感器180F,接近光传感器180G,指纹传感器180H,温度传感器180J,触摸传感器180K,环境光传感器180L,骨传导传感器180M等。2, the electronic device 100 may include a processor 110, an external memory interface 120, an internal memory 121, a universal serial bus (universal serial bus, USB) interface 130, a charging management module 140, a power management module 141, a battery 142, and an antenna 1. Antenna 2, mobile communication module 150, wireless communication module 160, audio module 170, speaker 170A, receiver 170B, microphone 170C, earphone jack 170D, sensor module 180, button 190, motor 191, indicator 192, camera 193, display screen 194, and a subscriber identification module (subscriber identification module, SIM) card interface 195, etc. The sensor module 180 may include a pressure sensor 180A, a gyroscope sensor 180B, an air pressure sensor 180C, a magnetic sensor 180D, an acceleration sensor 180E, a distance sensor 180F, a proximity light sensor 180G, a fingerprint sensor 180H, a temperature sensor 180J, a touch sensor 180K, an ambient light sensor 180L, bone conduction sensor 180M, etc.
处理器110通常用于控制电子设备100的整体操作,可以包括一个或多个处理单元。例如:处理器110可以包括中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU),应用处理器(application processor,AP),调制解调处理器,图形处理器(graphics processing unit,GPU),图像信号处理器(image signal processor,ISP),视频处理单元(video processing unit,VPU),控制器,存储器,视频编解码器,数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP),基带处理器,和/或神经网络处理器(neural-network processing unit,NPU)等。其中,不同的处理单元可以是独立的器件,也可以集成在一个或多个处理器中。控制器可以根据指令操作码和时序信号,产生操作控制信号,完成取指令和执行指令的控制。The processor 110 is generally used to control the overall operation of the electronic device 100 and may include one or more processing units. For example: the processor 110 may include a central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU), an application processor (application processor, AP), a modem processor, a graphics processing unit (graphics processing unit, GPU), an image signal processor ( image signal processor (ISP), video processing unit (video processing unit, VPU), controller, memory, video codec, digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), baseband processor, and/or neural network processing device (neural-network processing unit, NPU), etc. Wherein, different processing units may be independent devices, or may be integrated in one or more processors. The controller can generate an operation control signal according to the instruction opcode and timing signal, and complete the control of fetching and executing the instruction.
数字信号处理器用于处理数字信号,除了可以处理数字图像信号,还可以处理其他数字信号。例如,当电子设备100在频点选择时,数字信号处理器用于对频点能量进行傅里叶变换等。Digital signal processors are used to process digital signals. In addition to digital image signals, they can also process other digital signals. For example, when the electronic device 100 selects a frequency point, the digital signal processor is used to perform Fourier transform on the energy of the frequency point.
视频编解码器用于对数字视频压缩或解压缩。电子设备100可以支持一种或多种视频编解码器。这样,电子设备100可以播放或录制多种编码格式的视频,例如:动态图像专家组(moving picture experts group,MPEG)1,MPEG2,MPEG3,MPEG4等。Video codecs are used to compress or decompress digital video. The electronic device 100 may support one or more video codecs. In this way, the electronic device 100 can play or record videos in various encoding formats, for example: moving picture experts group (moving picture experts group, MPEG) 1, MPEG2, MPEG3, MPEG4 and so on.
NPU为神经网络(neural-network,NN)计算处理器,通过借鉴生物神经网络结构,例如借鉴人脑神经元之间传递模式,对输入信息快速处理,还可以不断的自学习。通过NPU可以实现电子设备的智能认知等应用,例如:图像识别,人脸识别,语音识别,文本理解等。The NPU is a neural-network (NN) computing processor. By referring to the structure of biological neural networks, such as the transfer mode between neurons in the human brain, it can quickly process input information and continuously learn by itself. Applications such as intelligent cognition of electronic devices can be realized through NPU, such as: image recognition, face recognition, speech recognition, text understanding, etc.
处理器110中还可以设置存储器,用于存储指令和数据。在一些实施例中,处理器110中的存储器为高速缓冲存储器。该存储器可以保存处理器110刚用过或循环使用的指令或数据。如果处理器110需要再次使用该指令或数据,可从所述存储器中直接调用。避免了重复存取,减少了处理器110的等待时间,因而提高了系统的效率。A memory may also be provided in the processor 110 for storing instructions and data. In some embodiments, the memory in processor 110 is a cache memory. The memory may hold instructions or data that the processor 110 has just used or recycled. If the processor 110 needs to use the instruction or data again, it can be called directly from the memory. Repeated access is avoided, and the waiting time of the processor 110 is reduced, thus improving the efficiency of the system.
在一些实施例中,处理器110可以包括一个或多个接口。接口可以包括集成电路(inter-integrated circuit,I2C)接口,集成电路内置音频(inter-integrated circuit sound,I2S)接口,脉冲编码调制(pulse code modulation,PCM)接口,通用异步收发传输器(universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter,UART)接口,移动产业处理器接口(mobile industry processor interface,MIPI),通用输入输出(general-purpose input/output,GPIO)接口,用户标识模块(subscriber identity module,SIM)接口,和/或通用串行总线(universal serial bus,USB)接口,串行外设接口(serial peripheral interface,SPI)接口等。In some embodiments, processor 110 may include one or more interfaces. The interface may include an integrated circuit (inter-integrated circuit, I2C) interface, an integrated circuit built-in audio (inter-integrated circuit sound, I2S) interface, a pulse code modulation (pulse code modulation, PCM) interface, a universal asynchronous transmitter (universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter, UART) interface, mobile industry processor interface (mobile industry processor interface, MIPI), general-purpose input and output (general-purpose input/output, GPIO) interface, subscriber identity module (subscriber identity module, SIM) interface, and /or universal serial bus (universal serial bus, USB) interface, serial peripheral interface (serial peripheral interface, SPI) interface, etc.
I2C接口是一种双向同步串行总线,包括一根串行数据线(serial data line,SDA)和一根串行时钟线(derail clock line,SCL)。在一些实施例中,处理器110可以包含多组I2C总线。处理器110可以通过不同的I2C总线接口分别耦合触摸传感器180K,充电器,闪光灯,摄像 头193等。例如:处理器110可以通过I2C接口耦合触摸传感器180K,使处理器110与触摸传感器180K通过I2C总线接口通信,实现电子设备的触摸功能。The I2C interface is a bidirectional synchronous serial bus, including a serial data line (serial data line, SDA) and a serial clock line (derail clock line, SCL). In some embodiments, processor 110 may include multiple sets of I2C buses. The processor 110 can be respectively coupled to the touch sensor 180K, the charger, the flashlight, the camera 193 and the like through different I2C bus interfaces. For example, the processor 110 may be coupled to the touch sensor 180K through the I2C interface, so that the processor 110 and the touch sensor 180K communicate through the I2C bus interface to realize the touch function of the electronic device.
I2S接口可以用于音频通信。在一些实施例中,处理器110可以包含多组I2S总线。处理器110可以通过I2S总线与音频模块170耦合,实现处理器110与音频模块170之间的通信。在一些实施例中,音频模块170可以通过I2S接口向无线通信模块160传递音频信号。The I2S interface can be used for audio communication. In some embodiments, processor 110 may include multiple sets of I2S buses. The processor 110 may be coupled to the audio module 170 through an I2S bus to implement communication between the processor 110 and the audio module 170 . In some embodiments, the audio module 170 can transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the I2S interface.
PCM接口也可以用于音频通信,将模拟信号抽样,量化和编码。在一些实施例中,音频模块170与无线通信模块160可以通过PCM总线接口耦合。在一些实施例中,音频模块170也可以通过PCM接口向无线通信模块160传递音频信号。I2S接口和PCM接口都可以用于音频通信。The PCM interface can also be used for audio communication, sampling, quantizing and encoding the analog signal. In some embodiments, the audio module 170 and the wireless communication module 160 may be coupled through a PCM bus interface. In some embodiments, the audio module 170 can also transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the PCM interface. Both I2S interface and PCM interface can be used for audio communication.
UART接口是一种通用串行数据总线,用于异步通信。该总线可以为双向通信总线。它将要传输的数据在串行通信与并行通信之间转换。The UART interface is a universal serial data bus used for asynchronous communication. The bus can be a bidirectional communication bus. It converts the data to be transmitted between serial communication and parallel communication.
在一些实施例中,UART接口通常被用于连接处理器110与无线通信模块160。例如:处理器110通过UART接口与无线通信模块160中的蓝牙模块通信,实现蓝牙功能。在一些实施例中,音频模块170可以通过UART接口向无线通信模块160传递音频信号,实现播放音频的功能。In some embodiments, a UART interface is generally used to connect the processor 110 and the wireless communication module 160 . For example: the processor 110 communicates with the Bluetooth module in the wireless communication module 160 through the UART interface to realize the Bluetooth function. In some embodiments, the audio module 170 can transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the UART interface, so as to realize the function of playing audio.
MIPI接口可以被用于连接处理器110与显示屏194,摄像头193等外围器件。MIPI接口包括摄像头串行接口(camera serial interface,CSI),显示屏串行接口(display serial interface,DSI)等。在一些实施例中,处理器110和摄像头193通过CSI接口通信,实现电子设备的拍摄功能。处理器110和显示屏194通过DSI接口通信,实现电子设备的显示功能。The MIPI interface can be used to connect the processor 110 with peripheral devices such as the display screen 194 and the camera 193 . MIPI interface includes camera serial interface (camera serial interface, CSI), display serial interface (display serial interface, DSI), etc. In some embodiments, the processor 110 communicates with the camera 193 through the CSI interface to realize the shooting function of the electronic device. The processor 110 communicates with the display screen 194 through the DSI interface to realize the display function of the electronic device.
GPIO接口可以通过软件配置。GPIO接口可以被配置为控制信号,也可被配置为数据信号。在一些实施例中,GPIO接口可以用于连接处理器110与摄像头193,显示屏194,无线通信模块160,音频模块170,传感器模块180等。GPIO接口还可以被配置为I2C接口,I2S接口,UART接口,MIPI接口等。The GPIO interface can be configured by software. The GPIO interface can be configured as a control signal or as a data signal. In some embodiments, the GPIO interface can be used to connect the processor 110 with the camera 193 , the display screen 194 , the wireless communication module 160 , the audio module 170 , the sensor module 180 and so on. The GPIO interface can also be configured as an I2C interface, I2S interface, UART interface, MIPI interface, etc.
USB接口130是符合USB标准规范的接口,具体可以是Mini USB接口,Micro USB接口,USB Type C接口等。USB接口130可以用于连接充电器为电子设备充电,也可以用于电子设备与外围设备之间传输数据。该接口还可以用于连接其他电子设备,例如手机、PC、智能电视等。USB接口可以是USB3.0,用于兼容高速显示接口(display port,DP)信号传输,可以传输视音频高速数据。The USB interface 130 is an interface conforming to the USB standard specification, specifically, it can be a Mini USB interface, a Micro USB interface, a USB Type C interface, and the like. The USB interface 130 can be used to connect a charger to charge the electronic device, and can also be used to transmit data between the electronic device and peripheral devices. This interface can also be used to connect other electronic devices, such as mobile phones, PCs, smart TVs, etc. The USB interface may be USB3.0, which is compatible with high-speed display port (DP) signal transmission, and can transmit video and audio high-speed data.
可以理解的是,本申请实施例示意的各模块间的接口连接关系,只是示意性说明,并不构成对电子设备100的结构限定。在本申请另一些实施例中,电子设备100也可以采用上述实施例中不同的接口连接方式,或多种接口连接方式的组合。It can be understood that the interface connection relationship between the modules shown in the embodiment of the present application is only a schematic illustration, and does not constitute a structural limitation of the electronic device 100 . In other embodiments of the present application, the electronic device 100 may also adopt different interface connection manners in the foregoing embodiments, or a combination of multiple interface connection manners.
充电管理模块140用于从充电器接收充电输入。其中,充电器可以是无线充电器,也可以是有线充电器。在一些有线充电的实施例中,充电管理模块140可以通过USB接口130接收有线充电器的充电输入。在一些无线充电的实施例中,充电管理模块140可以通过电子设备的无线充电线圈接收无线充电输入。充电管理模块140为电池142充电的同时,还可以通过电源管理模块141为电子设备供电。The charging management module 140 is configured to receive a charging input from a charger. Wherein, the charger may be a wireless charger or a wired charger. In some wired charging embodiments, the charging management module 140 can receive charging input from the wired charger through the USB interface 130 . In some wireless charging embodiments, the charging management module 140 may receive wireless charging input through a wireless charging coil of the electronic device. While the charging management module 140 is charging the battery 142 , it can also provide power for electronic devices through the power management module 141 .
电源管理模块141用于连接电池142,充电管理模块140与处理器110。电源管理模块141接收电池142和/或充电管理模块140的输入,为处理器110,内部存储器121,显示屏194,摄像头193,和无线通信模块160等供电。电源管理模块141还可以用于监测电池容量,电池循环次数,电池健康状态(漏电,阻抗)等参数。在其他一些实施例中,电源管理模块141也可以设置于处理器110中。在另一些实施例中,电源管理模块141和充电管理模块140也 可以设置于同一个器件中。The power management module 141 is used for connecting the battery 142 , the charging management module 140 and the processor 110 . The power management module 141 receives the input from the battery 142 and/or the charging management module 140 to provide power for the processor 110 , the internal memory 121 , the display screen 194 , the camera 193 , and the wireless communication module 160 . The power management module 141 can also be used to monitor parameters such as battery capacity, battery cycle times, and battery health status (leakage, impedance). In some other embodiments, the power management module 141 may also be disposed in the processor 110 . In other embodiments, the power management module 141 and the charging management module 140 can also be set in the same device.
电子设备100的无线通信功能可以通过天线1,天线2,移动通信模块150,无线通信模块160,调制解调处理器以及基带处理器等实现。The wireless communication function of the electronic device 100 can be realized by the antenna 1 , the antenna 2 , the mobile communication module 150 , the wireless communication module 160 , a modem processor, a baseband processor, and the like.
天线1和天线2用于发射和接收电磁波信号。电子设备100中的每个天线可用于覆盖单个或多个通信频带。不同的天线还可以复用,以提高天线的利用率。例如:可以将天线1复用为无线局域网的分集天线。在另外一些实施例中,天线可以和调谐开关结合使用。 Antenna 1 and Antenna 2 are used to transmit and receive electromagnetic wave signals. Each antenna in electronic device 100 may be used to cover single or multiple communication frequency bands. Different antennas can also be multiplexed to improve the utilization of the antennas. For example: Antenna 1 can be multiplexed as a diversity antenna of a wireless local area network. In other embodiments, the antenna may be used in conjunction with a tuning switch.
移动通信模块150可以提供应用在电子设备100上的包括第二代(2th generation,2G)网络/第三代(3th generation,3G)网络/第四代(4th generation,4G)网络/第五代(5th generation,5G)网络等无线通信的解决方案。移动通信模块150可以包括至少一个滤波器,开关,功率放大器,低噪声放大器(low noise amplifier,LNA)等。移动通信模块150可以由天线1接收电磁波,并对接收的电磁波进行滤波,放大等处理,传送至调制解调处理器进行解调。移动通信模块150还可以对经调制解调处理器调制后的信号放大,经天线1转为电磁波辐射出去。在一些实施例中,移动通信模块150的至少部分功能模块可以被设置于处理器110中。在一些实施例中,移动通信模块150的至少部分功能模块可以与处理器110的至少部分模块被设置在同一个器件中。The mobile communication module 150 can provide the second generation (2th generation, 2G) network/third generation (3th generation, 3G) network/fourth generation (4th generation, 4G) network/fifth generation network applied on the electronic device 100. (5th generation, 5G) network and other wireless communication solutions. The mobile communication module 150 may include at least one filter, switch, power amplifier, low noise amplifier (low noise amplifier, LNA) and the like. The mobile communication module 150 can receive electromagnetic waves through the antenna 1, filter and amplify the received electromagnetic waves, and send them to the modem processor for demodulation. The mobile communication module 150 can also amplify the signals modulated by the modem processor, and convert them into electromagnetic waves through the antenna 1 for radiation. In some embodiments, at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 may be set in the processor 110 . In some embodiments, at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 and at least part of the modules of the processor 110 may be set in the same device.
调制解调处理器可以包括调制器和解调器。其中,调制器用于将待发送的低频基带信号调制成中高频信号。解调器用于将接收的电磁波信号解调为低频基带信号。随后解调器将解调得到的低频基带信号传送至基带处理器处理。低频基带信号经基带处理器处理后,被传递给应用处理器。应用处理器通过音频设备(不限于扬声器170A,受话器170B等)输出声音信号,或通过显示屏194显示图像或视频。在一些实施例中,调制解调处理器可以是独立的器件。在另一些实施例中,调制解调处理器可以独立于处理器110,与移动通信模块150或其他功能模块设置在同一个器件中。A modem processor may include a modulator and a demodulator. Wherein, the modulator is used for modulating the low-frequency baseband signal to be transmitted into a medium-high frequency signal. The demodulator is used to demodulate the received electromagnetic wave signal into a low frequency baseband signal. Then the demodulator sends the demodulated low-frequency baseband signal to the baseband processor for processing. The low-frequency baseband signal is passed to the application processor after being processed by the baseband processor. The application processor outputs sound signals through audio equipment (not limited to speaker 170A, receiver 170B, etc.), or displays images or videos through display screen 194 . In some embodiments, the modem processor may be a stand-alone device. In some other embodiments, the modem processor may be independent from the processor 110, and be set in the same device as the mobile communication module 150 or other functional modules.
无线通信模块160可以提供应用在电子设备100上的包括无线局域网(wireless local area networks,WLAN)(如无线保真(wireless fidelity,Wi-Fi)网络),蓝牙(bluetooth,BT),全球导航卫星系统(global navigation satellite system,GNSS),调频(frequency modulation,FM),近距离无线通信技术(near field communication,NFC),红外技术(infrared,IR)等无线通信的解决方案。无线通信模块160可以是集成至少一个通信处理模块的一个或多个器件。无线通信模块160经由天线2接收电磁波,将电磁波信号调频以及滤波处理,将处理后的信号发送到处理器110。无线通信模块160还可以从处理器110接收待发送的信号,对其进行调频,放大,经天线2转为电磁波辐射出去。The wireless communication module 160 can provide wireless local area networks (wireless local area networks, WLAN) (such as wireless fidelity (Wireless Fidelity, Wi-Fi) network), bluetooth (bluetooth, BT), global navigation satellite, etc. applied on the electronic device 100. System (global navigation satellite system, GNSS), frequency modulation (frequency modulation, FM), near field communication technology (near field communication, NFC), infrared technology (infrared, IR) and other wireless communication solutions. The wireless communication module 160 may be one or more devices integrating at least one communication processing module. The wireless communication module 160 receives electromagnetic waves via the antenna 2 , frequency-modulates and filters the electromagnetic wave signals, and sends the processed signals to the processor 110 . The wireless communication module 160 can also receive the signal to be sent from the processor 110 , frequency-modulate it, amplify it, and convert it into electromagnetic waves through the antenna 2 for radiation.
在一些实施例中,电子设备100的天线1和移动通信模块150耦合,天线2和无线通信模块160耦合,使得电子设备100可以通过无线通信技术与网络以及其他设备通信。所述无线通信技术可以包括全球移动通讯系统(global system for mobile communications,GSM),通用分组无线服务(general packet radio service,GPRS),码分多址接入(code division multiple access,CDMA),宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access,WCDMA),时分码分多址(time-division code division multiple access,TD-SCDMA),长期演进(long term evolution,LTE),BT,GNSS,WLAN,NFC,FM,和/或IR技术等。所述GNSS可以包括全球卫星定位系统(global positioning system,GPS),全球导航卫星系统(global navigation satellite system,GLONASS),北斗卫星导航系统(beidou navigation satellite system,BDS),准天顶卫星系统(quasi-zenith satellite system,QZSS)和/或星基增强系统(satellite based augmentation systems,SBAS)。In some embodiments, the antenna 1 of the electronic device 100 is coupled to the mobile communication module 150, and the antenna 2 is coupled to the wireless communication module 160, so that the electronic device 100 can communicate with the network and other devices through wireless communication technology. The wireless communication technology may include global system for mobile communications (GSM), general packet radio service (general packet radio service, GPRS), code division multiple access (code division multiple access, CDMA), broadband Code division multiple access (wideband code division multiple access, WCDMA), time division code division multiple access (time-division code division multiple access, TD-SCDMA), long term evolution (long term evolution, LTE), BT, GNSS, WLAN, NFC , FM, and/or IR techniques, etc. The GNSS may include a global positioning system (global positioning system, GPS), a global navigation satellite system (global navigation satellite system, GLONASS), a Beidou navigation satellite system (beidou navigation satellite system, BDS), a quasi-zenith satellite system (quasi -zenith satellite system (QZSS) and/or satellite based augmentation systems (SBAS).
电子设备100可以通过GPU,显示屏194,以及应用处理器等实现显示功能。GPU为图像处理的微处理器,连接显示屏194和应用处理器。GPU用于执行数学和几何计算,用于图形渲染。处理器110可包括一个或多个GPU,其执行程序指令以生成或改变显示信息。The electronic device 100 may implement a display function through a GPU, a display screen 194, an application processor, and the like. The GPU is a microprocessor for image processing, and is connected to the display screen 194 and the application processor. GPUs are used to perform mathematical and geometric calculations for graphics rendering. Processor 110 may include one or more GPUs that execute program instructions to generate or change display information.
显示屏194用于显示图像,视频等。显示屏194包括显示面板。显示面板可以采用液晶显示屏(liquid crystal display,LCD),有机发光二极管(organic light-emitting diode,OLED),有源矩阵有机发光二极体或主动矩阵有机发光二极体(active-matrix organic light emitting diode的,AMOLED),柔性发光二极管(flex light-emitting diode,FLED),Miniled,MicroLed,Micro-oLed,量子点发光二极管(quantum dot light emitting diodes,QLED)等。在一些实施例中,电子设备100可以包括1个或N个显示屏194,N为大于1的正整数。The display screen 194 is used to display images, videos and the like. The display screen 194 includes a display panel. The display panel can be a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light-emitting diode (OLED), an active matrix organic light emitting diode or an active matrix organic light emitting diode (active-matrix organic light emitting diode, AMOLED), flexible light-emitting diode (flex light-emitting diode, FLED), Miniled, MicroLed, Micro-oLed, quantum dot light emitting diodes (quantum dot light emitting diodes, QLED), etc. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 may include 1 or N display screens 194 , where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
电子设备100可以通过ISP,摄像头193,视频编解码器,GPU,显示屏194以及应用处理器等实现拍摄功能。The electronic device 100 can realize the shooting function through the ISP, the camera 193 , the video codec, the GPU, the display screen 194 and the application processor.
ISP用于处理摄像头193反馈的数据。例如,拍照时,打开快门,光线通过镜头被传递到摄像头感光元件上,光信号转换为电信号,摄像头感光元件将所述电信号传递给ISP处理,转化为肉眼可见的图像。ISP还可以对图像的噪点,亮度,肤色进行算法优化。ISP还可以对拍摄场景的曝光,色温等参数优化。在一些实施例中,ISP可以设置在摄像头193中。The ISP is used for processing the data fed back by the camera 193 . For example, when taking a picture, open the shutter, the light is transmitted to the photosensitive element of the camera through the lens, and the light signal is converted into an electrical signal, and the photosensitive element of the camera transmits the electrical signal to the ISP for processing, and converts it into an image visible to the naked eye. ISP can also perform algorithm optimization on image noise, brightness, and skin color. ISP can also optimize the exposure, color temperature and other parameters of the shooting scene. In some embodiments, the ISP may be located in the camera 193 .
摄像头193用于捕获静态图像或视频。物体通过镜头生成光学图像投射到感光元件。感光元件可以是电荷耦合器件(charge coupled device,CCD)或互补金属氧化物半导体(complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor,CMOS)光电晶体管。感光元件把光信号转换成电信号,之后将电信号传递给ISP转换成数字图像信号。ISP将数字图像信号输出到DSP加工处理。DSP将数字图像信号转换成标准的RGB,YUV等格式的图像信号。在一些实施例中,电子设备100可以包括1个或N个摄像头193,N为大于1的正整数。摄像头193可包括但不限于传统彩色摄像头(RGB camera)、深度摄像头(RGB depth camera)、动态视觉传感器(dynamic vision sensor,DVS)相机等。在一些实施例中,摄像头193可以为深度摄像头。深度摄像头可以采集真实环境的空间信息。Camera 193 is used to capture still images or video. The object generates an optical image through the lens and projects it to the photosensitive element. The photosensitive element may be a charge coupled device (CCD) or a complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistor. The photosensitive element converts the light signal into an electrical signal, and then transmits the electrical signal to the ISP to convert it into a digital image signal. The ISP outputs the digital image signal to the DSP for processing. DSP converts digital image signals into standard RGB, YUV and other image signals. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 may include 1 or N cameras 193 , where N is a positive integer greater than 1. The camera 193 may include, but not limited to, a traditional color camera (RGB camera), a depth camera (RGB depth camera), a dynamic vision sensor (dynamic vision sensor, DVS) camera, and the like. In some embodiments, camera 193 may be a depth camera. The depth camera can collect the spatial information of the real environment.
在一些实施例中,电子设备100可以通过摄像头193拍摄用户图像,面部识别不同用户,对应启用不同用户账号,不同用户的账号保存不同用户的信息,可以保证不同用户的账号不混淆,进一步保护用户的数据私密性。In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 can take pictures of users through the camera 193, recognize different users by face, correspondingly enable different user accounts, and store the information of different users in the accounts of different users, which can ensure that the accounts of different users are not confused, and further protect users. data privacy.
在一些实施例中,摄像头193可以采集用户的手部图像或者身体图像,处理器110可用于对摄像头193采集到的图像进行分析,从而识别用户输入的手部动作或身体动作。比如,可以通过摄像头193识别用户的手部动作从而实现用户手势控制。In some embodiments, the camera 193 may collect hand images or body images of the user, and the processor 110 may be configured to analyze the images collected by the camera 193 to recognize hand motions or body motions input by the user. For example, the camera 193 can be used to recognize the user's hand movements to implement user gesture control.
内部存储器121可以用于存储计算机可执行程序代码,该可执行程序代码包括指令。处理器110通过运行存储在内部存储器121的指令,从而执行电子设备的各种功能应用以及数据处理。内部存储器121可以包括存储程序区和存储数据区。其中,存储程序区可存储操作系统,至少一个功能所需的应用程序(比如声音播放功能,图像播放功能等)等。存储数据区可存储电子设备使用过程中所创建的数据(比如音频数据,电话本等)等。The internal memory 121 may be used to store computer-executable program codes including instructions. The processor 110 executes various functional applications and data processing of the electronic device by executing instructions stored in the internal memory 121 . The internal memory 121 may include an area for storing programs and an area for storing data. Wherein, the stored program area can store an operating system, at least one application program required by a function (such as a sound playing function, an image playing function, etc.) and the like. The storage data area can store data (such as audio data, phone book, etc.) created during the use of the electronic device.
在本申请一些实施例中,内部存储器121可以用于存储一个或多个应用的应用程序,该应用程序包括指令。当该应用程序被处理器110执行时,使得电子设备100生成用于呈现给用户的内容。示例性地,该应用可以包括用于管理电子设备100的应用,如游戏应用、会议应用、视频应用、桌面应用或其他应用等等。In some embodiments of the present application, the internal memory 121 may be used to store application programs of one or more applications, and the application programs include instructions. When executed by the processor 110, the application program causes the electronic device 100 to generate content for presentation to the user. Exemplarily, the application may include an application for managing the electronic device 100, such as a game application, a meeting application, a video application, a desktop application or other applications, and the like.
内部存储器121可以包括一个或多个随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)和一个或多个非易失性存储器(non-volatile memory,NVM)。The internal memory 121 may include one or more random access memories (random access memory, RAM) and one or more non-volatile memories (non-volatile memory, NVM).
随机存取存储器具有读取/写入速度快,易失性的特性。易失性指的是一旦断电,RAM中所存储的数据将随之消失。通常情况下,随机存取存储器静态功耗极低,运行功耗相对较大。RAM中的数据即为内存数据,可随时被读取,断电即消失。Random access memory has the characteristics of fast read/write speed and volatility. Volatile means that once the power is turned off, the data stored in RAM will disappear. Usually, the static power consumption of the random access memory is extremely low, and the operating power consumption is relatively large. The data in RAM is memory data, which can be read at any time and disappears when the power is turned off.
非易失性存储器具有非易失性、存储数据稳定的特性。非易失性是指断电后,其所存储的数据不会消失,可以长时间断电保存数据。NVM中的数据包括应用数据,可以长时间稳定存储在NVM中。应用数据是指应用程序或服务进程运行过程中写入的内容,例如拍照类应用获取到的照片或视频、文档类应用中用户编辑的文本等等。Non-volatile memory has the characteristics of non-volatility and stable data storage. Non-volatile means that the stored data will not disappear after the power is turned off, and the data can be saved for a long time without power. The data in NVM includes application data, which can be stored stably in NVM for a long time. Application data refers to the content written during the running of an application or service process, such as photos or videos obtained by a camera application, text edited by a user in a document application, and so on.
随机存取存储器可以包括静态随机存储器(static random-access memory,SRAM)、动态随机存储器(dynamic random access memory,DRAM)、同步动态随机存储器(synchronous dynamic random access memory,SDRAM)、双倍资料率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory,DDR SDRAM,例如第五代DDR SDRAM一般称为DDR5SDRAM)等。Random access memory can include static random-access memory (SRAM), dynamic random access memory (DRAM), synchronous dynamic random access memory (synchronous dynamic random access memory, SDRAM), double data rate synchronous Dynamic random access memory (double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory, DDR SDRAM, such as the fifth generation DDR SDRAM is generally called DDR5SDRAM), etc.
非易失性存储器可以包括磁盘存储器件(magnetic disk storage)、快闪存储器(flash memory)等。The non-volatile memory may include magnetic disk storage, flash memory, and the like.
磁盘存储器件是以磁盘为存储介质的存储器,具有存储容量大、数据传输率高、存储数据可长期保存等特点。The disk storage device is a memory with a disk as the storage medium, which has the characteristics of large storage capacity, high data transmission rate, and long-term storage of stored data.
快闪存储器按照运作原理划分可以包括NOR FLASH、NAND FLASH、3D NAND FLASH等,按照存储单元电位阶数划分可以包括单阶存储单元(single-level cell,SLC)、多阶存储单元(multi-level cell,MLC)、三阶储存单元(triple-level cell,TLC)、四阶储存单元(quad-level cell,QLC)等,按照存储规范划分可以包括通用闪存存储(英文:universal flash storage,UFS)、嵌入式多媒体存储卡(embedded multi media Card,eMMC)等。According to the operating principle, flash memory can include NOR FLASH, NAND FLASH, 3D NAND FLASH, etc. According to the potential order of storage cells, it can include single-level storage cells (single-level cell, SLC), multi-level storage cells (multi-level cell, MLC), triple-level cell (TLC), quad-level cell (QLC), etc., can include universal flash storage (English: universal flash storage, UFS) according to storage specifications , embedded multimedia memory card (embedded multi media Card, eMMC), etc.
随机存取存储器可以由处理器110直接进行读写,可以用于存储操作系统或其他正在运行中的程序的可执行程序(例如机器指令),还可以用于存储用户及应用程序的数据等。The random access memory can be directly read and written by the processor 110, and can be used to store executable programs (such as machine instructions) of an operating system or other running programs, and can also be used to store data of users and application programs.
非易失性存储器也可以存储可执行程序和存储用户及应用程序的数据等,可以提前加载到随机存取存储器中,用于处理器110直接进行读写。The non-volatile memory can also store executable programs and data of users and application programs, etc., and can be loaded into the random access memory in advance for the processor 110 to directly read and write.
外部存储器接口120可以用于连接外部的非易失性存储器,实现扩展电子设备的存储能力。外部的非易失性存储器通过外部存储器接口120与处理器110通信,实现数据存储功能。例如将音乐,视频等文件保存在外部的非易失性存储器中。The external memory interface 120 can be used to connect an external non-volatile memory, so as to expand the storage capacity of the electronic device. The external non-volatile memory communicates with the processor 110 through the external memory interface 120 to implement a data storage function. For example, files such as music and video are stored in an external non-volatile memory.
电子设备100可以通过音频模块170,扬声器170A,受话器170B,麦克风170C,耳机接口170D,以及应用处理器等实现音频功能。例如音乐播放,录音等。The electronic device 100 can implement audio functions through the audio module 170 , the speaker 170A, the receiver 170B, the microphone 170C, the earphone interface 170D, and the application processor. Such as music playback, recording, etc.
音频模块170用于将数字音频信息转换成模拟音频信号输出,也用于将模拟音频输入转换为数字音频信号。音频模块170还可以用于对音频信号编码和解码。在一些实施例中,音频模块170可以设置于处理器110中,或将音频模块170的部分功能模块设置于处理器110中。The audio module 170 is used to convert digital audio information into analog audio signal output, and is also used to convert analog audio input into digital audio signal. The audio module 170 may also be used to encode and decode audio signals. In some embodiments, the audio module 170 may be set in the processor 110 , or some functional modules of the audio module 170 may be set in the processor 110 .
扬声器170A,也称“喇叭”,用于将音频电信号转换为声音信号。电子设备可以通过扬声器170A收听音乐,或收听免提通话。Speaker 170A, also referred to as a "horn", is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals. The electronic device can listen to music through speaker 170A, or listen to hands-free calls.
受话器170B,也称“听筒”,用于将音频电信号转换成声音信号。当电子设备接听电话或语音信息时,可以通过将受话器170B靠近人耳接听语音。Receiver 170B, also called "earpiece", is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals. When the electronic device receives a call or a voice message, it can listen to the voice by placing the receiver 170B close to the human ear.
麦克风170C,也称“话筒”,“传声器”,用于将声音信号转换为电信号。当拨打电话或发送语音信息时,用户可以通过人嘴靠近麦克风170C发声,将声音信号输入到麦克风170C。电子设备可以设置至少一个麦克风170C。在另一些实施例中,电子设备可以设置两个麦克风 170C,除了采集声音信号,还可以实现降噪功能。在另一些实施例中,电子设备还可以设置三个,四个或更多麦克风170C,实现采集声音信号,降噪,还可以识别声音来源,实现定向录音功能等。The microphone 170C, also called "microphone" or "microphone", is used to convert sound signals into electrical signals. When making a phone call or sending a voice message, the user can put his mouth close to the microphone 170C to make a sound, and input the sound signal to the microphone 170C. The electronic device may be provided with at least one microphone 170C. In some other embodiments, the electronic device can be provided with two microphones 170C, which can also implement a noise reduction function in addition to collecting sound signals. In some other embodiments, the electronic device can also be equipped with three, four or more microphones 170C to realize sound signal collection, noise reduction, identify sound sources, and realize directional recording functions, etc.
耳机接口170D用于连接有线耳机。耳机接口170D可以是USB接口130,也可以是3.5mm的开放移动电子设备平台(open mobile terminal platform,OMTP)标准接口,美国蜂窝电信工业协会(cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA,CTIA)标准接口。The earphone interface 170D is used for connecting wired earphones. The earphone interface 170D can be a USB interface 130, or a 3.5mm open mobile terminal platform (OMTP) standard interface, or a cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA (CTIA) standard interface.
电子设备100可以包括一个或多个按键190,这些按键190可以控制电子设备100,为用户提供访问电子设备100上的功能。按键190的形式可以是按钮、开关、刻度盘等机械式案件,也可以是触摸或近触摸式传感设备(如触摸传感器)。电子设备100可以接收按键输入,产生与电子设备100的用户设置以及功能控制有关的键信号输入。按键190可以包括开机键,音量键等。The electronic device 100 may include one or more keys 190 , and these keys 190 may control the electronic device 100 and provide a user with access to functions on the electronic device 100 . The key 190 may be in the form of a mechanical case such as a button, a switch, or a dial, or may be a touch or near-touch sensing device (such as a touch sensor). The electronic device 100 can receive key input and generate key signal input related to user settings and function control of the electronic device 100 . The keys 190 may include a power key, a volume key and the like.
马达191可以产生振动提示。马达191可以用于来电振动提示,也可以用于触摸振动反馈。例如,作用于不同应用(例如拍照,音频播放等)的触摸操作,可以对应不同的振动反馈效果。作用于电子设备100不同区域的触摸操作,马达191也可对应不同的振动反馈效果。不同的应用场景(例如:时间提醒,接收信息,闹钟,游戏等)也可以对应不同的振动反馈效果。触摸振动反馈效果还可以支持自定义。The motor 191 can generate a vibrating reminder. The motor 191 can be used for incoming call vibration prompts, and can also be used for touch vibration feedback. For example, touch operations applied to different applications (such as taking pictures, playing audio, etc.) may correspond to different vibration feedback effects. The motor 191 may also correspond to different vibration feedback effects for touch operations acting on different areas of the electronic device 100 . Different application scenarios (for example: time reminder, receiving information, alarm clock, games, etc.) can also correspond to different vibration feedback effects. The touch vibration feedback effect can also support customization.
指示器192可以是指示灯,可以用于指示充电状态,电量变化,也可以用于指示消息,通知等。The indicator 192 can be an indicator light, which can be used to indicate the charging status, the change of the battery capacity, and can also be used to indicate messages, notifications and the like.
电子设备100还可以包括其他输入输出接口,可以通过合适的输入输出接口将其他装置连接到电子设备100。组件例如可以包括音频/视频插孔,数据连接器等。The electronic device 100 may also include other input and output interfaces, and other devices may be connected to the electronic device 100 through a suitable input and output interface. Components may include, for example, audio/video jacks, data connectors, and the like.
电子设备100上装备有一个或多个传感器,包括但不限于压力传感器180A,陀螺仪传感器180B,气压传感器180C,磁传感器180D,加速度传感器180E,距离传感器180F,接近光传感器180G,指纹传感器180H,温度传感器180J,触摸传感器180K,环境光传感器180L,骨传导传感器180M等。The electronic device 100 is equipped with one or more sensors, including but not limited to a pressure sensor 180A, a gyroscope sensor 180B, an air pressure sensor 180C, a magnetic sensor 180D, an acceleration sensor 180E, a distance sensor 180F, a proximity sensor 180G, a fingerprint sensor 180H, Temperature sensor 180J, touch sensor 180K, ambient light sensor 180L, bone conduction sensor 180M, etc.
压力传感器180A用于感受压力信号,可以将压力信号转换成电信号。在一些实施例中,压力传感器180A可以设置于显示屏194。压力传感器180A的种类很多,如电阻式压力传感器,电感式压力传感器,电容式压力传感器等。电容式压力传感器可以是包括至少两个具有导电材料的平行板。当有力作用于压力传感器180A,电极之间的电容改变。电子设备100根据电容的变化确定压力的强度。当有触摸操作作用于显示屏194,电子设备100根据压力传感器180A检测所述触摸操作强度。电子设备100也可以根据压力传感器180A的检测信号计算触摸的位置。在一些实施例中,作用于相同触摸位置,但不同触摸操作强度的触摸操作,可以对应不同的操作指令。例如:当有触摸操作强度小于第一压力阈值的触摸操作作用于短消息应用图标时,执行查看短消息的指令。当有触摸操作强度大于或等于第一压力阈值的触摸操作作用于短消息应用图标时,执行新建短消息的指令。在一些实施例中,作用于相同触摸位置,但不同触摸操作时间长度的触摸操作,可以对应不同的操作指令。例如:当有触摸操作时间长度小于第一时间阈值的触摸操作作用于压力传感器180A时,执行确认的指令。当有触摸操作时间长度大于或等于第一时间阈值的触摸操作作用于压力传感器180A时,执行开机/关机的指令。The pressure sensor 180A is used to sense the pressure signal and convert the pressure signal into an electrical signal. In some embodiments, pressure sensor 180A may be disposed on display screen 194 . There are many types of pressure sensors 180A, such as resistive pressure sensors, inductive pressure sensors, and capacitive pressure sensors. A capacitive pressure sensor may be comprised of at least two parallel plates with conductive material. When a force is applied to the pressure sensor 180A, the capacitance between the electrodes changes. The electronic device 100 determines the intensity of pressure according to the change in capacitance. When a touch operation acts on the display screen 194, the electronic device 100 detects the intensity of the touch operation according to the pressure sensor 180A. The electronic device 100 may also calculate the touched position according to the detection signal of the pressure sensor 180A. In some embodiments, touch operations acting on the same touch position but with different touch operation intensities may correspond to different operation instructions. For example: when a touch operation with a touch operation intensity less than the first pressure threshold acts on the short message application icon, an instruction to view short messages is executed. When a touch operation whose intensity is greater than or equal to the first pressure threshold acts on the icon of the short message application, the instruction of creating a new short message is executed. In some embodiments, touch operations acting on the same touch position but with different touch operation durations may correspond to different operation instructions. For example: when a touch operation whose duration is shorter than the first time threshold acts on the pressure sensor 180A, a confirmation instruction is executed. When a touch operation whose duration is greater than or equal to the first time threshold acts on the pressure sensor 180A, a power on/off command is executed.
陀螺仪传感器180B可以用于确定电子设备100的运动姿态。在一些实施例中,可以通过陀螺仪传感器180B确定电子设备围绕三个轴(即,x,y和z轴)的角速度。陀螺仪传感器180B可以用于拍摄防抖。示例性地,当按下快门,陀螺仪传感器180B检测电子设备抖动的 角度,根据角度计算出镜头模组需要补偿的距离,让镜头通过反向运动抵消电子设备的抖动,实现防抖。陀螺仪传感器180B还可以用于导航,体感游戏场景。The gyro sensor 180B can be used to determine the motion posture of the electronic device 100 . In some embodiments, the angular velocity of the electronic device about three axes (ie, x, y, and z axes) may be determined by the gyro sensor 180B. The gyro sensor 180B can be used for image stabilization. For example, when the shutter is pressed, the gyro sensor 180B detects the angle of shaking of the electronic device, calculates the distance that the lens module needs to compensate according to the angle, and allows the lens to counteract the shaking of the electronic device through reverse movement to achieve anti-shake. The gyro sensor 180B can also be used for navigation and somatosensory game scenes.
气压传感器180C用于测量气压。在一些实施例中,电子设备100通过气压传感器180C测得的气压值计算海拔高度,辅助定位和导航。The air pressure sensor 180C is used to measure air pressure. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 calculates the altitude based on the air pressure value measured by the air pressure sensor 180C to assist positioning and navigation.
磁传感器180D包括霍尔传感器。电子设备100可以利用磁传感器180D检测翻盖皮套的开合。在一些实施例中,当电子设备100是翻盖机时,可以根据磁传感器180D检测翻盖的开合。进而根据检测到的皮套的开合状态或翻盖的开合状态,设置翻盖自动解锁等特性。The magnetic sensor 180D includes a Hall sensor. The electronic device 100 may use the magnetic sensor 180D to detect the opening and closing of the flip leather case. In some embodiments, when the electronic device 100 is a clamshell machine, the opening and closing of the clamshell can be detected according to the magnetic sensor 180D. Furthermore, according to the detected opening and closing state of the leather case or the opening and closing state of the flip cover, features such as automatic unlocking of the flip cover are set.
加速度传感器180E可检测电子设备100在各个方向上(一般为三轴)加速度的大小。当电子设备100静止时可检测出重力的大小及方向。还可以用于识别电子设备姿态,应用于横竖屏切换,计步器等应用。The acceleration sensor 180E can detect the acceleration of the electronic device 100 in various directions (generally three axes). When the electronic device 100 is stationary, the magnitude and direction of gravity can be detected. It can also be used to identify the posture of electronic devices, and can be used in applications such as horizontal and vertical screen switching, pedometers, etc.
距离传感器180F,用于测量距离。电子设备100可以通过红外或激光测量距离。在一些实施例中,拍摄场景,电子设备100可以利用距离传感器180F测距以实现快速对焦。The distance sensor 180F is used to measure the distance. The electronic device 100 may measure the distance by infrared or laser. In some embodiments, when shooting a scene, the electronic device 100 may use the distance sensor 180F for distance measurement to achieve fast focusing.
接近光传感器180G可以包括例如发光二极管(LED)和光检测器,例如光电二极管。发光二极管可以是红外发光二极管。电子设备100通过发光二极管向外发射红外光。电子设备100使用光电二极管检测来自附近物体的红外反射光。当检测到充分的反射光时,可以确定电子设备100附近有物体。当检测到不充分的反射光时,电子设备100可以确定附近没有物体。电子设备100可以利用接近光传感器180G检测用户手持电子设备100贴近耳朵通话,以便自动熄灭屏幕达到省电的目的。接近光传感器180G也可用于皮套模式,口袋模式自动解锁与锁屏。Proximity light sensor 180G may include, for example, light emitting diodes (LEDs) and light detectors, such as photodiodes. The light emitting diodes may be infrared light emitting diodes. The electronic device 100 emits infrared light through the light emitting diode. Electronic device 100 uses photodiodes to detect infrared reflected light from nearby objects. When sufficient reflected light is detected, it may be determined that there is an object near the electronic device 100 . When insufficient reflected light is detected, the electronic device 100 may determine that there is no object nearby. The electronic device 100 can use the proximity light sensor 180G to detect that the user is holding the electronic device 100 close to the ear to make a call, so as to automatically turn off the screen to save power. The proximity light sensor 180G can also be used in leather case mode, automatic unlock and lock screen in pocket mode.
环境光传感器180L用于感知环境光亮度。电子设备100可以根据感知的环境光亮度自适应调节显示屏194亮度。环境光传感器180L也可用于拍照时自动调节白平衡。环境光传感器180L还可以与接近光传感器180G配合,检测电子设备100是否在口袋里,以防误触。The ambient light sensor 180L is used for sensing ambient light brightness. The electronic device 100 can adaptively adjust the brightness of the display screen 194 according to the perceived ambient light brightness. The ambient light sensor 180L can also be used to automatically adjust the white balance when taking pictures. The ambient light sensor 180L can also cooperate with the proximity light sensor 180G to detect whether the electronic device 100 is in the pocket, so as to prevent accidental touch.
指纹传感器180H用于采集指纹。电子设备100可以利用采集的指纹特性实现指纹解锁,访问应用锁,指纹拍照,指纹接听来电等。The fingerprint sensor 180H is used to collect fingerprints. The electronic device 100 can use the collected fingerprint characteristics to implement fingerprint unlocking, access to application locks, take pictures with fingerprints, answer incoming calls with fingerprints, and the like.
温度传感器180J用于检测温度。在一些实施例中,电子设备100利用温度传感器180J检测的温度,执行温度处理策略。例如,当温度传感器180J上报的温度超过阈值,电子设备执行降低位于温度传感器180J附近的处理器的性能,以便降低功耗实施热保护。在另一些实施例中,当温度低于另一阈值时,电子设备100对电池142加热,以避免低温导致电子设备100异常关机。在其他一些实施例中,当温度低于又一阈值时,电子设备100对电池142的输出电压执行升压,以避免低温导致的异常关机。The temperature sensor 180J is used to detect temperature. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 uses the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 180J to implement a temperature treatment strategy. For example, when the temperature reported by the temperature sensor 180J exceeds a threshold, the electronic device may reduce the performance of a processor located near the temperature sensor 180J, so as to reduce power consumption and implement thermal protection. In other embodiments, when the temperature is lower than another threshold, the electronic device 100 heats the battery 142 to prevent the electronic device 100 from being shut down abnormally due to the low temperature. In some other embodiments, when the temperature is lower than another threshold, the electronic device 100 boosts the output voltage of the battery 142 to avoid abnormal shutdown caused by low temperature.
触摸传感器180K,也称“触控器件”。触摸传感器180K可以设置于显示屏194,由触摸传感器180K与显示屏194组成触摸屏,也称“触控屏”。触摸传感器180K用于检测作用于其上或附近的触摸操作。触摸传感器可以将检测到的触摸操作传递给应用处理器,以确定触摸事件类型。可以通过显示屏194提供与触摸操作相关的视觉输出。在另一些实施例中,触摸传感器180K也可以设置于电子设备100的表面,与显示屏194所处的位置不同。The touch sensor 180K is also called "touch device". The touch sensor 180K can be disposed on the display screen 194, and the touch sensor 180K and the display screen 194 form a touch screen, also called a “touch screen”. The touch sensor 180K is used to detect a touch operation on or near it. The touch sensor can pass the detected touch operation to the application processor to determine the type of touch event. Visual output related to the touch operation can be provided through the display screen 194 . In other embodiments, the touch sensor 180K may also be disposed on the surface of the electronic device 100 , which is different from the position of the display screen 194 .
骨传导传感器180M可以获取振动信号。在一些实施例中,骨传导传感器180M可以获取人体声部振动骨块的振动信号。骨传导传感器180M也可以接触人体脉搏,接收血压跳动信号。在一些实施例中,骨传导传感器180M也可以设置于耳机中,结合成骨传导耳机。音频模块170可以基于所述骨传导传感器180M获取的声部振动骨块的振动信号,解析出语音信号,实现语音功能。应用处理器可以基于所述骨传导传感器180M获取的血压跳动信号解析心率信息,实现心率检测功能。The bone conduction sensor 180M can acquire vibration signals. In some embodiments, the bone conduction sensor 180M can acquire the vibration signal of the vibrating bone mass of the human voice. The bone conduction sensor 180M can also contact the human pulse and receive the blood pressure beating signal. In some embodiments, the bone conduction sensor 180M can also be disposed in the earphone, combined into a bone conduction earphone. The audio module 170 can analyze the voice signal based on the vibration signal of the vibrating bone mass of the vocal part acquired by the bone conduction sensor 180M, so as to realize the voice function. The application processor can analyze the heart rate information based on the blood pressure beating signal acquired by the bone conduction sensor 180M, so as to realize the heart rate detection function.
SIM卡接口195用于连接SIM卡。SIM卡可以通过插入SIM卡接口195,或从SIM卡接口195拔出,实现和电子设备100的接触和分离。电子设备100可以支持1个或N个SIM卡接口,N为大于1的正整数。SIM卡接口195可以支持Nano SIM卡,Micro SIM卡,SIM卡等。同一个SIM卡接口195可以同时插入多张卡。所述多张卡的类型可以相同,也可以不同。SIM卡接口195也可以兼容不同类型的SIM卡。SIM卡接口195也可以兼容外部存储卡。电子设备100通过SIM卡和网络交互,实现通话以及数据通信等功能。在一些实施例中,电子设备100采用eSIM,即:嵌入式SIM卡。eSIM卡可以嵌在电子设备100中,不能和电子设备100分离。The SIM card interface 195 is used for connecting a SIM card. The SIM card can be connected and separated from the electronic device 100 by inserting it into the SIM card interface 195 or pulling it out from the SIM card interface 195 . The electronic device 100 may support 1 or N SIM card interfaces, where N is a positive integer greater than 1. SIM card interface 195 can support Nano SIM card, Micro SIM card, SIM card etc. Multiple cards can be inserted into the same SIM card interface 195 at the same time. The types of the multiple cards may be the same or different. The SIM card interface 195 is also compatible with different types of SIM cards. The SIM card interface 195 is also compatible with external memory cards. The electronic device 100 interacts with the network through the SIM card to implement functions such as calling and data communication. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 adopts an eSIM, that is, an embedded SIM card. The eSIM card can be embedded in the electronic device 100 and cannot be separated from the electronic device 100 .
电子设备100的软件系统可以采用分层架构,事件驱动架构,微核架构,微服务架构,或云架构。本发明实施例以分层架构的
Figure PCTCN2022115212-appb-000006
系统为例,示例性说明电子设备100的软件结构。
The software system of the electronic device 100 may adopt a layered architecture, an event-driven architecture, a micro-kernel architecture, a micro-service architecture, or a cloud architecture. The embodiment of the present invention uses a layered architecture
Figure PCTCN2022115212-appb-000006
The system is taken as an example to illustrate the software structure of the electronic device 100 .
图3是本发明实施例的电子设备100的软件结构框图。FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the software structure of the electronic device 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention.
分层架构将软件分成若干个层,每一层都有清晰的角色和分工。层与层之间通过软件接口通信。在一些实施例中,可以将
Figure PCTCN2022115212-appb-000007
系统分为四层,从上至下分别为应用程序层,应用程序框架层,安卓运行时(
Figure PCTCN2022115212-appb-000008
runtime)和系统库,以及内核层。
The layered architecture divides the software into several layers, and each layer has a clear role and division of labor. Layers communicate through software interfaces. In some embodiments, the
Figure PCTCN2022115212-appb-000007
The system is divided into four layers, from top to bottom are application layer, application framework layer, Android runtime (
Figure PCTCN2022115212-appb-000008
runtime) and system libraries, and the kernel layer.
应用程序层可以包括一系列应用程序包。The application layer can consist of a series of application packages.
如图3所示,应用程序包可以包括相机,图库,日历,通话,地图,导航,WLAN,蓝牙,音乐,视频,设置等应用程序。其中,设置应用中可以设定字体的大小、粗细等。As shown in Figure 3, the application package can include applications such as camera, gallery, calendar, call, map, navigation, WLAN, Bluetooth, music, video, and settings. Wherein, the font size, thickness and the like can be set in the setting application.
应用程序框架层为应用程序层的应用程序提供应用编程接口(application programming interface,API)和编程框架。应用程序框架层包括一些预先定义的函数。The application framework layer provides an application programming interface (application programming interface, API) and a programming framework for applications in the application layer. The application framework layer includes some predefined functions.
如图3所示,应用程序框架层可以包括窗口管理器,内容提供器,视图系统,电话管理器,资源管理器,通知管理器等。As shown in Figure 3, the application framework layer can include window manager, content provider, view system, phone manager, resource manager, notification manager, etc.
窗口管理器用于管理窗口程序。窗口管理器可以获取显示屏大小,判断是否有状态栏,锁定屏幕,截取屏幕等。A window manager is used to manage window programs. The window manager can get the size of the display screen, determine whether there is a status bar, lock the screen, capture the screen, etc.
内容提供器用来存放和获取数据,并使这些数据可以被应用程序访问。这些数据可以包括视频,图像,音频,拨打和接听的电话,浏览历史和书签,电话簿等。Content providers are used to store and retrieve data and make it accessible to applications. This data can include videos, images, audio, calls made and received, browsing history and bookmarks, phonebook, etc.
视图系统包括可视控件,例如显示文字的控件,显示图片的控件等。视图系统可用于构建应用程序。显示界面可以由一个或多个视图组成的。例如,包括短信通知图标的显示界面,可以包括显示文字的视图以及显示图片的视图。The view system includes visual controls, such as controls for displaying text, controls for displaying pictures, and so on. The view system can be used to build applications. A display interface can consist of one or more views. For example, a display interface including a text message notification icon may include a view for displaying text and a view for displaying pictures.
电话管理器用于提供通信功能。例如通话状态的管理(包括接通,挂断等)。Telephony Manager is used to provide communication functions. For example, the management of call status (including connected, hung up, etc.).
资源管理器为应用程序提供各种资源,比如本地化字符串,图标,图片,布局文件,视频文件等等。The resource manager provides various resources for the application, such as localized strings, icons, pictures, layout files, video files, and so on.
通知管理器使应用程序可以在状态栏中显示通知信息,可以用于传达告知类型的消息,可以短暂停留后自动消失,无需用户交互。比如通知管理器被用于告知下载完成,消息提醒等。通知管理器还可以是以图表或者滚动条文本形式出现在系统顶部状态栏的通知,例如后台运行的应用程序的通知,还可以是以对话窗口形式出现在屏幕上的通知。例如在状态栏提示文本信息,发出提示音,电子设备振动,指示灯闪烁等。The notification manager enables the application to display notification information in the status bar, which can be used to convey notification-type messages, and can automatically disappear after a short stay without user interaction. For example, the notification manager is used to notify the download completion, message reminder, etc. The notification manager can also be a notification that appears on the top status bar of the system in the form of a chart or scroll bar text, such as a notification of an application running in the background, or a notification that appears on the screen in the form of a dialog window. For example, prompting text information in the status bar, issuing a prompt sound, vibrating the electronic device, and flashing the indicator light, etc.
Figure PCTCN2022115212-appb-000009
Runtime包括核心库和虚拟机。
Figure PCTCN2022115212-appb-000010
runtime负责安卓系统的调度和管理。
Figure PCTCN2022115212-appb-000009
Runtime includes core library and virtual machine.
Figure PCTCN2022115212-appb-000010
The runtime is responsible for the scheduling and management of the Android system.
核心库包含两部分:一部分是java语言需要调用的功能函数,另一部分是安卓的核心库。The core library consists of two parts: one part is the function function that the java language needs to call, and the other part is the core library of Android.
应用程序层和应用程序框架层运行在虚拟机中。虚拟机将应用程序层和应用程序框架层的java文件执行为二进制文件。虚拟机用于执行对象生命周期的管理,堆栈管理,线程管理,安全和异常的管理,以及垃圾回收等功能。The application layer and the application framework layer run in virtual machines. The virtual machine executes the java files of the application program layer and the application program framework layer as binary files. The virtual machine is used to perform functions such as object life cycle management, stack management, thread management, security and exception management, and garbage collection.
系统库可以包括多个功能模块。例如:表面管理器(surface manager),媒体库(Media Libraries),三维图形处理库(例如:OpenGL ES),2D图形引擎(例如:SGL)等。A system library can include multiple function modules. For example: surface manager (surface manager), media library (Media Libraries), 3D graphics processing library (eg: OpenGL ES), 2D graphics engine (eg: SGL), etc.
表面管理器用于对显示子系统进行管理,并且为多个应用程序提供了2D和3D图层的融合。The surface manager is used to manage the display subsystem and provides the fusion of 2D and 3D layers for multiple applications.
媒体库支持多种常用的音频,视频格式回放和录制,以及静态图像文件等。媒体库可以支持多种音视频编码格式,例如:MPEG4,H.264,MP3,AAC,AMR,JPG,PNG等。The media library supports playback and recording of various commonly used audio and video formats, as well as still image files, etc. The media library can support a variety of audio and video encoding formats, such as: MPEG4, H.264, MP3, AAC, AMR, JPG, PNG, etc.
三维图形处理库用于实现三维图形绘图,图像渲染,合成,和图层处理等。The 3D graphics processing library is used to implement 3D graphics drawing, image rendering, compositing, and layer processing, etc.
2D图形引擎是2D绘图的绘图引擎。2D graphics engine is a drawing engine for 2D drawing.
内核层是硬件和软件之间的层。内核层至少包含显示驱动,摄像头驱动,音频驱动,传感器驱动。The kernel layer is the layer between hardware and software. The kernel layer includes at least a display driver, a camera driver, an audio driver, and a sensor driver.
以上对电子设备100的软件架构的介绍仅为示例,可以理解的是,本发明实施例示意的软件架构并不构成对本申请构成具体限定。在本申请另一些实施例中,电子设备100的软件架构可以包括比图示更多或更少的模块,或者组合某些模块,或者拆分某些模块,或者不同的架构布置。图示的部件可以以硬件,软件或软件和硬件的组合实现。The above introduction to the software architecture of the electronic device 100 is only an example, and it should be understood that the software architecture shown in the embodiment of the present invention does not constitute a specific limitation to the present application. In some other embodiments of the present application, the software architecture of the electronic device 100 may include more or fewer modules than shown in the figure, or combine some modules, or split some modules, or arrange different architectures. The illustrated components can be realized in hardware, software or a combination of software and hardware.
下面结合一些实施例提供的相关示意用户界面说明本申请的技术方案。The technical solutions of the present application will be described below in conjunction with the relevant schematic user interfaces provided by some embodiments.
在核心设备(如手机)和关联设备(如智能手表)建立通信连接之后,核心设备和关联设备可以通过该通信连接互相发送指令、数据等。该通信连接可以是USB连接、蓝牙连接、Wi-Fi P2P连接等,本实施例不作限制。After the core device (such as a mobile phone) and the associated device (such as a smart watch) establish a communication connection, the core device and the associated device can send instructions, data, etc. to each other through the communication connection. The communication connection may be a USB connection, a Bluetooth connection, a Wi-Fi P2P connection, etc., which is not limited in this embodiment.
在本申请以下实施例中,是以手机为核心设备,其他设备如智能手表、智能电视等作为关联设备与手机相连接,组成超级终端为示例进行说明,该示例并不对实际应用中的核心设备和关联设备的设备类型构成任何限制。In the following embodiments of this application, the mobile phone is used as the core device, and other devices such as smart watches, smart TVs, etc. are connected to the mobile phone as associated devices to form a super terminal. This example does not describe the core device in practical applications. and the device type of the associated device constitute no restrictions.
在核心设备和关联设备上可以登录有同一个账号,也可以是不同账号,本实施例不作限制。The core device and the associated device may be logged in with the same account or different accounts, which is not limited in this embodiment.
核心设备是超级终端系统的控制中心,承载设备管理、服务管理、服务调度等功能,The core device is the control center of the super terminal system, carrying functions such as device management, service management, and service scheduling.
关联设备可以是与核心设备(如手机)位于同一通信网络的电子设备,例如,位于同一个Wi-Fi网络的电子设备。关联设备还可以是其登录账号与核心设备登录账号为同一账号(如华为账号)的电子设备,或者是其登录账号与核心设备登录账号属于同一群组(如同一家庭账号)的电子设备。关联设备还可以是通过其他方式与核心设备建立可信关系(或称配对)的电子设备,如,已配对蓝牙的电子设备,连接过手机分享的热点的电子设备,或者,手机连接过该电子设备的热点,又或者,手机与该电子设备建立过Wi-Fi P2P连接等。本申请实施例对上述关联设备与核心设备的具体关联方式不作限定。The associated device may be an electronic device located on the same communication network as the core device (such as a mobile phone), for example, an electronic device located on the same Wi-Fi network. The associated device can also be an electronic device whose login account is the same as the core device login account (such as a Huawei account), or an electronic device whose login account and the core device login account belong to the same group (such as the same family account). The associated device can also be an electronic device that establishes a trusted relationship (or pairing) with the core device in other ways, such as an electronic device that has been paired with Bluetooth, an electronic device that has connected to a hotspot shared by a mobile phone, or a mobile phone that has been connected to the electronic device. The hotspot of the device, or the mobile phone has established a Wi-Fi P2P connection with the electronic device, etc. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific manner of associating the foregoing associated device with the core device.
可以理解的是,在本申请实施例提供的以下示例界面中,主要以核心设备为手机展示相关用户界面,但这并不对本申请构成限制。以下示例界面也可以迁移用于其他类型设备上,只要基于本申请提供的同一发明思想,都在本申请保护范围内。It can be understood that, in the following example interface provided by the embodiment of the present application, the core device is mainly used as the mobile phone to display the relevant user interface, but this does not constitute a limitation to the present application. The following sample interfaces can also be transferred to other types of devices, as long as they are based on the same inventive idea provided by this application, they are all within the protection scope of this application.
可以理解的是,本申请以下实施例中所描述的各个用户界面仅为示例界面,并不对本申请方案构成限制。在其他实施例中,用户界面中可以采用不同的界面布局,可以包括更多或更少的控件,可以增加或减少其他功能选项,只要基于本申请提供的同一发明思想,都在本 申请保护范围内。It can be understood that each user interface described in the following embodiments of the present application is only an example interface, and does not limit the solution of the present application. In other embodiments, different interface layouts may be used in the user interface, more or less controls may be included, and other functional options may be added or reduced, as long as it is based on the same inventive idea provided by this application, it is within the scope of protection of this application Inside.
参考图4所示的实施例,图4示出了用户可以通过下拉控制中心界面进入超级终端界面。Referring to the embodiment shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 4 shows that the user can enter the hyperterminal interface by pulling down the control center interface.
如图4所示,用户界面400为手机显示的一个主界面(或称为主屏幕界面等)的示意图,用户界面400中可以包括顶部状态栏401,桌面402,底部托盘栏403等。其中,顶部状态栏401中包括移动信号指示符,无线网络信号指示符,电量指示符,时间指示符等。桌面402中可以显示有一个或多个应用程序的图标、应用功能组件等。底部托盘栏403可以显示常用应用程序的图标,方便用户快速打开这些应用。在用户界面400的示例中,底部托盘栏403中显示有电话、短信、通讯录、相机应用程序的图标。As shown in FIG. 4 , the user interface 400 is a schematic diagram of a main interface (or called a main screen interface, etc.) displayed by the mobile phone. The user interface 400 may include a top status bar 401 , a desktop 402 , and a bottom tray bar 403 . Wherein, the top status bar 401 includes a mobile signal indicator, a wireless network signal indicator, a power indicator, a time indicator and the like. Icons of one or more application programs, application function components, and the like may be displayed on the desktop 402 . The bottom tray bar 403 can display icons of commonly used applications, so that users can quickly open these applications. In the example of the user interface 400 , the bottom tray bar 403 displays icons for phone, text message, address book, and camera applications.
如图4所示,用户可以通过用户操作404调出控制中心界面。图4所示的用户操作404可以是用户从显示界面的顶部执行向下滑动的触控操作。在另一些实施例中,用户操作404还可以是用户从显示界面的底部执行向上滑动的触控操作。As shown in FIG. 4 , the user can call out the control center interface through user operation 404 . The user operation 404 shown in FIG. 4 may be a touch operation in which the user slides down from the top of the display interface. In some other embodiments, the user operation 404 may also be a touch operation in which the user performs an upward slide from the bottom of the display interface.
手机在检测到用户操作404后,显示控制中心界面,如用户界面410所示。用户界面410中可以显示多个功能控件,或者也可以称为卡片或模块等。例如用户界面410所示的日期时间显示控件411、设置控件412、快捷设置卡片413、超级终端功能卡片414、音乐卡片415、台灯快捷控制卡片416、智慧屏快捷控制卡片417等。After the mobile phone detects the user operation 404 , it displays the control center interface, as shown in the user interface 410 . Multiple functional controls may be displayed on the user interface 410, or may also be called cards or modules. For example, the date and time display control 411 shown in the user interface 410, the setting control 412, the shortcut setting card 413, the hyper terminal function card 414, the music card 415, the desk lamp shortcut control card 416, the smart screen shortcut control card 417, etc.
其中,日期时间显示控件411中显示有当前的时间和日期。设置控件412可以用于用户快速进入设置界面。快捷设置卡片413中包括多个控件,可以用于用户快捷开启/关闭或调节相应的功能,如快捷开启/关闭Wi-Fi网络、蓝牙、移动网络、声音、闹钟,以及快速调节屏幕显示亮度等。超级终端功能卡片414中显示有一个或多个设备的图标,这些设备可以包括已经与手机连接组成超级终端的设备,也可以包括手机检测到的还未建立连接的设备,还未建立连接的设备可以是之前已经配对过,也可以是暂未配对过的设备,本实施例对此不作限制。用户点击超级终端功能卡片414,手机可以显示图5所示的用户界面500。音乐卡片415中可以显示当前播放的音乐及歌手等信息,还包括上一首、播放/暂停、下一首、歌曲列表等控件。台灯快捷控制卡片416可用于用户快速开启或关闭台灯。智慧屏快捷控制卡片417可用于用户快速开启或关闭智慧屏。Wherein, the current time and date are displayed in the date and time display control 411 . The setting control 412 can be used for the user to quickly enter the setting interface. The shortcut setting card 413 includes multiple controls, which can be used by the user to quickly turn on/off or adjust corresponding functions, such as quickly turning on/off Wi-Fi network, Bluetooth, mobile network, sound, alarm clock, and quickly adjusting the brightness of the screen display, etc. . One or more icons of devices are displayed in the hyperterminal function card 414, and these devices can include devices that have been connected with the mobile phone to form a hyperterminal, or devices that have not yet established a connection detected by the mobile phone, and devices that have not yet established a connection It may be a device that has been paired before, or a device that has not been paired yet, which is not limited in this embodiment. The user clicks the hyperterminal function card 414, and the mobile phone can display the user interface 500 shown in FIG. 5 . The music card 415 can display information such as currently played music and singers, and also includes controls such as previous song, play/pause, next song, and song list. The desk lamp shortcut control card 416 can be used for the user to quickly turn on or off the desk lamp. The smart screen shortcut control card 417 can be used for the user to quickly turn on or turn off the smart screen.
在其他实施例中,用户还可以通过选择设置页面中的超级终端选项,进入超级终端界面,即用户操作404可以包括一系列的操作,例如包括用户在主界面中点击“设置”应用图标的操作,和在“设置”应用界面中选择对应的功能选项的操作等。或者用户还可以从手机的负一屏、上拉工具栏、下拉通知栏、左拉/右拉快捷图标栏、桌面卡片或某个应用(如智能家居应用)等等入口进入超级终端界面,本实施例对进入超级终端界面的方式不作限制。In other embodiments, the user can also enter the hyperterminal interface by selecting the hyperterminal option in the setting page, that is, the user operation 404 can include a series of operations, for example, the user clicks the "settings" application icon on the main interface. , and the operation of selecting the corresponding function option in the "Settings" application interface, etc. Or the user can also enter the HyperTerminal interface from the negative screen of the mobile phone, pull up the toolbar, pull down the notification bar, pull left/right shortcut icon bar, desktop card or an application (such as a smart home application), etc. The embodiment does not limit the way of entering the hyper terminal interface.
用户点击超级终端功能卡片414,手机可以显示图5所示的用户界面500。图5是超级终端功能相关的设备交互界面。The user clicks the hyperterminal function card 414, and the mobile phone can display the user interface 500 shown in FIG. 5 . Fig. 5 is the device interaction interface related to the HyperTerminal function.
在一些实施例中,手机可以开启无线通信功能,搜索周围的电子设备,并在设备列表中显示搜索到的电子设备的名称。然后用户在设备列表中根据名称选择需要交互的电子设备,然后向该电子设备发起连接。在一些实施例中,用户没有特殊备注时,在手机的设备列表中显示的电子设备的名称通常是该电子设备的类型和/或型号,例如HUAWEI Vision、HUAWEI MateBook,有时会遇到两个或两个以上相同名称的电子设备,用户无法确定分别对应哪个电子设备。In some embodiments, the mobile phone can turn on the wireless communication function, search for electronic devices around, and display the names of the electronic devices found in the device list. Then the user selects the electronic device to be interacted with according to the name in the device list, and then initiates a connection to the electronic device. In some embodiments, when the user has no special remarks, the name of the electronic device displayed in the device list of the mobile phone is usually the type and/or model of the electronic device, such as HUAWEI Vision, HUAWEI MateBook, sometimes two or For two or more electronic devices with the same name, the user cannot determine which electronic device corresponds to each.
本申请实施例提供了一种全新的交互界面,可以给用户提供更易懂的界面和更人性化、 友好的交互体验,如图5所示的超级终端用户界面500。The embodiment of the present application provides a brand-new interactive interface, which can provide users with an easier-to-understand interface and a more humanized and friendly interactive experience, such as the super terminal user interface 500 shown in FIG. 5 .
用户界面500中可以显示有超级终端标题栏501,用于返回上一页的返回控件502,提示说明503,设备连接状态图示504等。The user interface 500 may display a hyperterminal title bar 501 , a return control 502 for returning to a previous page, a prompt description 503 , a device connection status icon 504 , and the like.
在提示说明503中,显示有提示文字“拖拽设备到本机,建立协同”。In the prompt description 503, the prompt text "drag the device to the local machine to establish collaboration" is displayed.
设备连接状态图示504可以表现为环形图,设备连接状态图示504中心显示有手机图标505,表示核心设备为手机。环绕在手机周围的设备图标及名称,是手机搜索到的周围的设备,如图5中所示的智能手表图标506,Sound X图标,Vision图标,FreeBuds图标,智能手环图标,MatePad图标,MateBook图标等。The device connection status diagram 504 may be presented as a circular diagram, and a mobile phone icon 505 is displayed in the center of the device connection status diagram 504, indicating that the core device is a mobile phone. The device icons and names surrounding the mobile phone are the surrounding devices searched by the mobile phone, such as the smart watch icon 506 shown in Figure 5, the Sound X icon, the Vision icon, the FreeBuds icon, the smart bracelet icon, the MatePad icon, and the MateBook icons etc.
可以注意的是,在设备连接状态图示504中,可以形象地指示核心设备与关联设备的布局关系。如设备连接状态图示504中显示的关联设备图标与核心设备图标的相对位置,可以指示关联设备与核心设备在真实空间中的位置关系,如相对方位信息、相对距离信息等,有助于用户快速查找和区分各个电子设备。例如,手机搜索到两个名称为智能手表的设备,用户可以在手机超级终端界面中,根据标识的与手机的相对位置(相对方位或距离远近),区分要选择的设备。如,真实空间中,智能手表A位于手机左侧,智能手表B位于手机右侧,在设备连接状态图示中,用户就可以区分出,在手机图标左边的智能手表图标代表智能手表A,在手机图标右边的智能手表图标代表智能手表B。It can be noted that, in the device connection state diagram 504 , the layout relationship between the core device and the associated device can be visually indicated. For example, the relative position of the associated device icon and the core device icon displayed in the device connection status diagram 504 can indicate the positional relationship between the associated device and the core device in real space, such as relative orientation information, relative distance information, etc., which is helpful for users Quickly find and distinguish individual electronic devices. For example, the mobile phone searches for two devices named smart watches, and the user can distinguish the device to be selected according to the relative position (relative orientation or distance) of the logo and the mobile phone in the super terminal interface of the mobile phone. For example, in the real space, smart watch A is located on the left side of the mobile phone, and smart watch B is located on the right side of the mobile phone. In the device connection status icon, the user can distinguish that the smart watch icon on the left of the mobile phone icon represents smart watch A. The smart watch icon to the right of the phone icon represents smart watch B.
在一些实施例中,在设备连接状态图示504中,不同关联设备与核心设备手机的距离也可以不同,在界面中关联设备图标与核心设备图标之间的距离可以指示在真实空间中距离的远近,如在真实空间中关联设备距离核心设备越远,对应显示在界面中关联设备图标与核心设备图标的距离也越远。本实施例对实现该功能的具体技术不作限制,如手机可以基于超宽带(ultra wide band,UWB)技术获取关联设备所携带的指向性信息的方位以及测量的距离,得到关联设备与手机在真实空间下的空间映射关系。In some embodiments, in the device connection state diagram 504, the distances between different associated devices and the core device mobile phone may also be different, and the distance between the associated device icon and the core device icon in the interface may indicate the distance in real space Far and near, for example, the farther the associated device is from the core device in the real space, the farther the distance between the associated device icon and the core device icon displayed on the interface will be. This embodiment does not limit the specific technology for realizing this function. For example, the mobile phone can obtain the orientation and the measured distance of the directional information carried by the associated device based on ultra wide band (UWB) technology, and obtain the actual distance between the associated device and the mobile phone. The spatial mapping relationship under the space.
在另一些实施例中,在界面中关联设备图标与核心设备图标之间的距离可以指示核心设备探测到的关联设备的信号强度,如蓝牙信号强度或WiFi信号强度,例如在核心设备探测到的关联设备的信号强度越强,对应显示在界面中关联设备图标与核心设备图标的距离也越近。In some other embodiments, the distance between the icon of the associated device and the icon of the core device in the interface may indicate the signal strength of the associated device detected by the core device, such as the Bluetooth signal strength or the WiFi signal strength. The stronger the signal strength of the associated device, the closer the distance between the associated device icon and the core device icon displayed on the interface.
本申请对设备连接状态图示504的布局、表现形式和指示含义不作限制。在其他实施例中,也可以采用其他的布局或表现形式指示检测到的关联设备。The present application does not limit the layout, expression form and indication meaning of the device connection status diagram 504 . In other embodiments, other layouts or presentation forms may also be used to indicate the detected associated devices.
在一些实施例中,手机可以周期性的自动检测周围的关联设备,比如手机可以显示雷达扫描形式的界面,表示当前手机在周期性地执行检测任务。或者,手机可以响应于作用于刷新控件的用户操作,然后检测周围的关联设备。例如,手机可以利用无线通信功能广播查询消息,以搜索手机周围的关联设备。当附件的电子设备接收到手机的查询消息后,可以向手机返回响应消息,该响应消息中可以携带该电子设备的媒体存取控制地址(media access control address,MAC地址)、设备类型、名称等信息。In some embodiments, the mobile phone can automatically detect surrounding associated devices periodically. For example, the mobile phone can display an interface in the form of a radar scan, indicating that the mobile phone is currently performing detection tasks periodically. Alternatively, the phone can respond to a user action on the refresh control and then detect surrounding associated devices. For example, a mobile phone can use the wireless communication function to broadcast query messages to search for associated devices around the mobile phone. After receiving the query message from the mobile phone, the attached electronic device can return a response message to the mobile phone, and the response message can carry the media access control address (media access control address, MAC address), device type, name, etc. of the electronic device. information.
手机可以根据电子设备的响应消息等,确定该电子设备是否与手机相关联,即该电子设备是否是手机的关联设备。例如,手机可以根据响应消息中携带的电子设备的MAC地址,向账号管理服务器查询该电子设备登录的账号,以确定该电子设备登录的账号是否与手机登录的账号相同,或者属于同一群组的账号。或者,手机可以根据响应消息中携带的电子设备的MAC地址,向其所在的Wi-Fi网络的路由器查询,该电子设备是否与手机位于同一Wi-Fi网络等。又或者,手机根据自身存储的历史记录,确定该电子设备是否为与手机建立过可信关系等。本申请实施例对确定手机的关联设备的具体方法不作限定。The mobile phone can determine whether the electronic device is associated with the mobile phone according to the response message of the electronic device, that is, whether the electronic device is an associated device of the mobile phone. For example, according to the MAC address of the electronic device carried in the response message, the mobile phone can query the account management server for the account logged in by the electronic device to determine whether the account logged in by the electronic device is the same as the account logged in by the mobile phone, or whether it belongs to the same group. account. Alternatively, the mobile phone may query the router of the Wi-Fi network where the mobile phone is located according to the MAC address of the electronic device carried in the response message, whether the electronic device is located in the same Wi-Fi network as the mobile phone. Or, the mobile phone determines whether the electronic device has established a trusted relationship with the mobile phone according to the historical records stored by itself. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific method for determining the associated device of the mobile phone.
上述无线通信功能包括但不限于WLAN、无线射频识别(radio frequency identification, REID)、Wi-Fi P2P、热点、红外线、超声波、蓝牙、ZigBee、UWB等技术实现的无线通信功能,本实施例对此不作限制。The above-mentioned wireless communication functions include but are not limited to WLAN, radio frequency identification (radio frequency identification, REID), Wi-Fi P2P, hotspot, infrared, ultrasonic, Bluetooth, ZigBee, UWB and other wireless communication functions. No limit.
可以理解的,很多无线通信技术支持定位功能。例如,基于Wi-Fi的定位功能,基于蓝牙iBeacon的定位功能,基于蓝牙5.1版本的信号到达角(arrival of angle,AOA)的定位功能,基于UWB的定位功能等,本实施例不作限制。其中,基于Wi-Fi的定位功能、基于蓝牙iBeacon的定位功能可以测量手机与其他电子设备之间的距离。基于蓝牙5.1版本的AOA定位功能、基于UWB的定位功能可以测量手机与其他电子设备之间的距离,以及其他电子设备相对于手机的方向。Understandably, many wireless communication technologies support a positioning function. For example, the positioning function based on Wi-Fi, the positioning function based on Bluetooth iBeacon, the positioning function based on the signal angle of arrival (arrival of angle, AOA) of Bluetooth version 5.1, the positioning function based on UWB, etc., are not limited in this embodiment. Among them, the positioning function based on Wi-Fi and the positioning function based on Bluetooth iBeacon can measure the distance between the mobile phone and other electronic devices. The AOA positioning function based on Bluetooth 5.1 and the UWB-based positioning function can measure the distance between the mobile phone and other electronic devices, as well as the direction of other electronic devices relative to the mobile phone.
手机在搜索到周围的关联设备之后,可以进一步利用无线通信功能的定位能力,测量关联设备与手机在真实空间中的相对方向和/或相对距离,然后显示如图5所示的设备连接状态图示504。在设备连接状态图示504中用于表征各个电子设备的图标(以及名称)的布局,可以与各个电子设备在真实空间的位置布局一致。例如本申请提供的实施例中,图1示出了多个关联设备(如智能手表102,笔记本电脑103,平板电脑104,智能手环105,耳机106,智能电视107,智能音箱108)与手机101之间的位置关系(未示出距离关系),与图5中设备连接状态图示504所示的各个关联设备图标与手机图标之间的布局一一对应。如,图1示出,智能手表102位于手机101的正前方,相应的,图5中设备连接状态图示504示出智能手表图标506在手机图标505的正上方。After the mobile phone searches the surrounding associated devices, it can further use the positioning capability of the wireless communication function to measure the relative direction and/or relative distance between the associated device and the mobile phone in real space, and then display the device connection status diagram as shown in Figure 5 Show 504. The layout of the icons (and names) used to represent each electronic device in the device connection state diagram 504 may be consistent with the layout of each electronic device's position in real space. For example, in the embodiment provided by this application, Fig. 1 shows a plurality of associated devices (such as smart watch 102, notebook computer 103, tablet computer 104, smart bracelet 105, earphone 106, smart TV 107, smart speaker 108) and mobile phone The positional relationship between 101 (the distance relationship is not shown) is in one-to-one correspondence with the layout of each associated device icon and mobile phone icon shown in the device connection state diagram 504 in FIG. 5 . For example, as shown in FIG. 1 , the smart watch 102 is located directly in front of the mobile phone 101 . Correspondingly, the device connection status diagram 504 in FIG. 5 shows that the smart watch icon 506 is directly above the mobile phone icon 505 .
图5所示的关联设备图标游离在核心设备外围,并未与核心设备图标吸附、重叠或贴合,表示当前这些关联设备还未与核心设备建立连接。也就是说,在核心设备探测周围有哪些关联设备的过程中,需要手机与各个关联设备都开启无线通信功能,但并不要求手机与各个关联设备已经建立无线连接。The associated device icons shown in Figure 5 are floating around the core device, and are not adsorbed, overlapped or attached to the core device icon, indicating that these associated devices have not yet established a connection with the core device. That is to say, in the process of the core device detecting which associated devices are around, the mobile phone and each associated device need to enable the wireless communication function, but it is not required that the mobile phone and each associated device have established a wireless connection.
如果用户想要某个关联设备与核心设备手机组成超级终端,实现一些协同功能,在一种实现方式中,用户可以在图5所示的超级终端界面上,选中该关联设备图标,并拖拽关联设备对应的图标靠近核心设备的图标,参考图6所示的用户界面600。If the user wants an associated device and the core device mobile phone to form a hyper terminal to achieve some collaborative functions, in one implementation, the user can select the icon of the associated device on the hyper terminal interface shown in Figure 5, and drag The icon corresponding to the associated device is close to the icon of the core device, refer to the user interface 600 shown in FIG. 6 .
假设设备未协同前,关联设备图标与核心设备图标的距离为第一距离,当拖拽关联设备图标靠近核心设备图标,且其之间的距离小于或等于第二距离时,用户松开手指,该关联设备图标就可以吸附在核心设备图标周围,参考图7所示的用户界面700。Assume that before the devices are coordinated, the distance between the associated device icon and the core device icon is the first distance. When the associated device icon is dragged close to the core device icon and the distance between them is less than or equal to the second distance, the user releases the finger. The associated device icon can be adsorbed around the core device icon, refer to the user interface 700 shown in FIG. 7 .
如图6所示,如果用户想让智能手表与手机组成超级终端,协同工作,用户可以按住智能手表图标506,并拖拽该智能手表图标506靠近手机图标505。在用户界面600中,还可以显示提示说明602“已选中智能手表”,说明当前用户的选择状态。As shown in FIG. 6 , if the user wants the smart watch and the mobile phone to form a super terminal and work together, the user can hold down the smart watch icon 506 and drag the smart watch icon 506 close to the mobile phone icon 505 . In the user interface 600, a prompt description 602 "smart watch has been selected" may also be displayed to illustrate the selection status of the current user.
当智能手表图标506与手机图标505之间的距离小于或等于第二距离,或者智能手表图标506进入以手机图标505中心为圆心,半径为第一半径距离R的圆形区域中时,用户松开手指,就可以显示图7所示的设备连接状态图示701中,智能手表图标702吸附在手机图标505边缘。在用户界面700中,还可以显示提示说明703“与智能手表已协同”,说明当前超级终端的连接状态。When the distance between the smart watch icon 506 and the mobile phone icon 505 is less than or equal to the second distance, or the smart watch icon 506 enters a circular area with the center of the mobile phone icon 505 as the center and a radius of the first radius distance R, the user loosens the Open your finger to display the device connection status diagram 701 shown in FIG. In the user interface 700, a prompt description 703 "cooperated with the smart watch" may also be displayed to illustrate the current connection status of the hyper terminal.
当然,如果在打开超级终端界面之前,智能手表已经与手机建立了连接,那么在手机检测到已经建立连接的情况下,直接显示智能手表图标702吸附在手机图标505边缘的界面,表达该智能手表已经与手机建立连接的状况,如图7所示的用户界面700。Of course, if the smart watch has established a connection with the mobile phone before opening the super terminal interface, then when the mobile phone detects that the connection has been established, it will directly display the interface where the smart watch icon 702 is attached to the edge of the mobile phone icon 505, expressing that the smart watch In the situation that the connection has been established with the mobile phone, the user interface 700 shown in FIG. 7 is shown.
可以理解的是,可以与手机建立通信连接是关联设备的必要非充分条件。与手机建立通信连接的设备不一定是可以组成超级终端的关联设备,关联设备一定是可以与手机建立通信 连接的设备。It can be understood that being able to establish a communication connection with the mobile phone is a necessary but not sufficient condition for the associated device. The device that establishes a communication connection with the mobile phone is not necessarily an associated device that can form a HyperTerminal. The associated device must be a device that can establish a communication connection with the mobile phone.
在图7中,已与手机连接形成超级终端的智能手表图标702可以显示有区别度的标识,便于与未连接状态的关联设备图标区分。如智能手表图标702显示为深色填充形式,指示智能手表与手机处于连接状态,其他还有智能手表图标702的大小小于未连接时的智能手表图标506,智能手表图标702的圆形图标直径为R2,吸附在手机图标505的边缘上,智能手表图标702与手机图标505的边缘相切。In FIG. 7 , the smart watch icon 702 that has been connected with the mobile phone to form a hyperterminal can display a distinctive logo, which is convenient for distinguishing it from the associated device icon in the unconnected state. For example, the smart watch icon 702 is displayed in a dark filled form, indicating that the smart watch is connected to the mobile phone. In addition, the size of the smart watch icon 702 is smaller than that of the smart watch icon 506 when it is not connected. The diameter of the round icon of the smart watch icon 702 is R2 is adsorbed on the edge of the mobile phone icon 505 , and the smart watch icon 702 is tangent to the edge of the mobile phone icon 505 .
在另一些实施例中,两个设备图标吸附在一起也可以是指这两个设备图标全部或部分重叠在一起。本实施例对吸附的表现形式不作限制。In some other embodiments, the two device icons being attracted together may also mean that the two device icons overlap in whole or in part. This embodiment does not limit the form of adsorption.
相应的,如果用户想让某个关联设备脱离超级终端系统,可以在该关联设备图标与核心设备处于吸附的状态下,选中该关联设备图标并拖动该关联设备图标远离核心设备图标。当手机检测到用户拖动该关联设备图标远离核心设备图标大于第三距离时,当用户松开手指,该关联设备图标回到未连接之前的位置,解除吸附状态,该关联设备同时也断开与核心设备的连接,脱离超级终端系统,该设备在超级终端中所提供的服务也随之终止。在一些示例中,核心设备图标保持不动,用户选中关联图标向远离核心设备图标的方向拖动超过一定距离,两个设备即可断开连接。在另一些示例中,用户可以同时选中关联图标和核心设备图标,分别按住两个图标,将两个图标向相反方向拖动超过一定距离,两个设备即可断开连接。Correspondingly, if the user wants to detach an associated device from the HyperTerminal system, he can select the associated device icon and drag the associated device icon away from the core device icon when the associated device icon is in the state of adsorption to the core device. When the mobile phone detects that the user drags the icon of the associated device away from the icon of the core device for a distance greater than the third distance, when the user releases the finger, the icon of the associated device returns to the position before it was not connected, the adsorption state is released, and the associated device is also disconnected If the connection with the core device is separated from the HyperTerminal system, the service provided by the device in the HyperTerminal will also be terminated. In some examples, the core device icon remains stationary, and the user selects the associated icon and drags it away from the core device icon for a certain distance, and the two devices can be disconnected. In other examples, the user can select the associated icon and the core device icon at the same time, press and hold the two icons respectively, and drag the two icons in opposite directions over a certain distance, and the two devices can be disconnected.
本实施例对触发吸附和解除吸附的条件或用户操作不作限制。In this embodiment, there is no limitation on conditions or user operations for triggering adsorption and releasing adsorption.
在另一些实施例中,当用户拖动关联设备图标靠近核心设备图标小于第二距离时,用户手指未松开该关联设备图标,但是在该位置停留时间超过第一预设时长后,该关联设备图标也可以与核心设备图标吸附在一起。相应的,用户也可以拖动改关联设备图标远离核心设备图标大于第三距离,用户手指未松开该关联设备图标,但是在该位置停留时间超过第二预设时长后,该关联设备图标回到未连接之前的位置,解除吸附状态,该关联设备同时也断开与核心设备的连接,脱离超级终端系统,该设备在超级终端中所提供的服务也随之终止。In some other embodiments, when the user drags the associated device icon closer to the core device icon for less than the second distance, the user does not release the associated device icon, but after the user stays at this position for more than the first preset time, the associated Device icons can also snap together with core device icons. Correspondingly, the user can also drag the icon of the associated device to move away from the icon of the core device for a distance greater than the third distance. To the position before it is not connected, the adsorption state is released, and the associated device is also disconnected from the core device at the same time, and it is separated from the hyperterminal system, and the service provided by the device in the hyperterminal is also terminated.
或者,在另一些实施例中,当用户点击了某个处于未连接状态的关联设备的图标,可以触发该关联设备与核心设备的连接,在界面上表现为该关联设备图标与核心设备图标吸附在一起。相应的,当用户点击了某个处于已连接状态的关联设备,可以触发该关联设备与核心设备断开连接,在界面上表现为该关联设备图标与核心设备图标分开,该关联设备图标回到未连接状态的位置。Or, in some other embodiments, when the user clicks an icon of an unconnected associated device, the connection between the associated device and the core device can be triggered, and the interface shows that the associated device icon is attached to the core device icon together. Correspondingly, when the user clicks an associated device that is in the connected state, it can trigger the associated device to disconnect from the core device. On the interface, the icon of the associated device is separated from the icon of the core device, and the icon of the associated device returns to The location of the unconnected state.
在一些实施例中,被选中的设备图标可以随着用户手指在屏幕上拖动的轨迹而变化位置。本实施例不限定用户拖动设备图标时的手指运动轨迹,用户拖动轨迹可以是任意曲线。例如,当用户选中某个关联设备图标后,用户手指在屏幕上拖动该关联设备图标一段距离或者在屏幕的某个位置上停留第二预设时长,手机可以检测当前该关联设备图标与手机图标之间的距离是否小于或等于一定距离,如第二距离,如果是,则该关联设备图标与手机图标吸附在一起。在用户手指移动时,该关联设备图标随着用户手指轨迹移动。In some embodiments, the selected device icon can change its position along with the track of the user's finger dragging on the screen. This embodiment does not limit the finger movement trajectory when the user drags the device icon, and the user's dragging trajectory may be any curve. For example, when the user selects an associated device icon, and the user drags the associated device icon on the screen for a certain distance or stays on a certain position on the screen for a second preset time, the mobile phone can detect the current association between the associated device icon and the mobile phone. Whether the distance between the icons is less than or equal to a certain distance, such as the second distance, if so, the associated device icon and the mobile phone icon are adsorbed together. When the user's finger moves, the associated device icon moves along with the track of the user's finger.
在另外一些实施例中,被选中的设备图标也可以不随着用户手指在屏幕上拖动的轨迹而变化位置。例如,当用户选中某个关联设备图标时,用户手指在屏幕上滑动一段距离或者在屏幕的某个位置上停留第二预设时长,手机可以确定当前用户手指所在位置与手机图标之间的距离是否小于或等于一定距离,如第二距离,如果是,则该关联设备图标与手机图标吸附在一起。在用户手指移动时,该关联设备图标并不会移动。In some other embodiments, the selected device icon may not change its position along with the dragging track of the user's finger on the screen. For example, when the user selects an associated device icon, and the user slides a finger on the screen for a certain distance or stays on a certain position on the screen for a second preset time, the mobile phone can determine the distance between the current position of the user's finger and the mobile phone icon Whether it is less than or equal to a certain distance, such as the second distance, if so, the associated device icon and the mobile phone icon are attracted together. The associated device icon does not move when the user's finger is moved.
在其他一些实施例中,用户也可以选中核心设备图标贴近关联设备图标,同样触发两个设备相连。如用户按住手机图标并拖拽手机图标靠近智能手表图标,在手机图标与智能手表 图标相贴或有重叠区域时,用户松开手指,该智能手表图标也可以与手机图标吸附在一起,表示手机与智能手表相连接,可以协同工作。In some other embodiments, the user can also select the icon of the core device to be close to the icon of the associated device, which also triggers the connection of the two devices. For example, if the user holds down the phone icon and drags the phone icon close to the smart watch icon, when the phone icon and the smart watch icon overlap or overlaps, the user releases the finger, and the smart watch icon can also be attached to the phone icon, indicating that The phone is connected to the smart watch and can work together.
在一些实施例中,超级终端界面上也可以设置一键断开控件,点击该一键断开控件,可以使得全部关联设备与核心设备断开连接,恢复到核心设备独立暂无任何关联设备连接的状态,各个关联设备提供的服务也随之终止。In some embodiments, a one-key disconnection control can also be set on the HyperTerminal interface. Clicking the one-key disconnection control can disconnect all associated devices from the core device, and restore the core device to be independent without any associated device connection. state, the services provided by each associated device will also be terminated.
可以理解的是,不限于关联设备与核心设备之间连接组成超级终端,在另一些实施例中,用户也可以在超级终端界面中,连接某个关联设备与另一个关联设备,组成超级终端。也就是说,用户可以连接任意两个或两个以上的设备,具有连接关系的设备不限于是关联设备或是核心设备,如关联设备智能音箱和智能电视可以直接连接组成超级终端,其各种功能、示意界面或用户操作可以参考前述或后述各个实施例中的描述,这里不多赘述。It can be understood that the hyperterminal is not limited to the connection between the associated device and the core device. In other embodiments, the user can also connect an associated device with another associated device in the hyperterminal interface to form a hyperterminal. That is to say, the user can connect any two or more devices, and the connected devices are not limited to associated devices or core devices. For example, associated devices, smart speakers and smart TVs can be directly connected to form a super terminal. For functions, schematic interfaces or user operations, reference may be made to the descriptions in the preceding or subsequent embodiments, and details are not repeated here.
在本申请提供的实施例中,当多个设备连接组成超级终端时,超级终端系统可以基于当前已经连接的设备类型和/或设备特征,或者根据所检测到用户当前所处的环境,或者设备的运行状态等情况,分析当前用户的使用场景,进一步地,列举超级终端系统所能提供的场景化服务或功能,在用户界面上予以显示,方便用户快速启动相关服务或功能。In the embodiment provided by this application, when multiple devices are connected to form a hyper terminal, the hyper terminal system can be based on the currently connected device type and/or device characteristics, or according to the detected environment where the user is currently located, or the device Analyze the current user’s usage scenarios, and further, enumerate the scenario-based services or functions that the HyperTerminal system can provide, and display them on the user interface, so that users can quickly start related services or functions.
具体地,不同的设备类型具有不同的设备特征,例如智能电视具有较大的屏幕,用户视觉观看体验较好,更适合观看视频;智能音箱具有较强的音频输出能力,扬声效果较好,更适合播放音频;耳机体积小,易携带,无需外放,不打扰周围人,还可以具有降噪效果,屏蔽外界环境噪音,适合在公共场合收听音频,如在公共场合通话、听音乐等;智能手表、智能手环可以相比于手机更精确的测量用户的运动数据或心率等其他健康信息;笔记本电脑处理能力强大,更适合办公。这里不再赘述设备类型及设备特征,以上示例说明不对其他实施例构成限制。Specifically, different device types have different device features. For example, smart TVs have larger screens, which provide users with a better visual viewing experience and are more suitable for watching videos; smart speakers have strong audio output capabilities and better speaker effects. It is more suitable for playing audio; the earphone is small in size, easy to carry, does not need to be placed outside, does not disturb people around, and can also have a noise reduction effect, shielding external environmental noise, suitable for listening to audio in public places, such as talking in public places, listening to music, etc.; Smart watches and smart bracelets can measure the user's exercise data or heart rate and other health information more accurately than mobile phones; laptops have powerful processing capabilities and are more suitable for office work. The device type and device features will not be described in detail here, and the above examples do not limit other embodiments.
或者,设备还可以检测用户当前所处的环境,分析当前用户的使用场景。本实施例对检测用户所处环境的方式不作限制,例如可以根据设备当前的定位信息判断是在室内或户外;或者使用摄像头采集当前所处环境的照片,或使用超声波、红外线等采集当前所处环境的空间纵深或大小,以判断当前用户处于室内还是户外。Alternatively, the device may also detect the current environment of the user, and analyze the usage scenario of the current user. This embodiment does not limit the method of detecting the user's environment. For example, it can be determined whether the device is indoors or outdoors based on the current location information of the device; or use a camera to collect photos of the current environment, or use ultrasonic waves, infrared rays, etc. The spatial depth or size of the environment to determine whether the current user is indoors or outdoors.
在一些实施例中,超级终端系统可以划分出多种消费者使用场景。超级终端系统可以基于当前系统中设备的设备类型、设备特征、产品定位、常用功能等信息,匹配相关的使用场景。In some embodiments, the hyperterminal system can be divided into various consumer usage scenarios. The HyperTerminal system can match relevant usage scenarios based on the device type, device features, product positioning, common functions and other information of the devices in the current system.
在一个示例中,消费者使用场景可以包括以下五个类别:移动办公、智能家居、影音娱乐、运动健康、智能出行。当然,消费者使用场景的分类并非一成不变,超级终端系统可以不断更新、扩充或细化更多的使用场景,本实施例不作限制,具体可以根据实际情况进行变动。比如说新增了之前未出现过的关联设备或功能,可能会导致出现新的使用场景,例如新增了智能汽车作为关联设备可以与手机组成超级终端,那么新增手机与智能汽车组成的使用场景为智能出行场景。In an example, consumer usage scenarios may include the following five categories: mobile office, smart home, audio-visual entertainment, sports and health, and smart travel. Of course, the classification of consumer usage scenarios is not static, and the hyperterminal system can continuously update, expand or refine more usage scenarios, which are not limited in this embodiment, and can be changed according to actual conditions. For example, the addition of associated devices or functions that have not appeared before may lead to new usage scenarios. For example, adding a smart car as an associated device can form a super terminal with a mobile phone, and then add a mobile phone and a smart car. The scene is an intelligent travel scene.
在超级终端系统根据设备匹配使用场景之后,还可以基于使用场景,分析、查询该设备组合可提供的场景化服务、原子化服务等。After the HyperTerminal system matches the usage scenario according to the device, it can also analyze and query the scenario-based services and atomized services that the device combination can provide based on the usage scenario.
其中,场景化服务指的是基于使用场景的功能性服务,是可以针对某个特殊场景提供的多个功能或服务的集合。而原子化服务指的是可独立运行的最小能力单元,是对单一功能/能力进行抽象封装的概念,可以是硬件服务,也可以是软件服务。一般一个场景化服务可以由多个原子化服务支持运行,一个原子化服务组合包括多个设备所具有的原子能力构成的原子 化服务。其中,原子能力可以包括以下一项或多项:音频输出能力、音频输入能力、显示能力、摄像能力、触控输入能力、键鼠输入能力等。举例说明,音频输出能力可以包括该设备在播放音频时,支持单声道或者多声道,支持的音效,可支持的频响范围,降噪能力,音频解析能力等;音频输入能力可以包括收声范围、降噪能力等;显示能力可以包括该设备的屏幕大小,显示分辨率参数,刷新率,色彩表现力等;摄像能力可以包括该设备的摄像头类型,拍摄像素,拍摄夜景能力,图像调整能力等;触控输入能力、键鼠输入能力指该设备是否可以支持触控输入或者键鼠输入等。Among them, the scenario-based service refers to a functional service based on a usage scenario, which is a collection of multiple functions or services that can be provided for a specific scenario. The atomic service refers to the smallest capability unit that can run independently. It is a concept of abstract packaging of a single function/capability. It can be a hardware service or a software service. Generally, a scene service can be supported by multiple atomic services, and an atomic service combination includes atomic services composed of atomic capabilities of multiple devices. The atomic capabilities may include one or more of the following: audio output capabilities, audio input capabilities, display capabilities, camera capabilities, touch input capabilities, keyboard and mouse input capabilities, and the like. For example, the audio output capability may include whether the device supports mono or multi-channel, supported sound effects, supported frequency response range, noise reduction capability, audio analysis capability, etc. when the device is playing audio; the audio input capability may include receiving Acoustic range, noise reduction capability, etc.; display capability may include the device’s screen size, display resolution parameters, refresh rate, color expressiveness, etc.; camera capability may include the device’s camera type, shooting pixels, night scene shooting capability, and image adjustment capability, etc.; touch input capability, keyboard and mouse input capability refer to whether the device can support touch input or keyboard and mouse input, etc.
例如,手机与大屏之间的多屏协同场景化服务由以下几个原子化服务支持运行:显示服务、音频输入服务、音频输出服务、触控输入服务、键鼠输入服务、摄像服务等。其中,显示服务可以由大屏提供,音频输入服务可以由手机提供,音频输出服务可以由大屏提供,触控输入服务可以由手机提供,键鼠输入服务可以由大屏提供等等。For example, the multi-screen collaborative scene service between the mobile phone and the large screen is supported by the following atomic services: display service, audio input service, audio output service, touch input service, keyboard and mouse input service, camera service, etc. Among them, the display service can be provided by the large screen, the audio input service can be provided by the mobile phone, the audio output service can be provided by the large screen, the touch input service can be provided by the mobile phone, the keyboard and mouse input service can be provided by the large screen, and so on.
可理解的,场景化服务、原子化服务只是本实施例中所使用的词语,其代表的含义在本实施例中已经记载,其名称并不能对本实施例构成任何限制。比如,在其他一些实施例中,场景化服务也可以称为场景化功能、场景功能、场景服务、场景化业务、业务功能等其他名词;原子化服务也可以称为元能力、原子能力(Ability)、原子服务、功能组件等其他名词。在本申请实施例中,主要以“场景化服务”、“原子化服务”进行描述。It can be understood that scene-based service and atomized service are only words used in this embodiment, and their representative meanings have been recorded in this embodiment, and their names do not constitute any limitation to this embodiment. For example, in some other embodiments, scenario-based services may also be called scenario-based functions, scenario functions, scenario services, scenario-based services, business functions, and other terms; atomic services may also be called meta-capabilities, atomic capabilities (Ability ), atomic services, functional components, and other nouns. In the embodiment of this application, it is mainly described as "scenario-based service" and "atomized service".
以手机与智能手表组成的超级终端为例,可以匹配其使用场景为运动健康场景,超级终端系统可以查询手机+智能手表组合所能提供的场景化服务、原子化服务。比如,手机+智能手表组合可以提供的服务包括:支持运动服务、支持健康服务、统计运动量、测量心率、测量血氧饱和度等。结合不同场景,推荐手机+智能手表组合的场景化服务包括:室内跑步、户外跑步、心脏健康、血氧健康等。查询智能手表支持的原子化服务包括:GPS定位、声音输出、振动提醒等。Taking a super terminal composed of a mobile phone and a smart watch as an example, it can match its usage scenario as a sports and health scene. The super terminal system can query the scene-based services and atomized services that can be provided by the mobile phone + smart watch combination. For example, the combination of mobile phone + smart watch can provide services including: supporting sports services, supporting health services, counting exercise, measuring heart rate, measuring blood oxygen saturation, etc. Combined with different scenarios, the scenario-based services recommended for mobile phone + smart watch combinations include: indoor running, outdoor running, heart health, blood oxygen health, etc. Query the atomic services supported by smart watches, including: GPS positioning, sound output, vibration reminder, etc.
在一个示例中,参见表一,表一列出了核心设备为手机,一些不同关联设备与手机组成超级终端时,对应分类的使用场景类别,以及查询设备能力后分析推荐的场景化服务。需要说明的是,表一只是示出了关联设备为单个设备的情况,但是不限于此,在其他实施例中,也存在多个关联设备与手机组成超级终端的情况,例如关联设备为智能电视和智能音箱,与手机组成超级终端,其对应的执行操作、功能描述可以参考前述或后述实施例,这里不再赘述。In an example, see Table 1. Table 1 lists the corresponding classification of usage scenarios when the core device is a mobile phone, and some different associated devices form a hyper terminal with the mobile phone, and the scenario-based services that are analyzed and recommended after querying the capabilities of the device. It should be noted that Table 1 only shows the case where the associated device is a single device, but it is not limited thereto. In other embodiments, there are also cases where multiple associated devices and mobile phones form a hyper terminal, for example, the associated device is a smart TV and a smart speaker, and a mobile phone to form a super terminal, and its corresponding execution operations and function descriptions can refer to the foregoing or subsequent embodiments, and will not be repeated here.
表一Table I
Figure PCTCN2022115212-appb-000011
Figure PCTCN2022115212-appb-000011
场景化服务可以是超级终端系统根据核心设备和/或关联设备的设备类型、设备用途、用户常用的协同工作内容、设备当前所处环境、设备运行状态、用户最近使用的应用、当前运行应用等情况,综合统计得出的场景化服务选项。Scenario-based services can be based on the type of core device and/or associated devices, device usage, user's commonly used collaborative work content, current environment of the device, device operating status, user's recently used applications, currently running applications, etc. Situation, scenario-based service options based on comprehensive statistics.
在一些实施例中,超级终端可以根据设备类型、产品定位、设备用途等推荐场景化服务,如手机与智能手表组合常用于统计运动量,那么超级终端系统基于手机和智能手表组合的设备类型、设备用途、常用的协同工作内容,可以给手机和智能手表组合分类为运动健康场景。运动健康场景下可以提供的场景化服务选项包括户外跑步、室内跑步、心脏健康、血管健康等。In some embodiments, the HyperTerminal can recommend scenario-based services based on device type, product positioning, and device usage. For example, the combination of a mobile phone and a smart watch is often used to count exercise, so the HyperTerminal system is based on the device type, device Uses and common collaborative work content can be classified as sports and health scenarios for the combination of mobile phones and smart watches. Scenario-based service options that can be provided in sports and health scenarios include outdoor running, indoor running, heart health, and vascular health.
在一些实施例中,在列出场景化服务选项时,可以根据用户最近使用频率或者检测当前设备所处的环境等情况,计算各场景化服务选项被选择的概率,在场景化服务选项区域中优先靠前显示推测被选择概率大的场景化服务选项。In some embodiments, when listing the scenario-based service options, the probability of each scenario-based service option being selected can be calculated according to the user's recent use frequency or the environment in which the current device is detected. In the scenario-based service option area The scenario-based service options that are estimated to have a high probability of being selected are displayed first.
超级终端系统可以根据统计到的用户在一定时间对各项场景化服务选项的使用频率,靠前显示高使用率的选项。一定时间可以是历史所有时间,也可以是某个时间段,如最近三个月。场景化服务选项历史使用率越高,显示越靠前。The hyper terminal system can display the options with high usage rate in the front according to the usage frequency of various scenario-based service options by users within a certain period of time according to the statistics. The certain time can be all the time in history, or a certain period of time, such as the last three months. The higher the historical usage rate of the scenario-based service option, the higher the display.
在另一些实施例中,核心设备或关联设备可以检测当前设备所处的环境,根据所处的环境排序场景化服务选项。如果核心设备或关联设备检测到用户所处环境为户外,那优先推荐户外相关服务选项,如户外跑步。如果核心设备或关联设备检测到用户所处环境为室内,那优先推荐室内相关服务选项,如室内跑步。本实施例对检测用户所处环境的方式不作限制,例如可以根据设备当前的定位信息判断所处环境;或者使用摄像头采集当前所处环境的照片,或使用超声波、红外线等采集当前空间的纵深或大小,以判断当前用户所处环境。In some other embodiments, the core device or the associated device may detect the environment where the current device is located, and sort the scenario-based service options according to the environment. If the core device or associated device detects that the user's environment is outdoors, it will give priority to recommending outdoor-related service options, such as outdoor running. If the core device or associated device detects that the user's environment is indoors, it will give priority to recommending indoor related service options, such as indoor running. This embodiment does not limit the method of detecting the user's environment. For example, the environment can be judged according to the current positioning information of the device; or the camera can be used to collect photos of the current environment, or ultrasonic waves, infrared rays, etc. size to determine the current user's environment.
在另一些实施例中,超级终端系统还可以根据用户最近打开或使用的应用,或者当前运行的应用,确定设备所处的环境或场景,进而推荐场景化服务选项。例如,手机与智能电视组成超级终端的情况下,检测到手机当前运行的应用为办公演示应用,则可以优先推荐多屏协同服务选项;或者,检测到手机当前运行的应用为视频应用,则优先推荐家庭影院服务选项;或者,当检测到用户浏览网页为游戏相关的网页时,优先推荐游戏娱乐相关的服务选项等。In some other embodiments, the HyperTerminal system can also determine the environment or scene where the device is located according to the application recently opened or used by the user, or the currently running application, and then recommend scene-based service options. For example, when a mobile phone and a smart TV form a super terminal, if it is detected that the application currently running on the mobile phone is an office presentation application, then the multi-screen collaborative service option can be recommended first; or, if it is detected that the application currently running on the mobile phone is a video application, then the Recommend home theater service options; or, when it is detected that the webpage browsed by the user is a game-related webpage, preferentially recommend game entertainment-related service options, etc.
在其他一些实施例中,超级终端系统还可以根据设备的运行状态,推荐场景化服务。例如,当手机与智能电视连接组成超级终端时,如果检测到智能电视处于亮屏状态,则优先推荐场景化服务为屏幕镜像,如果检测到智能电视处于灭屏状态,则优先推荐场景化服务为投音服务。In some other embodiments, the hyperterminal system can also recommend scene-based services according to the running status of the equipment. For example, when a mobile phone is connected to a smart TV to form a super terminal, if it is detected that the smart TV is in the on-screen state, then the scene-based service is recommended as screen mirroring; if the smart TV is detected to be off-screen, the scene-based service is recommended as Casting service.
在其他一些实施例中,超级终端系统还可以根据设备可以提供的原子化服务,推荐场景化服务。In some other embodiments, the hyperterminal system can also recommend scenario-based services according to the atomized services that the device can provide.
在一些实施例中,用户可以自定义添加场景化服务,如用户给某个使用场景设置名称,并让该场景关联其他应用服务或系统服务。该新添加的场景化服务与其他场景化服务并列显示在超级终端界面中。In some embodiments, the user can customize and add scene-based services, for example, the user sets a name for a usage scene and associates the scene with other application services or system services. The newly added scenario-based service is displayed side by side with other scenario-based services on the HyperTerminal interface.
上述实施例并不对其他实施例构成限制,超级终端系统可以综合考虑以上一项或多项因素,合理推荐场景化服务选项。The foregoing embodiments do not limit other embodiments. The hyperterminal system may comprehensively consider one or more of the above factors and reasonably recommend scene-based service options.
超级终端系统可以基于当前设备组合、查询到的各个设备可提供的原子化服务,再根据用户实际选择的场景化服务,可以基于用户常用服务组合,或者用户设定的默认服务组合,或者基于生活认知最适合该场景下的服务组合,或者从服务器获取到该场景下使用频率最多的服务组合等,自动设置该场景下的原子化服务组合,省去用户繁琐的选择操作。The hyper terminal system can be based on the current device combination, the atomized services that can be provided by each device that can be queried, and then according to the scene service actually selected by the user, it can be based on the user's usual service combination, or the default service combination set by the user, or based on life Cognition is the most suitable service combination in this scenario, or the most frequently used service combination in this scenario is obtained from the server, and the atomic service combination in this scenario is automatically set, saving users from tedious selection operations.
例如,手机与智能电视组成超级终端后,若用户选择的场景化服务为跨屏会议,自动设置原子化服务组合为:音频输出功能由智能电视提供、音频输入(麦克风)功能由手机提供、 摄像头功能由智能电视提供、显示功能由智能电视提供。再例如,手机与智能手表、耳机、跑步机组成超级终端后,若用户选择的场景化服务为室内跑步,自动设置原子化服务组合为:音频输出功能由耳机提供、音频输入(麦克风)功能由耳机提供、摄像头功能由手机提供、显示功能由跑步机提供。For example, after a mobile phone and a smart TV form a super terminal, if the scene service selected by the user is a multi-screen conference, the atomic service combination is automatically set as follows: the audio output function is provided by the smart TV, the audio input (microphone) function is provided by the mobile phone, and the camera The function is provided by the smart TV, and the display function is provided by the smart TV. For another example, after a super terminal is composed of a mobile phone, a smart watch, earphones, and a treadmill, if the scene service selected by the user is indoor running, the atomic service combination is automatically set as follows: the audio output function is provided by the earphone, and the audio input (microphone) function is provided by the The earphones provide, the camera function is provided by the mobile phone, and the display function is provided by the treadmill.
在一些实施例中,超级终端系统可以根据不同的设备类型具有的设备特征,分析最佳原子化服务组合。例如,智能电视具有较大的屏幕,用户视觉观看体验较好,更适合观看视频,那么在智能电视与手机组成超级终端时,优先设置智能电视提供显示功能。智能音箱具有较强的音频输出能力,扬声效果较好,更适合播放音频,那么在智能音箱与手机组成超级终端时,优先设置智能音箱提供音频输出功能。耳机体积小,易携带,无需外放,不打扰周围人,还可以具有降噪效果,屏蔽外界环境噪音,适合在公共场合收听音频,如在公共场合通话、听音乐等,那么在耳机与手机组成超级终端时,优先设置耳机提供音频输出功能。智能手表、智能手环可以相比于手机更精确的测量用户的运动数据或心率等其他健康信息,那么在智能手表或智能手环与手机组成超级终端时,优先设置采用智能手表或智能手环获取的运动数据;笔记本电脑处理能力强大,更适合办公,那么在笔记本电脑与手机组成超级终端时,优先设置笔记本电脑提供显示功能、键盘输入功能等。这里不再赘述设备类型及设备特征,以上示例说明不对其他实施例构成限制。In some embodiments, the hyperterminal system can analyze the optimal atomic service combination according to the device characteristics of different device types. For example, a smart TV has a larger screen, and the user has a better viewing experience and is more suitable for watching videos. Then, when a smart TV and a mobile phone form a super terminal, the smart TV is given priority to provide display functions. Smart speakers have strong audio output capabilities, better sound effects, and are more suitable for playing audio. When a smart speaker and a mobile phone form a super terminal, the smart speaker is given priority to provide audio output. The headset is small in size, easy to carry, does not need to be placed outside, does not disturb people around, and can also have a noise reduction effect, shielding external environmental noise, suitable for listening to audio in public places, such as talking in public places, listening to music, etc. When forming a HyperTerminal, it is preferred to set the earphone to provide audio output function. Smart watches and smart bracelets can measure the user's exercise data or heart rate and other health information more accurately than mobile phones. When smart watches or smart bracelets and mobile phones form a super terminal, the smart watch or smart bracelet is preferred. The acquired motion data; the laptop has powerful processing capability and is more suitable for office work, so when the laptop and mobile phone form a super terminal, the laptop is given priority to provide display functions, keyboard input functions, etc. The device type and device features will not be described in detail here, and the above examples do not limit other embodiments.
在一些实施例中,超级终端支持用户个性化设定原子化服务组合,用户可以根据个人喜好或实际情况手动修改原子化服务组合,将某个原子化服务调整为其他设备提供。如在跨屏会议中,如果周围环境比较嘈杂,用户可以将音频输出功能由智能电视提供,改为由耳机提供。In some embodiments, the hyper terminal supports users to personalize the atomic service combination, and the user can manually modify the atomic service combination according to personal preferences or actual conditions, and adjust a certain atomic service to be provided by other devices. For example, in a multi-screen conference, if the surrounding environment is noisy, the user can change the audio output function provided by the smart TV to the headset.
在本申请提供的实施例中,超级终端系统还可以基于当前组成超级终端系统的设备的类型,分析当前场景,向用户列举推荐适合当前场景的其他设备,以帮助用户获取更好的场景体验;或者推测更多可扩充的使用场景,然后向用户列举推荐其他设备,假如用户采用系统推荐的设备,可以进一步地扩充更多、更丰富的使用场景。In the embodiment provided by this application, the HyperTerminal system can also analyze the current scene based on the types of devices that currently make up the HyperTerminal system, and list and recommend other devices suitable for the current scene to the user, so as to help the user obtain a better scene experience; Or speculate on more scalable usage scenarios, and then list and recommend other devices to the user. If the user adopts the device recommended by the system, more and richer usage scenarios can be further expanded.
比如,当手机与智能电视协同后,可以推荐用户无线麦克风、无线游戏手柄等设备,可以对应拓展K歌、游戏等场景化服务。再例如,手机与智能手表协同后,可以推荐用户跑步机、心率带、血糖仪等设备,可以对应拓展室内跑步、心脏健康、血糖健康等场景化服务。在加入一个推荐设备后,系统还可以根据新组成的超级终端推荐新的设备。用户可以选择加入更多的设备组成超级终端,使得用户使用场景更为丰富。加入了更多关联设备后,超级终端可提供的场景化服务也会更多、更丰富,完善超级终端的生态系统。For example, when a mobile phone is coordinated with a smart TV, wireless microphones, wireless game controllers and other equipment can be recommended to users, and scene-based services such as karaoke and games can be expanded correspondingly. For another example, after the collaboration between the mobile phone and the smart watch, it can recommend users such as treadmills, heart rate belts, blood glucose meters and other equipment, and can correspondingly expand scene-based services such as indoor running, heart health, and blood sugar health. After adding a recommended device, the system can also recommend new devices according to the newly formed hyperterminal. Users can choose to add more devices to form a hyper terminal, making the user use scenarios more abundant. After adding more associated devices, the HyperTerminal can provide more and richer scene-based services, improving the HyperTerminal ecosystem.
下面结合附图对上述实施例提供的功能进行示例说明。The functions provided by the above-mentioned embodiments are illustrated below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
参考图7所示的用户界面700,在图7的示例中,当手机与智能手表组成了超级终端系统,在设备连接状态图示701下方可以显示场景化服务选项区域705,场景化服务选项区域705中列举超级终端系统根据当前设备组合所推荐的一项或多项场景化服务。另外还显示有推荐设备区域704,用于列举可以与当前超级终端系统设备联动带给用户更丰富场景或更好体验的设备,用户可以按需选择。在用户界面700中,还显示有原子化服务入口选项706,选中该原子化服务入口选项706,可以显示原子化服务组合,用户可以自行选择原子化服务的提供设备,参考图10所示实施例。Referring to the user interface 700 shown in FIG. 7, in the example of FIG. 7, when the mobile phone and the smart watch form a super terminal system, a scene-based service option area 705 can be displayed below the device connection status icon 701. The scene-based service option area In step 705, one or more scenario-based services recommended by the hyperterminal system according to the current device combination are listed. In addition, a recommended device area 704 is also displayed, which is used to list devices that can be linked with the current hyperterminal system device to provide users with richer scenarios or better experience, and the user can select according to needs. In the user interface 700, an atomized service entry option 706 is also displayed. Select the atomized service entry option 706 to display the atomized service combination, and the user can choose the atomized service provider by himself. Refer to the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 .
在图7的示例中,当手机与智能手表组成了超级终端系统,场景化服务选项区域705中 显示有多个场景化服务选项,如户外跑步、室内跑步、心脏健康、血管健康等。用户还可以使用手指作用在屏幕上的场景化服务选项区域705左右滑动,以查看更多未显示的选项。In the example of FIG. 7, when the mobile phone and the smart watch form a super terminal system, multiple scenario-based service options are displayed in the scenario-based service option area 705, such as outdoor running, indoor running, heart health, and vascular health. The user can also use a finger to slide left and right on the scene service option area 705 on the screen to view more options that are not displayed.
这些场景化服务选项可以是超级终端系统根据手机和智能手表的设备类型、设备用途、用户常用的协同工作内容、设备当前所处环境、设备运行状态、用户最近使用的应用、当前运行应用等情况,综合统计得出的场景化服务选项。并且还可以根据用户最近使用频率或者检测当前设备所处的环境等情况,计算各场景化服务选项被选择的概率,在场景化服务选项区域705中优先靠前显示推测被选择概率大的场景化服务选项。These scenario-based service options can be based on the device type of the mobile phone and smart watch, the purpose of the device, the content of the user's common collaborative work, the current environment of the device, the operating status of the device, the application recently used by the user, the currently running application, etc. , the scenario-based service options obtained from comprehensive statistics. In addition, the probability of each scene-based service option being selected can be calculated according to the user's recent frequency of use or the environment in which the current device is detected, and the scene-based service options that are estimated to have a high probability of being selected are displayed first in the scene-based service option area 705. Service options.
如手机与智能手表组合常用于统计运动量,那么超级终端系统基于手机和智能手表组合的设备类型、设备用途、常用的协同工作内容,可以给手机和智能手表组合分类为运动健康场景。运动健康场景下可以提供的场景化服务选项包括户外跑步、室内跑步、心脏健康、血管健康等,显示在场景化服务选项区域705。For example, the combination of mobile phones and smart watches is often used to count the amount of exercise. Based on the combination of mobile phones and smart watches, the super terminal system can classify the combination of mobile phones and smart watches as sports and health scenarios based on the device type, device use, and commonly used collaborative work content. The scenario-based service options that can be provided in the sports health scenario include outdoor running, indoor running, heart health, blood vessel health, etc., which are displayed in the scenario-based service option area 705 .
超级终端系统可以根据统计到的用户在一定时间对各项场景化服务选项的使用频率,靠前显示高使用率的选项。一定时间可以是历史所有时间,也可以是某个时间段,如最近三个月。场景化服务选项历史使用率越高,显示越靠前。例如获取到用户最常使用的场景化服务选项为户外跑步,其次为室内跑步等,那么在场景化服务选项区域705中,第一个显示的场景化服务选项为户外跑步,第二个显示的场景化服务选项为室外跑步等。The hyper terminal system can display the options with high usage rate in the front according to the usage frequency of various scenario-based service options by users within a certain period of time according to the statistics. The certain time can be all the time in history, or a certain period of time, such as the last three months. The higher the historical usage rate of the scenario-based service option, the higher the display. For example, it is obtained that the most frequently used scene service option of the user is outdoor running, followed by indoor running, etc., then in the scene service option area 705, the first displayed scene service option is outdoor running, and the second displayed service option is outdoor running. Scenario-based service options include outdoor running, etc.
在另一些实施例中,手机或智能手表可以检测当前设备所处的环境,根据所处的环境排序场景化服务选项。如果手机或智能手表检测到用户所处环境为户外,那优先推荐户外跑步服务选项。如果手机或智能手表检测到用户所处环境为室内,那优先推荐室内跑步服务选项。本实施例对检测用户所处环境的方式不作限制,例如可以根据设备当前的定位信息判断是在室内或户外;或者使用摄像头采集当前所处环境的照片,或使用超声波、红外线等采集当前所处环境的空间纵深或大小,以判断当前用户处于室内还是户外。In some other embodiments, the mobile phone or the smart watch can detect the environment where the current device is located, and sort the scene-based service options according to the environment. If the mobile phone or smart watch detects that the user's environment is outdoors, then the outdoor running service option is recommended first. If the mobile phone or smart watch detects that the user's environment is indoors, then the indoor running service option is recommended first. This embodiment does not limit the method of detecting the user's environment. For example, it can be determined whether the device is indoors or outdoors based on the current location information of the device; or use a camera to collect photos of the current environment, or use ultrasonic waves, infrared rays, etc. The spatial depth or size of the environment to determine whether the current user is indoors or outdoors.
在另一些实施例中,超级终端系统还可以根据用户最近打开或使用的应用,或者当前运行的应用,确定设备所处的环境或场景,进而推荐场景化服务选项。比如在用户打开超级终端界面连接智能手表和手机之前,用户运行的应用为运动健康应用,使用的服务为运动健康应用里的户外跑步子服务,那么在用户将智能手表与手机连接组成超级终端系统时,在场景化服务选项区域705中,第一个显示的场景化服务选项为户外跑步。In some other embodiments, the HyperTerminal system can also determine the environment or scene where the device is located according to the application recently opened or used by the user, or the currently running application, and then recommend scene-based service options. For example, before the user opens the super terminal interface to connect the smart watch and the mobile phone, the application the user runs is a sports and health application, and the service used is the outdoor running sub-service in the sports and health application, then the user connects the smart watch to the mobile phone to form a hyper terminal system , in the scenario-based service option area 705, the first displayed scenario-based service option is outdoor running.
上述示例并不对其他实施例构成限制,超级终端系统可以综合考虑以上一项或多项因素,合理推荐场景化服务选项。The above examples do not limit other embodiments. The hyper terminal system may comprehensively consider one or more of the above factors and reasonably recommend scene-based service options.
在一些实施例中,在设备连接组成超级终端时,可以先自动选定某个场景化服务作为默认服务。例如将场景化服务选项区域705中排在第一位的场景化服务选项设为默认服务,在设备连接组成超级终端时,各设备默认按照该场景化服务对应的原子化服务组合进行配置。如果用户想选择其他场景化服务,可以再选择其他的场景化服务选项。设定默认场景化服务,可以方便设备无缝转换服务,可以在一定程度上省去用户操作。例如当耳机与手机连接,默认服务设定位由耳机提供音频输出、音频输入功能,那么在耳机与手机成功连接的时刻,音频输出、音频输入功能就立刻切换至耳机提供,用户无需另外进行操作,省去了繁琐的操作。该默认服务的设定可以是用户自行选定的默认服务,包括场景化服务和/或原子化服务,该默认服务的设定也可以是系统将统计得到的用户常用服务作为默认服务,等等,本实施例对此不作限制。In some embodiments, when the devices are connected to form a hyper terminal, a certain scenario-based service may be automatically selected as a default service. For example, setting the first scenario service option in the scenario service option area 705 as a default service, when devices are connected to form a hyper terminal, each device is configured according to the atomic service combination corresponding to the scenario service by default. If the user wants to choose other scenario-based services, he can choose other scenario-based service options. Setting the default scene-based service can facilitate the seamless switching of services on devices and save user operations to a certain extent. For example, when the headset is connected to the mobile phone, the default service setting is that the headset provides audio output and audio input functions. Then when the headset is successfully connected to the mobile phone, the audio output and audio input functions are immediately switched to the headset, and the user does not need to perform additional operations. , saving the tedious operation. The setting of the default service may be a default service selected by the user, including scenario-based services and/or atomic services. The setting of the default service may also be that the system uses the user's frequently-used services obtained from statistics as the default service, etc. , which is not limited in this embodiment.
在另一些实施例中,在设备连接组成超级终端时,可以先不选定场景化服务,只是列出一个或多个场景化服务选项,需要用户选定某个场景化服务之后,再将场景化服务或相应原 子化服务切换至设定状态。这样的好处是充分考虑到用户使用意愿,避免自动切换到错误服务,给用户造成麻烦或困扰。例如将手机与PC连接,用户本意是想传递文件,如果默认服务是屏幕镜像,就会将手机屏幕投屏到PC上,这时需要用户再切换服务,尤其是如果当前PC正在用作其他用途,如正在演示文档,投屏服务会妨碍演示文档的显示,给用户造成了麻烦,或者用户手机上有隐私内容,不想展示在PC上,如果直接切换到屏幕镜像服务会给用户造成困扰。所以,当手机与PC连接时,可以在超级终端界面上显示场景化服务选项,用户先行选择需要的场景化服务选项和/或原子化服务组合选项,再执行切换服务。In some other embodiments, when the devices are connected to form a hyper terminal, the scene-based service may not be selected first, but one or more scene-based service options are listed. After the user selects a certain scene-based service, the scene The service or the corresponding atomic service switches to the set state. The advantage of this is to fully consider the user's willingness to use, and avoid automatically switching to the wrong service, causing trouble or distress to the user. For example, when connecting a mobile phone to a PC, the user intends to transfer files. If the default service is screen mirroring, the screen of the mobile phone will be mirrored to the PC. At this time, the user needs to switch services, especially if the current PC is being used for other purposes. , If you are presenting a document, the screen mirroring service will hinder the display of the presentation document, causing trouble to the user, or the user has private content on the mobile phone and does not want to display it on the PC. If you directly switch to the screen mirroring service, it will cause trouble for the user. Therefore, when the mobile phone is connected to the PC, the scene-based service options can be displayed on the hyperterminal interface, and the user first selects the required scene-based service options and/or atomized service combination options, and then executes switching services.
这里说明,当两个或两个以上的设备组成超级终端,并且用户选定场景化服务的时候,这些设备可以具备执行交互功能的能力或状态,但并不限定这两个或两个以上的设备之间立即执行交互功能。举例说明,若用户通过拖拽设备图标的方式,触发手机和智能音箱之间的投音功能。若此时,手机并未有音频播放任务或者手机的音频播放任务被暂停,手机也不会立即向智能音箱发送音频数据。但,手机有音频播放任务时,手机会将待播放的音频数据发送给智能音箱,由智能音箱进行播放。It is explained here that when two or more devices form a hyper terminal and the user selects a scene-based service, these devices can have the ability or status to perform interactive functions, but this is not limited to the two or more Interaction functions are performed immediately between devices. For example, if the user triggers the audio casting function between the mobile phone and the smart speaker by dragging the device icon. If at this time, the mobile phone does not have an audio playback task or the audio playback task of the mobile phone is suspended, the mobile phone will not immediately send audio data to the smart speaker. However, when the mobile phone has an audio playback task, the mobile phone will send the audio data to be played to the smart speaker, and the smart speaker will play it.
在图7的用户界面700中,推荐设备区域704显示有跑步机和动感单车的图标,提示用户可以将跑步机或动感单车加入超级终端,可以得到更好的场景体验。在图7所示示例中,超级终端系统可以基于当前组成超级终端的设备为手机和智能手表,分析用户使用场景为运动健康场景,该推荐设备区域704可以显示推荐运动设备或健康监控设备等,如跑步机、动感单车、血糖仪、心率仪等。In the user interface 700 of FIG. 7 , icons of treadmills and spinning bikes are displayed in the recommended equipment area 704 , prompting the user to add the treadmills or spinning bikes to the HyperTerminal to obtain a better scene experience. In the example shown in FIG. 7, the hyperterminal system can analyze the user's usage scene as a sports and health scene based on the current devices that make up the hyperterminal as a mobile phone and a smart watch. The recommended device area 704 can display recommended sports equipment or health monitoring equipment, etc. Such as treadmills, spinning bikes, blood glucose meters, heart rate meters, etc.
当用户选中(点击或拖拽)该推荐设备区域704的设备图标,如果该设备为当前核心设备检测到的关联设备,即显示在设备连接状态图示701中的设备,那么该设备可以发起连接加入超级终端。当用户选中(点击或拖拽)该推荐设备区域704的设备图标,如果该设备未显示在设备连接状态图示701中,那么可以跳转到与该设备产品相关的页面,例如向用户介绍该推荐设备的功能、使用体验、与其他设备组成超级终端时可以如何使用以及扩展出怎样的体验、购买链接、购买渠道等等。When the user selects (clicks or drags) the device icon in the recommended device area 704, if the device is an associated device detected by the current core device, that is, the device displayed in the device connection status diagram 701, then the device can initiate a connection Join HyperTerminal. When the user selects (clicks or drags) the device icon in the recommended device area 704, if the device is not displayed in the device connection status icon 701, it can jump to a page related to the device product, such as introducing the device to the user. The function of the recommended device, user experience, how to use and expand the experience when forming a hyper terminal with other devices, purchase links, purchase channels, etc.
加入这些推荐设备可以给用户更好的场景体验,或者扩展更多的使用场景。在加入一个推荐设备后,系统还可以根据新组成的超级终端推荐新的设备。用户可以选择加入更多的设备组成超级终端,使得用户使用场景更为丰富。例如,手机与智能手表连接组成超级终端,系统推荐设备包括跑步机,用户再选择跑步机连接加入超级终端,系统推荐设备可以包括耳机,推荐用户可以边跑步边听音乐。随着更多设备的加入,可以形成更完善的超级终端生态系统。Adding these recommended devices can give users a better scene experience, or expand more usage scenarios. After adding a recommended device, the system can also recommend new devices according to the newly formed hyperterminal. Users can choose to add more devices to form a hyper terminal, making the user use scenarios more abundant. For example, a mobile phone is connected to a smart watch to form a hyperterminal. The system recommends devices including a treadmill, and the user then selects the treadmill to connect to the hyperterminal. The system recommends devices including earphones, and the recommended user can listen to music while running. With the addition of more devices, a more complete HyperTerminal ecosystem can be formed.
在一些实施例中,手机可以在用户界面上显示推荐设备的提示信息,例如,在检测到手机与智能电视协同后,手机发现音箱也在周围,于是可以显示提示信息,如“推荐音箱Sound X加入超级终端,是否允许”,并给出选项“是”、“否”,如果用户选择“是”,则将音箱Sound X连入超级终端,如果用户选择“否”,则不作其他操作。或者给出提示信息后,只显示选项“是”,如果用户选择“是”,则将音箱Sound X连入超级终端,如果用户不操作超过一定时间,如两秒,则自动取消显示该提示信息,并不作其他操作。In some embodiments, the mobile phone can display the prompt information of the recommended device on the user interface. For example, after detecting that the mobile phone is coordinated with the smart TV, the mobile phone finds that the sound box is also around, so it can display the prompt information, such as "Recommended sound box Sound X Join the hyperterminal, is it allowed?" and give the options "yes" and "no". If the user selects "yes", the speaker Sound X will be connected to the hyperterminal. If the user selects "no", no other operations will be performed. Or after the prompt message is given, only the option "Yes" will be displayed. If the user selects "Yes", the speaker Sound X will be connected to the HyperTerminal. If the user does not operate for a certain period of time, such as two seconds, the prompt message will be automatically canceled. , and no other operations are performed.
在本申请实施例中,超级终端可提供的跨设备间的服务或功能包括但不限于系统级的服务或功能、应用级的服务或功能。在这里举例说明,系统级的服务或功能可以包括但不限于投音、投屏等,应用级的服务或功能包括但不限于应用接力、内容分享等。In the embodiment of the present application, the cross-device services or functions that the HyperTerminal can provide include but are not limited to system-level services or functions, and application-level services or functions. Here, for example, system-level services or functions may include but not limited to audio projection, screen projection, etc., and application-level services or functions include but not limited to application relay, content sharing, etc.
其中,投音,是指将一个电子设备上的播放的音频流发送给另一个电子设备,由另一个 电子设备进行播放。例如,手机与智能音箱的投音,手机与灭屏态的智慧屏的投音、手机与车机的投屏等。Among them, casting sound refers to sending the audio stream played on one electronic device to another electronic device, and the other electronic device plays it. For example, audio projection from a mobile phone to a smart speaker, audio projection from a mobile phone to a smart screen with the screen off, screen projection from a mobile phone to a car, etc.
投屏包括基于数字生活网络联盟(digital living network alliance,DLNA)技术的流(stream)投屏(也称为异源投屏),基于Miracast技术的屏幕镜像(也称为同源投屏),以及基于其他技术(例如基于AirPlay)的投屏。例如,手机与智能电视/PC/平板电脑之间的投屏。如果用户想将手机上播放的视频或音频等投屏到其他电子设备上,可以执行stream投屏。那么,手机可以将视频或音频的播放地址发送某一电子设备(如PC),PC根据接收到的播放地址播放相应的视频或音频。或者,手机将自身播放的视频数据或音频的数据发送给PC,PC可以直接根据接收到的视频数据或音频的数据进行播放。在该投屏过程中,手机上显示的界面可以与PC上显示的内容不同。如果用户想将手机屏幕上显示界面投屏到其他电子设备,可以执行屏幕镜像。那么,手机将手机界面数据发给其他电子设备(如PC),由PC显示手机的界面。在该投屏过程中,手机上显示的界面与PC上显示的手机界面相同。Screen projection includes stream projection based on digital living network alliance (DLNA) technology (also known as heterogeneous projection), screen mirroring based on Miracast technology (also known as homologous projection), And screencasting based on other technologies such as AirPlay based. For example, screen projection between a mobile phone and a smart TV/PC/tablet. If the user wants to cast the video or audio played on the mobile phone to other electronic devices, they can perform stream casting. Then, the mobile phone can send the playback address of the video or audio to an electronic device (such as a PC), and the PC plays the corresponding video or audio according to the received playback address. Alternatively, the mobile phone sends the video data or audio data played by itself to the PC, and the PC can directly play the received video data or audio data. During the screen projection process, the interface displayed on the mobile phone may be different from the content displayed on the PC. If the user wants to cast the display interface on the mobile phone screen to other electronic devices, screen mirroring can be performed. Then, the mobile phone sends the mobile phone interface data to other electronic devices (such as a PC), and the PC displays the mobile phone interface. During the screen casting process, the interface displayed on the mobile phone is the same as that displayed on the PC.
应用接力,是指一个电子设备可以接力运行另一个电子设备上运行的应用。Application relay means that one electronic device can relay an application running on another electronic device.
内容分享包括在不同电子设备之间分享文件/照片/视频/音频/文字等内容。例如,手机与智能电视/PC/平板电脑之间的应用接力。其中,接力的应用例如为畅联应用(一种视频通话应用)、视频应用、音乐应用、以及文档应用等。Content sharing includes sharing files/photos/videos/audio/text among different electronic devices. For example, application relay between mobile phones and smart TVs/PCs/tablets. Wherein, the relayed applications are, for example, Changlian application (a video call application), video application, music application, and document application.
由上可见,图7所示的示例用户界面700,可以是核心设备手机提供的与多个关联设备之间交互的统一入口,用户可以在用户界面700中触发任两个或两个以上的电子设备组成超级终端。并且,超级终端可以根据各个设备的设备类型、设备特征、产品定位、常用功能、设备状态、当前运行应用、当前设备所处环境等情况,判断使用场景,并基于使用场景提供一个或多个场景化服务选项、原子化服务组合选项或交互功能选项。用户可以根据个人需求快捷选择场景化服务和/或原子化服务,无需繁琐的分散设置,由此,可以解决电子设备间的交互功能的设置入口分布零散,设置繁琐,无法给用户列举丰富的使用场景的问题。It can be seen from the above that the example user interface 700 shown in FIG. The devices form a HyperTerminal. In addition, the HyperTerminal can judge the usage scenarios based on the device type, device features, product positioning, common functions, device status, current running applications, current device environment, etc., and provide one or more scenarios based on the usage scenarios. service options, atomized service composition options, or interactive function options. Users can quickly select scene-based services and/or atomized services according to their personal needs, without cumbersome decentralized settings. Therefore, it can solve the problem that the settings of interactive functions between electronic devices are scattered and cumbersome, and it is impossible to list rich uses for users. scene problem.
本申请实施例通过用户选定设备组合,针对性提供了该设备组合下可用的场景化服务和/或原子化服务,给用户列举了详尽、丰富的使用场景,引导用户使用超级终端的功能充分的探索更多的应用场景,实现了按设备组合推荐场景化服务的效果。The embodiment of the present application provides the scenario-based services and/or atomized services available under the device combination through the user-selected device combination, lists detailed and rich usage scenarios for the user, and guides the user to use the hyper terminal with sufficient functions. Explore more application scenarios and achieve the effect of recommending scenario-based services based on device combinations.
参考图8,当手机检测到用户点击选中用户界面700中场景化服务选项区域705列出的户外跑步选项707,手机可以跳转至户外跑步相关页面,如用户界面800所示。其中,户外跑步选项707可以在被选中时高亮显示。Referring to FIG. 8 , when the mobile phone detects that the user clicks and selects the outdoor running option 707 listed in the scene service option area 705 of the user interface 700 , the mobile phone can jump to a page related to outdoor running, as shown in the user interface 800 . Wherein, the outdoor running option 707 can be highlighted when selected.
用户界面800为运动健康应用页面,可以看到运动健康标题栏下面显示有子选项:户外跑步子选项801、室内跑步子选项、心脏健康子选项、血管健康子选项。由于用户在用户界面700中选中户外跑步选项707,所以当前跳转到用户界面800显示的是户外跑步子选项801所对应的页面,如可以显示有地图图示、用户的定位图标、用户运动路线、统计的用户运动量等。The user interface 800 is a sports and health application page, and you can see that there are sub-options displayed under the sports and health title bar: outdoor running sub-option 801 , indoor running sub-option, heart health sub-option, and vascular health sub-option. Since the user selects the outdoor running option 707 in the user interface 700, the page corresponding to the outdoor running sub-option 801 is currently displayed on the user interface 800, such as a map icon, a user's positioning icon, and a user's exercise route. , Statistical user exercise volume, etc.
相应的,智能手表显示户外跑步相关界面,参考智能手表用户界面802。智能手表用户界面802可以与手机户外跑步相关用户界面800并不一致,智能手表与手机之间可以共享运动数据。在智能手表用户界面802可以显示有智能手表检测到的配速、运动距离、心率、运动时间等运动数据。Correspondingly, the smart watch displays an interface related to outdoor running, refer to the smart watch user interface 802 . The user interface 802 of the smart watch may not be consistent with the user interface 800 related to outdoor running of the mobile phone, and exercise data may be shared between the smart watch and the mobile phone. The smart watch user interface 802 can display exercise data such as pace, exercise distance, heart rate, and exercise time detected by the smart watch.
图9示出了场景化服务选项和推荐设备会随着不同设备组合而相应变化,超级终端会根 据不同的设备组合提供更加合适的场景化服务选项和推荐设备。Figure 9 shows that the scenario-based service options and recommended devices will change with different device combinations, and the HyperTerminal will provide more suitable scenario-based service options and recommended devices according to different device combinations.
参考图9所示的用户界面900,用户界面900中,设备连接状态图示指示手机与智能电视Vision连接组成超级终端,参考指示区域901中显示有手机图标与智能电视Vision图标吸附在一起,且在超级终端标题下面说明“与Vision已协同”。Referring to the user interface 900 shown in FIG. 9 , in the user interface 900, the device connection status icon indicates that the mobile phone is connected to the smart TV Vision to form a hyper terminal, and the mobile phone icon and the smart TV Vision icon are adsorbed together in the reference indication area 901, and Under the title of HyperTerminal, it states "Synergy with Vision".
用户界面900中,场景化服务选项区域903包括多屏协同、屏幕扩展、跨屏会议、体感游戏等场景化服务选项。推荐设备区域902包括音箱、笔记本电脑、游戏手柄的设备图标。上述场景化服务选项和推荐设备选项是基于超级终端包括的设备是手机与智能电视Vision得到的推荐选项。In the user interface 900, the scene-based service option area 903 includes scene-based service options such as multi-screen collaboration, screen extension, multi-screen conference, and somatosensory games. The recommended device area 902 includes device icons for speakers, laptops, and gamepads. The above scenario-based service options and recommended device options are based on the recommended options obtained based on the fact that the devices included in the hyper terminal are mobile phones and Smart TV Vision.
如果用户选中推荐设备区域902中的音箱图标加入超级终端,或者拖拽设备连接状态图示中的音箱Sound X图标吸附在手机图标周围,可以显示用户界面910。If the user selects the speaker icon in the recommended device area 902 to join the hyperterminal, or drags the speaker Sound X icon in the device connection status icon to be absorbed around the mobile phone icon, the user interface 910 can be displayed.
用户界面910中,设备连接状态图示指示手机与智能电视Vision、音箱Sound X连接组成超级终端,参考指示区域911中显示有手机图标与智能电视Vision图标、音箱Sound X图标吸附在一起,且在超级终端标题下面说明“与Vision、Sound X已协同”。In the user interface 910, the device connection status icon indicates that the mobile phone is connected to the smart TV Vision and the speaker Sound X to form a super terminal. Under the title of the HyperTerminal, it says "Synergy with Vision and Sound X".
用户界面910中,场景化服务选项区域913包括家庭影院、体感游戏、畅享K歌、跨屏会议等场景化服务选项。推荐设备区域912包括笔记本电脑、游戏手柄的设备图标。上述场景化服务选项和推荐设备选项是基于超级终端包括的设备是手机与智能电视Vision、音箱Sound X得到的推荐选项。在这个示例中,相比于手机与智能电视Vision的设备组合,超级终端系统可以推测手机与智能电视Vision、音箱Sound X的组合更偏向娱乐,因此会优先推荐偏向娱乐性的场景化服务。In the user interface 910, the scene-based service option area 913 includes scene-based service options such as home theater, motion-sensing games, enjoying karaoke, and multi-screen conference. The recommended device area 912 includes device icons for laptops and gamepads. The above scenario-based service options and recommended equipment options are based on the recommended options obtained from the mobile phone, smart TV Vision, and speaker Sound X, which are included in the hyperterminal. In this example, compared to the device combination of mobile phone and smart TV Vision, the HyperTerminal system can infer that the combination of mobile phone, smart TV Vision, and speaker Sound X is more entertainment-oriented, so it will give priority to recommending entertainment-oriented scene services.
如果用户在用户界面910中选中原子化服务入口选项,可以显示一个或多个原子化服务组合,如图10所示的用户界面1000和用户界面1010,用户可以自行选择不同原子化服务由不同设备提供。If the user selects the atomic service entry option in the user interface 910, one or more atomic service combinations can be displayed, as shown in the user interface 1000 and user interface 1010 shown in Figure 10, and the user can choose different atomic services by different devices supply.
参考图10,用户界面1000中显示有服务设置窗口1001,该服务设置窗口1001中显示有多个原子化服务选项,如用户界面1000中所示的画面显示、声音输出、声音输入、摄像头等。其中,画面显示服务/功能由智能电视Vision提供,声音输出服务/功能由智能音箱Sound X提供,声音输入服务/功能由手机HuaWei P50提供,摄像头服务/功能由手机HuaWei P50提供,等。Referring to FIG. 10 , a service setting window 1001 is displayed in the user interface 1000, and multiple atomized service options are displayed in the service setting window 1001, such as screen display, sound output, sound input, camera, etc. shown in the user interface 1000. Among them, the screen display service/function is provided by the smart TV Vision, the sound output service/function is provided by the smart speaker Sound X, the sound input service/function is provided by the mobile phone HuaWei P50, the camera service/function is provided by the mobile phone HuaWei P50, etc.
在该示例中,声音输出对应的选项栏1002包括声音输出服务/功能标识,以及当前提供该声音输出服务/功能的设备智能音箱Sound X的图标和名称。In this example, the option bar 1002 corresponding to the sound output includes a sound output service/function identifier, and the icon and name of the device smart speaker Sound X that currently provides the sound output service/function.
在一些实施例中,超级终端支持用户个性化设定原子化服务组合,用户可以根据个人喜好或实际情况手动修改原子化服务组合,将某个原子化服务调整为其他设备提供。如用户可以选择将手机提供播放音频的服务切换为智能音箱提供播放音频的服务。In some embodiments, the hyper terminal supports users to personalize the atomic service combination, and the user can manually modify the atomic service combination according to personal preferences or actual conditions, and adjust a certain atomic service to be provided by other devices. For example, the user may choose to switch the audio playback service provided by the mobile phone to the audio playback service provided by the smart speaker.
用户如果想更换提供服务的设备,可以点击控件1003,手机可以显示用户界面1010。If the user wants to change the device providing the service, he can click on the control 1003 and the mobile phone can display the user interface 1010 .
可以看到,用户界面1010中的服务设置窗口1011里面,声音输出对应的选项栏1012展开显示有多个设备选项,即超级终端中的手机HuaWei P50与智能电视Vision、音箱Sound X。用户可以点击设备名称右侧对应的选中控件1013,确认由该设备提供声音输出服务/功能。It can be seen that in the service setting window 1011 in the user interface 1010, the option bar 1012 corresponding to the sound output is expanded to display multiple device options, namely the mobile phone HuaWei P50, the smart TV Vision, and the speaker Sound X in the hyperterminal. The user can click the selected control 1013 corresponding to the right side of the device name to confirm that the device provides the sound output service/function.
在一些实施例中,超级终端系统可以根据不同的设备类型具有的设备特征,分析最佳原子化服务组合,分配不同的设备承载不同的服务。例如,在本示例中,智能电视、智能音箱与手机组成超级终端,智能电视具有较大的屏幕,用户视觉观看体验较好,更适合观看视频,所以优先设置智能电视提供显示功能。智能音箱具有较强的音频输出能力,扬声效果较好, 更适合播放音频,所以优先设置智能音箱提供音频输出功能。手机较轻巧,用户容易抓握,麦克风收音方便,所以优先设置手机提供音频输入、摄像头拍摄功能。In some embodiments, the hyperterminal system can analyze the optimal atomic service combination according to the device characteristics of different device types, and allocate different devices to carry different services. For example, in this example, a smart TV, a smart speaker, and a mobile phone form a super terminal. The smart TV has a larger screen, and the user has a better visual viewing experience and is more suitable for watching videos. Therefore, it is preferred to set the smart TV to provide display functions. The smart speaker has strong audio output capability, better speaker effect, and is more suitable for playing audio, so it is preferred to set the smart speaker to provide the audio output function. The mobile phone is relatively light, easy for the user to grasp, and the microphone is convenient for listening to the sound, so it is preferred to set the mobile phone to provide audio input and camera shooting functions.
在另一些实施例中,还可以基于用户常用服务组合,或者用户设定的默认服务组合,或者基于生活认知最适合该场景下的服务组合,或者从服务器获取到该场景下使用频率最多的服务组合等,自动设置该场景下的原子化服务组合,省去用户繁琐的选择操作。In some other embodiments, it can also be based on the user's frequently used service combination, or the default service combination set by the user, or the service combination that is most suitable for the scene based on life cognition, or obtain the most frequently used service combination in the scene from the server. Service combination, etc., automatically set the atomic service combination in this scenario, saving users from tedious selection operations.
在一些实施例中,服务设置窗口1011中还可以设有空白选项,即该项原子化服务不由任意一个设备提供。In some embodiments, a blank option may also be set in the service setting window 1011, that is, the atomized service is not provided by any device.
在一些实施例中,手机界面上可以显示相应的提示信息,用于提示用户可以提供最佳原子化服务的设备,如当前音箱为提供播放音频的最佳设备。In some embodiments, corresponding prompt information may be displayed on the mobile phone interface to remind the user of the device that can provide the best atomization service, for example, the current speaker is the best device for playing audio.
在一些实施例中,当用户设置完毕,可以下滑服务设置窗口,然后返回上一界面。In some embodiments, when the user completes the setting, the user can slide down the service setting window, and then return to the previous interface.
图11、图12、图13A、图13B、图13C、图13D示出了另一些选择场景化服务选项的交互方式和示意界面。Fig. 11, Fig. 12, Fig. 13A, Fig. 13B, Fig. 13C, and Fig. 13D show other interaction modes and schematic interfaces for selecting scene-based service options.
如图11所示的用户界面1100,场景化服务选项可以显示为悬浮控件的形式,不同场景化服务选项对应不同区域,这样的交互方式更有趣、更直观、界面更简洁、相应的用户操作更便捷。As shown in the user interface 1100 shown in Figure 11, the scene-based service options can be displayed in the form of floating controls, and different scene-based service options correspond to different areas. convenient.
在用户界面1100中,当用户按住智能手表图标的时候,超级终端界面上可以以手机为中心,显示圆形悬浮区域1101,圆形悬浮区域1101可以分为多块区域,每块区域对应一项场景化服务选项。如用户界面1100中,圆形悬浮区域1101分为四块区域,分别对应场景化服务选项为:户外跑步、室内跑步、心脏健康、血管健康。In the user interface 1100, when the user presses the smart watch icon, the super terminal interface can display a circular floating area 1101 with the mobile phone as the center. The circular floating area 1101 can be divided into multiple areas, and each area corresponds to a A scenario-based service option. For example, in the user interface 1100, the circular floating area 1101 is divided into four areas, corresponding to scene-based service options: outdoor running, indoor running, heart health, and blood vessel health.
如果用户想选择某个场景化服务选项,如户外跑步服务选项,用户可以将智能手表图标拖拽到户外跑步服务选项对应的区域,然后沿着户外跑步服务选项对应区域内侧的方向拖拽,贴近手机图标,用户的手指运动轨迹可以参考用户界面1100中的示意轨迹。当智能手表图标到达吸附区域,用户松开手指,户外跑步对应的服务启动,手机跳转显示用户界面800所示的户外跑步的界面。当然,如果只有一项场景化服务选项,该圆形悬浮区域1101不需分块,用户从任意方向贴近手机图标都是选中同一个场景化服务。被选中的场景化服务选项可以表现为高亮显示,如图11中户外跑步服务选项对应的区域表现为高亮显示。If the user wants to select a scene-based service option, such as the outdoor running service option, the user can drag the smart watch icon to the area corresponding to the outdoor running service option, and then drag along the direction inside the area corresponding to the outdoor running service option, close to the For the mobile phone icon, the trajectory of the user's finger can refer to the schematic trajectory in the user interface 1100 . When the smart watch icon reaches the adsorption area, the user releases the finger, the service corresponding to the outdoor running starts, and the mobile phone jumps to display the outdoor running interface shown in the user interface 800 . Of course, if there is only one scene-based service option, the circular floating area 1101 does not need to be divided into blocks, and the user will select the same scene-based service when approaching the mobile phone icon from any direction. The selected scene-based service option can be displayed as highlighted, as shown in Figure 11, the area corresponding to the outdoor running service option is displayed as highlighted.
图11中的一个操作相当于图6和图8中两个操作,即图11中的一个用户操作包括了将关联设备关联至核心设备和选择场景化服务这两个功能,提高了用户操作效率。One operation in Figure 11 is equivalent to the two operations in Figure 6 and Figure 8, that is, one user operation in Figure 11 includes the two functions of associating the associated device to the core device and selecting the scene-based service, which improves the efficiency of user operations .
需要说明的是,在以悬浮区域表现的场景化服务选项也可以有推荐的顺序,本实施例对场景化服务选项的推荐排序的显示方式不作限制。比如,以四个场景化服务选项对应四个区域为例说明,以中心为原点,第一象限方位称为区域A,第二象限方位称为区域B,第三象限方位称为区域C,第四象限方位称为区域D。场景化服务选项的推荐顺序为户外跑步、室内跑步、心脏健康、血管健康,分别对应的区域可以是区域A、区域B、区域C、区域D;或者,区域B、区域A、区域C、区域D;或者,区域B、区域C、区域A、区域D;或者,区域B、区域A、区域D、区域C;或者,区域A、区域B、区域D、区域C;或者,区域B、区域C、区域D、区域A;或者,区域A、区域D、区域B、区域C;或者,区域A、区域D、区域C、区域B;等等,本实施例不作限制,具体可根据实际情况设置,如根据用户的操作习惯、常点区域等设置。It should be noted that the scene-based service options displayed in the floating area may also have a recommended order, and this embodiment does not limit the display manner of the recommended order of the scene-based service options. For example, take four scene-based service options corresponding to four areas as an example. Taking the center as the origin, the first quadrant is called area A, the second quadrant is called area B, the third quadrant is called area C, and the third quadrant is called area C. The four-quadrant orientation is called zone D. The recommended order of scenario-based service options is outdoor running, indoor running, heart health, and vascular health, and the corresponding areas can be area A, area B, area C, and area D; or, area B, area A, area C, area D; or, area B, area C, area A, area D; or, area B, area A, area D, area C; or, area A, area B, area D, area C; or, area B, area C, area D, area A; or, area A, area D, area B, area C; or, area A, area D, area C, area B; etc., this embodiment is not limited, and the details can be determined according to the actual situation Settings, such as settings based on the user's operating habits, common point area, etc.
图12示出了另一种用户交互操作,参考用户界面1200,当用户按住智能手表图标的时候,超级终端界面上可以以手机为中心,显示圆形悬浮区域1201,圆形悬浮区域1201可以 分为多块区域,每块区域对应一项场景化服务选项。如用户界面1200中,圆形悬浮区域1201分为四块区域,分别对应场景化服务选项为:户外跑步、室内跑步、心脏健康、血管健康。FIG. 12 shows another user interaction operation. Referring to the user interface 1200, when the user presses the smart watch icon, the hyper terminal interface can display a circular floating area 1201 centered on the mobile phone, and the circular floating area 1201 can be Divided into multiple areas, each area corresponds to a scenario-based service option. For example, in the user interface 1200, the circular floating area 1201 is divided into four areas, corresponding to scene-based service options: outdoor running, indoor running, heart health, and blood vessel health.
如果用户想选择某个场景化服务选项,如户外跑步服务选项,用户可以将智能手表图标拖拽到户外跑步服务选项对应的区域中,然后松开手指,即表示选中户外跑步服务选项,户外跑步对应的服务启动,手机跳转显示用户界面800所示的户外跑步的界面。其用户的手指运动轨迹可以参考用户界面1200中的示意轨迹。当然,如果只有一项场景化服务选项,该圆形悬浮区域1201不需分块,用户拖拽设备图标到悬浮区域1201中任意一个位置松开图标都是选中同一个场景化服务。被选中的场景化服务选项可以表现为高亮显示,如图12中户外跑步服务选项对应的区域表现为高亮显示。同样的,本实施例对场景化服务选项的推荐排序的显示方式不作限制。If the user wants to select a scene-based service option, such as the outdoor running service option, the user can drag the smart watch icon to the area corresponding to the outdoor running service option, and then release the finger, which means that the outdoor running service option is selected, and the outdoor running service option is selected. The corresponding service starts, and the mobile phone jumps to display the outdoor running interface shown in the user interface 800 . The trajectory of the user's finger can refer to the schematic trajectory in the user interface 1200 . Of course, if there is only one scene-based service option, the circular floating area 1201 does not need to be divided into blocks, and the user drags the device icon to any position in the floating area 1201 and releases the icon to select the same scene-based service. The selected scenario-based service option can be displayed as highlighted, as shown in Figure 12, the area corresponding to the outdoor running service option is displayed as highlighted. Likewise, this embodiment does not limit the display manner of the recommendation ranking of the scenario-based service options.
图12示出的交互方式相比于图11示出的交互方式,用户操作更简易,误选概率更低。Compared with the interaction mode shown in FIG. 11 , the interaction mode shown in FIG. 12 is easier for the user to operate, and the probability of wrong selection is lower.
图11、图12示出的圆形悬浮区域仅为示意图形,在其他实施例中,表示场景化服务选项的区域也可以为其他表现形式。The circular floating areas shown in FIG. 11 and FIG. 12 are only schematic diagrams. In other embodiments, the areas representing scene-based service options may also be in other forms.
参考图13A所示的用户界面1300,场景化服务选项区域为方形悬浮区域。用户界面1300中显示有以手机为中心,方形悬浮区域1301分为四块区域,分别对应场景化服务选项为:户外跑步、室内跑步、心脏健康、血管健康。如果用户想选择户外跑步服务,可以如图11所示的交互方式,将智能手表图标拖拽到户外跑步服务选项对应的区域,然后沿着户外跑步服务选项对应区域内侧的方向拖拽,贴近手机图标,当智能手表图标到达吸附区域,用户松开手指,户外跑步对应的服务启动,手机跳转显示用户界面800所示的户外跑步的界面。也可以如图12所示的交互方式,用户将智能手表图标拖拽到户外跑步服务选项对应的区域中,然后松开手指,即表示选中户外跑步服务选项,户外跑步对应的服务启动,手机跳转显示用户界面800所示的户外跑步的界面。被选中的场景化服务选项可以表现为高亮显示,如图13A中户外跑步服务选项对应的区域表现为高亮显示。同样的,本实施例对场景化服务选项的推荐排序的显示方式不作限制。Referring to the user interface 1300 shown in FIG. 13A , the scene-based service option area is a square floating area. The user interface 1300 displays a mobile phone as the center, and a square floating area 1301 is divided into four areas, corresponding to scene-based service options: outdoor running, indoor running, heart health, and blood vessel health. If the user wants to choose the outdoor running service, he can drag the smart watch icon to the area corresponding to the outdoor running service option in the interactive mode shown in Figure 11, and then drag along the direction inside the area corresponding to the outdoor running service option, close to the mobile phone icon, when the smart watch icon reaches the adsorption area, the user releases the finger, the service corresponding to the outdoor running starts, and the mobile phone jumps to display the outdoor running interface shown in the user interface 800 . The interaction method shown in Figure 12 can also be used. The user drags the smart watch icon to the area corresponding to the outdoor running service option, and then releases the finger, which means that the outdoor running service option is selected, the service corresponding to outdoor running starts, and the mobile phone jumps. Turn to display the outdoor running interface shown in the user interface 800 . The selected scene-based service option may be highlighted, for example, the area corresponding to the outdoor running service option shown in Figure 13A is highlighted. Likewise, this embodiment does not limit the display manner of the recommendation ranking of the scenario-based service options.
在一些示例中,如图13B所示的用户界面1310,相比于图12,可以不显示中心的手机图标,而是在用户选中智能手表图标后,显示的圆形悬浮区域1311中,只包括多个场景化服务选项。如图13B所示的圆形悬浮区域1311分为四块区域,分别对应场景化服务选项为:户外跑步、室内跑步、心脏健康、血管健康。如果用户想选择户外跑步服务,可以将选中的智能手表图标拖拽到户外跑步服务选项对应的区域中,户外跑步服务选项对应的区域表现为高亮显示,然后松开手指,即表示选中户外跑步服务选项,户外跑步对应的服务启动,手机跳转显示用户界面800所示的户外跑步的界面。同样的,本实施例对场景化服务选项的推荐排序的显示方式不作限制。In some examples, the user interface 1310 shown in FIG. 13B , compared to FIG. 12 , may not display the mobile phone icon in the center, but after the user selects the smart watch icon, the displayed circular floating area 1311 includes only Multiple scenario-based service options. The circular floating area 1311 shown in FIG. 13B is divided into four areas, corresponding to scene-based service options: outdoor running, indoor running, heart health, and blood vessel health. If the user wants to choose the outdoor running service, he can drag the selected smart watch icon to the area corresponding to the outdoor running service option, the area corresponding to the outdoor running service option will be highlighted, and then release the finger, which means that the outdoor running service is selected For service options, the service corresponding to outdoor running starts, and the mobile phone jumps to display the outdoor running interface shown in the user interface 800 . Likewise, this embodiment does not limit the display manner of the recommendation ranking of the scenario-based service options.
图13C的用户界面1320示出了另一种显示样式,在用户选中智能手表图标后,手机显示圆形悬浮区域1321,圆形悬浮区域1321中,包括多个圆环形区域,每个圆环形区域对应一个场景化服务选项。如图13C所示的圆形悬浮区域1321有四个圆环区域,分别对应场景化服务选项为:户外跑步、室内跑步、心脏健康、血管健康。如果用户想选择户外跑步服务,可以将选中的智能手表图标拖拽到户外跑步服务选项对应的区域中,户外跑步服务选项对应的区域表现为高亮显示,然后松开手指,即表示选中户外跑步服务选项,户外跑步对应的服务启动,手机跳转显示用户界面800所示的户外跑步的界面。同样的,本实施例对场景化服务选项的推荐排序的显示方式不作限制。在一种实现方式中,越优先推荐的场景化服务选项越靠内环显示,这里称直径小的圆环相对于直径大的圆环为内环,或者说越靠近圆心的圆环 越为内环,如户外跑步服务选项为第一推荐的场景化服务选项,可以显示在最内环的圆圈中。室内跑步服务选项为第二推荐的场景化服务选项,显示在第二内环的圆圈中。心脏健康服务选项为第三推荐的场景化服务选项,显示在第三内环的圆圈中。血管健康服务选项为第四推荐的场景化服务选项,显示在最外环的圆圈中。The user interface 1320 in Figure 13C shows another display style. After the user selects the smart watch icon, the mobile phone displays a circular floating area 1321. The circular floating area 1321 includes a plurality of ring-shaped areas, and each ring The shape area corresponds to a scenario-based service option. As shown in FIG. 13C , the circular floating area 1321 has four circular areas, corresponding to scene-based service options: outdoor running, indoor running, heart health, and blood vessel health. If the user wants to choose the outdoor running service, he can drag the selected smart watch icon to the area corresponding to the outdoor running service option, the area corresponding to the outdoor running service option will be highlighted, and then release the finger, which means that the outdoor running service is selected For service options, the service corresponding to outdoor running starts, and the mobile phone jumps to display the outdoor running interface shown in the user interface 800 . Likewise, this embodiment does not limit the display manner of the recommendation ranking of the scenario-based service options. In one implementation, the scenario-based service options that are recommended with higher priority are displayed closer to the inner ring. Here, the ring with a smaller diameter is called the inner ring relative to the ring with a larger diameter, or the ring that is closer to the center of the circle is the inner ring. The ring, such as the outdoor running service option being the first recommended scenario-based service option, may be displayed in the innermost circle. The indoor running service option is the second recommended scenario-based service option, and is displayed in the circle of the second inner ring. The heart health service option is the third recommended scenario-based service option, displayed in the third inner circle. The vascular health service option is the fourth recommended scenario-based service option, displayed in the outermost circle.
图13D的用户界面1330又示出了另一种显示样式,在用户选中智能手表图标后,手机显示扇形悬浮区域1331,圆形悬浮区域1331中,包括多个扇环形区域,每个扇环形区域对应一个场景化服务选项。如图13D所示的扇形悬浮区域1331有四个扇环区域,分别对应场景化服务选项为:户外跑步、室内跑步、心脏健康、血管健康。如果用户想选择户外跑步服务,可以将选中的智能手表图标拖拽到户外跑步服务选项对应的区域中,户外跑步服务选项对应的区域表现为高亮显示,然后松开手指,即表示选中户外跑步服务选项,户外跑步对应的服务启动,手机跳转显示用户界面800所示的户外跑步的界面。The user interface 1330 in Figure 13D shows another display style. After the user selects the smart watch icon, the mobile phone displays a fan-shaped floating area 1331. The circular floating area 1331 includes multiple fan-shaped ring areas, and each fan-shaped ring area Corresponds to a scenario-based service option. The fan-shaped floating area 1331 shown in FIG. 13D has four fan-ring areas, corresponding to scene-based service options: outdoor running, indoor running, heart health, and blood vessel health. If the user wants to choose the outdoor running service, he can drag the selected smart watch icon to the area corresponding to the outdoor running service option, the area corresponding to the outdoor running service option will be highlighted, and then release the finger, which means that the outdoor running service is selected For service options, the service corresponding to outdoor running starts, and the mobile phone jumps to display the outdoor running interface shown in the user interface 800 .
在图13D所示的示例中,扇形悬浮区域1331为以圆心为右下角的四分之一圆的扇形区域,这是考虑到用户常用右手操控手机,为了用户的操控方便,这样的设计较合理。当然,不限于图13D所示的示例,扇形悬浮区域1331也可以为以圆心为左下角的四分之一圆的扇形区域,方便左利手用户操控。手机可以根据用户设置的常用手为右手或左手切换不同的显示控件的样式,或者,手机可以在用户操控手机时,判断用户当前使用的是左手还是右手,进而确认悬浮控件的显示样式,等等。In the example shown in FIG. 13D , the fan-shaped floating area 1331 is a quarter-circle fan-shaped area with the center of the circle as the lower right corner. This is considering that the user often controls the mobile phone with the right hand. For the convenience of the user, this design is more reasonable . Of course, it is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 13D , the fan-shaped floating area 1331 may also be a quarter-circle fan-shaped area with the center of the circle as the lower left corner, which is convenient for left-handed users to manipulate. The mobile phone can switch different display control styles according to the user's favorite hand as the right hand or left hand, or the mobile phone can determine whether the user is currently using the left hand or the right hand when the user controls the mobile phone, and then confirm the display style of the floating control, etc. .
同样的,本实施例对场景化服务选项的推荐排序的显示方式不作限制。在一种实现方式中,如用户界面1330所示,考虑到用户常用右手在手机下半区域握持手机,所以越优先推荐的场景化服务选项越靠内环显示,这里称越靠近圆心的扇环相对为内环,或者说半径越小的扇环相对为内环。如户外跑步服务选项为第一推荐的场景化服务选项,可以显示在最内环的扇环中。室内跑步服务选项为第二推荐的场景化服务选项,显示在第二内环的扇环中。心脏健康服务选项为第三推荐的场景化服务选项,显示在第三内环的扇环中。血管健康服务选项为第四推荐的场景化服务选项,显示在最外环的扇环中。Likewise, this embodiment does not limit the display manner of the recommendation ranking of the scenario-based service options. In one implementation, as shown in the user interface 1330, considering that the user often holds the mobile phone with his right hand in the lower half of the mobile phone, the scene-based service options that are recommended with higher priority are displayed closer to the inner ring, which is referred to here as the fan that is closer to the center of the circle. The ring is relatively an inner ring, or the fan ring with a smaller radius is relatively an inner ring. If the outdoor running service option is the first recommended scenario-based service option, it may be displayed in the innermost fan ring. The indoor running service option is the second recommended scenario-based service option, which is displayed in the fan ring of the second inner ring. The heart health service option is the third recommended scenario-based service option, which is displayed in the fan ring of the third inner ring. The vascular health service option is the fourth recommended scenario-based service option, displayed in the outermost fan ring.
以上实施例仅为示例,本申请实施例不限制选择场景化服务选项以及原子化服务选项的形式,相同发明思想的技术方案都在本申请的保护范围之内。The above embodiments are only examples, and the embodiments of the present application do not limit the form of selecting scene-based service options and atomized service options, and technical solutions with the same inventive concept are within the scope of protection of the present application.
在图11、图12、图13A、图13B、图13C、图13D所示的实施例中,在用户选中户外跑步服务选项之后,户外跑步对应的服务启动,手机跳转显示用户界面800所示的户外跑步服务的界面。当用户选择返回超级终端页面,可以参见图14所示的用户界面1400,超级终端页面中的设备连接状态图示区域显示智能手表图标吸附在手机图标周围,表示智能手表已与手机建立连接,可以协同工作。In the embodiments shown in Figure 11, Figure 12, Figure 13A, Figure 13B, Figure 13C, and Figure 13D, after the user selects the outdoor running service option, the service corresponding to outdoor running starts, and the mobile phone jumps to display the user interface 800 The interface of the outdoor running service. When the user chooses to return to the hyperterminal page, the user interface 1400 shown in FIG. Collaborative work.
在一些实施例中,在多个设备组成超级终端,启动场景化服务协同工作时,在界面中,交互的方位信息,也可以作为一项输入参数,不同方位信息的输入可以对应不同的反馈。例如,手机与PAD/PC/智能电视等关联设备连接启动多屏协同服务时,用户拖动该关联设备图标从手机图标的左边或右边或中间区域贴合吸附,将产生不同的效果。举例说明,如果用户拖动该关联设备图标从手机图标的左边区域贴合过去,吸附在一起,那么手机屏幕会投屏在该关联设备屏幕的右侧;如果用户拖动该关联设备图标从手机图标的右边区域贴合过去,吸附在一起,那么手机屏幕会投屏在该关联设备屏幕的左侧;如果用户拖动该关联设备图标至手机图标的中间区域,吸附在一起,那么手机屏幕会在该关联设备屏幕上全屏投屏。In some embodiments, when multiple devices form a hyperterminal and start scene-based services to work together, in the interface, the interactive orientation information can also be used as an input parameter, and the input of different orientation information can correspond to different feedbacks. For example, when a mobile phone is connected to an associated device such as a PAD/PC/smart TV to start a multi-screen collaborative service, the user drags the icon of the associated device to attach and absorb it from the left or right side or the middle area of the mobile phone icon, which will produce different effects. For example, if the user drags the icon of the associated device from the left area of the mobile phone icon to stick it together, then the screen of the mobile phone will be projected on the right side of the screen of the associated device; if the user drags the icon of the associated device from the mobile phone If the right area of the icon fits and sticks together, the screen of the mobile phone will be projected on the left side of the screen of the associated device; Cast full screen on the associated device screen.
当然,在一些实施例中,吸附方设备图标和被吸附方设备图标互换拖拽方向,其执行的 服务或交互功能一样。如用户也可以按住手机图标拖拽至关联设备图标的左边或右边或中间区域贴合吸附,其服务反馈也会不同,与上个实施例描述的效果相同,即,如果用户拖动手机图标从该关联设备图标的右边区域贴合过去,吸附在一起,那么手机屏幕会投屏在该关联设备屏幕的右侧;如果用户拖动手机图标从该关联设备图标的左边区域贴合过去,吸附在一起,那么手机屏幕会投屏在该关联设备屏幕的左侧;如果用户拖动手机图标至该关联设备图标的中间区域,吸附在一起,那么手机屏幕会在该关联设备屏幕上全屏投屏。总之,场景化服务展现的效果可以根据核心设备图标与关联设备图标连接的方位的不同而不同。Of course, in some embodiments, the dragging directions of the attracting device icon and the adsorbed device icon are exchanged, and the service or interactive function performed by them is the same. If the user can also press and hold the mobile phone icon and drag it to the left or right side of the associated device icon or the middle area to fit and adsorb, the service feedback will be different, which is the same as the effect described in the previous embodiment, that is, if the user drags the mobile phone icon Paste from the right area of the associated device icon and stick together, then the mobile phone screen will be projected on the right side of the associated device screen; if the user drags the mobile phone icon to paste it from the left area of the associated device icon, the adsorption together, the screen of the mobile phone will be projected on the left side of the screen of the associated device; if the user drags the icon of the mobile phone to the middle area of the icon of the associated device and snaps them together, the screen of the mobile phone will be projected in full screen on the screen of the associated device . In a word, the effect displayed by the scene-based service may be different according to the orientation of the connection between the core device icon and the associated device icon.
在另一个示例中,对于音频设备,如音箱,耳机等,从不同方位吸附可以关联不同声道。假设用户有两个及以上的音箱,用户拖动第一个音箱图标从手机图标的左边区域贴合过去,吸附在一起,那么该第一个音箱可以提供左声道的音频输出;用户拖动第二个音箱图标从手机图标的右边区域贴合过去,吸附在一起,那么该第二个音箱可以提供右声道的音频输出。其他多声道的布置同理。In another example, for audio devices, such as speakers and earphones, different sound channels can be associated with different orientations. Assuming that the user has two or more speakers, the user drags the icon of the first speaker to fit it from the left area of the phone icon and sticks it together, then the first speaker can provide the audio output of the left channel; the user drags The second speaker icon is pasted from the right area of the mobile phone icon and absorbed together, then the second speaker can provide the audio output of the right channel. The arrangement of other multi-channels is the same.
在另一些实施例中,吸附方设备图标和被吸附方设备图标互换拖拽方向,其执行的服务或交互功能可能不同。如数据的传输方向不同,设备作为吸附方或者作为被吸附方指示了该设备是数据的发送方或者接收方,如规定数据传输方向为吸附方设备向被吸附方设备发送数据流。举例说明,在分享文件时,如果按住PC图标并拖拽吸附到手机图标上,对应的服务是将PC的文件发送给手机,如果按住手机图标并拖拽吸附到PC图标上,对应的服务是将手机的文件发送给PC。In some other embodiments, the dragging directions of the attracting device icon and the adsorbed device icon are exchanged, and the services or interactive functions executed by them may be different. If the data transmission direction is different, the device as the adsorbing party or as the adsorbed party indicates that the device is the sender or receiver of the data. For example, the data transmission direction is stipulated that the adsorbing device sends data streams to the adsorbed device. For example, when sharing files, if you press and hold the PC icon and drag to attach to the mobile phone icon, the corresponding service is to send the PC file to the mobile phone; if you press and hold the mobile phone icon and drag to attach to the PC icon, the corresponding The service is to send files from the phone to the PC.
再如,设备图标作为吸附方或被吸附方其触发的场景化服务也可以不同。举例说明,如果按住PC图标并拖拽吸附到手机图标上,触发的服务是将PC的文件发送给手机,如果按住手机图标并拖拽吸附到PC图标上,触发的服务是将手机的屏幕投屏到PC的屏幕上。For another example, the scenario-based services triggered by the device icon as the absorber or the absorber can also be different. For example, if you press and hold the PC icon and drag it to attach to the mobile phone icon, the triggered service is to send the files of the PC to the mobile phone; Screen mirroring to the PC screen.
参考图15、图16、图17所示的示例。图15、图16、图17描述了用户拖拽笔记本电脑MateBook图标贴近手机图标,建立多屏协同连接时,不同方位、不同区域的吸附,产生的效果也不同。Refer to the examples shown in Figure 15, Figure 16, and Figure 17. Figure 15, Figure 16, and Figure 17 describe that when the user drags the MateBook icon of the laptop computer close to the icon of the mobile phone to establish a multi-screen collaborative connection, different orientations and different areas will have different adsorption effects.
如图15所示,在手机的用户界面1500中,用户拖动该笔记本电脑MateBook图标从手机图标的左边区域1501贴合过去,在笔记本电脑MateBook图标位于左边区域1501时,界面上可以显示提示“右侧投屏”,提示用户选择该选项会让手机投屏在笔记本电脑屏幕右侧。当用户将笔记本电脑MateBook图标拖到左边区域1501然后松开手指,手机图标可以与笔记本电脑MateBook图标吸附在一起。可以看到,在笔记本电脑屏幕上,手机显示界面1502会投屏在该笔记本电脑显示界面的右侧。As shown in Figure 15, in the user interface 1500 of the mobile phone, the user drags the MateBook icon of the notebook computer to fit it from the left area 1501 of the mobile phone icon. When the MateBook icon of the notebook computer is located in the left area 1501, a prompt " Screen on the right” prompts the user to choose this option to mirror the phone screen on the right side of the laptop screen. When the user drags the icon of the notebook computer MateBook to the left area 1501 and then releases the finger, the icon of the mobile phone can be attached to the icon of the notebook computer MateBook. It can be seen that, on the laptop computer screen, the mobile phone display interface 1502 is projected on the right side of the laptop computer display interface.
如图16所示,在手机的用户界面1600中,用户拖动该笔记本电脑MateBook图标从手机图标的右边区域1601贴合过去,在笔记本电脑MateBook图标位于右边区域1601时,界面上可以显示提示“左侧投屏”,提示用户选择该选项会让手机投屏在笔记本电脑屏幕左侧。当用户将笔记本电脑MateBook图标拖到右边区域1601然后松开手指,手机图标可以与笔记本电脑MateBook图标吸附在一起。可以看到,在笔记本电脑屏幕上,手机显示界面1602会投屏在该笔记本电脑显示界面的左侧。As shown in Figure 16, in the user interface 1600 of the mobile phone, the user drags the MateBook icon of the notebook computer to fit it from the right area 1601 of the mobile phone icon. When the MateBook icon of the notebook computer is located in the right area 1601, a prompt " Screen on the left”, prompting the user to choose this option to mirror the mobile phone screen on the left side of the laptop screen. When the user drags the icon of the notebook computer MateBook to the right area 1601 and then releases the finger, the icon of the mobile phone can be attached to the icon of the notebook computer MateBook. It can be seen that, on the laptop computer screen, the mobile phone display interface 1602 will be projected on the left side of the laptop computer display interface.
如图17所示,在手机的用户界面1700中,用户拖动该笔记本电脑MateBook图标至手机图标的中间区域1701,在笔记本电脑MateBook图标位于中间区域1701时,界面上可以显示提示“全屏投屏”,提示用户选择该选项会让手机铺满全屏显示在笔记本电脑屏幕上。当用户将笔记本电脑MateBook图标拖到中间区域1701然后松开手指,手机图标可以与笔记本电脑MateBook图标吸附或者说重叠在一起。可以看到,在笔记本电脑屏幕上,手机显示界面 1702会在该笔记本电脑上全屏投屏显示。As shown in Figure 17, in the user interface 1700 of the mobile phone, the user drags the icon of the notebook computer MateBook to the middle area 1701 of the mobile phone icon. ", prompting the user to select this option will make the phone fill the full screen and display it on the laptop screen. When the user drags the icon of the notebook computer MateBook to the middle area 1701 and then releases the finger, the icon of the mobile phone can be adsorbed or overlapped with the icon of the notebook computer MateBook. It can be seen that, on the laptop computer screen, the display interface 1702 of the mobile phone will be displayed in full-screen projection on the laptop computer.
在核心设备与关联设备连接执行交互功能时,该核心设备与该关联设备所示界面内容可以相同,也可以不同。When the core device is connected to the associated device to perform an interactive function, the contents of the interfaces displayed by the core device and the associated device may be the same or different.
在一些实施例中,核心设备与关联设备虽然所示界面内容不同,但是核心设备与关联设备可以配合使用,显示的界面具有关联性,而非各自显示不相干的内容。In some embodiments, although the core device and the associated device display different interface content, the core device and the associated device can be used together, and the displayed interfaces are related instead of displaying irrelevant content.
如图18所示,手机所示用户界面1800中,手机与智能电视连接,场景化服务区域显示多屏协同、家庭影院、跨屏会议、体感游戏等服务选项。用户选中家庭影院服务选项1801,手机和智能电视可以显示家庭影院服务相关页面。As shown in FIG. 18 , in the user interface 1800 shown on the mobile phone, the mobile phone is connected to the smart TV, and the scene service area displays service options such as multi-screen collaboration, home theater, multi-screen conference, and somatosensory games. The user selects the home theater service option 1801, and the mobile phone and the smart TV can display a page related to the home theater service.
如图18中所示,智能电视播放视频,界面1806中显示有视频画面,在视频画面顶部显示有当前应用标题“家庭影院”,以及提示语“本设备已与HuaWei P50协同”,天气,时间等。而手机用户界面1810显示家庭影院应用的遥控界面,用户界面1810中显示有标题“家庭影院”,提示语1802“本设备已与Vision协同,点击可遥控Vision”,遥控操作区域1803,切换控件1804等。遥控操作区域1803可用于用户控制智能电视,可包括主页控件、开关控件、音量增大控件、音量减小控件、返回控件、菜单控件、语音控件、确认控件、上下左右方向控件等。As shown in Figure 18, the smart TV plays a video, and the video screen is displayed on the interface 1806, and the current application title "Home Theater" is displayed on the top of the video screen, as well as the prompt "This device has been coordinated with HuaWei P50", weather, time wait. The mobile phone user interface 1810 displays the remote control interface of the home theater application. The user interface 1810 displays the title "Home Theater", a prompt 1802 "This device has been coordinated with Vision, click to remotely control Vision", a remote control operation area 1803, and a switching control 1804 wait. The remote control operation area 1803 can be used for the user to control the smart TV, and can include homepage control, switch control, volume up control, volume down control, return control, menu control, voice control, confirmation control, up, down, left, and right direction controls, etc.
切换控件1804用于手机界面在视频画面和遥控界面之间切换,在遥控界面上切换控件1804提示“切换为显示画面”。如图19所示,当用户点击切换控件1804,手机可以在用户界面1900中显示视频画面1901,以及切换控件1902。在手机的视频播放界面上切换控件1902提示“切换为遥控界面”,如果用户点击切换控件1902,手机可以返回显示遥控界面,即用户界面1810。The switching control 1804 is used to switch between the video screen and the remote control interface on the mobile phone interface, and the switching control 1804 prompts "switch to the display screen" on the remote control interface. As shown in FIG. 19 , when the user clicks on the switch control 1804 , the mobile phone can display a video image 1901 and a switch control 1902 on the user interface 1900 . The switching control 1902 on the video playback interface of the mobile phone prompts “Switch to the remote control interface”. If the user clicks the switching control 1902, the mobile phone can return to display the remote control interface, that is, the user interface 1810 .
在另一些实施例中,核心设备与关联设备协同后,核心设备的一些功能可以迁移给关联设备,由关联设备提供服务,而核心设备可以将该服务隐藏至后台,在前台运行其他应用。例如,手机与智能电视协同后,播放视频的服务由智能电视提供,而用户可以将该服务隐藏至后台,在前台打开聊天应用,边聊天边看视频。In other embodiments, after the core device cooperates with the associated device, some functions of the core device can be migrated to the associated device, and the associated device can provide services, and the core device can hide the service in the background and run other applications in the foreground. For example, after a mobile phone and a smart TV are coordinated, the service of playing video is provided by the smart TV, and the user can hide the service in the background, open the chat application in the foreground, and watch the video while chatting.
可以理解的是,以上图4至图19所描述的用户界面仅为示例界面,用于辅助阅读者理解本申请描述的技术方案,并不对本申请其他实施例的用户界面构成限制。其他实施例中可以根据实际情况增减更多或更少的用户界面,或增减更多或更少的控件,或设计不同的人机交互操作等,使得用户界面更迎合用户的使用体验。It can be understood that the user interfaces described above in FIG. 4 to FIG. 19 are only exemplary interfaces for assisting readers in understanding the technical solutions described in the present application, and do not limit the user interfaces in other embodiments of the present application. In other embodiments, more or fewer user interfaces may be added or removed, or more or fewer controls may be added or removed, or different human-computer interaction operations may be designed according to actual conditions, so that the user interface is more suitable for the user experience.
结合前述图1至图19所示的各个实施例,下面介绍本申请实施例提供的一种设备交互方法。With reference to the foregoing embodiments shown in FIGS. 1 to 19 , a method for device interaction provided by an embodiment of the present application is introduced below.
以下方法实施例可以应用在多个设备组成的通信系统中,如前述通信系统10。该通信系统也可称为超级终端。这多个电子设备具体可以为手机、平板电脑、笔记本电脑、个人计算机(personal computer,PC)、智能电视(也可称为智慧屏、大屏等),或智能手表、智能手环等可穿戴设备,本申请对设备类型不作限制。The following method embodiments may be applied in a communication system composed of multiple devices, such as the aforementioned communication system 10 . The communication system may also be referred to as a HyperTerminal. These multiple electronic devices can specifically be mobile phones, tablet computers, notebook computers, personal computers (personal computers, PCs), smart TVs (also called smart screens, large screens, etc.), or wearable devices such as smart watches and smart bracelets. Equipment, this application does not limit the type of equipment.
核心设备和关联设备之间建立有通信连接,并可以通过该通信连接进行通信,传输数据或指令。该通信连接可以是有线连接或无线连接,或结合几种方式的连接,本实施例不作限制。A communication connection is established between the core device and the associated device, through which communication can be performed to transmit data or instructions. The communication connection may be a wired connection or a wireless connection, or a combination of several connection methods, which is not limited in this embodiment.
通信系统中各终端设备上可以分别搭载
Figure PCTCN2022115212-appb-000012
系统、
Figure PCTCN2022115212-appb-000013
系统、
Figure PCTCN2022115212-appb-000014
Figure PCTCN2022115212-appb-000015
系统、HarmonyOS或者其他类型的操作系统,通信系统中的各个终端设备的操作系统 可以相同也可以不同,本申请对此不作限制。在一些实施例中,通信系统中的各个终端均搭载有HarmonyOS,那么该通信系统可以称为HarmonyOS超级虚拟终端(super virtual device),亦可称为HarmonyOS超级终端。
Each terminal device in the communication system can be equipped with
Figure PCTCN2022115212-appb-000012
system,
Figure PCTCN2022115212-appb-000013
system,
Figure PCTCN2022115212-appb-000014
Figure PCTCN2022115212-appb-000015
system, HarmonyOS or other types of operating systems, the operating systems of each terminal device in the communication system may be the same or different, which is not limited in this application. In some embodiments, each terminal in the communication system is equipped with HarmonyOS, so the communication system may be called a HarmonyOS super virtual device (super virtual device), or a HarmonyOS super terminal.
在以下方法实施例中,核心设备/中心设备(如手机)是超级终端系统的控制中心,承载设备管理、服务管理、服务调度等功能,可以与其他一个或多个关联设备(如笔记本电脑、PC、平板电脑、智能手表、智能电视等)连接、协同,为用户提供多种场景化服务以及多种原子化服务组合等。In the following method embodiments, the core device/central device (such as a mobile phone) is the control center of the hyperterminal system, carrying functions such as device management, service management, and service scheduling, and can be connected with one or more other associated devices (such as a notebook computer, PCs, tablets, smart watches, smart TVs, etc.) to connect and collaborate, to provide users with a variety of scenario-based services and a variety of atomized service combinations.
在一些实施例中,核心设备或关联设备上安装有超级终端应用,方便用户对超级终端系统中各个终端设备进行管理。In some embodiments, a hyper terminal application is installed on the core device or the associated device, so as to facilitate the user to manage each terminal device in the hyper terminal system.
可以理解的是,用户可以在任何一个安装超级终端应用的设备上进行交互。用户在任意一个设备上的超级终端应用中输入的指令、数据,可以同步迁移给超级终端系统中的其他设备。It can be understood that the user can interact on any device installed with the HyperTerminal application. The instructions and data entered by the user in the HyperTerminal application on any device can be transferred to other devices in the HyperTerminal system synchronously.
图20是本实施例提供的设备交互方法的流程图,具体包括步骤如下:FIG. 20 is a flow chart of the device interaction method provided in this embodiment, which specifically includes the following steps:
S101,第一设备显示第一界面,该第一界面包括指示第一设备的第一控件和指示第二设备的第二控件。S101. The first device displays a first interface, where the first interface includes a first control indicating the first device and a second control indicating a second device.
第一控件为指示第一设备的设备选项,第二控件为指示第二设备的设备选项。The first control is a device option indicating the first device, and the second control is a device option indicating the second device.
第一设备可以为上述核心设备,第二设备可以为上述关联设备,第二设备是第一设备发现的周围的设备。The first device may be the aforementioned core device, the second device may be the aforementioned associated device, and the second device is a peripheral device discovered by the first device.
第一界面即为超级终端交互界面,用户可以通过作用在第一界面上的用户操作控制、管理超级终端系统中的各个设备。本实施例对超级终端交互界面的表现形式不作任何限制。其中一种表现形式可以参考图5所描述的实施例。The first interface is the hyper terminal interactive interface, and the user can control and manage each device in the hyper terminal system through user operations acting on the first interface. This embodiment does not impose any limitation on the presentation form of the hyper terminal interactive interface. For one form of expression, reference may be made to the embodiment described in FIG. 5 .
第一控件为指示核心设备的图标,如图5所示的手机图标。第二控件为指示关联设备的图标,如图5所示的智能手表图标。The first control is an icon indicating the core device, such as the mobile phone icon shown in FIG. 5 . The second control is an icon indicating an associated device, such as the smart watch icon shown in FIG. 5 .
参考图5,在超级终端交互界面中可以显示有设备连接状态图示,该设备连接状态图示中心为核心设备图标,周围环绕着一个或多个关联设备图标。Referring to FIG. 5 , a device connection status diagram may be displayed in the hyperterminal interactive interface. The center of the device connection status diagram is a core device icon surrounded by one or more associated device icons.
该设备连接状态图示可以指示核心设备与关联设备之间的连接关系、相对位置关系、信号强弱关系等。The device connection state diagram may indicate the connection relationship, relative position relationship, signal strength relationship and the like between the core device and the associated device.
连接关系可以参考图7所示,手机图标与智能手表图标吸附在一起,表示手机与智能手表建立连接,可以协同工作提供系统级服务。而智能手环图标游离在手机图标外围,未与手机图标吸附、重叠或贴合,而是分开的状态,表示手机与智能手环未建立连接。The connection relationship can be referred to as shown in Figure 7. The icon of the mobile phone and the icon of the smart watch are attached together, indicating that the mobile phone and the smart watch are connected and can work together to provide system-level services. However, the smart bracelet icon is free from the periphery of the mobile phone icon, and is not attached to, overlapped or attached to the mobile phone icon, but separated, indicating that the mobile phone and the smart bracelet have not established a connection.
在一些实施例中,设备连接状态图示中显示的关联设备图标与核心设备图标的相对位置,可以指示关联设备与核心设备在真实空间中的位置关系,如相对方位信息、相对距离信息等,有助于用户快速查找和区分各个电子设备。如核心设备与关联设备在真实空间中的方位与设备连接状态图示中核心设备图标与关联设备图标的方位一致。再如在真实空间中如在真实空间中关联设备距离核心设备越远,对应显示在界面中关联设备图标与核心设备图标的距离也越远。本实施例对实现该功能的具体技术不作限制,如手机可以基于UWB技术获取关联设备所携带的指向性信息的方位以及测量的距离,得到关联设备与手机在真实空间下的空间映射关系。In some embodiments, the relative position of the associated device icon and the core device icon displayed in the device connection status diagram may indicate the positional relationship between the associated device and the core device in real space, such as relative orientation information, relative distance information, etc. It is helpful for users to quickly find and distinguish each electronic device. For example, the orientation of the core device and the associated device in the real space is consistent with the orientation of the core device icon and the associated device icon in the device connection status diagram. For another example, in the real space, the farther the associated device is from the core device in the real space, the farther the distance between the associated device icon and the core device icon displayed on the interface is. This embodiment does not limit the specific technology for realizing this function. For example, the mobile phone can obtain the orientation and measured distance of the directional information carried by the associated device based on UWB technology, and obtain the spatial mapping relationship between the associated device and the mobile phone in real space.
在另一些实施例中,在界面中关联设备图标与核心设备图标之间的距离可以指示核心设备探测到的关联设备的信号强度,如蓝牙信号强度或WiFi信号强度,例如在核心设备探测到的关联设备的信号强度越强,对应显示在界面中关联设备图标与核心设备图标的距离也越近。In some other embodiments, the distance between the icon of the associated device and the icon of the core device in the interface may indicate the signal strength of the associated device detected by the core device, such as the Bluetooth signal strength or the WiFi signal strength. The stronger the signal strength of the associated device, the closer the distance between the associated device icon and the core device icon displayed on the interface.
S102,第一设备检测到第一用户操作。S102. The first device detects a first user operation.
如果用户想要第二设备与第一设备组成超级终端,实现一些协同功能,可以实施选中该第二设备的第一用户操作。本实施例对第一用户操作的具体方式不作任何限制。第一用户操作用于用户关联第一设备和第二设备。If the user wants the second device to form a hyper terminal with the first device to realize some collaborative functions, the first user operation of selecting the second device can be implemented. This embodiment does not impose any limitation on the specific manner of the first user's operation. The first user operation is for the user to associate the first device with the second device.
在一种实现方式中,第一用户操作可以是作用于第二控件的用户操作,如,用户按住第二控件并拖拽该第二控件靠近第一控件,在第二控件到达指定区域时释放该第二控件。在一些实施例中,该指定区域可以是以第一控件为中心,半径为第一半径距离的圆形区域。In one implementation, the first user operation may be a user operation acting on the second control. For example, the user presses and holds the second control and drags the second control close to the first control. When the second control reaches the designated area Release the second control. In some embodiments, the designated area may be a circular area centered on the first control and having a radius of the first radius distance.
参考图6所示的实施例,用户可以在超级终端界面上,选中智能手表对应的智能手表图标506,并拖拽该智能手表图标506靠近手机图标505,当智能手表图标506与手机图标505之间的距离小于或等于第二距离(如图6中所示的R2)时,或者,当智能手表图标506进入指定区域时(图6中为围绕手机图标的最近圆圈构成的环形区域,即以手机图标505为中心,半径为R的圆形区域),用户松开手指,就可以显示图7所示的设备连接状态图示701中,智能手表图标702吸附在手机图标505边缘。With reference to the embodiment shown in Figure 6, the user can select the smart watch icon 506 corresponding to the smart watch on the super terminal interface, and drag the smart watch icon 506 close to the mobile phone icon 505, when the smart watch icon 506 and the mobile phone icon 505 When the distance between them is less than or equal to the second distance (R2 as shown in Figure 6), or, when the smart watch icon 506 enters the specified area (in Figure 6, it is an annular area formed by the nearest circle around the mobile phone icon, that is, The mobile phone icon 505 is the center and the radius is a circular area of R), and the user releases the finger to display the device connection status diagram 701 shown in FIG.
其中,在一些实施例中,被选中的设备图标可以随着用户手指在屏幕上拖动的轨迹而变化位置。本实施例不限定用户拖动设备图标时的手指运动轨迹,用户拖动轨迹可以是任意曲线。例如,当用户选中某个关联设备图标后,用户手指在屏幕上拖动该关联设备图标一段距离或者在屏幕的某个位置上停留第二预设时长,手机可以检测当前该关联设备图标与手机图标之间的距离是否小于或等于一定距离,如第二距离,如果是,则该关联设备图标与手机图标吸附在一起。在用户手指移动时,该关联设备图标随着用户手指轨迹移动。Wherein, in some embodiments, the selected device icon may change its position along with the trajectory of the user's finger dragging on the screen. This embodiment does not limit the finger movement trajectory when the user drags the device icon, and the user's dragging trajectory may be any curve. For example, when the user selects an associated device icon, and the user drags the associated device icon on the screen for a certain distance or stays on a certain position on the screen for a second preset time, the mobile phone can detect the current association between the associated device icon and the mobile phone. Whether the distance between the icons is less than or equal to a certain distance, such as the second distance, if so, the associated device icon and the mobile phone icon are adsorbed together. When the user's finger moves, the associated device icon moves along with the track of the user's finger.
在另外一些实施例中,被选中的设备图标也可以不随着用户手指在屏幕上拖动的轨迹而变化位置。例如,当用户选中某个关联设备图标时,用户手指在屏幕上滑动一段距离或者在屏幕的某个位置上停留第二预设时长,手机可以确定当前用户手指所在位置与手机图标之间的距离是否小于或等于一定距离,如第二距离,如果是,则该关联设备图标与手机图标吸附在一起。在用户手指移动时,该关联设备图标并不会移动。In some other embodiments, the selected device icon may not change its position along with the dragging track of the user's finger on the screen. For example, when the user selects an associated device icon, and the user slides a finger on the screen for a certain distance or stays on a certain position on the screen for a second preset time, the mobile phone can determine the distance between the current position of the user's finger and the mobile phone icon Whether it is less than or equal to a certain distance, such as the second distance, if so, the associated device icon and the mobile phone icon are attracted together. The associated device icon does not move when the user's finger is moved.
在另一种实现方式中,第一用户操作可以是用户点击了处于未连接状态的第二控件,或者同时点击第一控件和第二控件,可以触发第二设备与第一设备的连接,在界面上表现为第二设备图标与第一设备图标吸附在一起。In another implementation manner, the first user operation may be that the user clicks the second control in an unconnected state, or clicks the first control and the second control at the same time, which may trigger the connection between the second device and the first device. The interface shows that the icon of the second device is attracted to the icon of the first device.
在另一种实现方式中,第一用户操作也可以是作用于第一控件的用户操作,如,用户按住第一控件并拖拽该第一控件靠近第二控件,在第一控件到达指定区域时释放该第一控件,同样可以实现第一控件与第二控件吸附在一起。In another implementation, the first user operation may also be a user operation acting on the first control, for example, the user presses and holds the first control and drags the first control close to the second control, and when the first control reaches the specified When releasing the first control in the region, the first control and the second control can also be adsorbed together.
可选的,在另一种实现方式中,第一用户操作也可以是选中第二控件的用户操作,如按住第二控件,参考图11、图12、图13A、图13B、图13C、图13D所描述的实施例。Optionally, in another implementation, the first user operation may also be a user operation of selecting the second control, such as pressing and holding the second control, refer to Figure 11, Figure 12, Figure 13A, Figure 13B, Figure 13C, Figure 13D depicts the embodiment.
S103,响应于第一用户操作,第一设备显示第二界面,第二界面中显示有一个或多个场景化服务的服务选项,该场景化服务是第一设备和第二设备所能协同提供的服务。S103, in response to the first user operation, the first device displays a second interface, and the second interface displays one or more service options of scenario-based services, where the scenario-based services can be provided by the cooperation of the first device and the second device services.
可选的,该第二界面中显示有第一控件与第二控件相连。响应于第一用户操作,第二界面中可以显示有第二控件与第一控件吸附在一起。两个设备图标吸附在一起可以指两个设备对应的图标的边缘相切,或者,两个设备图标吸附在一起也可以是指这两个设备图标全部或部分重叠在一起。本实施例对吸附的表现形式不作特殊限制。Optionally, the second interface displays that the first control is connected to the second control. In response to the first user operation, the second control may be displayed on the second interface to be adsorbed together with the first control. The two device icons being attracted together may refer to that the edges of the icons corresponding to the two devices are tangent, or the two device icons being adsorbed together may also refer to that the two device icons are completely or partially overlapped. In this embodiment, no special limitation is imposed on the form of adsorption.
本实施例中的第二界面可以参考图7所示的用户界面700。For the second interface in this embodiment, refer to the user interface 700 shown in FIG. 7 .
在一些实施例中,第二界面中的第二控件可能与第一界面中的第二控件的表现形式有所区别。例如,在图7中,已与手机连接形成超级终端的智能手表图标702可以显示有区别度的标识,便于与未连接状态的关联设备图标区分。如智能手表图标702显示为深色填充形式,指示智能手表与手机处于连接状态,其他还有智能手表图标702的大小小于未连接时的智能手表图标506,智能手表图标702的圆形图标直径为R2,吸附在手机图标505的边缘上,智能手表图标702与手机图标505的边缘相切。In some embodiments, the second control in the second interface may have a different form from the second control in the first interface. For example, in FIG. 7 , the smart watch icon 702 that has been connected to a mobile phone to form a hyperterminal can display a distinctive logo, so as to be easily distinguished from the associated device icon in an unconnected state. For example, the smart watch icon 702 is displayed in a dark filled form, indicating that the smart watch is connected to the mobile phone. In addition, the size of the smart watch icon 702 is smaller than that of the smart watch icon 506 when it is not connected. The diameter of the round icon of the smart watch icon 702 is R2 is adsorbed on the edge of the mobile phone icon 505 , and the smart watch icon 702 is tangent to the edge of the mobile phone icon 505 .
可选的,在另一种实现方式中,参考图11、图12、图13A、图13B、图13C、图13D所描述的实施例,响应于选中第二控件的第一用户操作,该第二界面中显示有悬浮控件,该悬浮控件有一个或多个区域,每个区域对应一个场景化服务选项。该悬浮控件表现为多个圆形区域,或者多个矩形区域,或者多个扇形区域,或者多个扇环形区域,或者多个圆环形区域,或者多个多边形区域。在第二界面中,可以显示第一控件,也可以不显示第一控件。本实施例对该悬浮控件的布局方式不作限制。Optionally, in another implementation manner, referring to the embodiments described in FIG. 11, FIG. 12, FIG. 13A, FIG. 13B, FIG. 13C, and FIG. A floating control is displayed on the second interface, and the floating control has one or more areas, and each area corresponds to a scenario-based service option. The floating control is represented as multiple circular areas, or multiple rectangular areas, or multiple fan-shaped areas, or multiple fan-shaped ring areas, or multiple circular ring-shaped areas, or multiple polygonal areas. In the second interface, the first control may or may not be displayed. This embodiment does not limit the layout of the floating control.
参考图11所示的用户界面1100,或图12所示的用户界面1200,或图13A、图13B、图13C、图13D所示的实施例,第二界面中显示有一个悬浮控件,该悬浮控件可以分为一个或多个区域,每个区域对应一个场景化服务选项,不同场景化服务选项对应不同区域,这样的交互方式更有趣、更直观、界面更简洁。本实施例对悬浮控件的形状不作限制,对划分区域的方式也不作任何限制。Referring to the user interface 1100 shown in FIG. 11, or the user interface 1200 shown in FIG. 12, or the embodiments shown in FIG. 13A, FIG. 13B, FIG. 13C, and FIG. 13D, a floating control is displayed in the second interface. Controls can be divided into one or more areas, each area corresponds to a scene-based service option, and different scene-based service options correspond to different areas. This way of interaction is more interesting, more intuitive, and the interface is more concise. This embodiment does not limit the shape of the floating control, nor does it limit the way of dividing regions.
例如在用户界面1100中,当用户按住智能手表图标的时候,超级终端界面上可以以手机为中心,显示圆形悬浮区域1101,圆形悬浮区域1101可以分为多块区域,每块区域对应一项场景化服务选项。如用户界面1100中,圆形悬浮区域1101分为四块区域,分别对应场景化服务选项为:户外跑步、室内跑步、心脏健康、血管健康。For example, in the user interface 1100, when the user presses the smart watch icon, the super terminal interface can display a circular floating area 1101 with the mobile phone as the center. The circular floating area 1101 can be divided into multiple areas, and each area corresponds to A scenario-based service option. For example, in the user interface 1100, the circular floating area 1101 is divided into four areas, corresponding to scene-based service options: outdoor running, indoor running, heart health, and blood vessel health.
第二界面中显示有一个或多个场景化服务选项,这里说的场景化服务是第一设备和第二设备所能协同提供的服务。One or more scenario-based service options are displayed on the second interface, and the scenario-based service mentioned here is a service that can be provided by the first device and the second device in cooperation.
参考前述实施例中的描述,场景化服务指的是基于使用场景的功能性服务,是可以针对某个特殊场景提供的多个功能或服务的集合。一个场景化服务可以由一个或多个原子化服务支持。在第二界面上显示的场景化服务的服务选项,可以为当前超级终端系统,即第一设备和第二设备的设备组合所能提供的场景化服务,在第一设备上或第二设备上已经安装、部署有这些场景化服务对应的原子能力。Referring to the descriptions in the foregoing embodiments, the scenario-based service refers to a functional service based on a usage scenario, which is a collection of multiple functions or services that can be provided for a specific scenario. A scene service can be supported by one or more atom services. The service options of the scene-based service displayed on the second interface may be the scene-based service provided by the current hyper terminal system, that is, the combination of the first device and the second device, on the first device or on the second device The atomic capabilities corresponding to these scenario-based services have been installed and deployed.
在一些实施例中,某个场景化服务可以是基于某个相同应用,不同设备在该应用服务下提供不同原子能力。该场景化服务其实是由同一个服务商提供,例如,图8所示的示例中,手机和智能手表都安装有运动健康应用,用户在选择户外跑步的场景化服务选项后,手机和智能手表都跳转到运动健康应用中的户外跑步服务,智能手表可以提供定位服务、统计用户运动数据服务等,智能手表可以将用户数据上传至应用服务器,应用服务器再将用户数据同步下发给手机,手机可以提供显示用户的运动轨迹的服务等。对于同一个场景化服务,即使使用同一个客户端,不同设备显示的界面、提供的服务也可以不同。In some embodiments, a certain scenario-based service may be based on a certain same application, and different devices provide different atomic capabilities under the application service. The scenario-based service is actually provided by the same service provider. For example, in the example shown in Figure 8, both the mobile phone and the smart watch are installed with sports and health applications. Both jump to the outdoor running service in the sports and health application. The smart watch can provide positioning services and statistical user sports data services. The mobile phone can provide services such as displaying the user's movement track. For the same scenario-based service, even if the same client is used, different devices may display different interfaces and provide different services.
场景化服务可以是超级终端系统根据核心设备和/或关联设备的设备类型、设备特征、产品定位、设备用途、设备可以提供的协同服务、设备当前所处环境、设备运行状态、用户最近使用的应用、用户使用场景化服务的频率、当前运行应用、用户设定的场景化服务的排序或默认选项等情况,综合考量得出的场景化服务选项,并在用户界面上予以显示,方便用户快速启动相关服务或功能。超级终端系统计算出的被用户选中概率越高的场景化服务的服务选项,越优先推荐显示。Scenario-based services can be based on the type of core device and/or associated devices, device features, product positioning, device usage, collaborative services that the device can provide, the current environment of the device, the operating status of the device, and the most recently used Based on the application, the frequency of the user using the scenario-based service, the currently running application, the sorting or default options of the scenario-based service set by the user, etc., the scenario-based service options obtained after comprehensive consideration are displayed on the user interface, which is convenient for the user to quickly Start the related service or function. The service options of the scenario-based service with a higher probability of being selected by the user calculated by the hyperterminal system are recommended and displayed with higher priority.
在一些实施例中,超级终端可以根据设备类型、产品定位、设备用途等推荐场景化服务,如手机与智能手表组合常用于统计运动量,那么超级终端系统基于手机和智能手表组合的设备类型、设备用途、常用的协同工作内容,可以给手机和智能手表组合分类为运动健康场景。运动健康场景下可以提供的场景化服务选项包括户外跑步、室内跑步、心脏健康、血管健康等。In some embodiments, the HyperTerminal can recommend scenario-based services based on device type, product positioning, and device usage. For example, the combination of a mobile phone and a smart watch is often used to count exercise, so the HyperTerminal system is based on the device type, device Uses and common collaborative work content can be classified as sports and health scenarios for the combination of mobile phones and smart watches. Scenario-based service options that can be provided in sports and health scenarios include outdoor running, indoor running, heart health, and vascular health.
再如,不同的设备类型具有不同的设备特征,例如智能电视具有较大的屏幕,用户视觉观看体验较好,更适合观看视频;智能音箱具有较强的音频输出能力,扬声效果较好,更适合播放音频;耳机体积小,易携带,无需外放,不打扰周围人,还可以具有降噪效果,屏蔽外界环境噪音,适合在公共场合收听音频,如在公共场合通话、听音乐等;智能手表、智能手环可以相比于手机更精确的测量用户的运动数据或心率等其他健康信息;笔记本电脑处理能力强大,更适合办公。这里不再赘述设备类型及设备特征,以上示例说明不对其他实施例构成限制。For another example, different device types have different device characteristics. For example, smart TVs have larger screens, which provide users with a better visual viewing experience and are more suitable for watching videos; smart speakers have strong audio output capabilities and better speaker effects. It is more suitable for playing audio; the earphone is small in size, easy to carry, does not need to be placed outside, does not disturb people around, and can also have a noise reduction effect, shielding external environmental noise, suitable for listening to audio in public places, such as talking in public places, listening to music, etc.; Smart watches and smart bracelets can measure the user's exercise data or heart rate and other health information more accurately than mobile phones; laptops have powerful processing capabilities and are more suitable for office work. The device type and device features will not be described in detail here, and the above examples do not limit other embodiments.
在一些实施例中,在列出场景化服务选项时,可以根据用户最近对不同协同服务的使用频率或者检测当前设备所处的环境等情况,计算各场景化服务选项被选择的概率,在场景化服务选项区域中优先靠前显示推测被选择概率大的场景化服务选项。In some embodiments, when listing the scenario-based service options, the probability of each scenario-based service option being selected can be calculated according to the user's recent use frequency of different collaborative services or the environment in which the current device is detected. In the customized service options area, the scenario-based service options that are estimated to be selected with a higher probability are displayed first.
超级终端系统可以根据统计到的用户在一定时间对各项场景化服务选项的使用频率,靠前显示高使用率的选项。一定时间可以是历史所有时间,也可以是某个时间段,如最近三个月。场景化服务选项历史使用率越高,显示越靠前。The hyper terminal system can display the options with high usage rate in the front according to the usage frequency of various scenario-based service options by users within a certain period of time according to the statistics. The certain time can be all the time in history, or a certain period of time, such as the last three months. The higher the historical usage rate of the scenario-based service option, the higher the display.
在另一些实施例中,核心设备或关联设备可以检测当前设备所处的环境,根据所处的环境排序场景化服务选项。如果核心设备或关联设备检测到用户所处环境为户外,那优先推荐户外相关服务选项,如户外跑步。如果核心设备或关联设备检测到用户所处环境为室内,那优先推荐室内相关服务选项,如室内跑步。本实施例对检测用户所处环境的方式不作限制,例如可以根据设备当前的定位信息判断所处环境;或者使用摄像头采集当前所处环境的照片,或使用超声波、红外线等采集当前空间的纵深或大小,以判断当前用户所处环境。In some other embodiments, the core device or the associated device may detect the environment where the current device is located, and sort the scenario-based service options according to the environment. If the core device or associated device detects that the user's environment is outdoors, it will give priority to recommending outdoor-related service options, such as outdoor running. If the core device or associated device detects that the user's environment is indoors, it will give priority to recommending indoor related service options, such as indoor running. This embodiment does not limit the method of detecting the user's environment. For example, the environment can be judged according to the current positioning information of the device; or the camera can be used to collect photos of the current environment, or ultrasonic waves, infrared rays, etc. size to determine the current user's environment.
在另一些实施例中,超级终端系统还可以根据用户最近打开或使用的应用,或者当前运行的应用,确定设备所处的环境或场景,进而推荐场景化服务选项。例如,手机与智能电视组成超级终端的情况下,检测到手机当前运行的应用为办公演示应用,则可以优先推荐多屏协同服务选项;或者,检测到手机当前运行的应用为视频应用,则优先推荐家庭影院服务选项;或者,当检测到用户浏览网页为游戏相关的网页时,优先推荐游戏娱乐相关的服务选项等。In some other embodiments, the HyperTerminal system can also determine the environment or scene where the device is located according to the application recently opened or used by the user, or the currently running application, and then recommend scene-based service options. For example, when a mobile phone and a smart TV form a super terminal, if it is detected that the application currently running on the mobile phone is an office presentation application, then the multi-screen collaborative service option can be recommended first; or, if it is detected that the application currently running on the mobile phone is a video application, then the Recommend home theater service options; or, when it is detected that the webpage browsed by the user is a game-related webpage, preferentially recommend game entertainment-related service options, etc.
在其他一些实施例中,超级终端系统还可以根据设备的运行状态,推荐场景化服务。例如,当手机与智能电视连接组成超级终端时,如果检测到智能电视处于亮屏状态,则优先推荐场景化服务为屏幕镜像,如果检测到智能电视处于灭屏状态,则优先推荐场景化服务为投音服务。In some other embodiments, the hyperterminal system can also recommend scene-based services according to the running status of the equipment. For example, when a mobile phone is connected to a smart TV to form a super terminal, if it is detected that the smart TV is in the on-screen state, then the scene-based service is recommended as screen mirroring; if the smart TV is detected to be off-screen, the scene-based service is recommended as Casting service.
可选的,在一些实施例中,超级终端系统中可以包括第一数据库,第一数据库记录了一个或多个设备组合所支持的一个或多个场景化服务,该设备组合包括第一设备和其关联的第二设备构成的设备组合,第一场景化服务是从第一数据库中查询到的场景化服务。该第一数据库可以存储在本地或云服务器上。该场景化服务通过以下一项或多项参数确定:设备组合的设备类型、设备特征、产品定位、设备用途、设备所处环境或场景、设备所处状态、最近运行的应用等。Optionally, in some embodiments, the HyperTerminal system may include a first database, the first database records one or more scenario-based services supported by one or more device combinations, the device combination includes the first device and The associated second device constitutes a device combination, and the first scenario-based service is a scenario-based service queried from the first database. The first database can be stored locally or on a cloud server. The scenario-based service is determined by one or more of the following parameters: device type of device combination, device features, product positioning, device usage, environment or scenario of the device, status of the device, recently run applications, etc.
可选的,在一些实施例中,超级终端系统中可以包括第二数据库,第二数据库记录了一 个或多个原子化服务组合所支持的一个或多个场景化服务,第一场景化服务是从第二数据库中查询到的场景化服务。该第二数据库可以存储在本地或云服务器上。该原子化服务组合包括第一设备和其关联的第二设备所具有的原子能力构成的原子化服务组合。其中,原子能力包括以下一项或多项:音频输出能力、音频输入能力、显示能力、摄像能力、触控输入能力、键鼠输入能力等。举例说明,音频输出能力可以包括该设备在播放音频时,支持单声道或者多声道,支持的音效,可支持的频响范围,降噪能力,音频解析能力等;音频输入能力可以包括收声范围、降噪能力等;显示能力可以包括该设备的屏幕大小,显示分辨率参数,刷新率,色彩表现力等;摄像能力可以包括该设备的摄像头类型,拍摄像素,拍摄夜景能力,图像调整能力等;触控输入能力、键鼠输入能力指该设备是否可以支持触控输入或者键鼠输入等。Optionally, in some embodiments, the hyperterminal system may include a second database, the second database records one or more scenario-based services supported by one or more atomic service combinations, and the first scenario-based service is Scenario-based services queried from the second database. The second database can be stored locally or on a cloud server. The atomic service combination includes an atomic service combination composed of atomic capabilities of the first device and its associated second device. Among them, the atomic capability includes one or more of the following: audio output capability, audio input capability, display capability, camera capability, touch input capability, keyboard and mouse input capability, etc. For example, the audio output capability may include whether the device supports mono or multi-channel, supported sound effects, supported frequency response range, noise reduction capability, audio analysis capability, etc. when the device is playing audio; the audio input capability may include receiving Acoustic range, noise reduction capability, etc.; display capability may include the device’s screen size, display resolution parameters, refresh rate, color expressiveness, etc.; camera capability may include the device’s camera type, shooting pixels, night scene shooting capability, and image adjustment capability, etc.; touch input capability, keyboard and mouse input capability refer to whether the device can support touch input or keyboard and mouse input, etc.
在本实施例中,悬浮控件的布局不同,其推荐场景化服务的排列顺序也会不同。In this embodiment, the layouts of the floating controls are different, and the sequence of the recommended scene-based services is also different.
可选的,参考图13C、图13D所示的实施例,悬浮控件的形状为圆环形或扇环形,其中多个圆环形区域或扇环形区域分别指示多个场景化服务,越靠近圆心的圆环形区域或扇环形区域所指示的场景化服务为更优先推荐的场景化服务。Optionally, referring to the embodiments shown in FIG. 13C and FIG. 13D , the shape of the floating control is circular or fan-shaped, where multiple circular areas or fan-shaped areas respectively indicate multiple scene-based services, the closer to the center of the circle The scene-based service indicated by the ring-shaped area or fan-shaped area of , is the recommended scene-based service with higher priority.
可选的,参考图11、图12、图13A、图13B所示的实施例,悬浮控件的形状为圆形或矩形,该圆形或矩形被分为四个区域,第一象限方位为区域A,第二象限方位为区域B,第三象限方位为区域C,第四象限方位为区域D,场景化服务选项的推荐顺序为场景化服务选项A、场景化服务选项B、场景化服务选项C、场景化服务选项D,分别放置的区域为区域B、区域A、区域C、区域D,或者为区域B、区域C、区域A、区域D,或者为区域A、区域D、区域B、区域C,或者为区域A、区域B、区域D、区域C,或者为区域B、区域A、区域D、区域C,或者为区域A、区域B、区域C、区域D。Optionally, referring to the embodiments shown in FIG. 11, FIG. 12, FIG. 13A, and FIG. 13B, the shape of the floating control is a circle or a rectangle, and the circle or rectangle is divided into four areas, and the orientation of the first quadrant is the area A, the orientation of the second quadrant is area B, the orientation of the third quadrant is area C, and the orientation of the fourth quadrant is area D. The recommended order of scenario-based service options is scenario-based service option A, scenario-based service option B, scenario-based service option C. Scenario-based service option D, the areas respectively placed are area B, area A, area C, area D, or area B, area C, area A, area D, or area A, area D, area B, Area C, or area A, area B, area D, area C, or area B, area A, area D, area C, or area A, area B, area C, area D.
当然,场景化服务选项并非一成不变,超级终端系统可以不断更新、扩充或细化更多的场景化服务选项,本实施例不作限制,具体可以根据实际情况进行变动。在一些实施例中,用户可以自定义添加场景化服务,如用户给某个使用场景设置名称,并让该场景关联其他应用服务或系统服务。该新添加的场景化服务选项与其他场景化服务选项并列显示在超级终端界面中。Of course, the scenario-based service options are not static, and the hyper terminal system can continuously update, expand or refine more scenario-based service options, which are not limited in this embodiment, and can be changed according to actual conditions. In some embodiments, the user can customize and add scene-based services, for example, the user sets a name for a usage scene and associates the scene with other application services or system services. The newly added scenario-based service option is displayed in parallel with other scenario-based service options on the HyperTerminal interface.
上述实施例并不对其他实施例构成限制,超级终端系统可以综合考虑以上一项或多项因素,合理推荐场景化服务选项。The foregoing embodiments do not limit other embodiments. The hyperterminal system may comprehensively consider one or more of the above factors and reasonably recommend scene-based service options.
具体示例可以参考图7、图9所示的实施例的说明,这里不再赘述。For specific examples, reference may be made to the descriptions of the embodiments shown in FIG. 7 and FIG. 9 , which will not be repeated here.
在一些实施例中,在设备连接组成超级终端时,可以先自动选定某个场景化服务作为默认服务。例如将场景化服务选项区域中排在第一位的场景化服务选项设为默认服务,在设备连接组成超级终端时,各设备默认按照该场景化服务对应的原子化服务组合进行配置。如果用户想选择其他场景化服务,可以再选择其他的场景化服务选项。设定默认场景化服务,可以方便设备无缝转换服务,可以在一定程度上省去用户操作。例如当耳机与手机连接,默认服务设定位由耳机提供音频输出、音频输入功能,那么在耳机与手机成功连接的时刻,音频输出、音频输入功能就立刻切换至耳机提供,用户无需另外进行操作,省去了繁琐的操作。该默认服务的设定可以是用户自行选定的默认服务,包括场景化服务和/或原子化服务,该默认服务的设定也可以是系统将统计得到的用户常用服务作为默认服务,等等,本实施例对此不作限制。In some embodiments, when the devices are connected to form a hyper terminal, a certain scenario-based service may be automatically selected as a default service. For example, set the first-ranked scenario-based service option in the scenario-based service option area as the default service. When devices are connected to form a hyper terminal, each device will be configured according to the atomic service combination corresponding to the scenario-based service by default. If the user wants to choose other scenario-based services, he can choose other scenario-based service options. Setting the default scene-based service can facilitate the seamless switching of services on devices and save user operations to a certain extent. For example, when the headset is connected to the mobile phone, the default service setting is that the headset provides audio output and audio input functions. Then when the headset is successfully connected to the mobile phone, the audio output and audio input functions are immediately switched to the headset, and the user does not need to perform additional operations. , saving the tedious operation. The setting of the default service may be a default service selected by the user, including scenario-based services and/or atomic services. The setting of the default service may also be that the system uses the user's frequently-used services obtained from statistics as the default service, etc. , which is not limited in this embodiment.
在另一些实施例中,在设备连接组成超级终端时,可以先不选定场景化服务,只是列出 一个或多个场景化服务选项,需要用户选定某个场景化服务之后,再将场景化服务或相应原子化服务切换至设定状态。这样的好处是充分考虑到用户使用意愿,避免自动切换到错误服务,给用户造成麻烦或困扰。例如将手机与PC连接,用户本意是想传递文件,如果默认服务是屏幕镜像,就会将手机屏幕投屏到PC上,这时需要用户再切换服务,尤其是如果当前PC正在用作其他用途,如正在演示文档,投屏服务会妨碍演示文档的显示,给用户造成了麻烦,或者用户手机上有隐私内容,不想展示在PC上,如果直接切换到屏幕镜像服务会给用户造成困扰。所以,当手机与PC连接时,可以在超级终端界面上显示场景化服务选项,用户先行选择需要的场景化服务选项和/或原子化服务组合选项,再执行切换服务。In some other embodiments, when the devices are connected to form a hyper terminal, the scene-based service may not be selected first, but one or more scene-based service options are listed. After the user selects a certain scene-based service, the scene The service or the corresponding atomic service switches to the set state. The advantage of this is to fully consider the user's willingness to use, and avoid automatically switching to the wrong service, causing trouble or distress to the user. For example, when connecting a mobile phone to a PC, the user intends to transfer files. If the default service is screen mirroring, the screen of the mobile phone will be mirrored to the PC. At this time, the user needs to switch services, especially if the current PC is being used for other purposes. , If you are presenting a document, the screen mirroring service will hinder the display of the presentation document, causing trouble to the user, or the user has private content on the mobile phone and does not want to display it on the PC. If you directly switch to the screen mirroring service, it will cause trouble for the user. Therefore, when the mobile phone is connected to the PC, the scene-based service options can be displayed on the hyperterminal interface, and the user first selects the required scene-based service options and/or atomized service combination options, and then executes switching services.
这里说明,当两个或两个以上的设备组成超级终端,并且用户选定场景化服务的时候,这些设备可以具备执行交互功能的能力或状态,但并不限定这两个或两个以上的设备之间立即执行交互功能。举例说明,若用户通过拖拽设备图标的方式,触发手机和智能音箱之间的投音功能。若此时,手机并未有音频播放任务或者手机的音频播放任务被暂停,手机也不会立即向智能音箱发送音频数据。但,手机有音频播放任务时,手机会将待播放的音频数据发送给智能音箱,由智能音箱进行播放。It is explained here that when two or more devices form a hyper terminal and the user selects a scene-based service, these devices can have the ability or status to perform interactive functions, but this is not limited to the two or more Interaction functions are performed immediately between devices. For example, if the user triggers the audio casting function between the mobile phone and the smart speaker by dragging the device icon. If at this time, the mobile phone does not have an audio playback task or the audio playback task of the mobile phone is suspended, the mobile phone will not immediately send audio data to the smart speaker. However, when the mobile phone has an audio playback task, the mobile phone will send the audio data to be played to the smart speaker, and the smart speaker will play it.
在第二界面中,还可以显示有推荐关联设备,又可称第三设备。超级终端系统还可以基于当前组成超级终端系统的设备的类型、设备特征、产品定位、设备用途、设备所处环境或场景、设备所处状态、最近运行的应用,分析当前场景,向用户列举推荐适合当前场景的其他设备,以帮助用户获取更好的场景体验;或者推测更多可扩充的使用场景,然后向用户列举推荐其他设备,假如用户采用系统推荐的设备,可以进一步地扩充更多、更丰富的使用场景。In the second interface, a recommended associated device may also be displayed, which may also be called a third device. The HyperTerminal system can also analyze the current scenario based on the type of devices currently forming the HyperTerminal system, device features, product positioning, device usage, device environment or scene, device status, and recently running applications, and list recommendations to users. Other devices suitable for the current scene to help users obtain a better scene experience; or speculate on more scalable usage scenarios, and then list and recommend other devices to the user. If the user adopts the device recommended by the system, it can further expand more, Richer usage scenarios.
可选的,第三设备是第一设备发现的设备,点击第三设备的设备选项,第一设备显示第二场景化服务的服务选项。其中,第二场景化服务的服务选项可能是在第一场景化服务的服务选项基础上新增了一些场景化服务选项,或者,第二场景化服务的服务选项是重新更新的场景化服务,与第一场景化服务的服务选项不同。Optionally, the third device is a device discovered by the first device, and the device option of the third device is clicked, and the first device displays the service options of the second scenario-based service. Among them, the service options of the second scenario-based service may be that some scenario-based service options are added on the basis of the service options of the first scenario-based service, or the service options of the second scenario-based service are re-updated scenario-based services, It is different from the service options of the first scenario-based service.
可选的,第三设备不是第一设备发现的设备,点击第三设备的设备选项,第一设备跳转显示第五界面,如第五界面可以是第三设备的购买界面,第五界面包括多个物品选项,多个物品选项来自于多个提供源,多个物品选项包括指示第三设备的物品选项。Optionally, the third device is not the device discovered by the first device. Click the device option of the third device, and the first device will jump to display the fifth interface. For example, the fifth interface can be the purchase interface of the third device, and the fifth interface includes A plurality of item options, the plurality of item options come from multiple sources, the plurality of item options includes an item option indicative of a third device.
比如,当手机与智能电视协同后,可以推荐用户无线麦克风、无线游戏手柄等设备,可以对应拓展K歌、游戏等场景化服务。再例如,手机与智能手表协同后,可以推荐用户跑步机、心率带、血糖仪等设备,可以对应拓展室内跑步、心脏健康、血糖健康等场景化服务。在加入一个推荐设备后,系统还可以根据新组成的超级终端推荐新的设备。用户可以选择加入更多的设备组成超级终端,使得用户使用场景更为丰富。加入了更多关联设备后,超级终端可提供的场景化服务也会更多、更丰富,完善超级终端的生态系统。For example, when a mobile phone is coordinated with a smart TV, wireless microphones, wireless game controllers and other equipment can be recommended to users, and scene-based services such as karaoke and games can be expanded correspondingly. For another example, after the collaboration between the mobile phone and the smart watch, it can recommend users such as treadmills, heart rate belts, blood glucose meters and other equipment, and can correspondingly expand scene-based services such as indoor running, heart health, and blood sugar health. After adding a recommended device, the system can also recommend new devices according to the newly formed hyperterminal. Users can choose to add more devices to form a hyper terminal, making the user use scenarios more abundant. After adding more associated devices, the HyperTerminal can provide more and richer scene-based services, improving the HyperTerminal ecosystem.
在图7所示示例中,超级终端系统可以基于当前组成超级终端的设备为手机和智能手表,分析用户使用场景为运动健康场景,该推荐设备区域704可以显示推荐运动设备或健康监控设备等,如跑步机、动感单车、血糖仪、心率仪等。当用户选中(点击或拖拽)该推荐设备区域704的设备图标,如果该设备为当前核心设备检测到的关联设备,即显示在设备连接状态图示701中的设备,那么该设备可以发起连接加入超级终端。当用户选中(点击或拖拽)该推荐设备区域704的设备图标,如果该设备未显示在设备连接状态图示701中,那么可以跳转到与该设备产品相关的页面,例如向用户介绍该推荐设备的功能、使用体验、与其他设 备组成超级终端时可以如何使用以及扩展出怎样的体验等等。In the example shown in FIG. 7, the hyperterminal system can analyze the user's usage scene as a sports and health scene based on the current devices that make up the hyperterminal as a mobile phone and a smart watch. The recommended device area 704 can display recommended sports equipment or health monitoring equipment, etc. Such as treadmills, spinning bikes, blood glucose meters, heart rate meters, etc. When the user selects (clicks or drags) the device icon in the recommended device area 704, if the device is an associated device detected by the current core device, that is, the device displayed in the device connection status diagram 701, then the device can initiate a connection Join HyperTerminal. When the user selects (clicks or drags) the device icon in the recommended device area 704, if the device is not displayed in the device connection status icon 701, it can jump to a page related to the device product, such as introducing the device to the user. The function of the recommended device, the user experience, how to use and expand the experience when forming a hyperterminal with other devices, etc.
S104,第一设备检测到选中第一场景化服务的第二用户操作,该第一场景化服务指示第一设备提供第一服务,和/或第二设备提供第二服务。S104, the first device detects a second user operation for selecting the first contextualized service, and the first contextualized service instructs the first device to provide the first service, and/or the second device to provide the second service.
第一场景化服务对应第一原子化服务组合,该第一原子化服务组合为第一设备提供至少一个第一服务,和/或第二设备提供至少一个第二服务。一个场景化服务可以由一个或多个原子化服务支持。The first scenario-based service corresponds to a first atomized service combination, and the first atomized service combination provides at least one first service for the first device, and/or at least one second service for the second device. A scene service can be supported by one or more atom services.
原子化服务指的是可独立运行的最小能力单元,是对单一功能/能力进行抽象封装的概念,可以是硬件服务,也可以是软件服务。Atomic service refers to the smallest capability unit that can run independently. It is a concept of abstract encapsulation of a single function/capability. It can be a hardware service or a software service.
本实施例对第二用户操作不作限制。参考图8所示的实施例,第二用户操作可以是用户点击第一场景化服务选项。This embodiment does not limit the operation of the second user. Referring to the embodiment shown in FIG. 8 , the second user operation may be that the user clicks on the first scenario-based service option.
可选的,参考图11、图12、图13A、图13B、图13C、图13D所描述的实施例。第二用户操作可以是用户拖动第二控件至第一场景化服务选项对应的区域,然后松开;第二用户操作也可以是用户拖动第二控件经由第一场景化服务的服务选项对应的区域贴近第一设备图标等。本实施例对用户拖拽的运动轨迹也不作限制。Optionally, refer to the embodiments described in FIG. 11 , FIG. 12 , FIG. 13A , FIG. 13B , FIG. 13C , and FIG. 13D . The second user operation may be that the user drags the second control to the area corresponding to the first scene-based service option, and then releases it; the second user operation may also be that the user drags the second control to correspond to the service option of the first scene-based service area close to the first device icon etc. In this embodiment, there is no limitation on the motion track dragged by the user.
在一些实施例中,前述悬浮控件可以包括第一区域,第一区域显示第一场景化服务的服务选项。第二用户操作为用户拖拽第二控件至第一区域后,释放第二控件的操作,或者,第二用户操作为用户拖拽第二控件经由第一区域,向着靠近第一控件的方向移动到指定区域后,释放第二控件的操作,该指定区域可以为以第一控件为中心,半径为第一半径距离的圆形区域。In some embodiments, the aforementioned floating control may include a first area, and the first area displays service options of the first scenario-based service. The second user operation is the operation of releasing the second control after the user drags the second control to the first area, or the second user operation is the user dragging the second control through the first area and moving towards the direction close to the first control After arriving at the specified area, release the operation of the second control. The specified area can be a circular area with the first control as the center and a radius equal to the first radius distance.
例如在图11所示的示例中,如果用户想选择某个场景化服务选项,如户外跑步服务选项,用户可以将智能手表图标拖拽到户外跑步服务选项对应的区域,然后经由户外跑步服务选项对应区域朝着手机图标的方向贴近,用户的手指运动轨迹可以参考用户界面1100中的示意轨迹。当智能手表图标到达吸附区域,用户松开手指,户外跑步对应的服务启动,手机跳转显示用户界面800所示的户外跑步的界面。当然,如果只有一项场景化服务选项,该圆形悬浮区域1101不需分块,用户从任意方向贴近手机图标都是选中同一个场景化服务。For example, in the example shown in Figure 11, if the user wants to select a scene-based service option, such as an outdoor running service option, the user can drag the smart watch icon to the area corresponding to the outdoor running service option, and then select the service option via the outdoor running service option. The corresponding area is close to the direction of the mobile phone icon, and the trajectory of the user's finger can refer to the schematic trajectory in the user interface 1100 . When the smart watch icon reaches the adsorption area, the user releases the finger, the service corresponding to the outdoor running starts, and the mobile phone jumps to display the outdoor running interface shown in the user interface 800 . Of course, if there is only one scene-based service option, the circular floating area 1101 does not need to be divided into blocks, and the user will select the same scene-based service when approaching the mobile phone icon from any direction.
再如在图12所示的示例中,如果用户想选择某个场景化服务选项,如户外跑步服务选项,用户可以将智能手表图标拖拽到户外跑步服务选项对应的区域中,然后松开手指,即表示选中户外跑步服务选项,户外跑步对应的服务启动,手机跳转显示用户界面800所示的户外跑步的界面。其用户的手指运动轨迹可以参考用户界面1200中的示意轨迹。当然,如果只有一项场景化服务选项,该圆形悬浮区域1201不需分块,用户拖拽设备图标到悬浮区域1201中任意一个位置松开图标都是选中同一个场景化服务。As another example in the example shown in Figure 12, if the user wants to select a scenario-based service option, such as the outdoor running service option, the user can drag the smart watch icon to the area corresponding to the outdoor running service option, and then release the finger , which means that the outdoor running service option is selected, the service corresponding to the outdoor running is started, and the mobile phone jumps to display the outdoor running interface shown in the user interface 800 . The trajectory of the user's finger can refer to the schematic trajectory in the user interface 1200 . Of course, if there is only one scene-based service option, the circular floating area 1201 does not need to be divided into blocks, and the user drags the device icon to any position in the floating area 1201 and releases the icon to select the same scene-based service.
图12示出的交互方式相比于图11示出的交互方式,用户操作更简易,误选概率更低。Compared with the interaction mode shown in FIG. 11 , the interaction mode shown in FIG. 12 is easier for the user to operate, and the probability of wrong selection is lower.
超级终端系统可以基于当前设备组合、查询到的各个设备可提供的原子化服务,再根据用户实际选择的场景化服务,或基于用户常用服务组合,或者用户设定的默认服务组合,或者基于生活认知最适合该场景下的服务组合,或者从服务器获取到该场景下使用频率最多的服务组合等,自动设置该场景下的原子化服务组合,省去用户繁琐的选择操作。The hyper terminal system can be based on the current device combination, the atomized services that can be provided by each device that can be queried, and then based on the scene service actually selected by the user, or based on the user's usual service combination, or the default service combination set by the user, or based on the life Cognition is the most suitable service combination in this scenario, or the most frequently used service combination in this scenario is obtained from the server, and the atomic service combination in this scenario is automatically set, saving users from tedious selection operations.
例如,手机与智能电视组成超级终端后,若用户选择的场景化服务为跨屏会议,自动设置原子化服务组合为:音频输出功能由智能电视提供、音频输入(麦克风)功能由手机提供、摄像头功能由智能电视提供、显示功能由智能电视提供。再例如,手机与智能手表、耳机、 跑步机组成超级终端后,若用户选择的场景化服务为室内跑步,自动设置原子化服务组合为:音频输出功能由耳机提供、音频输入(麦克风)功能由耳机提供、摄像头功能由手机提供、显示功能由跑步机提供。For example, after a mobile phone and a smart TV form a super terminal, if the scene service selected by the user is a multi-screen conference, the atomic service combination is automatically set as follows: the audio output function is provided by the smart TV, the audio input (microphone) function is provided by the mobile phone, and the camera The function is provided by the smart TV, and the display function is provided by the smart TV. For another example, after a mobile phone, a smart watch, earphones, and a treadmill form a super terminal, if the scene service selected by the user is indoor running, the atomic service combination is automatically set as follows: the audio output function is provided by the earphone, and the audio input (microphone) function is provided by the The earphones provide, the camera function is provided by the mobile phone, and the display function is provided by the treadmill.
在一些实施例中,超级终端系统可以根据不同的设备类型具有的设备特征,分析最佳原子化服务组合。例如,智能电视具有较大的屏幕,用户视觉观看体验较好,更适合观看视频,那么在智能电视与手机组成超级终端时,优先设置智能电视提供显示功能。智能音箱具有较强的音频输出能力,扬声效果较好,更适合播放音频,那么在智能音箱与手机组成超级终端时,优先设置智能音箱提供音频输出功能。耳机体积小,易携带,无需外放,不打扰周围人,还可以具有降噪效果,屏蔽外界环境噪音,适合在公共场合收听音频,如在公共场合通话、听音乐等,那么在耳机与手机组成超级终端时,优先设置耳机提供音频输出功能。智能手表、智能手环可以相比于手机更精确的测量用户的运动数据或心率等其他健康信息,那么在智能手表或智能手环与手机组成超级终端时,优先设置采用智能手表或智能手环获取的运动数据;笔记本电脑处理能力强大,更适合办公,那么在笔记本电脑与手机组成超级终端时,优先设置笔记本电脑提供显示功能、键盘输入功能等。这里不再赘述设备类型及设备特征,以上示例说明不对其他实施例构成限制。In some embodiments, the hyperterminal system can analyze the optimal atomic service combination according to the device characteristics of different device types. For example, a smart TV has a larger screen, and the user has a better viewing experience and is more suitable for watching videos. Then, when a smart TV and a mobile phone form a super terminal, the smart TV is given priority to provide display functions. Smart speakers have strong audio output capabilities, better sound effects, and are more suitable for playing audio. When a smart speaker and a mobile phone form a super terminal, the smart speaker is given priority to provide audio output. The headset is small in size, easy to carry, does not need to be placed outside, does not disturb people around, and can also have a noise reduction effect, shielding external environmental noise, suitable for listening to audio in public places, such as talking in public places, listening to music, etc. When forming a HyperTerminal, it is preferred to set the earphone to provide audio output function. Smart watches and smart bracelets can measure the user's exercise data or heart rate and other health information more accurately than mobile phones. When smart watches or smart bracelets and mobile phones form a super terminal, the smart watch or smart bracelet is preferred. The acquired motion data; the laptop has powerful processing capability and is more suitable for office work, so when the laptop and mobile phone form a super terminal, the laptop is given priority to provide display functions, keyboard input functions, etc. The device type and device features will not be described in detail here, and the above examples do not limit other embodiments.
在一些实施例中,超级终端支持用户个性化设定原子化服务组合,用户可以根据个人喜好或实际情况手动修改原子化服务组合,将某个原子化服务调整为其他设备提供。如在跨屏会议中,如果周围环境比较嘈杂,用户可以将音频输出功能由智能电视提供,改为由耳机提供。In some embodiments, the hyper terminal supports users to personalize the atomic service combination, and the user can manually modify the atomic service combination according to personal preferences or actual conditions, and adjust a certain atomic service to be provided by other devices. For example, in a multi-screen conference, if the surrounding environment is noisy, the user can change the audio output function provided by the smart TV to the headset.
可选的,第一设备在第七界面上显示第一原子化服务组合,第一原子化服务组合由用户选择,或者第一原子化服务组合是根据以下一项或多项参数确定的原子化服务组合:第一设备和/或第二设备的设备类型、设备特征,或者用户常用的原子化服务组合,或者用户设定默认的原子化服务组合,或者分析得到的最适合第一场景化服务的原子化服务组合,或者从服务器获取到第一场景化服务下使用频率最高的原子化服务组合。Optionally, the first device displays the first atomic service combination on the seventh interface, the first atomic service combination is selected by the user, or the first atomic service combination is determined according to one or more of the following parameters Service combination: the device type and device characteristics of the first device and/or the second device, or the atomic service combination commonly used by the user, or the default atomic service combination set by the user, or the analyzed service that is most suitable for the first scenario Atomic service combination, or the most frequently used atomic service combination obtained from the server under the first scenario service.
参考在前述图10所示的示例中,如果用户在用户界面910中选中原子化服务入口选项,可以显示一个或多个原子化服务组合,如图10所示的用户界面1000和用户界面1010,用户可以自行选择不同原子化服务由不同设备提供。Referring to the aforementioned example shown in FIG. 10, if the user selects the atomic service entry option in the user interface 910, one or more atomic service combinations may be displayed, as shown in the user interface 1000 and the user interface 1010 shown in FIG. 10, Users can choose different atomic services to be provided by different devices.
可理解的,场景化服务、原子化服务只是本实施例中所使用的词语,其代表的含义在本实施例中已经记载,其名称并不能对本实施例构成任何限制。比如,在其他一些实施例中,场景化服务也可以称为场景化功能、场景功能、场景服务、场景化业务、业务功能等其他名词;原子化服务也可以称为元能力、原子能力(Ability)、原子服务、功能组件等其他名词。在本申请实施例中,主要以“场景化服务”、“原子化服务”进行描述。It can be understood that scene-based service and atomized service are only words used in this embodiment, and their representative meanings have been recorded in this embodiment, and their names do not constitute any limitation to this embodiment. For example, in some other embodiments, scenario-based services may also be called scenario-based functions, scenario functions, scenario services, scenario-based services, business functions, and other terms; atomic services may also be called meta-capabilities, atomic capabilities (Ability ), atomic services, functional components, and other nouns. In the embodiment of this application, it is mainly described as "scenario-based service" and "atomized service".
S105,第一设备和/或第二设备运行第一场景化服务,即第一设备运行第一服务,和/或,第二设备运行第二服务。S105, the first device and/or the second device runs the first scenario-based service, that is, the first device runs the first service, and/or the second device runs the second service.
本实施例中对第一设备和/或第二设备运行场景化服务的获知途径不作限制。在一些实施例中,第一设备可以直接通过通信连接通知第二设备运行第一场景化服务对应的原子化服务。在另一些实施例中,第一设备可以将通知运行第一场景化服务的指令发送给云服务器,或者,第一设备可以将自己获得的指令或消息或将自己的运行状态上报给云服务器,然后由云服务器生成运行第一场景化服务的指令,再下发给第二设备。第二设备在接收到运行第一场景化服务的指令后,运行第一场景化服务指示的原子化服务。In this embodiment, there is no limitation on the way of knowing the scenario-based service run by the first device and/or the second device. In some embodiments, the first device may directly notify the second device to run the atomized service corresponding to the first scenario-based service through the communication connection. In some other embodiments, the first device may send an instruction to notify the operation of the first scenario-based service to the cloud server, or the first device may report the instruction or message obtained by itself or its own running status to the cloud server, Then the cloud server generates an instruction to run the first scenario-based service, and sends it to the second device. After receiving the instruction to run the first scenario-based service, the second device runs the atomized service indicated by the first scenario-based service.
其中,第一设备运行第一场景化服务所显示的第三界面与第二设备运行第一场景化服务所显示的第四界面可以不同,也可以相同。Wherein, the third interface displayed by the first device running the first scenario-based service may be different from or the same as the fourth interface displayed by the second device running the first scenario-based service.
可选的,第一场景化服务为运动监测服务,第二设备为可穿戴运动设备,第三界面可以为运动轨迹的画面,第四界面可以为检测到的用户的运动数据,该运动数据可以包括:运动速度、运动距离、运动时间、心率等。Optionally, the first scenario-based service is a motion monitoring service, the second device is a wearable motion device, the third interface can be a picture of a motion track, and the fourth interface can be the detected motion data of the user, and the motion data can be Including: exercise speed, exercise distance, exercise time, heart rate, etc.
参考图8所示的示例,当手机检测到用户点击选中用户界面700中场景化服务选项区域705列出的户外跑步选项707,手机可以跳转至户外跑步相关页面,如用户界面800所示。用户界面800为运动健康应用页面,可以看到运动健康标题栏下面显示有子选项:户外跑步子选项801、室内跑步子选项、心脏健康子选项、血管健康子选项。由于用户在用户界面700中选中户外跑步选项707,所以当前跳转到用户界面800显示的是户外跑步子选项801所对应的页面,如可以显示有地图图示、用户的定位图标、用户运动路线、统计的用户运动量等。Referring to the example shown in FIG. 8 , when the mobile phone detects that the user clicks and selects the outdoor running option 707 listed in the scene service option area 705 in the user interface 700 , the mobile phone can jump to an outdoor running related page, as shown in the user interface 800 . The user interface 800 is a sports and health application page, and you can see that there are sub-options displayed under the sports and health title bar: outdoor running sub-option 801 , indoor running sub-option, heart health sub-option, and vascular health sub-option. Since the user selects the outdoor running option 707 in the user interface 700, the page corresponding to the outdoor running sub-option 801 is currently displayed on the user interface 800, such as a map icon, a user's positioning icon, and a user's exercise route. , Statistical user exercise volume, etc.
相应的,智能手表显示户外跑步相关界面,参考智能手表用户界面802。智能手表用户界面802可以与手机户外跑步相关用户界面800并不一致,智能手表与手机之间可以共享运动数据。在智能手表用户界面802可以显示有智能手表检测到的配速、运动距离、心率、运动时间等运动数据。Correspondingly, the smart watch displays an interface related to outdoor running, refer to the smart watch user interface 802 . The user interface 802 of the smart watch may not be consistent with the user interface 800 related to outdoor running of the mobile phone, and exercise data may be shared between the smart watch and the mobile phone. The smart watch user interface 802 can display exercise data such as pace, exercise distance, heart rate, and exercise time detected by the smart watch.
可选的,参考图18所示的实施例,第一场景化服务为投屏服务,第二设备为大屏设备,第四界面为视频或图像画面,第三界面为控制所述视频或图像画面显示功能的控制界面。Optionally, referring to the embodiment shown in FIG. 18 , the first scenario-based service is a screen projection service, the second device is a large-screen device, the fourth interface is a video or image screen, and the third interface is to control the video or image The control interface of the screen display function.
可选的,第三界面和第四界面显示的画面内容可以相同,参考图19所示的实施例,手机和电视都显示相同的视频画面。Optionally, the screen content displayed on the third interface and the fourth interface may be the same. Referring to the embodiment shown in FIG. 19 , both the mobile phone and the TV display the same video screen.
可选的,当用户选择返回超级终端页面,可以显示有第二控件与第一控件吸附在一起。两个设备图标吸附在一起可以指两个设备对应的图标的边缘相切,或者,两个设备图标吸附在一起也可以是指这两个设备图标全部或部分重叠在一起。本实施例对吸附的表现形式不作特殊限制。例如可以参见图14所示的用户界面1400,超级终端页面中的设备连接状态图示区域显示智能手表图标吸附在手机图标周围,表示智能手表已与手机建立连接,可以协同工作。Optionally, when the user chooses to return to the HyperTerminal page, a second control may be displayed that is adsorbed together with the first control. The two device icons being attracted together may refer to that the edges of the icons corresponding to the two devices are tangent, or the two device icons being adsorbed together may also refer to that the two device icons are completely or partially overlapped. In this embodiment, no special limitation is imposed on the form of adsorption. For example, referring to the user interface 1400 shown in FIG. 14 , the device connection status icon area on the hyperterminal page shows that the smart watch icon is attached to the mobile phone icon, indicating that the smart watch has established a connection with the mobile phone and can work together.
在一些实施例中,当用户拖拽关联设备图标从不同方位、不同区域向核心设备图标吸附,产生的效果、触发的服务也可能不同。In some embodiments, when the user drags the associated device icon to attach to the core device icon from different orientations and different areas, the resulting effects and triggered services may also be different.
在投屏场景下,第一设备根据释放拖拽操作时,第二控件与第一控件的相对位置,确定第一设备的屏幕界面投屏在第二设备屏幕中的位置。具体可以参考图15、图16、图17所描述的实施例。In the screen projection scenario, the first device determines the position of the screen interface of the first device on the screen of the second device according to the relative position of the second control and the first control when the drag operation is released. For details, reference may be made to the embodiments described in FIG. 15 , FIG. 16 , and FIG. 17 .
如果相对位置为第二控件在第一控件的左侧,那么第一设备的屏幕界面投屏在第二设备屏幕中的右侧;如果相对位置为第二控件在第一控件的右侧,那么第一设备的屏幕界面投屏在第二设备屏幕中的左侧;如果相对位置为第二控件在第一控件的中间,那么第一设备的屏幕界面全屏投屏在第二设备屏幕上。If the relative position is that the second control is on the left side of the first control, then the screen interface of the first device is projected on the right side of the screen of the second device; if the relative position is that the second control is on the right side of the first control, then The screen interface of the first device is projected on the left side of the screen of the second device; if the relative position is that the second control is in the middle of the first control, then the full screen of the screen interface of the first device is projected on the screen of the second device.
如果用户想让某个关联设备脱离超级终端系统,或者结束服务,可以在超级终端界面中,在该关联设备图标与核心设备处于吸附的状态下,操作第四用户操作,第四用户操作包括将第一控件与第二控件分开的操作。如选中第二控件,并拖拽第二控件向着远离第一控件的方向移动,直到移动出指定区域后,释放第二控件的操作。在一个示例中,用户可以选中该关联设备图标并拖动该关联设备图标远离核心设备图标。当手机检测到用户拖动该关联设备图标远离核心设备图标大于第三距离时,当用户松开手指,该关联设备图标回到未连接之前的 位置,解除吸附状态,该关联设备同时也断开与核心设备的连接,脱离超级终端系统,该设备在超级终端中所提供的服务也随之终止。或者,当用户点击了某个处于已连接状态的关联设备,或者,用户按住某个关联设备图标和核心设备图标,朝着相反方向拖拽,使其分开,可以触发该关联设备与核心设备断开连接,在界面上表现为该关联设备图标与核心设备图标分开,该关联设备图标回到未连接状态的位置。本实施例对触发吸附和解除吸附的条件或用户操作不作限制。If the user wants to detach an associated device from the HyperTerminal system or end the service, he can operate the fourth user operation on the HyperTerminal interface under the condition that the icon of the associated device is attached to the core device. The fourth user operation includes Operation of the first control separately from the second control. For example, select the second control, and drag the second control to move away from the first control until it moves out of the specified area, then release the operation of the second control. In one example, the user can select the associated device icon and drag the associated device icon away from the core device icon. When the mobile phone detects that the user drags the icon of the associated device away from the icon of the core device for a distance greater than the third distance, when the user releases the finger, the icon of the associated device returns to the position before it was not connected, the adsorption state is released, and the associated device is also disconnected If the connection with the core device is separated from the HyperTerminal system, the service provided by the device in the HyperTerminal will also be terminated. Or, when the user clicks an associated device that is in the connected state, or the user presses an associated device icon and a core device icon, and drags them in opposite directions to separate them, the associated device and the core device can be triggered. Disconnection means that the icon of the associated device is separated from the icon of the core device on the interface, and the icon of the associated device returns to the unconnected state. In this embodiment, there is no limitation on conditions or user operations for triggering adsorption and releasing adsorption.
在一些实施例中,超级终端界面上也可以设置一键断开控件,点击该一键断开控件,可以使得全部关联设备与核心设备断开连接,恢复到核心设备独立暂无任何关联设备连接的状态,各个关联设备提供的服务也随之终止。In some embodiments, a one-key disconnection control can also be set on the HyperTerminal interface. Clicking the one-key disconnection control can disconnect all associated devices from the core device, and restore the core device to be independent without any associated device connection. state, the services provided by each associated device will also be terminated.
可以理解的是,不限于关联设备与核心设备之间连接组成超级终端,在另一些实施例中,用户也可以在超级终端界面中,连接某个关联设备与另一个关联设备,组成超级终端。也就是说,用户可以连接任意两个或两个以上的设备,具有连接关系的设备不限于是关联设备或是核心设备,如关联设备智能音箱和智能电视可以直接连接组成超级终端,其各种功能、示意界面或用户操作可以参考前述各个实施例中的描述,这里不多赘述。It can be understood that the hyperterminal is not limited to the connection between the associated device and the core device. In other embodiments, the user can also connect an associated device with another associated device in the hyperterminal interface to form a hyperterminal. That is to say, the user can connect any two or more devices, and the connected devices are not limited to associated devices or core devices. For example, associated devices, smart speakers and smart TVs can be directly connected to form a super terminal. For functions, schematic interfaces or user operations, reference may be made to the descriptions in the foregoing embodiments, and details are not repeated here.
在一些实施例中,第一设备检测到作用于第二界面上的第三用户操作,第三用户操作用于关联第四设备和第一设备,第三用户操作包括选中指示第四设备的第三控件操作。响应于第三用户操作,第一设备显示第六界面,第六界面中显示有第一控件、第二控件、第三控件吸附在一起,第六界面中还显示有第三场景化服务选项,第三场景化服务选项是根据第一设备、第二设备和第四设备确定的,第三场景化服务选项与第一场景化服务选项不同。参考图9所示的实施例,这里不多赘述。In some embodiments, the first device detects a third user operation acting on the second interface, the third user operation is used to associate the fourth device with the first device, and the third user operation includes selecting the third user operation indicating the fourth device. Three control operation. In response to the third user operation, the first device displays a sixth interface, the sixth interface displays the first control, the second control, and the third control are adsorbed together, and the sixth interface also displays a third scene-based service option, The third scenario-based service option is determined according to the first device, the second device, and the fourth device, and the third scenario-based service option is different from the first scenario-based service option. Referring to the embodiment shown in FIG. 9 , details are not repeated here.
由上可见,本申请实施例提供了核心设备与多个关联设备之间交互的统一入口,即超级终端界面,用户可以在超级终端界面中触发任两个或两个以上的电子设备组成超级终端。并且,超级终端可以根据各个设备的设备类型、设备特征、产品定位、常用功能、设备状态、当前运行应用、当前设备所处环境等情况,判断使用场景,并基于使用场景提供一个或多个场景化服务选项、原子化服务组合选项或交互功能选项。用户可以根据个人需求快捷选择场景化服务和/或原子化服务,无需繁琐的分散设置,由此,可以解决电子设备间的交互功能的设置入口分布零散,设置繁琐,无法给用户列举丰富的使用场景的问题。It can be seen from the above that the embodiment of the present application provides a unified entrance for the interaction between the core device and multiple associated devices, that is, the hyper terminal interface, and the user can trigger any two or more electronic devices in the hyper terminal interface to form a hyper terminal . In addition, the HyperTerminal can judge the usage scenarios based on the device type, device features, product positioning, common functions, device status, current running applications, current device environment, etc., and provide one or more scenarios based on the usage scenarios. service options, atomized service composition options, or interactive function options. Users can quickly select scene-based services and/or atomized services according to their personal needs, without cumbersome decentralized settings. Therefore, it can solve the problem that the settings of interactive functions between electronic devices are scattered and cumbersome, and it is impossible to list rich uses for users. scene problem.
本申请实施例通过用户选定设备组合,针对性提供了该设备组合下可用的场景化服务和/或原子化服务,给用户列举了详尽、丰富的使用场景,引导用户使用超级终端的功能充分的探索更多的应用场景,实现了按设备组合推荐场景化服务的效果。The embodiment of the present application provides the scenario-based services and/or atomized services available under the device combination through the user-selected device combination, lists detailed and rich usage scenarios for the user, and guides the user to use the hyper terminal with sufficient functions. Explore more application scenarios and achieve the effect of recommending scenario-based services based on device combinations.
结合前述实施例,下面说明本申请实施例提供的通信系统10的功能模块。With reference to the foregoing embodiments, the following describes the functional modules of the communication system 10 provided by the embodiments of the present application.
参考图21,图21示出了通信系统10的功能模块。通信系统10可以包括设备组合生成模块2101,场景服务决策模块2102,场景服务提供模块2103,原子服务提供模块2104等。其中,通信系统10又可称为超级终端,超级终端中可以包括核心设备与一个或多个关联设备。关于超级终端、核心设备、关联设备等解释说明,可以参考前述实施例,这里不再赘述。Referring to FIG. 21 , FIG. 21 shows functional modules of the communication system 10 . The communication system 10 may include a device combination generating module 2101, a scenario service decision module 2102, a scenario service providing module 2103, an atomic service providing module 2104, and the like. Wherein, the communication system 10 may also be called a hyper terminal, and the hyper terminal may include a core device and one or more associated devices. Regarding the explanations of the hyper terminal, the core device, the associated device, etc., reference may be made to the foregoing embodiments, and details are not repeated here.
其中,设备组合生成模块2101,可以用于超级终端中核心设备与关联设备的组合等,包括实现核心设备发现周围关联设备,在界面上指示关联设备与核心设备之间的位置关系或信号强弱关系等,以及核心设备与关联设备连接等功能。核心设备上可以显示有超级终端界面,在超级终端界面上可以显示发现到的周围的关联设备。在一些实施例中,用户可以拖拽关联 设备图标靠近核心设备图标,在到达指定区域时,关联设备图标可以吸附在核心设备图标边缘,表示核心设备已经与关联设备建立连接。关于核心设备与关联设备的连接情况、用户操作、示意界面等说明,可以参考图5、图6、图15、图16、图17等前述描述的实施例,这里不再赘述。Among them, the device combination generation module 2101 can be used for the combination of the core device and the associated device in the hyper terminal, etc., including realizing the discovery of the surrounding associated devices by the core device, and indicating the positional relationship or signal strength between the associated device and the core device on the interface Relationships, etc., as well as functions such as connecting core devices and associated devices. A hyper terminal interface may be displayed on the core device, and the discovered surrounding associated devices may be displayed on the hyper terminal interface. In some embodiments, the user can drag the associated device icon close to the core device icon, and when reaching the specified area, the associated device icon can be attached to the edge of the core device icon, indicating that the core device has established a connection with the associated device. Regarding the connection between the core device and the associated device, user operations, schematic interface, etc., you can refer to the above-described embodiments such as FIG. 5 , FIG. 6 , FIG. 15 , FIG. 16 , and FIG. 17 , and will not repeat them here.
场景服务决策模块2102,可以用于基于当前已经连接的设备类型和/或设备特征、产品定位、常用功能等信息,或者根据所检测到用户当前所处的环境,或者设备的运行状态等情况,分析当前用户的使用场景。场景服务决策模块2102可以划分出多种消费者使用场景。在一个示例中,消费者使用场景可以包括以下五个类别:移动办公、智能家居、影音娱乐、运动健康、智能出行。当然,消费者使用场景的分类并非一成不变,场景服务决策模块2102可以不断更新、扩充或细化更多的使用场景,本实施例不作限制,具体可以根据实际情况进行变动。比如说新增了之前未出现过的关联设备或功能,可能会导致出现新的使用场景。具体说明可以参考前述描述的实施例,这里不再赘述。The scene service decision module 2102 can be used to base on the currently connected device type and/or device features, product positioning, common functions and other information, or according to the detected environment where the user is currently in, or the operating status of the device, etc., Analyze current user usage scenarios. Scenario service decision module 2102 can classify multiple consumer usage scenarios. In an example, consumer usage scenarios may include the following five categories: mobile office, smart home, audio-visual entertainment, sports and health, and smart travel. Of course, the classification of consumer usage scenarios is not static, and the scenario service decision module 2102 can continuously update, expand or refine more usage scenarios, which are not limited in this embodiment, and can be changed according to actual conditions. For example, the addition of associated devices or functions that have not appeared before may lead to new usage scenarios. For specific description, reference may be made to the above-described embodiments, and details are not repeated here.
场景服务提供模块2103,用于在多个设备连接时,根据核心设备和/或关联设备的设备类型、设备特征、产品定位、设备用途、设备可以提供的协同服务、设备当前所处环境、设备运行状态、用户最近使用的应用、当前运行应用、用户操作输入的方位信息等情况,综合考量得出的一个或多个场景化服务选项,并在用户界面上予以显示,方便用户快速启动相关服务或功能。The scene service providing module 2103 is used to, when multiple devices are connected, according to the device type, device characteristics, product positioning, device usage, collaborative service that the device can provide, the current environment of the device, the device One or more scenario-based service options based on comprehensive consideration of running status, recently used applications by users, currently running applications, location information input by users, etc., and displayed on the user interface, so that users can quickly start related services or function.
在一些实施例中,在列出场景化服务选项时,场景服务提供模块2103可以根据用户最近对不同协同服务的使用频率,或者检测当前设备所处的环境,或者用户最近运行的应用等情况,计算各场景化服务选项被选择的概率,在场景化服务选项区域中优先靠前显示推测被选择概率大的场景化服务选项。当然,场景化服务选项并非一成不变,场景服务提供模块2103可以不断更新、扩充或细化更多的场景化服务选项,本实施例不作限制,具体可以根据实际情况进行变动。在一些实施例中,用户可以自定义添加场景化服务,如用户给某个使用场景设置名称,并让该场景关联其他应用服务或系统服务。该新添加的场景化服务选项与其他场景化服务选项并列显示在超级终端界面中。场景服务提供模块2103可以综合考虑以上一项或多项因素,合理推荐场景化服务选项。In some embodiments, when listing the scenario-based service options, the scenario service providing module 2103 may detect the environment where the current device is located, or the application recently run by the user, etc. The probability of each scenario-based service option being selected is calculated, and the scenario-based service option that is estimated to have a higher probability of being selected is displayed first in the scenario-based service option area. Of course, the scenario-based service options are not static, and the scenario-based service providing module 2103 can continuously update, expand or refine more scenario-based service options, which are not limited in this embodiment, and can be changed according to actual conditions. In some embodiments, the user can customize and add scene-based services, for example, the user sets a name for a usage scene and associates the scene with other application services or system services. The newly added scenario-based service option is displayed in parallel with other scenario-based service options on the HyperTerminal interface. The scenario service providing module 2103 may comprehensively consider one or more of the above factors, and reasonably recommend scenario-based service options.
场景服务提供模块2103还可以用于推荐关联设备。场景服务提供模块2103可以基于当前组成超级终端系统的设备的类型,分析当前场景,向用户列举推荐适合当前场景的其他设备,以帮助用户获取更好的场景体验;或者推测更多可扩充的使用场景,然后向用户列举推荐其他设备,假如用户采用系统推荐的设备,可以进一步地扩充更多、更丰富的使用场景。The scenario service providing module 2103 may also be used to recommend associated devices. The scene service providing module 2103 can analyze the current scene based on the types of devices that currently make up the hyper terminal system, and list and recommend other devices suitable for the current scene to the user, so as to help the user obtain a better scene experience; or speculate more scalable usage Scenarios, and then list and recommend other devices to the user. If the user adopts the device recommended by the system, more and richer usage scenarios can be further expanded.
关于更多场景服务提供模块2103可以提供的功能的描述,可以参考图7、图8、图9、图11、图12、图13A、图13B、图13C、图13D、图15、图16、图17、图18、图19等前述实施例的说明,这里不再赘述。For more descriptions of the functions that the scene service providing module 2103 can provide, please refer to Figure 7, Figure 8, Figure 9, Figure 11, Figure 12, Figure 13A, Figure 13B, Figure 13C, Figure 13D, Figure 15, Figure 16, The descriptions of the foregoing embodiments such as FIG. 17 , FIG. 18 , and FIG. 19 will not be repeated here.
原子服务提供模块2104,可以用于基于当前设备组合、查询到的各个设备可提供的原子化服务,再根据用户实际选择的场景化服务,或基于用户常用服务组合,或者用户设定的默认服务组合,或者基于生活认知最适合该场景下的服务组合,或者从服务器获取到该场景下使用频率最多的服务组合等,自动设置该场景下的原子化服务组合,省去用户繁琐的选择操作。原子化服务指的是可独立运行的最小能力单元,是对单一功能/能力进行抽象封装的概念,可以是硬件服务,也可以是软件服务。The atomic service providing module 2104 can be used to provide atomized services based on the current device combination and each device that can be queried, and then based on the scene service actually selected by the user, or based on the user's common service combination, or the default service set by the user Combination, or the service combination that is most suitable for the scenario based on life cognition, or the service combination that is most frequently used in the scenario is obtained from the server, etc., and the atomic service combination in the scenario is automatically set, saving the user from tedious selection operations . Atomic service refers to the smallest capability unit that can run independently. It is a concept of abstract encapsulation of a single function/capability. It can be a hardware service or a software service.
在一些实施例中,原子服务提供模块2104支持用户个性化设定原子化服务组合,用户可以根据个人喜好或实际情况手动修改原子化服务组合,将某个原子化服务调整为其他设备提 供。如在跨屏会议中,如果周围环境比较嘈杂,用户可以将音频输出功能由智能电视提供,改为由耳机提供。In some embodiments, the atomic service providing module 2104 supports users to personalize the atomic service combination, and the user can manually modify the atomic service combination according to personal preference or actual situation, and adjust a certain atomic service to be provided by other devices. For example, in a multi-screen conference, if the surrounding environment is noisy, the user can change the audio output function provided by the smart TV to the headset.
关于更多原子服务提供模块2104的功能性描述,可以参考图10等前述实施例的说明,这里不再赘述。For more functional descriptions of the atomic service providing module 2104, reference may be made to the descriptions of the foregoing embodiments such as FIG. 10 , and details are not repeated here.
在一些实施例中,可加入超级终端的电子设备可以包括:同账号设备、跨账号设备、无账号设备。In some embodiments, the electronic devices that can be added to the HyperTerminal may include: devices with the same account, devices with different accounts, and devices without accounts.
上述同账号设备可以包括其登录账号与超级终端的核心设备登录账号为同一账号的电子设备。例如,张三的手机和张三的平板电脑中登录的账号为同一个账号,即张三的账号。在超级终端的核心设备为上述张三的手机的情况下,张三的平板电脑可以作为同账号设备加入该超级终端。The aforementioned device with the same account may include an electronic device whose login account is the same as the login account of the core device of the hyper terminal. For example, the accounts logged into Zhang San's mobile phone and Zhang San's tablet computer are the same account, that is, Zhang San's account. In the case that the core device of the hyperterminal is Zhang San's mobile phone, Zhang San's tablet computer can join the hyperterminal as a device with the same account.
上述同账号设备还可以包括与超级终端的核心设备配对,与该核心设备上登录账号关联的电子设备。在一些实施例中,一些电子设备(如耳机、智能手表、智能手环等)不具备独立登录账号的能力。用户可以通过手机(或者平板电脑等具备独立登录账号能力的电子设备)与上述电子设备配对,从而将上述电子设备与手机上登录的账号关联,便于通过手机控制和管理上述电子设备。上述配对的方法可以包括蓝牙配对、Wi-Fi配对等等。本申请实施例对上述配对的方法不作限定。例如,张三的耳机不具备独立登录账号的能力。张三的手机和张三的耳机配对。那么,张三的耳机与张三的手机上登录账号(即张三的账号)关联。即张三的耳机可以是属于张三的账号下管理的一个电子设备。在超级终端的核心设备为上述张三的手机的情况下,张三的耳机可以作为同账号设备加入该超级终端。The device with the same account may also include an electronic device that is paired with the core device of the hyper terminal and associated with the login account on the core device. In some embodiments, some electronic devices (such as earphones, smart watches, smart bracelets, etc.) do not have the ability to independently log in to an account. The user can pair the above-mentioned electronic device through a mobile phone (or an electronic device such as a tablet computer capable of independently logging in to an account), thereby associating the above-mentioned electronic device with the account registered on the mobile phone, so as to facilitate the control and management of the above-mentioned electronic device through the mobile phone. The aforementioned pairing method may include Bluetooth pairing, Wi-Fi pairing, and the like. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the above pairing method. For example, Zhang San's headset does not have the ability to independently log in to the account. Zhang San's mobile phone is paired with Zhang San's headset. Then, Zhang San's headset is associated with the login account on Zhang San's mobile phone (that is, Zhang San's account). That is, Zhang San's earphone may be an electronic device managed under Zhang San's account. In the case that the core device of the hyperterminal is Zhang San's mobile phone, Zhang San's earphone can be added to the hyperterminal as a device with the same account.
上述跨账号设备可以包括其登录账号与超级终端的核心设备登录账号不同的电子设备。例如,张三的手机上登录账号为张三的账号。李四的平板电脑上登录账号为李四的账号。张三的手机登录账号与李四的平板电脑登录账号不同。在超级终端的核心设备为上述张三的手机的情况下,李四的平板电脑可以作为跨账号设备加入该超级终端。The above-mentioned cross-account device may include an electronic device whose login account is different from the login account of the core device of the hyper terminal. For example, the login account on Zhang San's mobile phone is Zhang San's account. The login account on Li Si's tablet computer is Li Si's account. Zhang San's mobile phone login account is different from Li Si's tablet computer login account. In the case that the core device of the hyperterminal is Zhang San's mobile phone, Li Si's tablet computer can join the hyperterminal as a cross-account device.
上述跨账号设备还可以包括通过与其它电子设备配对而关联一个账号,且关联的账号与超级终端的核心设备登录账号不同的电子设备。例如,李四的手机上登录账号为李四的账号。李四的耳机与李四的手机配对,从而与李四的账号关联。在超级终端的核心设备为上述张三的手机(登录账号为张三的账号)的情况下,李四的耳机可以作为跨账号设备加入该超级终端。The above-mentioned cross-account device may also include an electronic device associated with an account through pairing with other electronic devices, and the associated account is different from the login account of the core device of the HyperTerminal. For example, the login account on Li Si's mobile phone is Li Si's account. Li Si's earphone is paired with Li Si's mobile phone, thereby being associated with Li Si's account. In the case that the core device of the hyperterminal is Zhang San's mobile phone (the login account is Zhang San's account), Li Si's earphone can be added to the hyperterminal as a cross-account device.
上述无账号设备可以是没有登录账号,且没有关联账号的电子设备。其它电子设备(如手机、平板电脑等)与上述无账号设备建立通信连接之后,可以与上述无账号设备协同工作,为用户提供场景化服务。上述无账号设备可以相当于公用设备。例如,打印机中没有登录账号,且没有关联账号。在超级终端的核心设备为上述张三的手机(登录账号为张三的账号)的情况下,打印机可以作为无账号设备加入该超级终端。The aforementioned device without an account may be an electronic device without a login account and no associated account. After other electronic devices (such as mobile phones, tablet computers, etc.) establish a communication connection with the above-mentioned unaccounted devices, they can cooperate with the above-mentioned unaccounted devices to provide users with scene-based services. The aforementioned device without an account may be equivalent to a public device. For example, there is no login account in the printer, and there is no associated account. In the case that the core device of the hyperterminal is Zhang San's mobile phone (the login account is Zhang San's account), the printer can be added to the hyperterminal as a device without an account.
本申请实施例对上述同账号设备、跨账号设备、无账号设备的类型不作限定。The embodiment of the present application does not limit the types of the above-mentioned same-account device, cross-account device, and non-account device.
在一些实施例中,上述跨账号设备加入超级终端时,可以先进行设备绑定。其中,超级终端的核心设备可以请求与上述跨账号设备绑定。待上述跨账号设备同意绑定之后,核心设备可以与上述跨账号设备绑定,从而上述跨账号设备可以加入超级终端。超级终端可以利用上述跨账号设备为用户提供场景化服务。In some embodiments, when the above-mentioned cross-account device joins the hyperterminal, device binding may be performed first. Wherein, the core device of the hyper terminal may request to be bound with the above-mentioned cross-account device. After the above-mentioned cross-account device agrees to bind, the core device can be bound with the above-mentioned cross-account device, so that the above-mentioned cross-account device can join the hyperterminal. The HyperTerminal can use the above-mentioned cross-account devices to provide users with scenario-based services.
可以理解的,上述跨账号设备所属的用户,与超级终端的核心设备所属的用户通常不是 同一个用户。核心设备所属的用户想要利用上述跨账号设备提供场景化服务,需要得到跨账号设备所属用户的同意。那么,在将上述跨账号设备加入超级终端时,核心设备可以与上述跨账号设备进行设备绑定,来请求跨账号设备所属的用户同意核心设备所属的用户使用跨账号设备。这样可以减少跨设备账号所属的用户在不同意或者不知情的情况下,自己的电子设备被其它用户使用的情况,提高用户的使用体验。It can be understood that the user to which the above-mentioned cross-account device belongs is usually not the same user as the user to which the core device of the HyperTerminal belongs. If the user who belongs to the core device wants to use the above-mentioned cross-account device to provide scenario-based services, he needs to obtain the consent of the user who belongs to the cross-account device. Then, when the above-mentioned cross-account device is added to the hyperterminal, the core device can perform device binding with the above-mentioned cross-account device to request the user to which the cross-account device belongs to agree that the user to which the core device belongs to use the cross-account device. This can reduce the situation that the user who belongs to the cross-device account does not agree or know that his electronic device is used by other users, and improves the user experience.
在一些实施例中,上述同账号设备加入超级终端时,可以无需进行上述设备绑定的过程。可以理解的,上述同账号设备所属的用户,与超级终端的核心设备所属的用户通常是同一个用户。核心设备所属的用户想要利用自己的其它设备与核心设备协同,可以通过前述图5~图8所示的方法使得核心设备与同账号设备协同,提供场景化服务。这样,用户使用自己的多个电子设备协同,可以无需进行设备绑定。这可以简化用户使用超级终端提供场景化服务的操作,提高用户的使用体验。In some embodiments, when the above-mentioned device with the same account joins the hyperterminal, the above-mentioned device binding process may not be performed. It can be understood that the user to which the above-mentioned device with the same account belongs is usually the same user as the user to which the core device of the hyper terminal belongs. If the user who belongs to the core device wants to use other devices of his own to cooperate with the core device, he can use the method shown in Figure 5 to Figure 8 to enable the core device to cooperate with the device with the same account to provide scene-based services. In this way, the user uses his or her multiple electronic devices to cooperate without device binding. This can simplify the user's operation of using the HyperTerminal to provide scene-based services and improve the user experience.
在一些实施例中,上述无账号设备加入超级终端,可以进行设备绑定,或者也可以不进行设备绑定。In some embodiments, the above-mentioned unaccounted device joins the hyperterminal, and device binding may be performed, or device binding may not be performed.
下面具体介绍本申请实施例提供的一种电子设备加入超级终端,进行设备绑定的场景。The following specifically introduces a scenario in which an electronic device joins a hyper terminal and performs device binding provided by the embodiment of the present application.
图22A~图22H示例性示出了电子设备加入超级终端,进行设备绑定的场景示意图。22A to 22H exemplarily show schematic diagrams of scenarios where an electronic device joins a hyperterminal and performs device binding.
如图22A所示,电子设备100可以显示用户界面2210。这里以电子设备100为手机作为示例进行说明。不限于手机,电子设备100还可以为其它类型的电子设备(如平板电脑、笔记本电脑等等)。用户界面2210可以参考前述图5所示的用户界面500的介绍。As shown in FIG. 22A , the electronic device 100 may display a user interface 2210 . Here, the electronic device 100 is taken as an example for illustration. Not limited to mobile phones, the electronic device 100 may also be other types of electronic devices (such as tablet computers, notebook computers, etc.). For the user interface 2210, reference may be made to the introduction of the aforementioned user interface 500 shown in FIG. 5 .
其中,用户界面2210可以包含设备连接状态图示2211和添加控件2212。设备连接状态图示2211中可包含手机图标505。该手机图标505可表示核心设备为手机,也即电子设备100。围绕在手机图标505周围的设备图标及名称代表的电子设备,可以是电子设备100搜索到的电子设备。例如,设备连接状态图示2211中的Sound X图标、张三的FreeBuds图标、张三的MatePad图标、张三的MateBook图标。Wherein, the user interface 2210 may include a device connection status icon 2211 and an adding control 2212 . The device connection status icon 2211 may include a mobile phone icon 505 . The mobile phone icon 505 may indicate that the core device is a mobile phone, that is, the electronic device 100 . The electronic devices represented by the device icons and names surrounding the mobile phone icon 505 may be the electronic devices searched by the electronic device 100 . For example, the Sound X icon in the device connection status icon 2211, the FreeBuds icon of Zhang San, the MatePad icon of Zhang San, and the MateBook icon of Zhang San.
在一些实施例中,当电子设备上登录有账号,该电子设备的名称可以为账号名称+电子设备的类型和/或型号。其它电子设备搜索到该电子设备时,可以显示该电子设备的名称。例如,电子设备的类型为MatePad。该电子设备上登录有账号,且账号名称为“张三”。则该电子设备的名称可以为张三的MatePad。电子设备100搜索到该电子设备,可以在图22A所示的设备连接状态图示2211中显示张三的MatePad图标,以及该电子设备的名称“张三的MatePad”。In some embodiments, when an account is registered on the electronic device, the name of the electronic device may be account name + type and/or model of the electronic device. When other electronic devices search for the electronic device, they can display the name of the electronic device. For example, the type of electronic device is MatePad. An account is registered on the electronic device, and the account name is "Zhang San". Then the name of the electronic device may be Zhang San's MatePad. After the electronic device 100 searches for the electronic device, it may display the icon of Zhang San's MatePad and the name of the electronic device "Zhang San's MatePad" in the device connection status diagram 2211 shown in FIG. 22A .
在一些实施例中,电子设备的名称可以是用户备注的。其中,用户可以通过电子设备100管理与电子设备100配对的电子设备,例如,修改与电子设备100配对的电子设备的名称。示例性地,电子设备100与耳机配对。用户可以通过电子设备100将耳机的名称修改为张三的FreeBuds。电子设备搜索到该耳机,可以在图22A所示的设备连接状态图示2211中显示张三的FreeBuds图标,以及该电子设备的名称“张三的FreeBuds”。In some embodiments, the name of the electronic device may be noted by the user. Wherein, the user can manage the electronic device paired with the electronic device 100 through the electronic device 100 , for example, modify the name of the electronic device paired with the electronic device 100 . Exemplarily, the electronic device 100 is paired with an earphone. The user can modify the name of the headset to Zhang San's FreeBuds through the electronic device 100 . After the electronic device searches for the headset, the icon of Zhang San's FreeBuds and the name of the electronic device "Zhang San's FreeBuds" can be displayed in the device connection status diagram 2211 shown in FIG. 22A .
本申请实施例对上述电子设备的名称确定的方法不作限定。The embodiment of the present application does not limit the method for determining the name of the electronic device.
添加控件2212可用于触发电子设备100搜索其它电子设备。例如,位于电子设备100周围的电子设备、通过互联网Internet实现连接并通信的电子设备等等。The add control 2212 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to search for other electronic devices. For example, electronic devices located around the electronic device 100, electronic devices that are connected and communicate through the Internet, and so on.
在一些实施例中,上述设备连接状态图示2211中,手机图标505周围的设备图标代表的电子设备可以包括同账号设备、与电子设备100完成设备绑定的跨账号设备、无账号设备。也即是说,用户可以通过将手机图标505周围的设备图标拖拽至靠近手机图标505的操作,直接实现该设备图标代表的电子设备与电子设备100的协同工作。In some embodiments, in the above-mentioned device connection status diagram 2211 , the electronic devices represented by the device icons around the mobile phone icon 505 may include devices with the same account, cross-account devices bound with the electronic device 100 , and devices without accounts. That is to say, the user can directly realize the cooperative work between the electronic device represented by the device icon and the electronic device 100 by dragging the device icon around the mobile phone icon 505 close to the mobile phone icon 505 .
除了设备连接状态图示2211中设备图标代表的电子设备,可能还存在能够与电子设备100协同工作的其它电子设备。电子设备100可以响应于作用在添加控件2212上的操作,搜索设备图标未显示在设备连接状态图示2211中的电子设备。例如,与电子设备100未完成设备绑定的跨账号设备、无账号设备等等。In addition to the electronic device represented by the device icon in the device connection state diagram 2211 , there may be other electronic devices that can work together with the electronic device 100 . The electronic device 100 may search for electronic devices whose device icons are not displayed in the device connection state illustration 2211 in response to an operation acting on the add control 2212 . For example, a cross-account device, a non-account device, etc. that have not completed device binding with the electronic device 100 .
当搜索到设备图标未显示在设备连接状态图示2211中的电子设备,电子设备100可以在用户界面2210显示图22B的设备列表2213。设备列表2213中可显示有电子设备100搜索到的电子设备的设备标识,以便于用户选择其中的电子设备来进行设备绑定。其中,设备列表2213中电子设备的设备标识可以包括设备图标和设备名称。When searching for an electronic device whose device icon is not displayed in the device connection status diagram 2211 , the electronic device 100 may display the device list 2213 in FIG. 22B on the user interface 2210 . The device identifications of the electronic devices searched by the electronic device 100 may be displayed in the device list 2213, so that the user may select an electronic device among them for device binding. Wherein, the device identification of the electronic device in the device list 2213 may include a device icon and a device name.
如图22B所示,设备列表2213中可包含智能手环标识2213B、Vision标识2213C、李四的MatePad标识2213D、李四的FreeBuds标识2213E。上述任意一个电子设备的设备标识可用于触发电子设备100与这一个电子设备进行设备绑定。设备列表2213中还可包含搜索控件2213A和取消控件2213F。搜索控件2213A可用于触发电子设备100继续搜索其它电子设备。取消控件2213F可用于触发电子设备100取消显示设备列表2213。As shown in FIG. 22B , the device list 2213 may include a smart bracelet ID 2213B, a Vision ID 2213C, Li Si's MatePad ID 2213D, and Li Si's FreeBuds ID 2213E. The device identifier of any one of the above electronic devices may be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to perform device binding with this electronic device. A search control 2213A and a cancel control 2213F may also be included in the device list 2213 . The search control 2213A can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to continue searching for other electronic devices. The cancel control 2213F can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to cancel displaying the device list 2213 .
如图22B所示,响应于对李四的MatePad标识2213D的操作,电子设备100可以显示图22C所示的连接码设置框2214和输入键盘2215。其中:As shown in FIG. 22B , in response to the operation on Li Si's MatePad logo 2213D, the electronic device 100 may display the connection code setting box 2214 and the input keyboard 2215 shown in FIG. 22C . in:
连接码设置框2214可用于设置电子设备100与上述名称为李四的MatePad的电子设备进行设备绑定的连接码。连接码设置框2214可包含设置提示。该设置提示可以例如是文字信息:连接李四的MatePad,请键入在对方设备上验证的连接码。连接码设置框2214还可包含取消控件2214A和确定控件2214B。取消控件2214A可用于取消电子设备100与名称为李四的MatePad的电子设备进行设备绑定。确定控件2214B可用于触发电子设备100向名称为李四的MatePad的电子设备发送进行设备绑定的绑定请求。The connection code setting box 2214 can be used to set the connection code for device binding between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device named Li Si's MatePad. A connection code setup box 2214 may contain setup prompts. The setting prompt can be, for example, a text message: to connect to Li Si's MatePad, please key in the connection code verified on the other party's device. The connection code setup box 2214 may also include a cancel control 2214A and an OK control 2214B. The cancel control 2214A can be used to cancel the device binding between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device named Si Li's MatePad. The determination control 2214B can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to send a binding request for device binding to the electronic device named Li Si's MatePad.
输入键盘2215可用于用户在连接码设置框2214中输入连接码。输入键盘2215中可包含数字输入键、字母输入键、字符输入键等等。即连接码可以包含以下一种或多种:数字、字母、字符等等。本申请实施例对连接码的组成内容不作限定。例如,连接码可以由6位数字组成:710710。The input keyboard 2215 can be used for the user to input the connection code in the connection code setting box 2214 . The input keyboard 2215 may include number input keys, letter input keys, character input keys and the like. That is, the connection code may contain one or more of the following: numbers, letters, characters, and so on. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the content of the connection code. For example, the connection code can consist of 6 digits: 710710.
如图22C所示,在连接码设置框2214中输入有连接码的情况下,电子设备100可以响应于对确定控件2214B的操作,向电子设备200发送进行设备绑定的绑定请求。电子设备200可以是上述名称为李四的MatePad的电子设备。电子设备100和电子设备200之间可建立有通信连接。As shown in FIG. 22C , if a connection code is input in the connection code setting box 2214, the electronic device 100 may send a binding request for device binding to the electronic device 200 in response to the operation on the determination control 2214B. The electronic device 200 may be the above-mentioned electronic device named Li Si's MatePad. A communication connection may be established between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 .
如图22D所示,在电子设备100请求与电子设备200进行设备绑定的过程中,电子设备100可以显示等待提示框2216。等待提示框2216可用于提示用户要将电子设备200加入核心设备为电子设备100的超级终端,需要等待电子设备200所属用户的同意。等待提示框2216中可包含文字提示:等待对方同意中。本申请实施例对等待提示框2216中的内容不作限定。As shown in FIG. 22D , during the process of the electronic device 100 requesting device binding with the electronic device 200 , the electronic device 100 may display a waiting prompt box 2216 . The waiting prompt box 2216 may be used to prompt the user to wait for the consent of the user to which the electronic device 200 belongs before adding the electronic device 200 to the core device as a hyper terminal of the electronic device 100 . The waiting prompt box 2216 may contain a text prompt: waiting for the other party to agree. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the content in the waiting prompt box 2216 .
当接收到电子设备100发送的绑定请求,电子设备200可以显示图22D所示的绑定提示框2221。绑定提示框2221可用于提示用户电子设备100请求将电子设备200加入超级终端,使得电子设备200能在超级终端中提供场景化服务,并询问用户是否同意。When receiving the binding request sent by the electronic device 100, the electronic device 200 may display a binding prompt box 2221 shown in FIG. 22D. The binding prompt box 2221 can be used to prompt the user that the electronic device 100 requests to add the electronic device 200 to the hyperterminal, so that the electronic device 200 can provide scene-based services in the hyperterminal, and ask the user whether to agree.
绑定提示框2221可包含拒绝控件2221A和同意控件2221B。拒绝控件2221A可用于拒绝电子设备200加入核心设备为电子设备100的超级终端。响应于对拒绝控件2221A的操作,电子设备200可以向电子设备100发送拒绝消息。然后,电子设备100可以提示用户电子设备200拒绝加入超级终端。同意控件2221B可用于同意电子设备200加入核心设备为电子设备100的超级终端。响应于对同意控件2221B的操作,电子设备200可以显示图22E所示的 连接码输入框2222。连接码输入框2222可用于输入连接码。当连接码输入框2222中输入的连接码与用户在前述图22C所示连接码设置框2214中设置的连接码相同,电子设备100和电子设备200可以完成绑定。The binding prompt box 2221 may include a reject control 2221A and an agree control 2221B. The rejection control 2221A can be used to reject the electronic device 200 from joining the hyper terminal whose core device is the electronic device 100 . In response to the manipulation of the rejection control 2221A, the electronic device 200 may send a rejection message to the electronic device 100 . Then, the electronic device 100 may prompt the user that the electronic device 200 refuses to join the HyperTerminal. The consent control 2221B can be used to agree that the electronic device 200 joins the core device as the hyper terminal of the electronic device 100 . In response to the operation of the consent control 2221B, the electronic device 200 may display a connection code input box 2222 shown in FIG. 22E. The connection code input box 2222 may be used to enter a connection code. When the connection code input in the connection code input box 2222 is the same as the connection code set by the user in the connection code setting box 2214 shown in FIG. 22C , the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 can complete the binding.
如图22E所示,连接码输入框2222中输入的连接码为710710,与前述图22C所示连接码设置框2214中设置的连接码相同。然后,响应于对连接码输入框2222中的确定控件2222A的操作,电子设备200可以向电子设备100发送同意消息。上述同意消息中可包含在连接码输入框2222中输入的连接码。当接收到上述同意消息,电子设备100可以验证同意消息中包含的连接码是否准确。当检测出同意消息中包含的连接码准确,电子设备100可以显示图22F所示的用户界面2210。As shown in FIG. 22E, the connection code input in the connection code input box 2222 is 710710, which is the same as the connection code set in the connection code setting box 2214 shown in FIG. 22C. Then, in response to the operation of the determination control 2222A in the connection code input box 2222, the electronic device 200 may transmit a consent message to the electronic device 100. The connection code entered in the connection code input box 2222 may be included in the above-mentioned consent message. When receiving the above-mentioned consent message, the electronic device 100 may verify whether the connection code included in the consent message is correct. When it is detected that the connection code included in the consent message is correct, the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 2210 shown in FIG. 22F .
如图22F所示,电子设备100可以在用户界面2210的设备连接状态图示2211中显示李四的MatePad图标2211A。李四的MatePad图标2211A可以代表名称为李四的MatePad的电子设备,即电子设备200。As shown in FIG. 22F , the electronic device 100 may display a MatePad icon 2211A of Li Si in the device connection state illustration 2211 of the user interface 2210 . Li Si's MatePad icon 2211A may represent an electronic device named Li Si's MatePad, that is, the electronic device 200 .
可以看出,当电子设备200同意加入超级终端,电子设备100可以在设备连接状态图示2211中显示电子设备200的标识,以便于用户可以快速将电子设备100与电子设备200协同。It can be seen that when the electronic device 200 agrees to join the HyperTerminal, the electronic device 100 can display the identification of the electronic device 200 in the device connection status icon 2211 , so that the user can quickly cooperate with the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 .
如图22G所示,响应于将李四的MtaPad图标2211A拖拽至靠近手机图标505的操作电子设备100可以显示图22H所示的用户界面2210。As shown in FIG. 22G , the operating electronic device 100 may display the user interface 2210 shown in FIG. 22H in response to dragging the MtaPad icon 2211A of Johnny's icon 2211A close to the phone icon 505 .
如图22H所示,李四的MtaPad图标可以图标2211B的样式显示在用户界面2210上。其中,李四的MtaPad图标可以吸附在手机图标505的边缘。As shown in FIG. 22H , John's MtaPad icon may be displayed on user interface 2210 in the style of icon 2211B. Wherein, the MtaPad icon of Li Si can be adsorbed on the edge of the mobile phone icon 505 .
用户界面2210可包含提示说明2217“与李四的MatePad已协同”。上述提示说明2217可提示用户当前电子设备100和电子设备200已经处于连接状态,能够协同工作,为用户提供场景化服务。The user interface 2210 may include a prompt description 2217 "Already coordinated with Li Si's MatePad". The above prompt description 2217 may prompt the user that the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 are currently connected and can work together to provide the user with scene-based services.
图22H所示的用户界面2210还可包含推荐设备区域2218A、场景化服务选项区域2218B、原子化服务入口选项2219。其中,推荐设备区域2218A可用于列举可以与当前已协同的设备组成的超级终端(如电子设备100和电子设备200组成的超级终端)联动带给用户更丰富场景或更好体验的设备。场景化服务选项区域2218B可用于列举超级终端根据当前设备组合所推荐的一项或多项场景化服务。例如,手机和李四的MatePad(即平板电脑)协同工作可以提供的场景化服务包括:多屏协同、摄像头协同、跨屏会议、屏幕扩展等等。原子化服务入口选项2219可用于显示原子化服务组合,用户可以自行选择原子化服务的提供设备。The user interface 2210 shown in FIG. 22H may also include a recommended device area 2218A, a scene-based service option area 2218B, and an atomized service entry option 2219 . Among them, the recommended device area 2218A can be used to list the devices that can be linked with the hyperterminal formed by the currently coordinated devices (such as the hyperterminal composed of the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 ) to bring richer scenarios or better experience to the user. The scenario-based service option area 2218B can be used to list one or more scenario-based services recommended by the hyper terminal according to the current device combination. For example, the scenario-based services that can be provided by the mobile phone and Li Si's MatePad (i.e. tablet computer) working together include: multi-screen collaboration, camera collaboration, multi-screen conference, screen expansion, etc. The atomic service entry option 2219 can be used to display the atomic service combination, and the user can choose the atomic service provider by himself.
上述电子设备100和电子设备200协同工作,提供场景化服务的实现方式具体可以参考前述图6~图10所述的实施例。这里不再赘述。The electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 work together to provide a scene-based service. For details, reference may be made to the embodiments described in FIG. 6 to FIG. 10 . I won't go into details here.
由上述图22A~图22H所示的场景可知,以电子设备100为核心设备的超级终端可以加入跨账号电子设备。这样,电子设备100所属的用户不仅可以利用自己拥有的电子设备进行协同工作,还可以利用自己的电子设备和其他用户的电子设备进行协同工作,从而享受更加便捷、丰富的场景化服务。其中,用户可以通过设置连接码来请求跨账号设备完成设备绑定,从而建立能够协同工作的连接关系。这可以减少跨设备账号所属的用户在不同意或者不知情的情况下,自己的电子设备被其它用户使用的情况,并且,上述连接码的验证过程可以确保与电子设备100进行设备绑定的电子设备的准确性,提高用户的使用体验。It can be known from the scenarios shown in FIGS. 22A to 22H that the hyperterminal with the electronic device 100 as the core device can join the cross-account electronic device. In this way, the user to whom the electronic device 100 belongs can not only use his own electronic device to perform collaborative work, but also use his own electronic device to perform collaborative work with other users' electronic devices, thereby enjoying more convenient and rich scene-based services. Among them, the user can request cross-account devices to complete device binding by setting a connection code, so as to establish a connection relationship that can work together. This can reduce the situation that the user who belongs to the cross-device account does not agree or know that his electronic device is used by other users, and the verification process of the above-mentioned connection code can ensure that the electronic device bound with the electronic device 100 The accuracy of the equipment improves the user experience.
图22I和图22J示例性示出了一些超级终端中电子设备之间交互的统一入口。FIG. 22I and FIG. 22J exemplarily show a unified entry for interaction between electronic devices in some hyperterminals.
如图22I所示,电子设备100可以显示用户界面2210。用户界面2210可包含设备连接状态图示2231。设备连接状态图示2231中可显示有一个或多个电子设备的设备图标。例如, 手机图标505。手机图标505可以代表超级终端的核心设备,即电子设备100。设备连接状态图示2231中还可包含电子设备100搜索到的电子设备的设备图标。As shown in FIG. 22I , the electronic device 100 may display a user interface 2210 . User interface 2210 may include a device connection status icon 2231 . Device icons of one or more electronic devices may be displayed in the device connection state diagram 2231 . For example, cell phone icon 505 . The mobile phone icon 505 may represent the core device of the hyper terminal, that is, the electronic device 100 . The device connection status diagram 2231 may also include device icons of electronic devices searched by the electronic device 100 .
在一些实施例中,电子设备100可以将同账号设备的设备图标显示在以手机图标505为中心,半径为距离A2的圆周上。例如,张三的MateBook图标、张三的MatePad图标、张三的FreeBuds图标。电子设备100可以将跨账号设备的设备图标、无账号的设备图标显示在以手机图标505为中心,半径为距离A3的圆周上。例如,李四的FreeBuds图标、李四的MatePad图标、智能手表图标。上述距离A3可以大于距离A2。In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 may display the device icon of the device with the same account on a circle with the mobile phone icon 505 as the center and a radius of A2. For example, Zhang San's MateBook icon, Zhang San's MatePad icon, and Zhang San's FreeBuds icon. The electronic device 100 may display the device icon of the cross-account device and the device icon of no account on a circle with the mobile phone icon 505 as the center and a radius of A3. For example, Li Si's FreeBuds icon, Li Si's MatePad icon, smart watch icon. The above distance A3 may be greater than the distance A2.
当将电子设备的设备图标拖拽至以手机图标505为中心,半径为距离A1的圆形区域内,用户松开手指,该电子设备的图标可以与手机图标505吸附,该电子设备可以与电子设备100协同。上述过程可以参考图6和图7所示的场景。上述距离A1可以小于距离A2。When the device icon of the electronic device is dragged to a circular area centered on the mobile phone icon 505 and the radius is A1, the user releases the finger, the icon of the electronic device can be attached to the mobile phone icon 505, and the electronic device can be connected to the mobile phone icon 505. Devices 100 cooperate. For the above process, reference may be made to the scenarios shown in FIG. 6 and FIG. 7 . The above-mentioned distance A1 may be smaller than the distance A2.
如图22J所示,电子设备100可以显示用户界面2210。用户界面2210可包含设备连接状态图示2211、非同账号设备显示区域2232。上述设备连接状态图示2211可以参考前述实施例的介绍。上述非同账号设备显示区域2232可用于显示跨账号设备的设备图标和无账号设备的设备图标。例如,李四的FreeBuds图标、李四的MataPad图标、智能手表图标等等。非同账号设备显示区域2232中设备图标代表的电子设备均可以是电子设备100搜索到的。As shown in FIG. 22J , the electronic device 100 may display a user interface 2210 . The user interface 2210 may include a device connection status icon 2211 and a display area 2232 for devices with different accounts. For the above-mentioned device connection status diagram 2211, reference may be made to the introduction of the foregoing embodiments. The above non-same-account device display area 2232 may be used to display device icons of cross-account devices and device icons of non-account devices. For example, Li Si's FreeBuds icon, Li Si's MataPad icon, smart watch icon and so on. The electronic devices represented by the device icons in the device display area 2232 of the non-same account may all be searched by the electronic device 100 .
在一些实施例中,电子设备100可以根据将设备连接状态图示2211中的设备图标拖拽至与非同账号设备显示区域2232中的设备图标的距离小于预设距离的操作,将两个设备图标吸附。其中,这两个设备图标各自代表的电子设备可以建立协同,提供场景化服务。在一些实施例中,电子设备100可以根据将非同账号设备显示区域2232中的设备图标拖拽至与设备连接状态图示2211中的设备图标的距离小于预设距离的操作,将两个设备图标吸附。其中,这两个设备图标各自代表的电子设备可以建立协同,提供场景化服务。In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 can connect the two devices according to the operation of dragging the device icon in the device connection status diagram 2211 to a distance less than a preset distance from the device icon in the device display area 2232 of the non-same account. Icon snapping. Wherein, the electronic devices respectively represented by the two device icons can establish collaboration to provide scene-based services. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 can connect the two devices according to the operation of dragging the device icon in the device display area 2232 of the non-same account to a distance less than the preset distance from the device icon in the device connection status icon 2211. Icon snapping. Wherein, the electronic devices respectively represented by the two device icons can establish collaboration to provide scene-based services.
也即是说,用户可以拖拽设备连接状态图示2211中的设备图标靠近非同账号设备显示区域2232中的设备图标,使得两个设备图标吸附,两个设备图标各自代表的电子设备建立协同。用户也可以拖拽非同账号设备显示区域2232中的设备图标靠近设备连接状态图示2211中的设备图标,使得两个设备图标吸附,两个设备图标各自代表的电子设备建立协同。That is to say, the user can drag the device icon in the device connection status icon 2211 close to the device icon in the device display area 2232 of the non-same account, so that the two device icons are attracted, and the electronic devices represented by the two device icons respectively establish collaboration. . The user can also drag the device icon in the device display area 2232 of the non-same account close to the device icon in the device connection status icon 2211, so that the two device icons are attracted, and the electronic devices represented by the two device icons establish collaboration.
本申请实施例对超级终端中电子设备之间交互的统一入口的表现形式不作限定。电子设备100还可以通过其它的表现形式来显示超级终端的核心设备和关联设备。The embodiment of the present application does not limit the expression form of the unified entry for interaction between electronic devices in the hyper terminal. The electronic device 100 may also display the core device and associated devices of the HyperTerminal in other presentation forms.
在一些实施例中,上述图22A所示的设备连接状态图示2211中设备图标代表的电子设备还可包含:电子设备100搜索到的与电子设备100未完成设备绑定的跨账号设备。响应于将上述未完成设备绑定的跨账号设备与电子设备100协同的操作,电子设备100可以和上述未完成设备绑定的跨账号设备进行设备绑定。然后,电子设备100和上述跨账号设备可以协同工作,提供场景化服务。In some embodiments, the electronic devices represented by the device icons in the device connection status diagram 2211 shown in FIG. 22A may also include: cross-account devices searched by the electronic device 100 and not yet bound to the electronic device 100 . In response to the operation of coordinating the above-mentioned cross-account device whose device binding has not been completed with the electronic device 100, the electronic device 100 may perform device binding with the above-mentioned cross-account device whose device binding has not been completed. Then, the electronic device 100 and the cross-account device can work together to provide scene-based services.
下面介绍本申请实施例提供的另一种电子设备加入超级终端,进行设备绑定的场景。The following describes another scenario in which an electronic device joins a HyperTerminal and performs device binding provided by the embodiment of the present application.
图23A~图23D示例性示出了电子设备加入超级终端,进行设备绑定的场景示意图。FIG. 23A to FIG. 23D exemplarily show schematic diagrams of scenarios in which an electronic device joins a hyperterminal and performs device binding.
响应于打开超级终端功能相关的设备交互界面的操作(如作用在前述图4所示的超级终端功能卡片414上的触摸操作),电子设备100可以显示如图23A所示的用户界面2210。In response to the operation of opening the device interaction interface related to the hyperterminal function (such as the touch operation on the hyperterminal function card 414 shown in FIG. 4 ), the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 2210 as shown in FIG. 23A .
用户界面2210可包含设备连接状态图示2211。设备连接状态图示2211可以参考前述实施例的介绍,这里不再赘述。在图23A的设备连接状态图示2211中,手机图标505的周围可显示有李四的MatePad图标2311。李四的MatePad图标2311可以代表名称为李四的MatePad的电子设备,例如上述图22D所示的电子设备200。电子设备200上登录的账号可以例如是 李四的账号,与电子设备100上登录的账号不同。其中,电子设备100可以搜索到电子设备200,从而在设备连接状态图示2211中显示李四的MatePad图标2311。电子设备100与电子设备200未进行设备绑定。The user interface 2210 may include a device connection status icon 2211 . For the device connection state diagram 2211, reference may be made to the introduction of the foregoing embodiments, and details are not repeated here. In the device connection state diagram 2211 in FIG. 23A , around the mobile phone icon 505 , there may be a MatePad icon 2311 of Li Si. Li Si's MatePad icon 2311 may represent an electronic device named Li Si's MatePad, such as the electronic device 200 shown in FIG. 22D above. The account registered on the electronic device 200 may be, for example, the account of Li Si, which is different from the account registered on the electronic device 100 . Wherein, the electronic device 100 can search for the electronic device 200 , so that Li Si's MatePad icon 2311 is displayed in the device connection state diagram 2211 . The electronic device 100 is not bound to the electronic device 200 .
用户界面2210还可包含添加控件2212。响应于对添加控件2212的操作,电子设备100可以搜索更多的电子设备,供用户选择加入超级终端。The user interface 2210 may also include an add control 2212 . In response to the operation on the add control 2212, the electronic device 100 can search for more electronic devices for the user to choose to join the HyperTerminal.
如图23B所示,响应于将电子设备200与电子设备100协同的操作,例如,将李四的MtaPad图标2311拖拽至靠近手机图标505的操作,电子设备100可以与电子设备200进行设备绑定。As shown in FIG. 23B , in response to the operation of coordinating the electronic device 200 with the electronic device 100 , for example, the operation of dragging Lisi's MtaPad icon 2311 close to the mobile phone icon 505 , the electronic device 100 can perform device binding with the electronic device 200 . Certainly.
在一些实施例中,响应于上述将电子设备200与电子设备100协同的操作,电子设备100可以先判断电子设备200是否是跨账号设备。在判断出电子设备200是跨账号设备的情况下,电子设备100可以判断电子设备200是否与电子设备100进行过设备绑定。在判断出电子设备200与电子设备100未进行设备绑定的情况下,电子设备100可以与电子设备200进行设备绑定。In some embodiments, in response to the above operation of coordinating the electronic device 200 with the electronic device 100, the electronic device 100 may first determine whether the electronic device 200 is a cross-account device. When it is determined that the electronic device 200 is a cross-account device, the electronic device 100 may determine whether the electronic device 200 has been bound with the electronic device 100 . If it is determined that the electronic device 200 is not bound to the electronic device 100 , the electronic device 100 may be bound to the electronic device 200 .
在一些实施例中,当将上述李四的MtaPad图标2311拖拽至靠近手机图标505,电子设备100可以图23B所示图标2312的样式显示李四的MtaPad图标。图标2312与李四的MtaPad图标2311不同,从而可以方便用户区分哪些电子设备与电子设备100建立了能够协同工作的连接。In some embodiments, when the above-mentioned Li Si's MtaPad icon 2311 is dragged close to the mobile phone icon 505, the electronic device 100 may display Li Si's MtaPad icon in the style of the icon 2312 shown in FIG. 23B. The icon 2312 is different from the MtaPad icon 2311 of Li Si, so that it is convenient for the user to distinguish which electronic devices have established connections with the electronic device 100 that can work together.
如图23C所示,在电子设备100与电子设备200进行设备绑定的过程中,电子设备100可以显示连接码设置框2313和输入键盘2314,供用户输入与电子设备100进行设备绑定的连接码。电子设备100与电子设备200进行设备绑定的实现方式可以参考前述图22C~图22E所述的实施例。这里不再赘述。As shown in FIG. 23C , during the device binding process between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 , the electronic device 100 may display a connection code setting box 2313 and an input keyboard 2314 for the user to input a device binding connection with the electronic device 100 code. For an implementation of device binding between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200, reference may be made to the embodiments described in FIGS. 22C to 22E. I won't go into details here.
当电子设备100和电子设备200完成设备绑定,电子设备100可以显示图23D所示的用户界面2210。图23D所示的用户界面可以参考前述图22H所示的用户界面。这里不再赘述。When the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 complete the device binding, the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 2210 shown in FIG. 23D . The user interface shown in FIG. 23D may refer to the aforementioned user interface shown in FIG. 22H. I won't go into details here.
在一些实施例中,电子设备100可以按照预设的规则在设备连接状态图示2211中显示搜索到的电子设备的设备图标。例如,设备连接状态图示2211中显示的设备图标数量有限。电子设备100可以按照下述优先级排序:同账号设备>无账号设备>跨账号设备,选择优先级高的电子设备在设备连接状态图示2211中显示设备图标。再例如,设备连接状态图示2211中显示的设备图标数量有限。电子设备100可以按照搜索到的电子设备距离电子设备100的远近程度,选择距离电子设备100近的电子设备在设备连接状态图示2211中显示设备图标。再例如,设备连接状态图示2211中显示的设备图标数量有限。电子设备100可以按照搜索到的电子设备对应的信号强度的高低,选择信号强度高的电子设备在设备连接状态图示2211中显示设备图标。本申请实施例对上述在设备连接状态图示2211中显示设备图标的预设规则不作限定。In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 may display the device icon of the searched electronic device in the device connection status diagram 2211 according to a preset rule. For example, the number of device icons displayed in the device connection status icon 2211 is limited. The electronic device 100 may be sorted according to the following priorities: same-account device>non-account device>cross-account device, select the electronic device with higher priority to display the device icon in the device connection status icon 2211 . For another example, the number of device icons displayed in the device connection status icon 2211 is limited. The electronic device 100 may select an electronic device that is close to the electronic device 100 to display a device icon in the device connection status diagram 2211 according to the distance between the searched electronic device and the electronic device 100 . For another example, the number of device icons displayed in the device connection status icon 2211 is limited. The electronic device 100 may select an electronic device with a high signal strength to display a device icon in the device connection status diagram 2211 according to the level of the signal strength corresponding to the searched electronic device. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the above preset rules for displaying device icons in the device connection status icon 2211 .
由上述图23A~图23D所示的场景可知,电子设备100可以将搜索到的电子设备(如同账号设备、已绑定的跨账号设备、未绑定的跨账号设备、无账号设备)的标识显示在超级终端的核心设备图标的周围。这样,用户可以通过拖拽设备图标的方式快速建立不同电子设备之间协同工作的连接关系。当被拖拽的设备图标代表的电子设备包含未绑定的跨账号设备,电子设备100可以和上述未绑定的电子设备建立绑定关系,从而建立协同工作的连接关系。通过上述方法,电子设备100所属的用户不仅可以利用自己拥有的电子设备进行协同工作,还可以利用自己的电子设备和其他用户的电子设备进行协同工作,从而享受更加便捷、丰富的场景化服务。It can be seen from the scenarios shown in FIGS. 23A to 23D that the electronic device 100 can identify the searched electronic devices (such as account devices, bound cross-account devices, unbound cross-account devices, and no-account devices). Displayed around the core device icon of HyperTerminal. In this way, the user can quickly establish a connection relationship between different electronic devices for collaborative work by dragging and dropping the device icon. When the electronic device represented by the dragged device icon includes an unbound cross-account device, the electronic device 100 may establish a binding relationship with the above-mentioned unbound electronic device, so as to establish a cooperative working connection relationship. Through the above method, the user to which the electronic device 100 belongs can not only use his own electronic device to perform collaborative work, but also use his own electronic device to perform collaborative work with other users' electronic devices, thereby enjoying more convenient and rich scene-based services.
在一些实施例中,与超级终端的核心设备进行过设备绑定的电子设备(如跨账号设备),再次加入超级终端时,其与核心设备进行设备绑定的过程可以简化。例如,电子设备200与电子设备100进行过设备绑定,当再次加入核心设备为电子设备100的超级终端,电子设备100和电子设备200可以互相验证彼此的身份,完成设备绑定,而无需用户再次输入用于设备绑定的连接码。上述方法可以简化电子设备再次加入超级终端的用户操作,方便用户快速使用超级终端提供的场景化服务,提高用户的使用体验。In some embodiments, when an electronic device (such as a cross-account device) that has been bound to the core device of the hyperterminal joins the hyperterminal again, the process of binding the core device to the hyperterminal can be simplified. For example, electronic device 200 and electronic device 100 have performed device binding. When adding the core device as the hyperterminal of electronic device 100 again, electronic device 100 and electronic device 200 can mutually verify each other's identities and complete the device binding without requiring the user to Enter the connection code for device binding again. The above method can simplify the user operation of adding the electronic device to the hyperterminal again, facilitate the user to quickly use the scene-based service provided by the hyperterminal, and improve the user experience.
下面介绍本申请实施例提供的另一种电子设备加入超级终端,进行设备绑定的场景。The following describes another scenario in which an electronic device joins a HyperTerminal and performs device binding provided by the embodiment of the present application.
图24A~图24D示例性示出了电子设备加入超级终端,进行设备绑定的场景示意图。FIG. 24A to FIG. 24D exemplarily show schematic diagrams of scenarios in which an electronic device joins a hyperterminal and performs device binding.
如图24A所述,电子设备100可以显示用户界面2210。用户界面2210可以参考前述图22A所述实施例的介绍。As described in FIG. 24A , the electronic device 100 may display a user interface 2210 . For the user interface 2210, reference may be made to the introduction of the foregoing embodiment described in FIG. 22A.
在图24A中,用户界面2210可包含设备连接状态图示2211。设备连接状态图示2211中的手机图标505周围可显示有李四的MatePad图标2411、李四的FreeBuds图标2412。其中,李四的MatePad图标2411可代表名称为李四的MatePad的电子设备,例如上述图22D所示的电子设备200。电子设备200上登录账号可以为李四的账号,与手机图标505代表的电子设备100上登录账号不同。李四的FreeBuds图标2412可代表名称为李四的FreeBuds的电子设备。名称为李四的FreeBuds的电子设备可以是关联李四的账号的电子设备。In FIG. 24A , user interface 2210 may include device connection status illustration 2211 . Surrounding the mobile phone icon 505 in the device connection status icon 2211 , there may be a MatePad icon 2411 of Li Si and a FreeBuds icon 2412 of Li Si. Wherein, Si Li's MatePad icon 2411 may represent an electronic device named Si Li's MatePad, such as the electronic device 200 shown in FIG. 22D . The login account on the electronic device 200 may be Li Si's account, which is different from the login account on the electronic device 100 represented by the mobile phone icon 505 . Johnny's FreeBuds icon 2412 may represent an electronic device named Johnny's FreeBuds. The electronic device named Li Si's FreeBuds may be an electronic device associated with Li Si's account.
可以看出上述名称为李四的MatePad的电子设备和名称为李四的FreeBuds的电子设备均可以为,核心设备为电子设备100的超级终端的跨账号设备。It can be seen that the above-mentioned MatePad electronic device named as Li Si and the electronic device named as Li Si's FreeBuds can both be cross-account devices whose core device is the hyper terminal of the electronic device 100 .
在一些实施例中,曾经与电子设备100进行过设备绑定的跨账号设备的设备图标,和未与电子设备100进行过设备绑定的跨账号设备的设备图标的表示形式可以不同。例如,名称为李四的MatePad的电子设备(后续简称李四的MatePad)曾经与电子设备100进行过设备绑定。名称为李四的FreeBuds的电子设备(后续简称李四的FreeBuds)未与电子设备100进行过设备绑定。李四的MatePad图标2411可以显示为图24A所示的深色填充形式。李四的FreeBuds图标2412可以显示为图24A所示的浅色填充形式。上述设备图标的不同表现形式可以便于用户区分哪些跨账号设备曾与电子设备100进行过设备绑定,哪些跨账号设备未与电子设备100进行过设备绑定。In some embodiments, the device icons of cross-account devices that have been device-bound with the electronic device 100 and the device icons of cross-account devices that have not been device-bound with the electronic device 100 may have different representation forms. For example, an electronic device named as Li Si's MatePad (hereinafter referred to as Li Si's MatePad) was once bound to the electronic device 100 . The electronic device named Li Si's FreeBuds (hereinafter referred to as Li Si's FreeBuds) has not been bound to the electronic device 100 . Lisi's MatePad icon 2411 may be displayed in a dark filled form as shown in FIG. 24A . John's FreeBuds icon 2412 may be displayed in a light filled form as shown in FIG. 24A . The different presentation forms of the above-mentioned device icons can facilitate the user to distinguish which cross-account devices have been bound with the electronic device 100 and which cross-account devices have not been bound with the electronic device 100 .
在一些实施例中,跨账号设备首次加入核心设备为的电子设备100的超级终端,跨账号设备与电子设备100可以进行前述图22C~图22E所示的设备绑定。在进行上述设备绑定的过程中,跨账号设备和电子设备100可以互相存储对方的设备标识。当上述跨账号设备退出超级终端并再次加入超级终端,电子设备100和上述跨账号设备可以利用上述设备标识来互相验证彼此的身份,完成设备绑定。也即是说,用户再次将曾经加入过超级终端的跨账号设备加入超级终端时,可以无需再次设置用于进行设备绑定的连接码。In some embodiments, the cross-account device joins the hyperterminal of the electronic device 100 as the core device for the first time, and the cross-account device and the electronic device 100 can perform device binding as shown in FIGS. 22C to 22E . During the above-mentioned device binding process, the cross-account device and the electronic device 100 may store each other's device identifiers. When the above-mentioned cross-account device exits the HyperTerminal and joins the HyperTerminal again, the electronic device 100 and the above-mentioned cross-account device can use the above-mentioned device identification to verify each other's identities and complete device binding. That is to say, when the user adds a cross-account device that has joined the HyperTerminal to the HyperTerminal again, there is no need to set the connection code for device binding again.
示例性地,李四的MatePad(即电子设备200)曾经与电子设备100进行过设备绑定。响应于图24B所示将李四的MatePad图标2411拖拽至靠近手机图标505的操作(即再次将电子设备200加入核心设备为电子设备100的超级终端的操作),电子设备100可以向电子设备100发送请求绑定的绑定请求。该绑定请求中可包含用于进行身份验证的设备标识。Exemplarily, Li Si's MatePad (that is, the electronic device 200 ) has been bound with the electronic device 100 once. In response to the operation of dragging Li Si's MatePad icon 2411 close to the mobile phone icon 505 as shown in FIG. 24B (that is, the operation of adding the electronic device 200 to the core device as the hyperterminal of the electronic device 100 again), the electronic device 100 can send a message to the electronic device. 100 Send a bind request requesting a bind. The binding request may include a device identity for authentication.
在上述电子设备100请求电子设备200完成设备绑定的过程中,电子设备100可以显示图24C所示的用户界面,来提示用户与电子设备200协同需要等待电子设备200所属用户的同意。In the process of the electronic device 100 requesting the electronic device 200 to complete the device binding, the electronic device 100 may display the user interface shown in FIG. 24C to remind the user that cooperation with the electronic device 200 needs to wait for the consent of the user to which the electronic device 200 belongs.
当接收到来自电子设备100的绑定请求,电子设备200可以根据绑定请求中的设备标识 确定自己曾经与电子设备200通过连接码完成过设备绑定。电子设备200还可以显示图24C所示的用户界面2220,来询问用户是否同意电子设备100所属的用户利用电子设备200进行协同工作。图24C所示的用户界面2220可以参考前述图22D所示的用户界面2220的介绍。这里不再赘述。When receiving the binding request from the electronic device 100, the electronic device 200 can determine that it has completed device binding with the electronic device 200 through the connection code according to the device identification in the binding request. The electronic device 200 may also display the user interface 2220 shown in FIG. 24C to ask the user whether to agree to the user to which the electronic device 100 belongs to use the electronic device 200 for collaborative work. For the user interface 2220 shown in FIG. 24C, reference may be made to the introduction of the user interface 2220 shown in FIG. 22D. I won't go into details here.
当检测到用户同意电子设备200与电子设备100完成绑定的请求,电子设备200可以向电子设备100发送同意消息。当接收到上述同意消息,电子设备100可以将电子设备200加入超级终端,从而与电子设备200建立能够协同工作的连接,为用户提供场景化服务。电子设备200加入超级终端之后,电子设备100可以显示图24D所示的用户界面2210,供用户控制和管理电子设备100和电子设备200之间协同工作提供的场景化服务。图24D所示的用户界面2210可以参考前述图22H所述的用户界面2210。这里不再赘述。When it is detected that the user agrees to the request of the electronic device 200 to complete the binding with the electronic device 100 , the electronic device 200 may send a consent message to the electronic device 100 . When receiving the above-mentioned consent message, the electronic device 100 can add the electronic device 200 to the HyperTerminal, so as to establish a cooperative connection with the electronic device 200 and provide the user with scenario-based services. After the electronic device 200 joins the HyperTerminal, the electronic device 100 can display the user interface 2210 shown in FIG. 24D for the user to control and manage the scenario-based services provided by the cooperative work between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 . The user interface 2210 shown in FIG. 24D may refer to the user interface 2210 described above in FIG. 22H . I won't go into details here.
可以理解的,电子设备100所属的用户和电子设备200所属的用户可能不同。尽管电子设备200曾经加入过核心设备为电子设备100的超级终端,电子设备100的用户再次想要利用电子设备200进行协同工作时,仍应经过电子设备200所属用户的同意。这可以减少跨设备账号所属的用户在不同意或者不知情的情况下,自己的电子设备被其它用户使用的情况。It can be understood that the user to which the electronic device 100 belongs may be different from the user to which the electronic device 200 belongs. Although the electronic device 200 once joined the hyperterminal whose core device is the electronic device 100 , if the user of the electronic device 100 wants to use the electronic device 200 for collaborative work again, the consent of the user who belongs to the electronic device 200 should still be obtained. This can reduce the situation that the user who belongs to the cross-device account has his own electronic device used by other users without consent or knowledge.
由图24A~图24D所示的场景可知,在电子设备曾经加入过超级终端的情况下,用户再次将该电子设备加入超级终端进行设备绑定的用户操作可以更加简单。这可以提高用户使用超级终端的使用体验。It can be known from the scenarios shown in FIG. 24A to FIG. 24D that, in the case that the electronic device has joined the HyperTerminal, the user operation of adding the electronic device to the HyperTerminal again for device binding can be simpler. This can improve user experience in using the HyperTerminal.
在一些实施例中,加入超级终端的跨账号设备与其它电子设备配对,从而关联与之配对的电子设备上登录的账号。在上述跨账号设备加入核心设备为电子设备100的超级终端的过程中,电子设备100可以通过与上述跨账号设备进行配对的电子设备完成上述跨账号设备与电子设备100之间的设备绑定。In some embodiments, the cross-account device added to the HyperTerminal is paired with other electronic devices, thereby associating the account logged in on the paired electronic device. In the process of the above-mentioned cross-account device joining the hyper terminal whose core device is the electronic device 100, the electronic device 100 can complete the device binding between the above-mentioned cross-account device and the electronic device 100 through the electronic device paired with the above-mentioned cross-account device.
下面介绍本申请实施例提供的另一种电子设备加入超级终端,进行设备绑定的场景。The following describes another scenario in which an electronic device joins a HyperTerminal and performs device binding provided by the embodiment of the present application.
图25A~图25F示例性示出了电子设备加入超级终端,进行设备绑定的场景示意图。FIG. 25A to FIG. 25F exemplarily show schematic diagrams of scenarios in which an electronic device joins a hyperterminal and performs device binding.
如图25A所示,电子设备100可以显示用户界面2210。用户界面2210可包含设备连接状态图示2211。设备连接状态图示2211中显示在手机图标505周围得到设备图标包括李四的FreeBuds图标2511。李四的FreeBuds图标2511可代表名称为李四的FreeBuds的电子设备(后续简称李四的FreeBuds)。其中,李四的FreeBuds可与登录账号为李四的账号的电子设备,例如李四的手机配对。上述李四的账号与电子设备100上登录的账号不同。即李四的FreeBuds可以作为跨账号设备加入核心设备为电子设备100的超级终端。As shown in FIG. 25A , the electronic device 100 may display a user interface 2210 . The user interface 2210 may include a device connection status icon 2211 . In the device connection status diagram 2211 , the device icons displayed around the mobile phone icon 505 include Li Si's FreeBuds icon 2511 . Li Si's FreeBuds icon 2511 may represent an electronic device named Li Si's FreeBuds (hereinafter referred to as Li Si's FreeBuds). Among them, Li Si's FreeBuds can be paired with an electronic device whose login account is Li Si's account, such as Li Si's mobile phone. The above-mentioned account number of Li Si is different from the account number registered on the electronic device 100 . That is, Li Si's FreeBuds can be used as a cross-account device to join the hyperterminal whose core device is the electronic device 100 .
用户界面2210中的其它内容可以参考前述实施例的介绍。这里不再赘述。For other content in the user interface 2210, reference may be made to the introduction of the foregoing embodiments. I won't go into details here.
响应于将李四的FreeBuds图标2511拖拽至靠近手机图标505的操作,电子设备100可以与李四的FreeBuds进行设备绑定。其中,电子设备100可以显示图25B所示的连接码设置框2513和输入键盘2514供用户设置进行设备绑定的连接码。上述图25B所示的用户界面可以参考前述图22C所示用户界面的介绍。这里不再赘述。In response to the operation of dragging Li Si's FreeBuds icon 2511 close to the mobile phone icon 505, the electronic device 100 can perform device binding with Li Si's FreeBuds. Wherein, the electronic device 100 may display a connection code setting box 2513 and an input keyboard 2514 shown in FIG. 25B for the user to set a connection code for device binding. For the user interface shown in FIG. 25B above, reference may be made to the introduction of the user interface shown in FIG. 22C above. I won't go into details here.
当检测到在上述连接码设置框2513中完成连接码设置的操作,电子设备100可以向李四的FreeBuds发送进行设备绑定的绑定请求,并显示图25C所示的用户界面2210。When detecting that the connection code setting operation has been completed in the connection code setting box 2513, the electronic device 100 may send a binding request for device binding to Li Si's FreeBuds, and display the user interface 2210 shown in FIG. 25C .
在一些实施例中,李四的FreeBuds与电子设备300配对。上述电子设备300可以例如是李四的手机。电子设备300上登录的账号可以为李四的账号。当接收到上述电子设备100的绑定请求,李四的FreeBuds可以将绑定请求发送给电子设备300。然后,电子设备300可以显示图25D所示的用户界面2520。In some embodiments, Johnny's FreeBuds are paired with electronic device 300 . The aforementioned electronic device 300 may be, for example, Li Si's mobile phone. The account registered on the electronic device 300 may be Li Si's account. When receiving the above-mentioned binding request from the electronic device 100 , Li Si's FreeBuds can send the binding request to the electronic device 300 . Then, the electronic device 300 may display the user interface 2520 shown in FIG. 25D.
如图25D所示,用户界面2520可包含绑定提示框2521。绑定提示框2521中可包含拒绝控件2521A和同意控件2521B。该绑定提示框可以参考前述图22D所示的绑定提示框2221。响应于对同意控件2521B的操作,电子设备300可以显示图25E所示的连接码输入框2522,供用户输入李四的FreeBuds与电子设备100进行设备绑定的连接码。连接码输入框2522可包含确定控件2522A。连接码输入框2522可以参考前述图22E所示的连接码输入框2222。As shown in FIG. 25D , the user interface 2520 may include a binding prompt box 2521 . The binding prompt box 2521 may include a reject control 2521A and an agree control 2521B. For the binding prompt box, refer to the aforementioned binding prompt box 2221 shown in FIG. 22D . In response to the operation on the consent control 2521B, the electronic device 300 may display the connection code input box 2522 shown in FIG. 25E for the user to input the connection code for device binding between Li Si's FreeBuds and the electronic device 100 . The connection code entry box 2522 may include a determination control 2522A. For the connection code input box 2522, refer to the aforementioned connection code input box 2222 shown in FIG. 22E.
如图25E所示,连接码输入框2522中输入的连接码为710710,与前述图25B所示连接码设置框2513中设置的连接码相同。然后,响应于对确定控件2522A的操作,电子设备300可以经过李四的FreeBuds将同意消息发送给电子设备100。上述同意消息中可包含在连接码输入框2522中输入的连接码。当接收到上述同意消息,电子设备100可以验证同意消息中包含的连接码是否准确。当检测出同意消息中包含的连接码准确,电子设备100可以显示图25F所示的用户界面2210。在图25F所示的用户界面中,手机图标505上可吸附有李四的FreeBuds图标2512。该李四的FreeBuds图标2512可以与图25A所示的李四的FreeBuds图标2511的表现形式不同,从而便于用户区别李四的FreeBuds是否已与电子设备100协同。As shown in FIG. 25E, the connection code input in the connection code input box 2522 is 710710, which is the same as the connection code set in the connection code setting box 2513 shown in FIG. 25B. Then, in response to the operation on the determination control 2522A, the electronic device 300 may send a consent message to the electronic device 100 through Li Si's FreeBuds. The connection code entered in the connection code input box 2522 may be included in the above-mentioned consent message. When receiving the above-mentioned consent message, the electronic device 100 may verify whether the connection code included in the consent message is correct. When it is detected that the connection code included in the consent message is correct, the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 2210 shown in FIG. 25F . In the user interface shown in FIG. 25F , Li Si's FreeBuds icon 2512 can be adsorbed on the mobile phone icon 505 . The Li Si's FreeBuds icon 2512 may be different from the Li Si's FreeBuds icon 2511 shown in FIG. 25A , so that the user can easily distinguish whether Li Si's FreeBuds has been coordinated with the electronic device 100 .
图25F所示的用户界面2210还可包含提示说明2531“与李四的FreeBuds已协同”。上述提示说明2531可提示用户当前电子设备100和李四的FreeBuds已经建立了能够协同工作的通信连接,为用户提供场景化服务。The user interface 2210 shown in FIG. 25F may also include a prompt description 2531 "cooperated with Li Si's FreeBuds". The above prompt description 2531 can prompt the user that the current electronic device 100 and Li Si's FreeBuds have established a communication connection that can work together, so as to provide the user with scene-based services.
图25F所示的用户界面2210还可包含场景化服务选项区域2532、原子化服务入口选项2533。其中,场景化服务选项区域2532可用于列举当前已协同的设备组成的超级终端(如电子设备100和李四的FreeBuds组成的超级终端)根据当前设备组合所推荐的一项或多项场景化服务。例如,手机和李四的FreeBuds协同工作可以提供的场景化服务包括:音频分享、音频播放。上述音频分享可用于将电子设备100播放的一路或多路音频分享给李四的FreeBuds。李四的FreeBuds可以播放电子设备100分享的音频。其中,电子设备100在分享音频的同时仍可继续播放被分享的音频。上述音频投放可用于将电子设备播放的一路或多路音频投放至李四的FreeBuds。李四的FreeBuds可以播放电子设备100投放的音频。其中,电子设备100将音频投放至李四的FreeBuds之后,可以不再播放上述被投放的音频。The user interface 2210 shown in FIG. 25F may also include a scene-based service option area 2532 and an atomized service entry option 2533 . Among them, the scenario-based service option area 2532 can be used to list one or more scenario-based services recommended by the hyperterminal composed of currently coordinated devices (such as the hyperterminal composed of the electronic device 100 and Li Si's FreeBuds) according to the current device combination . For example, the scenario-based services that the mobile phone and Li Si's FreeBuds can work together include: audio sharing and audio playback. The above-mentioned audio sharing can be used to share one or more channels of audio played by the electronic device 100 to Li Si's FreeBuds. Li Si's FreeBuds can play the audio shared by the electronic device 100 . Wherein, the electronic device 100 can continue to play the shared audio while sharing the audio. The above audio delivery can be used to deliver one or more channels of audio played by the electronic device to Li Si's FreeBuds. Li Si's FreeBuds can play the audio delivered by the electronic device 100 . Wherein, after the electronic device 100 puts the audio onto Li Si's FreeBuds, it may no longer play the above-mentioned put audio.
由上述图25A~图25F所示的场景可知,电子设备100与跨账号设备进行设备绑定时,可以通过跨账号设备配对的电子设备完成上述设备绑定,从而使得跨账号设备能够加入核心设备为电子设备100的超级终端。上述跨账号设备配对的电子设备可以更好地提醒跨账号设备所属的用户存在其它用户想要使用跨账号设备进行协同工作。上述跨账号设备配对的电子设备可以方便用户确认是否同意跨账号设备加入超级终端。It can be known from the scenarios shown in Figure 25A to Figure 25F above that when the electronic device 100 is bound to a cross-account device, the above-mentioned device binding can be completed through the electronic device paired with the cross-account device, so that the cross-account device can join the core device It is the hyper terminal of the electronic device 100 . The electronic device paired with the above-mentioned cross-account device can better remind the user that the cross-account device belongs to that there are other users who want to use the cross-account device for collaborative work. The electronic device paired with the above-mentioned cross-account device can facilitate the user to confirm whether the cross-account device agrees to join the hyperterminal.
在一些实施例中,与跨账号设备配对的电子设备还配对有其它电子设备。上述其它电子设备也可以显示邀请上述跨账号设备加入超级终端,进行设备绑定的消息。In some embodiments, the electronic device paired with the cross-account device is also paired with other electronic devices. The above-mentioned other electronic devices may also display a message inviting the above-mentioned cross-account device to join the HyperTerminal for device binding.
示例性地,由前述图25A~图25C所示的场景可知,电子设备100可以向跨账号设备李四的FreeBuds发送进行设备绑定的绑定请求。如图25G所示,李四的FreeBuds与电子设备300绑定。上述电子设备300可以是李四的手机。与电子设备300配对的电子设备除了上述李四的FreeBuds,还可包括图25G所示的智能手表。该智能手表可以是李四的智能手表。李四的FreeBuds可以将来自电子设备的绑定请求发送给电子设备300。当接收到该绑定请求,电子设备300可以显示前述图25D所示的绑定提示框2521。另外,电子设备300还可以将上述绑定请求发送给与自己配对的智能手表。智能手表可以显示图25G所示的用户界面2520。用户界面2520可用于提示用户张三的手机(即电子设备100)请求将李四的FreeBuds,使得 李四的FreeBuds能在超级终端中提供场景化服务,并询问用户是否同意。Exemplarily, it can be known from the scenarios shown in FIGS. 25A to 25C that the electronic device 100 may send a binding request for device binding to the FreeBuds of the cross-account device Li Si. As shown in FIG. 25G , Li Si's FreeBuds are bound to the electronic device 300 . The above-mentioned electronic device 300 may be Li Si's mobile phone. The electronic device paired with the electronic device 300 may include the smart watch shown in FIG. 25G in addition to Li Si's FreeBuds mentioned above. The smart watch may be Li Si's smart watch. Li Si's FreeBuds can send the binding request from the electronic device to the electronic device 300 . When receiving the binding request, the electronic device 300 may display the aforementioned binding prompt box 2521 shown in FIG. 25D . In addition, the electronic device 300 may also send the binding request to the smart watch paired with itself. The smart watch may display user interface 2520 shown in Figure 25G. The user interface 2520 can be used to prompt the user that Zhang San's mobile phone (that is, the electronic device 100) requests to use Li Si's FreeBuds so that Li Si's FreeBuds can provide scene-based services in the hyperterminal, and ask the user whether to agree.
用户界面2520中可包含拒绝控件2521、同意控件2522。拒绝控件可用于拒绝李四的FreeBuds加入核心设备为电子设备100的超级终端。同意控件2522可用于同意李四的FreeBuds加入核心设备为电子设备100的超级终端。响应于对同意控件2522的操作,智能手表可以显示图25H所示的用户界面2530。用户界面2530可用于输入与电子设备100完成设备绑定的连接码。用户界面2530可包含确定控件2531。The user interface 2520 may include a reject control 2521 and an agree control 2522 . The rejection control can be used to reject Li Si's FreeBuds from joining the hyperterminal whose core device is the electronic device 100 . The consent control 2522 can be used to agree that Li Si's FreeBuds joins the core device as the hyper terminal of the electronic device 100 . In response to manipulation of consent control 2522, smart watch may display user interface 2530 shown in Figure 25H. The user interface 2530 may be used to input a connection code for completing device binding with the electronic device 100 . User interface 2530 may include an OK control 2531 .
如图25H所示,在用户界面2530输入有连接码(如710710)的情况下,响应于对确定控件2531的操作,智能手表可以将同意消息发送给李四的FreeBuds。其中,上述同意消息可以是经过电子设备300发送给李四的FreeBuds的。然后,李四的FreeBuds可以将同意消息发送给电子设备100。电子设备100和李四的FreeBuds可以完成设备绑定。As shown in FIG. 25H , when a connection code (such as 710710) is input on the user interface 2530, in response to the operation on the confirmation control 2531, the smart watch can send a consent message to Li Si's FreeBuds. Wherein, the above-mentioned consent message may be sent to Li Si's FreeBuds through the electronic device 300 . Then, Li Si's FreeBuds can send the consent message to the electronic device 100 . The electronic device 100 and Li Si's FreeBuds can complete device binding.
由上述实施例可知,用户既可以使用上述电子设备300,也可以使用上述智能手表来完成电子设备100和李四的FreeBuds之间的设备绑定。It can be seen from the above embodiment that the user can use the above electronic device 300 or the above smart watch to complete the device binding between the electronic device 100 and Li Si's FreeBuds.
下面介绍本申请实施例提供的另一种电子设备加入超级终端,进行设备绑定的场景。The following describes another scenario in which an electronic device joins a HyperTerminal and performs device binding provided by the embodiment of the present application.
图26A~图26C示例性示出了电子设备加入超级终端,进行设备绑定的场景示意图。FIG. 26A to FIG. 26C exemplarily show schematic diagrams of scenarios in which an electronic device joins a hyperterminal and performs device binding.
如图26A所示,电子设备100可以显示用户界面2210。用户界面2210可以参考前述图26A所示用户界面2210的介绍。这里不再赘述。响应于将李四的FreeBuds图标2511拖拽至靠近手机图标505的操作,电子设备100可以与李四的FreeBuds进行设备绑定。As shown in FIG. 26A , the electronic device 100 may display a user interface 2210 . For the user interface 2210, reference may be made to the introduction of the aforementioned user interface 2210 shown in FIG. 26A. I won't go into details here. In response to the operation of dragging Li Si's FreeBuds icon 2511 close to the mobile phone icon 505, the electronic device 100 can perform device binding with Li Si's FreeBuds.
在一些实施例中,在电子设备100与李四的FreeBuds进行设备绑定的过程中,电子设备100可以显示图26B所示的绑定提示框2611,并向李四的FreeBuds发送进行设备绑定的绑定请求。In some embodiments, during the device binding process between the electronic device 100 and Li Si's FreeBuds, the electronic device 100 may display the binding prompt box 2611 shown in FIG. 26B , and send a device binding message to Li Si's FreeBuds. The binding request.
如图26B所示,绑定提示框2611可用于提示用户与李四的FreeBuds完成设备绑定需要在李四的FreeBuds上进行的操作。例如,绑定提示框2611可包含文字提示:已请求与李四的FreeBuds建立协同连接,待对方同意后可完成协同连接建立,对方同意需长按左耳机/右耳机的耳机柄。本申请实施例对绑定提示框2611中的提示内容不作限定。As shown in FIG. 26B , the binding prompt box 2611 can be used to prompt the user to perform operations on Li Si's FreeBuds to complete device binding with Li Si's FreeBuds. For example, the binding prompt box 2611 may contain a text prompt: It has been requested to establish a cooperative connection with Li Si's FreeBuds, and the establishment of the cooperative connection can be completed after the other party agrees, and the other party agrees to press and hold the earphone handle of the left earphone/right earphone. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the prompt content in the binding prompt box 2611.
如图26B所示,响应于作用在李四的FreeBuds耳机柄(如右耳机的耳机柄)上的长按操作,李四的FreeBuds可以向电子设备100发送同意消息。当接收到上述同意消息,电子设备100可以显示图26C所示的用户界面2210。图26C所示的用户界面2210可以参考前述图25F所示用户界面2210的介绍。这里不再赘述。As shown in FIG. 26B , in response to a long press operation on the earphone handle of Li Si's FreeBuds (such as the earphone handle of the right earphone), Li Si's FreeBuds can send a consent message to the electronic device 100 . When receiving the above-mentioned consent message, the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 2210 shown in FIG. 26C . For the user interface 2210 shown in FIG. 26C, reference may be made to the introduction of the user interface 2210 shown in FIG. 25F. I won't go into details here.
在一些实施例中,当接收到上述电子设备100发送的绑定请求,李四的FreeBuds可以通过语音播放、指示灯闪烁等方式来提示用户电子设备100请求与李四的FreeBuds进行设备绑定,以及完成设备绑定需要的用户操作。In some embodiments, when receiving the binding request sent by the above-mentioned electronic device 100, Li Si's FreeBuds can prompt the user electronic device 100 to request device binding with Li Si's FreeBuds through voice playback, light flashing, etc. And the user operations required to complete the device binding.
在一些实施例中,上述图26A~图26C所示设备绑定的过程可以是李四的FreeBuds再次加入超级终端,与电子设备100绑定的过程。可以看出,上述图26A~图26C所示设备绑定的过程比上述图25A~图25F所示设备绑定的过程更简单。电子设备100与李四的FreeBuds首次进行设备绑定时可以按照图25A~图25F所示的过程进行设备绑定,以便于电子设备100和李四的FreeBuds通过连接码更准确地验证彼此的身份,减少设备绑定错误的可能性。在曾经进行过设备绑定的情况下,李四的FreeBuds再次加入超级终端,再次与电子设备100进行设备绑定时可以按照图26A~图26C所示的过程进行设备绑定。这可以简化用户再次将跨账号设备加入超级终端时进行设备绑定的用户操作,提高用户的使用体验。In some embodiments, the device binding process shown in FIG. 26A to FIG. 26C may be a process in which Li Si's FreeBuds joins the HyperTerminal again and binds with the electronic device 100 . It can be seen that the device binding process shown in FIGS. 26A to 26C is simpler than the device binding process shown in FIGS. 25A to 25F . When the electronic device 100 and Li Si's FreeBuds are bound for the first time, the device binding can be performed according to the process shown in Figure 25A-25F, so that the electronic device 100 and Li Si's FreeBuds can more accurately verify each other's identities through the connection code , reducing the possibility of device binding errors. In the case of device binding once, Li Si's FreeBuds joins the HyperTerminal again, and when performing device binding with the electronic device 100 again, the device binding can be performed according to the process shown in Fig. 26A to Fig. 26C. This can simplify the user operation of device binding when the user adds the cross-account device to the HyperTerminal again, and improve the user experience.
由前述实施例可知,上述图22A所示的设备连接状态图示2211可以提供多个电子设备之间交互的统一入口,方便用户利用不同的电子设备进行协同工作。在一些实施例中,用户还可以根据自己的需要将设备连接状态图示2211中的一个或多个设备图标移除。It can be seen from the foregoing embodiments that the device connection status diagram 2211 shown in FIG. 22A can provide a unified entry for interaction between multiple electronic devices, which is convenient for users to use different electronic devices for collaborative work. In some embodiments, the user may also remove one or more device icons in the device connection status diagram 2211 according to his needs.
下面介绍本申请实施例提供的一种停止电子设备之间的协同工作,将电子设备从超级终端移除的场景。The following introduces a scenario of stopping the cooperative work between electronic devices and removing the electronic devices from the HyperTerminal provided by the embodiment of the present application.
图27A~图27E示例性示出了停止电子设备之间的协同工作,将电子设备从超级终端移除的场景示意图。FIG. 27A to FIG. 27E exemplarily show a schematic diagram of a scene where the cooperation among electronic devices is stopped and the electronic device is removed from the HyperTerminal.
如图27A所示,电子设备100可以显示用户界面2210。该用户界面2210可以参考前述图25F所示的介绍。这里不再赘述。其中,李四的FreeBuds图标2512与手机图标505吸附,可以表示李四的FreeBuds与电子设备100已建立能够协同工作的连接关系。响应于作用在李四的FreeBuds图标2512上的操作,例如长按操作,电子设备100可以根据持续作用在李四的FreeBuds图标2512上的操作移动李四的FreeBuds图标2512的位置。As shown in FIG. 27A , the electronic device 100 may display a user interface 2210 . For the user interface 2210, reference may be made to the introduction shown in FIG. 25F. I won't go into details here. Among them, Li Si's FreeBuds icon 2512 is attached to the mobile phone icon 505, which may indicate that Li Si's FreeBuds and the electronic device 100 have established a connection relationship capable of working together. In response to an operation on Li Si's FreeBuds icon 2512 , such as a long press operation, the electronic device 100 can move the position of Li Si's FreeBuds icon 2512 according to the continuous operation on Li Si's FreeBuds icon 2512 .
如图27B所示,响应于长按并拖拽李四的FreeBuds图标2512的操作,电子设备100可以根据在上述操作指示的位置显示李四的FreeBuds图标2512。电子设备100还可以在用户界面2210显示删除控件2711。该删除控件2711可用于将被拖拽至删除控件2711所在位置的设备图标从设备连接状态图示2211中移除。As shown in FIG. 27B , in response to the operation of long pressing and dragging Li Si's FreeBuds icon 2512 , the electronic device 100 may display Li Si's FreeBuds icon 2512 according to the position indicated by the above operation. The electronic device 100 may also display a delete control 2711 on the user interface 2210 . The delete control 2711 can be used to remove the device icon dragged to the location of the delete control 2711 from the device connection status icon 2211 .
在一些实施例中,响应于将李四的FreeBuds图标2512拖拽在图27B所示位置,并释放李四的FreeBuds图标2512的操作,电子设备100可以显示图27B所示的用户界面2210。上述释放李四的FreeBuds图标2512可以表示对李四的FreeBuds图标2512进行操作的手指离开电子设备100的屏幕。In some embodiments, in response to the operation of dragging and dropping Lisi's FreeBuds icon 2512 to the position shown in FIG. 27B and releasing Lisi's FreeBuds icon 2512 , the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 2210 shown in FIG. 27B . The aforementioned release of Li Si's FreeBuds icon 2512 may indicate that the finger operating on Li Si's FreeBuds icon 2512 leaves the screen of the electronic device 100 .
如图27C所示,李四的FreeBuds的设备图标可以从李四的FreeBuds图标2512变化为李四的FreeBuds图标2511。其中,李四的FreeBuds图标2512可以与手机图标505吸附,可以表示李四的FreeBuds与电子设备100已协同,能够为用户提供场景化服务。李四的FreeBuds图标2511未与手机图标505吸附,可以表示李四的FreeBuds还未与电子设备100协同。As shown in FIG. 27C , the device icon of Si Li's FreeBuds can change from Si Li's FreeBuds icon 2512 to Si Li's FreeBuds icon 2511 . Among them, Li Si's FreeBuds icon 2512 can be attached to the mobile phone icon 505, which can indicate that Li Si's FreeBuds and the electronic device 100 have been coordinated to provide users with scene-based services. Li Si's FreeBuds icon 2511 is not attached to the mobile phone icon 505, which may indicate that Li Si's FreeBuds has not been coordinated with the electronic device 100 yet.
示例性地,李四的FreeBuds与电子设备100已协同。其中,电子设备100将音频分享给李四的FreeBuds。李四的FreeBuds可以播放电子设备100分享的音频。响应于将李四的FreeBuds图标2512拖拽至远离手机图标505的操作,电子设备100可以停止与李四的FreeBuds协同。其中,电子设备100可以停止将音频分享给李四的FreeBuds。Exemplarily, Li Si's FreeBuds has cooperated with the electronic device 100 . Wherein, the electronic device 100 shares the audio to Li Si's FreeBuds. Li Si's FreeBuds can play the audio shared by the electronic device 100 . In response to the operation of dragging the Doe's FreeBuds icon 2512 away from the phone icon 505, the electronic device 100 may stop coordinating with Doe's FreeBuds. Wherein, the electronic device 100 can stop sharing the audio to Li Si's FreeBuds.
也即是说,在李四的FreeBuds与电子设备100已协同的情况下,用户可以通过将李四的FreeBuds图标远离手机图标505的操作实现停止电子设备之间的协同工作。That is to say, when Li Si's FreeBuds and the electronic device 100 have been coordinated, the user can stop the cooperative work between the electronic devices by moving the Li Si's FreeBuds icon away from the mobile phone icon 505 .
如图27D所示,响应于拖拽李四的FreeBuds图标2512至上述删除控件2711所在位置的操作,电子设备100可以显示图27E所示的用户界面2210。其中,电子设备100可以将李四的FreeBuds的设备图标从设备连接状态图示2211中移除。也及时说,用户可以将加入超级终端中的电子设备从超级终端中移除。As shown in FIG. 27D , in response to the operation of dragging Li Si's FreeBuds icon 2512 to the location of the deletion control 2711 , the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 2210 shown in FIG. 27E . Wherein, the electronic device 100 may remove the device icon of Li Si's FreeBuds from the device connection status icon 2211 . It is also in time that users can remove electronic devices incorporated into HyperTerminal from HyperTerminal.
由上述图27A~图27B所示的场景可知,上述停止电子设备之间协同工作,将电子设备从超级终端中移除的用户操作均较为简单。用户可以快速管理超级终端中的电子设备,控制电子设备之间的协同工作。It can be known from the scenarios shown in FIGS. 27A to 27B that the user operations of stopping the cooperation between the electronic devices and removing the electronic device from the HyperTerminal are relatively simple. Users can quickly manage electronic devices in the HyperTerminal and control the collaborative work between electronic devices.
在一些实施例中,当跨账号设备加入上述核心设备为电子设备100的超级终端,跨账号设备所属的用户可以停止跨账号设备与超级终端中的其它电子设备协同工作,将跨账号设备从超级终端中移除。In some embodiments, when the cross-account device joins the above-mentioned hyper terminal whose core device is the electronic device 100, the user to which the cross-account device belongs can stop the cross-account device from cooperating with other electronic devices in the hyper terminal, and remove the cross-account device from the hyper terminal. removed from the terminal.
下面介绍本申请实施例提供的另一种停止电子设备之间的协同工作,将电子设备从超级终端移除的场景。The following describes another scenario of stopping the collaboration between electronic devices and removing the electronic devices from the HyperTerminal provided by the embodiment of the present application.
图28A~图28E示例性示出了停止电子设备之间的协同工作,将电子设备从超级终端移除的场景示意图。FIG. 28A-FIG. 28E exemplarily show a schematic diagram of a scene where the cooperation among electronic devices is stopped and the electronic device is removed from the HyperTerminal.
如图28A所示,电子设备100可以显示用户界面2210。用户界面2210可以参考前述图25F所示用户界面的介绍。其中,李四的FreeBuds图标2512与手机图标505吸附,可以表示李四的FreeBuds与电子设备100已协同。李四的FreeBuds是以核心设备为电子设备100的超级终端中的跨账号设备。As shown in FIG. 28A , the electronic device 100 may display a user interface 2210 . For the user interface 2210, reference may be made to the introduction of the aforementioned user interface shown in FIG. 25F. Among them, Li Si's FreeBuds icon 2512 is attached to the mobile phone icon 505, which may indicate that Li Si's FreeBuds and the electronic device 100 have been coordinated. Li Si's FreeBuds is a cross-account device in the hyper terminal whose core device is the electronic device 100 .
如图28B所示,电子设备300可以显示用户界面2810。上述电子设备300可以是与上述李四的FreeBuds配对的电子设备。例如,电子设备300可以是手机。电子设备300中可登录有李四的账号。用户界面2810可以是已核心设备为电子设备300的超级终端功能相关的设备交互界面。As shown in FIG. 28B , the electronic device 300 may display a user interface 2810 . The above-mentioned electronic device 300 may be an electronic device paired with the above-mentioned Li Si's FreeBuds. For example, electronic device 300 may be a mobile phone. The account of Li Si can be registered in the electronic device 300 . The user interface 2810 may be a device interaction interface related to the hyperterminal function of the electronic device 300 as the core device.
用户界面2810可包含设备连接状态图示2811。设备连接状态图示2811可以表现为环形图。设备连接状态图示2811中心可显示有手机图标2801。该手机图标2801可以表示核心设备为手机,即电子设备300。手机图标2801周围可环绕有电子设备300搜索到的电子设备的设备标识。上述电子设备的设备标识可包括设备图标和设备名称。例如,手机图标2801周围可包含:李四的FreeBuds图标2811A、Vision图标、智能手表图标、李四的MateBook图标、李四的MatePad图标等等。上述李四的FreeBuds图标2811A可以代表李四的FreeBuds。 User interface 2810 may include device connection status icon 2811 . The device connection status diagram 2811 may be presented as a donut diagram. A mobile phone icon 2801 may be displayed in the center of the device connection status icon 2811 . The mobile phone icon 2801 may indicate that the core device is a mobile phone, that is, the electronic device 300 . The mobile phone icon 2801 may be surrounded by device identifications of electronic devices searched by the electronic device 300 . The device identification of the electronic device may include a device icon and a device name. For example, surrounding the mobile phone icon 2801 may include: Si Li's FreeBuds icon 2811A, a Vision icon, a smart watch icon, Si Li's MateBook icon, Si Li's MatePad icon, and the like. The above-mentioned Li Si's FreeBuds icon 2811A may represent Li Si's FreeBuds.
如图28C所示,响应于将李四的FreeBuds图标2811A拖拽至靠近手机图标2801的操作,电子设备100可以显示图28D所示的用户界面2810。其中,李四的FreeBuds可以与电子设备300建立能够协同工作的连接关系,并停止前述图28A所示与电子设备100之间的协同工作。As shown in FIG. 28C , in response to the operation of dragging Li Si's FreeBuds icon 2811A close to the mobile phone icon 2801 , the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 2810 shown in FIG. 28D . Among them, Li Si's FreeBuds can establish a connection relationship capable of cooperating with the electronic device 300, and stop the cooperating work with the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 28A.
如图28D所示,当与手机图标2801吸附,李四的FreeBuds的设备图标可以显示图李四的FreeBuds图标2811B所示的表现形式。李四的FreeBuds图标2811B与手机图标2801吸附可以表示李四的FreeBuds与电子设备300已经协同。As shown in FIG. 28D , when attached to the mobile phone icon 2801 , the device icon of Li Si's FreeBuds can display the expression form shown in FIG. 2811B of Li Si's FreeBuds icon 2811B. The adsorption between Li Si's FreeBuds icon 2811B and the mobile phone icon 2801 may indicate that Li Si's FreeBuds and the electronic device 300 have been coordinated.
当李四的FreeBuds停止与电子设备100之间的协同工作,电子设备100可以显示图28E所示的用户界面2210。在图28E中,李四的FreeBuds图标2511未与手机图标505吸附。即电子设备100与李四的FreeBuds之间的协同工作已停止。对比图28A和图28E可知,经过图28B~图28D所示将李四的FreeBuds与电子设备300协同的过程,李四的FreeBuds可以停止与电子设备100协同,退出核心设备为电子设备100的超级终端。When Li Si's FreeBuds stops cooperating with the electronic device 100, the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 2210 shown in FIG. 28E. In FIG. 28E , Li Si's FreeBuds icon 2511 is not attached to the mobile phone icon 505 . That is, the collaborative work between the electronic device 100 and Li Si's FreeBuds has stopped. Comparing Fig. 28A and Fig. 28E, it can be seen that after the process of coordinating Lisi's FreeBuds with electronic device 300 as shown in Fig. 28B-Fig. terminal.
在一些实施例中,当李四的FreeBuds停止与电子设备100之间的协同工作,电子设备100还可以显示提示消息,来提示用户李四的FreeBuds已停止协同。In some embodiments, when Li Si's FreeBuds stops cooperating with the electronic device 100, the electronic device 100 may also display a prompt message to remind the user that Li Si's FreeBuds has stopped cooperating.
示例性地,李四的FreeBuds与电子设备100协同,李四的FreeBuds可以播放由电子设备100分享的音频。在李四的FreeBuds图标与电子设备100协同的过程中,李四的FreeBuds接收到与跟自己配对的电子设备300进行协同的执行。李四的FreeBuds可以停止与电子设备100协同,而与电子设备300协同。其中,李四的FreeBuds可以停止播放由电子设备100分享的音频,而播放电子设备300投放的音频。Exemplarily, Li Si's FreeBuds cooperates with the electronic device 100 , and Li Si's FreeBuds can play audio shared by the electronic device 100 . During the process of coordinating the icon of Li Si's FreeBuds with the electronic device 100 , Li Si's FreeBuds receives the execution of coordinating with the electronic device 300 that is paired with it. Li Si's FreeBuds can stop cooperating with the electronic device 100 and instead cooperate with the electronic device 300 . Among them, Li Si's FreeBuds can stop playing the audio shared by the electronic device 100 and play the audio delivered by the electronic device 300 .
本申请实施例对上述用于停止电子设备与超级终端中的其它电子设备协同的用户操作不作限定。例如,响应于作用在上述图28B所示李四的FreeBuds图标2811上的操作(如长按操作),电子设备300可以显示用于停止李四的FreeBuds与电子设备100协同的控件。这样,李四的FreeBuds所属的用户可以停止其它用户使用自己的耳机进行协同工作。The embodiment of the present application does not limit the above user operation for stopping the coordination between the electronic device and other electronic devices in the hyper terminal. For example, in response to an operation (such as a long press operation) on the icon 2811 of Li Si's FreeBuds shown in FIG. 28B , the electronic device 300 may display a control for stopping the cooperation between Li Si's FreeBuds and the electronic device 100 . In this way, the user to whom Li Si's FreeBuds belongs can stop other users from using their own headphones for collaborative work.
由上述图28A~图28E所示的场景可知,在用户的电子设备被其它用户加入超级终端,提供协同服务的情况下,用户可以根据自己的需要随时停止自己的电子设备被其它用户使用。It can be seen from the scenarios shown in Fig. 28A to Fig. 28E above that when the user's electronic device is added to the HyperTerminal by other users to provide collaborative services, the user can stop his electronic device from being used by other users at any time according to his needs.
在一些实施例中,用户可以主动将自己的电子设备作为跨账号设备加入其它用户的超级终端。这样,用户可以利用自己的电子设备与其它用户的电子设备协同。例如,李四可以请求将自己的耳机作为跨账号设备加入核心设备为张三的手机的超级终端。当加入该超级终端,李四的耳机可以与张三的手机协同。张三的手机可以将音频分享给李四的耳机。这样,李四可以通过自己的耳机收听到来自张三的手机分享的音频。In some embodiments, the user can actively add his own electronic device to other users' hyperterminals as a cross-account device. In this way, users can use their own electronic devices to cooperate with other users' electronic devices. For example, Li Si can request to add his earphone as a cross-account device to the HyperTerminal of Zhang San's mobile phone as the core device. When joining the hyper terminal, Li Si's earphone can cooperate with Zhang San's mobile phone. Zhang San's mobile phone can share the audio to Li Si's earphone. In this way, Li Si can listen to the audio shared from Zhang San's mobile phone through his earphone.
示例性地,如图28F所示,电子设备300可以显示用户界面2810。用户界面2810可以包含设备连接状态图示2811、非同账号设备显示区域2821。其中,设备连接状态图示2811中可显示有手机图标2801。该手机图标2801可以代表超级终端的核心设备,即电子设备300。这里以电子设备300中登录李四的账号为例进行说明。即电子设备300可以为李四的手机。设备连接状态图示2811中还可包含电子设备300搜索到的同账号设备的设备图标。例如,李四的MateBook图标、李四的MatePad图标、李四的FreeBuds图标2811A、Vision图标、智能手表图标。非同账号设备显示区域2821可用于显示一个或多个电子设备300搜索到的跨账号设备的设备图标、无账号设备的设备图标。例如,张三的MateBook图标、张三的MatePad图标、张三的P50图标2822。上述张三的P50图标2822可以代表名称为张三的P50的电子设备,该电子设备可以是前述电子设备100。即电子设备100可以是张三的手机。Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 28F , the electronic device 300 may display a user interface 2810 . The user interface 2810 may include a device connection status icon 2811 and a display area 2821 for devices with different accounts. Wherein, a mobile phone icon 2801 may be displayed in the device connection status icon 2811 . The mobile phone icon 2801 may represent the core device of the hyper terminal, that is, the electronic device 300 . Here, the account for logging in to Li Si in the electronic device 300 is taken as an example for illustration. That is, the electronic device 300 may be Li Si's mobile phone. The device connection status diagram 2811 may also include device icons of devices with the same account that are searched by the electronic device 300 . For example, Li Si's MateBook icon, Li Si's MatePad icon, Li Si's FreeBuds icon 2811A, Vision icon, smart watch icon. The non-same-account device display area 2821 can be used to display device icons of cross-account devices and device icons of non-account devices searched by one or more electronic devices 300 . For example, Zhang San's MateBook icon, Zhang San's MatePad icon, and Zhang San's P50 icon 2822 . The above-mentioned Zhang San's P50 icon 2822 may represent an electronic device named Zhang San's P50, and the electronic device may be the aforementioned electronic device 100 . That is, the electronic device 100 may be Zhang San's mobile phone.
响应于图28F所示将李四的FreeBuds图标2811A拖拽至靠近张三的P50图标2822的操作,电子设备300可以指示李四的FreeBuds与电子设备100进行设备绑定。可以理解的,李四的FreeBuds所属的用户(如李四)与电子设备100所属的用户(如张三)不同。那么,电子设备300指示李四的FreeBuds与电子设备100协同,需要询问电子设备100所属的用户是否同意。也即是说,李四的FreeBuds与电子设备100在建立协同之前,可以先进行设备绑定。In response to the operation of dragging Li Si's FreeBuds icon 2811A close to Zhang San's P50 icon 2822 shown in FIG. 28F , the electronic device 300 can instruct Li Si's FreeBuds to perform device binding with the electronic device 100 . Understandably, the user to which Li Si's FreeBuds belongs (such as Li Si) is different from the user to which the electronic device 100 belongs (such as Zhang San). Then, the electronic device 300 instructs Li Si's FreeBuds to cooperate with the electronic device 100, and needs to ask the user to whom the electronic device 100 belongs whether to agree. That is to say, before Li Si's FreeBuds and the electronic device 100 establish cooperation, the device can be bound first.
在李四的FreeBuds与电子设备100进行设备绑定的过程中,电子设备300可以显示图28G所示的连接码设置框2831、输入键盘2832。连接码设置框2831可用于设置李四的FreeBuds与电子设备100进行设备绑定的连接码。输入键盘2832可用于用户在连接码设置框2831中输入连接码。During the device binding process between Li Si's FreeBuds and the electronic device 100 , the electronic device 300 may display the connection code setting box 2831 and the input keyboard 2832 shown in FIG. 28G . The connection code setting box 2831 can be used to set the connection code for device binding between Li Si's FreeBuds and the electronic device 100 . The input keyboard 2832 can be used for the user to input the connection code in the connection code setting box 2831 .
如图28G所示,当连接码设置框2831中设置有连接码,响应于作用在连接码设置框2831中确定控件的操作,电子设备300可以向电子设备100发送绑定请求。该绑定请求可用于指示李四的FreeBuds请求与电子设备100协同。在一些实施例中,上述绑定请求可以是通过李四的FreeBuds发送给电子设备100的。As shown in FIG. 28G , when a connection code is set in the connection code setting box 2831 , the electronic device 300 may send a binding request to the electronic device 100 in response to an operation acting on a control determined in the connection code setting box 2831 . The binding request can be used to instruct Li Si's FreeBuds to request cooperation with the electronic device 100 . In some embodiments, the above binding request may be sent to the electronic device 100 through Li Si's FreeBuds.
当接收到上述绑定请求,电子设备100可以显示图28H所示的绑定提示框2833。该绑定提示框2833可以参考前述图22D所示的绑定提示框2221。响应于作用在该绑定提示框2833中同意控件上的操作,电子设备100可以显示图28I所示的连接码输入框2834。该连接码输入框2834可以参考前述图22E所示的连接码输入框2222。When receiving the above-mentioned binding request, the electronic device 100 may display the binding prompt box 2833 shown in FIG. 28H . The binding prompt box 2833 may refer to the aforementioned binding prompt box 2221 shown in FIG. 22D . In response to the operation on the consent control in the binding prompt box 2833, the electronic device 100 may display the connection code input box 2834 shown in FIG. 28I. The connection code input box 2834 may refer to the connection code input box 2222 shown in FIG. 22E.
如图28I所示,当连接码输入框2834中输入有连接码,电子设备100可以响应于对连接码输入框2834中确定控件的操作,向电子设备300发送同意消息。该同意消息中可包含连接码输入框2834中输入的连接码(如710710)。当接收到同意消息,电子设备300可以验证同意消息中的连接码与图28G所示连接码设置框2831中设置的连接码是否相同。若相同,电子设备300可以指示李四的FreeBuds与电子设备协同。As shown in FIG. 28I , when a connection code is input in the connection code input box 2834 , the electronic device 100 may send a consent message to the electronic device 300 in response to the operation of the control determined in the connection code input box 2834 . The consent message may include the connection code (such as 710710) entered in the connection code input box 2834 . When receiving the consent message, the electronic device 300 may verify whether the connection code in the consent message is the same as the connection code set in the connection code setting box 2831 shown in FIG. 28G . If they are the same, the electronic device 300 may instruct Li Si's FreeBuds to cooperate with the electronic device.
当李四的FreeBuds与电子设备100协同,电子设备100可以显示图28J所示的用户界面 2210,电子设备300可以显示图28K所示的用户界面2810。在图28J中,李四的FreeBuds图标与手机图标505吸附。在图28K中,李四的FreeBuds图标2823与张三的P50图标2822吸附。When Li Si's FreeBuds cooperate with the electronic device 100, the electronic device 100 can display the user interface 2210 shown in Figure 28J, and the electronic device 300 can display the user interface 2810 shown in Figure 28K. In FIG. 28J , Li Si's FreeBuds icon is attached to the mobile phone icon 505 . In FIG. 28K , Li Si's FreeBuds icon 2823 is attached to Zhang San's P50 icon 2822 .
一些实施例中,电子设备100可以响应于作用在图28J所示李四的FreeBuds图标上,将李四的FreeBuds图标拖拽至与手机图标505分离的操作,停止电子设备100与李四的FreeBuds协同。In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 can respond to the action of acting on the icon of Li Si's FreeBuds shown in FIG. 28J , dragging the icon of Li Si's FreeBuds to separate from the mobile phone icon 505, and stop the electronic device 100 and Li Si's FreeBuds synergy.
在一些实施例中,电子设备300可以响应于作用在图28K所示李四的FreeBuds图标上,将李四的FreeBuds图标拖拽至与张三的P50图标2822分离的操作,停止电子设备100与李四的FreeBuds协同。In some embodiments, the electronic device 300 may respond to the operation of dragging Li Si's FreeBuds icon to separate from Zhang San's P50 icon 2822 acting on Li Si's FreeBuds icon shown in FIG. Li Si's FreeBuds collaboration.
由上述实施例可知,跨账号设备加入超级终端,既可以是由超级终端的核心设备邀请跨账号设备加入的,也可以是跨账号设备申请加入的。在超级终端的核心设备邀请跨账号设备加入的情况下,核心设备可以询问跨账号设备是否同意加入超级终端。在跨账号设备申请加入的情况下,跨账号设备可以询问核心设备是否允许该跨账号设备加入超级终端。It can be seen from the above-mentioned embodiments that the cross-account device joins the hyperterminal, either by the core device of the hyperterminal inviting the cross-account device to join, or by applying for cross-account device to join. When the core device of the hyperterminal invites the cross-account device to join, the core device may ask the cross-account device whether to agree to join the hyperterminal. In the case of a cross-account device applying to join, the cross-account device can ask the core device whether to allow the cross-account device to join the HyperTerminal.
需要进行说明的是,在一些实施例中,一个电子设备可以同时与多个电子设备协同工作。例如,上述李四的FreeBuds在与电子设备100协同的同时,还可以与电子设备300协同。其中,李四的FreeBuds可包含两只耳机(左耳耳机和右耳耳机)。李四的FreeBuds中的一只耳机可以播放来自电子设备100的音频。与此同时,李四的FreeBuds中的另一只耳机可以播放来自电子设备300的音频。再例如,一个打印机可以同时加入不同的超级终端。这一个打印机可以接收到多个电子设备的打印请求,为这多个电子设备提供相应的打印服务。It should be noted that, in some embodiments, one electronic device can work cooperatively with multiple electronic devices at the same time. For example, the aforementioned FreeBuds of Li Si can also cooperate with the electronic device 300 while cooperating with the electronic device 100 . Among them, Li Si's FreeBuds can include two earphones (left earphone and right earphone). One earphone in Li Si's FreeBuds can play audio from the electronic device 100 . Meanwhile, another earphone in Li Si's FreeBuds can play audio from the electronic device 300 . For another example, a printer can be added to different hyperterminals at the same time. This one printer can receive printing requests from multiple electronic devices, and provide corresponding printing services for the multiple electronic devices.
在一些实施例中,在超级终端中协同的电子设备包含跨账号设备的情况下,跨账号设备可以随时响应于用户的操作停止与超级终端中的其它电子设备协同。例如,以上述电子设备100为核心设备的超级终端中协同的电子设备包含上述李四的FreeBuds。在与超级终端中的电子设备100协同的过程中,李四的FreeBuds可播放来自电子设备100的音频。李四的FreeBuds可以响应于作用在Freebuds上停止播放的操作,停止播放音频。李四的FreeBuds还可以接收到与自己配对的电子设备(如李四的手机)发送的停止协同指示,根据该停止协同指示退出上述超级终端,停止与电子设备100协同。也即是说,当李四的FreeBuds作为跨账号设备加入超级终端,与超级终端中的其它电子设备协同,李四的FreeBuds所属的用户可以随时将李四的FreeBuds收回,停止其它用户使用自己的电子设备。In some embodiments, in the case that the coordinated electronic devices in the hyperterminal include cross-account devices, the cross-account devices may stop coordinating with other electronic devices in the hyperterminal at any time in response to user operations. For example, the coordinated electronic devices in the hyperterminal with the above-mentioned electronic device 100 as the core device include the above-mentioned FreeBuds of Li Si. In the process of cooperating with the electronic device 100 in the hyperterminal, Li Si's FreeBuds can play audio from the electronic device 100 . Li Si's FreeBuds can stop playing audio in response to an operation acting on the Freebuds to stop playing. Li Si's FreeBuds can also receive a stop coordination instruction sent by an electronic device (such as Li Si's mobile phone) that is paired with him, and exit the above-mentioned hyper terminal according to the stop coordination instruction, and stop coordinating with the electronic device 100 . That is to say, when Li Si's FreeBuds joins the HyperTerminal as a cross-account device and cooperates with other electronic devices in the HyperTerminal, the user to which Li Si's FreeBuds belongs can take back Li Si's FreeBuds at any time and stop other users from using their own. Electronic equipment.
在一些实施例中,无账号设备可能同一时间只能加入一个超级终端,与一个电子设备协同。在该无账号设备已加入超级终端的情况下,若再次接收到加入其它超级终端进行协同的协同请求,该无账号设备可以向发送上述协同请求的设备发送等待消息。该等待消息可用于提示用户该无账号设备已被占用,需等待其它用户协同结束后方可使用。In some embodiments, a device without an account may only join one HyperTerminal at a time, and cooperate with one electronic device. In the case that the unaccounted device has joined the hyperterminal, if it receives a collaboration request to join other hyperterminals for collaboration again, the unaccounted device may send a waiting message to the device that sent the aforementioned collaboration request. The waiting message can be used to remind the user that the device without an account has been occupied and can only be used after the cooperation of other users is completed.
在一些实施例中,电子设备100可以将从超级终端中移除的电子设备记录在设备回收站内。这样,用户可以在设备回收站查看自己移除超级终端的电子设备,以及可以重新将被移除的电子设备加入超级终端。In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 can record the electronic device removed from the HyperTerminal in the device recycle bin. In this way, the user can view the electronic device that he has removed from the HyperTerminal in the device recycle bin, and can add the removed electronic device to the HyperTerminal again.
下面介绍本申请实施例提供的一种管理超级终端的场景。The following introduces a scenario of managing a hyperterminal provided by the embodiment of the present application.
图29A和图29B示例性示出了管理超级终端的场景示意图。FIG. 29A and FIG. 29B exemplarily show a schematic diagram of a scene for managing a hyperterminal.
如图29A所示,电子设备100可以显示用户界面2210。用户界面2210可包含设备回收站控件2901。用户界面2210包含的其它内容可以参考前述图22A所示用户界面的介绍。As shown in FIG. 29A , the electronic device 100 may display a user interface 2210 . The user interface 2210 may include a device recycle bin control 2901 . For other content contained in the user interface 2210, refer to the introduction of the user interface shown in FIG. 22A.
响应于对设备回收站控件2901的操作,电子设备100可以显示图29B所示的回收站列表2902。回收站列表2902可用于显示从设备连接状态图示2211中被移除的设备图标,以便于用户查看自己移除的哪些电子设备。In response to the operation of the device recycle bin control 2901, the electronic device 100 may display a recycle bin list 2902 shown in FIG. 29B. The recycle bin list 2902 can be used to display icons of devices removed from the device connection status diagram 2211 , so that the user can check which electronic devices he has removed.
示例性地,电子设备100可以根据前述图27D所示的操作将李四的FreeBuds图标从设备连接状态图示2211中移除。然后,电子设备100可以在上述回收站列表2902中显示李四的FreeBuds图标。Exemplarily, the electronic device 100 may remove Li Si's FreeBuds icon from the device connection status icon 2211 according to the aforementioned operations shown in FIG. 27D . Then, the electronic device 100 may display Li Si's FreeBuds icon in the above-mentioned recycle bin list 2902 .
如图29B所示,回收站列表2902可包含李四的FreeBuds图标2902A、恢复控件2902B。其中,李四的FreeBuds图标2902A可以代表李四的FreeBuds。恢复控件2902B可用于触发电子设备100将李四的FreeBuds加入核心设备为电子设备100的超级终端。例如,响应于对恢复控件2902B的操作(如触摸操作),电子设备100可以在设备连接状态图示2211中显示李四的FreeBuds图标。回收站列表2902中还可包含其它电子设备的设备图标以及对应的恢复控件。本申请实施例对上述回收站列表中表示电子设备的方法不作限定。例如,回收站列表中可仅通过设备名称来代表电子设备。As shown in FIG. 29B , the recycle bin list 2902 may include an icon of John's FreeBuds 2902A, a restore control 2902B. Among them, Li Si's FreeBuds icon 2902A may represent Li Si's FreeBuds. The restore control 2902B can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to add Lisi's FreeBuds to the core device as the hyperterminal of the electronic device 100 . For example, in response to an operation (such as a touch operation) on the recovery control 2902B, the electronic device 100 may display an icon of Li Si's FreeBuds in the device connection status illustration 2211 . The recycle bin list 2902 may also include device icons of other electronic devices and corresponding restore controls. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the method for displaying electronic equipment in the above-mentioned recycle bin list. For example, electronic devices may be represented only by device names in the recycle bin list.
在一些实施例中,当电子设备的设备图标从设备连接状态图示2211中移除,电子设备100可以不再在设备连接状态图示2211中显示该电子设备的设备图标。即回收站列表2902中电子设备的设备图标可以再在设备连接状态图示2211中显示。当用户通过回收站列表2902中的恢复控件来恢复回收站列表2902中的电子设备,电子设备100可以再次在设备连接状态图示2211中显示该电子设备的设备标识。In some embodiments, when the device icon of the electronic device is removed from the device connection state diagram 2211 , the electronic device 100 may no longer display the device icon of the electronic device in the device connection state diagram 2211 . That is, the device icon of the electronic device in the recycle bin list 2902 can be displayed in the device connection status icon 2211 again. When the user restores the electronic device in the recycle bin list 2902 through the restore control in the recycle bin list 2902 , the electronic device 100 may display the device identifier of the electronic device in the device connection status diagram 2211 again.
在一些实施例中,当将回收站列表2902中的跨账号设备加入超级终端,电子设备100和该跨账号设备的设备绑定过程可以参考前述图24A~图24D所示的过程。可以理解的,回收站列表2902中的跨账号设备曾经与电子设备100进行过设备绑定。用户将回收站列表2902中的跨账号设备加入超级终端可以无需再设置连接码。这可以简化用户将将回收站列表2902中的跨账号设备加入超级终端的操作,提高用户的使用体验。In some embodiments, when the cross-account device in the recycle bin list 2902 is added to the hyperterminal, the device binding process between the electronic device 100 and the cross-account device can refer to the process shown in FIGS. 24A-24D . It can be understood that the cross-account devices in the recycle bin list 2902 have been bound with the electronic device 100 once. The user can add the cross-account device in the recycle bin list 2902 to the hyperterminal without setting the connection code. This can simplify the user's operation of adding cross-account devices in the recycle bin list 2902 to the hyperterminal, and improve user experience.
需要进行说明的是,本申请实施例以跨账号设备为例来说明电子设备加入超级终端的设备绑定过程,以及电子设备从超级终端中移除的过程。其它电子设备,例如无账号设备,在加入超级终端时也可以与超级终端的核心设备进行设备绑定,绑定过程可以参考前述实施例的介绍。It should be noted that the embodiment of the present application uses a cross-account device as an example to illustrate the device binding process of an electronic device joining the hyperterminal and the process of removing the electronic device from the hyperterminal. Other electronic devices, such as devices without an account, can also be bound with the core device of the hyper terminal when joining the hyper terminal, and the binding process can refer to the introduction of the foregoing embodiments.
下面介绍本申请实施例提供的另一种管理超级终端的场景。Another hyperterminal management scenario provided by the embodiment of the present application is introduced below.
图30A~图30C示例性示出了管理超级终端的场景。FIG. 30A to FIG. 30C exemplarily show the scenario of managing hyperterminals.
如图30A所示,电子设备100可以显示用户界面3010。用户界面3010可以是电子设备100的控制中心界面。用户界面3010可包含超级终端功能卡片3011。As shown in FIG. 30A , the electronic device 100 may display a user interface 3010 . The user interface 3010 may be a control center interface of the electronic device 100 . The user interface 3010 may include a hyperterminal function card 3011 .
超级终端功能卡片3011中可显示有一个或多个电子设备的设备图标。上述一个或多个电子设备可以是电子设备100搜索到的。超级终端功能卡片3011还可包含设置控件3012。该设置控件3012可用于打开超级终端的设置界面。One or more device icons of electronic devices may be displayed in the hyperterminal function card 3011 . The above one or more electronic devices may be searched by the electronic device 100 . The hyperterminal function card 3011 may also include a setting control 3012 . The setting control 3012 can be used to open the setting interface of the hyper terminal.
用户界面3010包含的其它内容可以参考前述图4所示的用户界面410。这里不再赘述。For other content contained in the user interface 3010, reference may be made to the aforementioned user interface 410 shown in FIG. 4 . I won't go into details here.
响应于对设置控件3012的操作,电子设备100可以显示图30B所示的用户界面3020。用户界面3020即为超级终端的设置界面。In response to the manipulation of the setting control 3012, the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 3020 shown in FIG. 30B. The user interface 3020 is the setting interface of the hyper terminal.
如图30B所示,用户界面3020可包含超级终端入口3021、视频简介3022A、使用提示3022B、本机控件3023、同账号设备控件3024。其中:As shown in FIG. 30B , the user interface 3020 may include a hyperterminal entry 3021 , a video introduction 3022A, a usage prompt 3022B, a local control 3023 , and a same-account device control 3024 . in:
超级终端入口3021可用于触发电子设备100提供超级终端中核心设备与多个关联设备之 间交互的统一入口。例如,响应于对超级终端入口3021的操作,电子设备100可以显示前述图22A所示的用户界面。The hyperterminal entry 3021 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to provide a unified entry for interaction between the core device in the hyperterminal and multiple associated devices. For example, in response to an operation on the hyperterminal entry 3021, the electronic device 100 may display the aforementioned user interface shown in FIG. 22A.
视频简介3022A可包含用于介绍超级终端的功能、使用方法等内容的视频。这可以提升用户对超级终端的认知,帮助用户更好地使用超级终端。The video introduction 3022A may include videos for introducing the functions and usage methods of the HyperTerminal. This can improve users' awareness of HyperTerminal and help users use HyperTerminal better.
使用提示3022B可包含用于介绍超级终端的功能、使用方法等内容的文字信息,从而帮助用户了解超级终端。本申请实施例对使用提示3022B中的内容不作限定。The usage prompt 3022B may include text information for introducing the functions and usage methods of the HyperTerminal, so as to help the user understand the HyperTerminal. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the content in the usage prompt 3022B.
本机控件3023可用于查看电子设备100的相关设备信息。电子设备100可以是超级终端的核心设备。例如,电子设备100可以是型号为Hua Wei P50的手机。电子设备100上登录账号可以为123xxxxxx。上述电子设备100的型号和登录账号仅为示例性说明,不应对本申请构成限定。响应于对本机控件3023的操作,电子设备100还可以显示更多电子设备100的相关设备信息。The local control 3023 can be used to view related device information of the electronic device 100 . The electronic device 100 may be a core device of a hyper terminal. For example, the electronic device 100 may be a mobile phone modeled as Hua Wei P50. The login account on the electronic device 100 may be 123xxxxxx. The above-mentioned model and login account of the electronic device 100 are only exemplary descriptions, and should not be construed as limiting the present application. In response to the operation on the local control 3023, the electronic device 100 can also display more related device information of the electronic device 100.
同账号设备控件3024可用于查看在超级终端中与电子设备100(即核心设备)账号相同的电子设备。例如,电子设备100上登录的账号可以是张三的账号。张三的MateBook与张三的MatePad上登录的账号均为张三的账号。则张三的MateBook与张三的MatePad可以是核心设备为电子设备100的超级终端中的同账号设备。同账号设备控件3024中可包含张三的MateBook的设备标识与张三的MatePad的设备标识。响应于对同账号设备控件3024中一个设备标识的操作,电子设备100可以显示显示设备管理界面。该设备管理界面可便于用户对登录账号(或者关联的账号)为张三的账号的电子设备进行管理,例如将电子设备从超级终端中移除、取消电子设备关联张三的账号等等。The same-account device control 3024 can be used to view electronic devices with the same account as the electronic device 100 (ie, the core device) in the HyperTerminal. For example, the account registered on the electronic device 100 may be Zhang San's account. The accounts logged in on Zhang San's MateBook and Zhang San's MatePad are both Zhang San's accounts. Then Zhang San's MateBook and Zhang San's MatePad may be devices with the same account in the hyper terminal whose core device is the electronic device 100 . The same-account device control 3024 may include the device identifier of Zhang San's MateBook and the device identifier of Zhang San's MatePad. In response to an operation on a device identifier in the same-account device control 3024, the electronic device 100 may display a device management interface. The device management interface can facilitate the user to manage the electronic device whose login account (or associated account) is Zhang San's account, such as removing the electronic device from the HyperTerminal, canceling the association of the electronic device with Zhang San's account, and so on.
用户界面3020还可以包含更多的内容。 User interface 3020 may also contain more content.
示例性地,响应于图30B所述作用在用户界面3020上向上滑动的用户操作,电子设备100可以显示图30C所示的用户界面3020。Exemplarily, in response to the user operation of sliding upward on the user interface 3020 described in FIG. 30B , the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 3020 shown in FIG. 30C .
如图30C所示,用户界面3020还可包含共享设备控件3025、跨账号设备控件3026、绑定控件3027、更多设置控件3028。其中:As shown in FIG. 30C , the user interface 3020 may further include a shared device control 3025 , a cross-account device control 3026 , a binding control 3027 , and a more setting control 3028 . in:
共享设备控件3025可用于查看家庭群组设备、共享设备。上述家庭群组设备可以是与电子设备100位于同一个家庭群组中的电子设备。上述共享设备可以是由包括电子设备100在内的多个电子设备共同管理和控制的电子设备。例如,图30C所示共享设备控件3025中的MatePad图标可以表示家庭群组设备,MateBook图标可以表示共享设备。上述家庭群组设备、共享设备均可以为超级终端中的关联设备,可以与超级终端中的其它电子设备协同。Shared devices control 3025 can be used to view family group devices, shared devices. The aforementioned family group device may be an electronic device located in the same family group as the electronic device 100 . The above-mentioned shared device may be an electronic device jointly managed and controlled by multiple electronic devices including the electronic device 100 . For example, the MatePad icon in the shared device control 3025 shown in FIG. 30C may represent a family group device, and the MateBook icon may represent a shared device. The aforementioned family group devices and shared devices can all be associated devices in the HyperTerminal, and can cooperate with other electronic devices in the HyperTerminal.
在一些实施例中,响应于对共享设备控件3025的操作,电子设备100可以显示智慧生活应用程序的用户界面。上述智慧生活应用程序可以是用于管理上述家庭群组设备、共享设备的APP。In some embodiments, in response to manipulation of the shared device control 3025, the electronic device 100 may display a user interface of a smart living application. The above-mentioned smart life application program may be an APP for managing the above-mentioned family group equipment and shared equipment.
跨账号设备控件3026可用于查看跨账号设备。例如,跨账号设备李四的FreeBuds和李四的MatePad均与电子设备100进行了设备绑定,加入了核心设备为电子设备100的超级终端。电子设备100可以在跨账号设备控件3026中显示李四的FreeBuds图标和李四的MatePad图标。其中,跨账号设备控件3026中还可包含解绑控件。例如,与李四的FreeBuds图标对应的解绑控件,以及与李四的MatePad图标对应的解绑控件。解绑控件可用于接触对应的电子设备与电子设备100之间的设备绑定关系。当解除绑定,相关的电子设备可以退出核心设备为电子设备100的超级终端。A cross-account device control 3026 can be used to view cross-account devices. For example, Li Si's FreeBuds and Li Si's MatePad, which are cross-account devices, are both bound to the electronic device 100 , and a hyperterminal whose core device is the electronic device 100 is added. The electronic device 100 may display Si Li's FreeBuds icon and Si Li's MatePad icon in the cross-account device control 3026 . Wherein, the cross-account device control 3026 may also include an unbinding control. For example, the unbinding control corresponding to Li Si's FreeBuds icon, and the unbinding control corresponding to Li Si's MatePad icon. The unbinding control can be used to contact the device binding relationship between the corresponding electronic device and the electronic device 100 . When unbinding, the relevant electronic device can exit the core device as the hyper terminal of the electronic device 100 .
绑定控件3027可用于触发电子设备100搜索其它的电子设备,并进行设备绑定。The binding control 3027 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to search for other electronic devices and perform device binding.
更多设置控件3028中可包含服务流转推荐选项、多设备任务中心选项。上述服务流转推 荐选项可用于开启或者关闭推荐超级终端中协同的电子设备可提供的场景化服务的功能。例如,当服务流转推荐选项的状态处于开启状态,超级终端可以根据超级终端中的设备类型、设备特征、产品定位、设备用途、设备可以提供的协同服务、设备当前所处环境、设备运行状态、用户最近使用的应用、当前运行应用、用户操作输入的方位信息等情况,综合考量得出的一个或多个场景化服务选项,并在用户界面上予以显示,方便用户快速启动相关服务或功能。上述多设备任务中心选项可用于开启或者关闭分配超级终端中协同的电子设备各自提供的原子化服务的功能。例如,当多设备任务中心选项的状态处于开启状态,超级终端可以根据超级终端中各个电子设备能提供的原子化服务,在用户界面上显示选择原子化服务的选项。这样用户可以根据需要自行选择在超级终端提供的场景化服务中,原子化服务由哪个电子设备提供。The more setting control 3028 may include service flow recommendation options and multi-device task center options. The above-mentioned service flow recommendation option can be used to turn on or turn off the function of recommending scene-based services that can be provided by the coordinated electronic devices in the hyperterminal. For example, when the status of the service transfer recommendation option is turned on, the HyperTerminal can, according to the device type, device features, product positioning, device usage, collaborative services that the device can provide, the current environment of the device, the operating status of the device, One or more scenario-based service options based on comprehensive consideration of the user's recently used applications, currently running applications, and location information input by the user, and displayed on the user interface, so that users can quickly start related services or functions. The above multi-device task center option can be used to enable or disable the function of distributing atomized services provided by the coordinated electronic devices in the hyperterminal. For example, when the option of the multi-device task center is turned on, the hyperterminal may display an option for selecting an atomized service on the user interface according to the atomized service that can be provided by each electronic device in the hyperterminal. In this way, the user can choose which electronic device provides the atomization service in the scenario-based service provided by the hyper terminal according to the needs.
不限于图30B和图30C所示用于管理超级终端的控件,用户界面3020中还可以包含更多或更少用于管理超级终端的控件。用户界面3020的布局仅为本申请实施例的示例性说明,不应对本申请构成限定。Not limited to the controls for managing the HyperTerminal shown in FIG. 30B and FIG. 30C , the user interface 3020 may also include more or less controls for managing the HyperTerminal. The layout of the user interface 3020 is only an exemplary description of the embodiment of the application, and should not limit the application.
由上述图30A~图30C所示的场景可知,电子设备100可以提供丰富的管理控件便于用户管理超级终端,提供用户使用超级终端的体验。It can be seen from the scenarios shown in FIGS. 30A to 30C above that the electronic device 100 can provide rich management controls to facilitate the user to manage the hyperterminal and provide the user with an experience of using the hyperterminal.
在一些实施例中,当将超级终端中的多个电子设备协同,超级终端的核心设备可以提供一项或多项场景化服务的选项,供用户选择。上述一项或多项场景化服务可以是超级终端根据协同的电子设备的设备类型、设备特征、产品定位、设备用途、设备可以提供的协同服务、设备当前所处环境、设备运行状态、用户最近使用的应用、当前运行应用、用户操作输入的方位信息等情况,综合考量得出的。上述协同的电子设备可以根据用户选择的场景化服务的选项来提供对应的场景化服务。上述具体场景可以参考前述图6~图8所示的场景。In some embodiments, when multiple electronic devices in the hyperterminal are coordinated, the core device of the hyperterminal can provide one or more options of scene-based services for users to choose. One or more of the above scenario-based services can be based on the device type, device features, product positioning, device usage, device-provided collaborative services, device current environment, device operating status, user recent Based on comprehensive consideration of the applications used, currently running applications, and location information input by the user. The aforementioned coordinated electronic devices may provide corresponding scenario-based services according to the option of the scenario-based service selected by the user. For the above specific scenarios, reference may be made to the scenarios shown in FIGS. 6 to 8 .
在另一些实施例中,当将超级终端中的多个电子设备协同,这多个电子设备可以直接提供一项场景化服务。这一项场景化服务可以是超级终端根据协同的电子设备的设备类型、设备特征、产品定位、设备用途、设备可以提供的协同服务、设备当前所处环境、设备运行状态、用户最近使用的应用、当前运行应用、用户操作输入的方位信息等情况,综合考量得出的用户最可能需要的场景化服务。In some other embodiments, when multiple electronic devices in the hyper terminal are coordinated, the multiple electronic devices can directly provide a scenario-based service. This scenario-based service can be based on the device type, device features, product positioning, device usage, device-provided collaborative services, current environment of the device, device operating status, and recently used applications of the electronic device that the HyperTerminal uses. , the currently running application, the location information input by the user, etc., and comprehensively consider the scenario-based services that the user most likely needs.
下面介绍本申请实施例提供的一种超级终端中的电子设备协同的场景。The following introduces a scenario of collaboration between electronic devices in a hyper terminal provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图31A~图31C示例性示出了超级终端中的电子设备协同的场景示意图。FIG. 31A to FIG. 31C exemplarily show schematic diagrams of scenarios of collaboration between electronic devices in a hyper terminal.
如图31A所示,电子设备100可以显示用户界面2210。用户界面2210可包含设备连接状态图示2211。设备连接状态图示2211中可显示有手机图标505、张三的MatePad图标3111。响应于将张三的MatePad图标3111拖拽至靠近手机图标505的操作,电子设备100可以与名称为张三的MatePad的电子设备(后续简称张三的MatePad)协同。其中,电子设备100可以综合考量用户利用电子设备100与张三的MatePad协同最可能需要的场景化服务,例如,多屏协同服务。那么,响应于图31A所示的操作,电子设备100与张三的MatePad可以协同,提供多屏协同服务。As shown in FIG. 31A , the electronic device 100 may display a user interface 2210 . The user interface 2210 may include a device connection status icon 2211 . A mobile phone icon 505 and Zhang San's MatePad icon 3111 may be displayed in the device connection status icon 2211 . In response to the operation of dragging San Zhang's MatePad icon 3111 close to the mobile phone icon 505, the electronic device 100 can cooperate with the electronic device named Zhang San's MatePad (hereinafter referred to as Zhang San's MatePad). Among them, the electronic device 100 may comprehensively consider the scenario-based services most likely to be required by the user for collaboration between the electronic device 100 and Zhang San's MatePad, for example, multi-screen collaborative services. Then, in response to the operation shown in FIG. 31A , the electronic device 100 and Zhang San's MatePad can cooperate to provide a multi-screen collaborative service.
响应于图31A所示的操作,电子设备100还可以显示图31B所示的用户界面2210。In response to the operation shown in FIG. 31A, the electronic device 100 may also display the user interface 2210 shown in FIG. 31B.
如图31B所示,张三的MatePad图标3112与手机图标505吸附,可以表示张三的MatePad与电子设备100已经协同。图31B所示的用户界面2210还可包含服务设置控件3114。响应于对服务设置控件3114的操作,电子设备100可以显示图31C所示的服务选择框3115。As shown in FIG. 31B , Zhang San's MatePad icon 3112 is attached to the mobile phone icon 505 , which may indicate that Zhang San's MatePad and the electronic device 100 have cooperated. The user interface 2210 shown in FIG. 31B may also include a service settings control 3114 . In response to the operation of the service setting control 3114, the electronic device 100 may display a service selection box 3115 shown in FIG. 31C.
如图31C所示,服务选择框3115可用于用户选择张三的MatePad与电子设备100协同 提供的场景化服务。服务选择框3115可包含多屏协同选项3115A、摄像头协同选项3115B。服务选择框3115中的一个选项处于选中状态可以表示这一个选项对应的场景化服务为,张三的MatePad与电子设备100提供的场景化服务。由上述实施例可知,多屏协同服务为张三的MatePad与电子设备100协同时用户最可能需要的场景化服务。那么,电子设备100在接收到将张三的MatePad图标与手机图标505吸附的操作后,可以与张三的MatePad提供多屏协同服务。上述服务选择框3115中的多屏协同选项3115A则处于选中状态。若用户需要的场景话服务不是多屏协同服务,用户可以通过上述服务选择框3115中的选项调整电子设备100与张三的MatePad提供的场景化服务。例如,用户可以选择上述摄像头协同选项3115B,使得电子设备100与张三的MatePad提供摄像头协同服务。As shown in FIG. 31C , the service selection box 3115 can be used for the user to select the scenario-based service provided by Zhang San's MatePad and the electronic device 100 in cooperation. The service selection box 3115 may include a multi-screen collaboration option 3115A and a camera collaboration option 3115B. An option in the service selection box 3115 being selected may indicate that the scenario-based service corresponding to this option is the scenario-based service provided by Zhang San's MatePad and the electronic device 100 . It can be seen from the above embodiment that the multi-screen collaborative service is the scenario-based service that the user most likely needs when Zhang San's MatePad cooperates with the electronic device 100 . Then, after receiving the operation of attaching the icon of Zhang San's MatePad to the mobile phone icon 505 , the electronic device 100 can provide multi-screen collaborative service with Zhang San's MatePad. The multi-screen collaboration option 3115A in the service selection box 3115 is selected. If the scene service required by the user is not a multi-screen collaborative service, the user can adjust the scene service provided by the electronic device 100 and Zhang San's MatePad through the options in the service selection box 3115 . For example, the user may select the above-mentioned camera cooperation option 3115B, so that the electronic device 100 and Zhang San's MatePad provide the camera cooperation service.
由上述图31A~图31C所示的场景可知,超级终端可以预测用户需要的场景化服务,并在检测到用户触发电子设备建立协同连接的用户操作后,直接提供上述预测的场景化服务。这样,用户可以通过拉合设备图标的方式快速让电子设备协同提供自己需要的服务。若用户需要的不是超级终端根据预测提供的场景化服务,用户也可再调整电子设备协同所提供的服务。From the above scenarios shown in Figures 31A to 31C, it can be known that the HyperTerminal can predict the scenario-based services required by the user, and directly provide the predicted scenario-based services after detecting the user's operation of triggering the electronic device to establish a coordinated connection. In this way, the user can quickly make the electronic devices cooperate to provide the services they need by pulling and closing the device icons. If what the user needs is not the scenario-based service provided by the hyper terminal according to the prediction, the user can also adjust the service provided by the electronic device cooperation.
下面介绍本申请实施例提供的另一种超级终端中的电子设备协同的场景。Another scenario of collaboration between electronic devices in a hyper terminal provided by an embodiment of the present application is introduced below.
图32A和图32B示例性示出了超级终端中的电子设备协同的场景示意图。FIG. 32A and FIG. 32B exemplarily show a schematic diagram of a scene where electronic devices in a hyper terminal cooperate.
如图32A所述,电子设备100可以显示用户界面3010。用户界面3010包含的内容可以参考前述图30A的介绍。其中,用户界面3010中的超级终端功能卡片3011可包含一个或多个电子设备的设备图标。例如,张三的MateBook图标3011A、张三的MatePad图标、张三的FreeBuds图标、Sound X图标。As described in FIG. 32A , the electronic device 100 may display a user interface 3010 . For the content contained in the user interface 3010, reference may be made to the introduction of the aforementioned FIG. 30A. Wherein, the hyperterminal function card 3011 in the user interface 3010 may include device icons of one or more electronic devices. For example, Zhang San's MateBook icon 3011A, Zhang San's MatePad icon, Zhang San's FreeBuds icon, and Sound X icon.
超级终端功能卡片3011中一个电子设备的设备图标可用于触发电子设备100与这一个电子设备协同。The device icon of an electronic device in the hyperterminal function card 3011 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to cooperate with this electronic device.
示例性地,响应于对张三的MateBook图标3011A的操作,例如触摸操作,电子设备100可以与张三的MateBook协同。其中,电子设备100可以预测用户利用电子设备100与张三的MateBook协同最可能需要的场景化服务(如多屏协同服务)。电子设备100和张三的MateBook协同,可以提供上述预测的场景化服务。当电子设备100与张三的MateBook协同,电子设备100可以显示图32B所示的用户界面3010。Exemplarily, in response to an operation on Zhang San's MateBook icon 3011A, such as a touch operation, the electronic device 100 can cooperate with Zhang San's MateBook. Among them, the electronic device 100 can predict the scenario-based services (such as multi-screen collaborative services) that the user may most likely need when using the electronic device 100 to cooperate with Zhang San's MateBook. The electronic device 100 cooperates with Zhang San's MateBook to provide the above-mentioned predictive scenario-based service. When the electronic device 100 cooperates with Zhang San's MateBook, the electronic device 100 can display the user interface 3010 shown in FIG. 32B .
如图32B所示,超级终端功能卡片3011中可显示有张三的MateBook图标3011B和协同提示控件3011C。张三的MateBook图标3011B和图32A所示张三的MateBook图标3011A的表现形式可以不同。例如张三的MateBook图标3011B可以显示为深色填充形式。这可以方便用于区分超级终端功能卡片3011呈现的设备图标中,哪些设备图标对应的电子设备正在与超级终端中其它电子设备协同。上述协同提示控件3011C也可以提示用户张三的MateBook正在与电子设备100协同。本申请实施例对超级终端功能卡片3011中设备图标的表现形式不作限定。As shown in FIG. 32B , a MateBook icon 3011B of Zhang San and a collaborative prompt control 3011C may be displayed in the hyperterminal function card 3011 . The presentation forms of Zhang San's MateBook icon 3011B and Zhang San's MateBook icon 3011A shown in FIG. 32A may be different. For example, Zhang San's MateBook icon 3011B may be displayed in a dark filled form. This can be conveniently used to distinguish among the device icons presented by the hyperterminal function card 3011 , which device icons correspond to electronic devices that are coordinating with other electronic devices in the hyperterminal. The collaboration prompt control 3011C may also prompt the user that Zhang San's MateBook is cooperating with the electronic device 100 . The embodiment of the present application does not limit the expression form of the device icon in the hyper terminal function card 3011 .
在一些实施例中,若用户想调整张三的MateBook与电子设备100协同提供的服务,可以通过超级终端功能卡片打开超级终端功能相关的设备交互界面(可以参考前述图22A所示的用户界面2210)。然后,用户在上述超级终端功能相关的设备交互界面调整张三的MateBook与电子设备100协同提供的服务。In some embodiments, if the user wants to adjust the service provided by Zhang San's MateBook in cooperation with the electronic device 100, he can open the device interaction interface related to the hyperterminal function through the hyperterminal function card (refer to the user interface 2210 shown in FIG. 22A above. ). Then, the user adjusts the service provided by Zhang San's MateBook and the electronic device 100 on the device interaction interface related to the hyper terminal function.
由上述图32A和图32B所示的场景可知,用户可以在电子设备100的控制中心界面快速触发超级终端中的电子设备交互,从而提供场景化服务。上述触发超级终端中的电子设备协 同的操作简便,可以提升用户使用多个电子设备交互的体验。As can be seen from the scenarios shown in FIG. 32A and FIG. 32B , the user can quickly trigger the electronic device interaction in the hyper terminal on the control center interface of the electronic device 100 , thereby providing scenario-based services. The above-mentioned operation of triggering the cooperation of the electronic devices in the hyperterminal is simple and convenient, which can improve the user's experience of interacting with multiple electronic devices.
下面介绍本申请实施例提供的另一种超级终端中的电子设备协同的场景。Another scenario of collaboration between electronic devices in a hyper terminal provided by an embodiment of the present application is introduced below.
图33A~图33C示例性示出了超级终端中的电子设备协同的场景示意图。FIG. 33A to FIG. 33C exemplarily show schematic diagrams of scenarios of cooperation of electronic devices in a hyper terminal.
如图33A所示,电子设备100可以显示用户界面3010。用户界面3010包含的内容可以参考前述图30A的介绍。其中,用户界面3010中的超级终端功能卡片3011可包含Mate 40图标3011D。Mate 40图标3011D可以代表名称为Mate 40的电子设备(后续简称Mate 40)。响应于对Mate 40图标3011D的操作,例如触摸操作,电子设备100可以显示图33B所示的服务选择框3311。服务选择框3311可用于用户选择Mate 40与电子设备100协同能够提供的场景化服务。As shown in FIG. 33A , the electronic device 100 may display a user interface 3010 . For the content contained in the user interface 3010, reference may be made to the introduction of the aforementioned FIG. 30A. Wherein, the hyper terminal function card 3011 in the user interface 3010 may include a Mate 40 icon 3011D. The Mate 40 icon 3011D may represent an electronic device named Mate 40 (hereinafter referred to as Mate 40). In response to an operation, such as a touch operation, on the Mate 40 icon 3011D, the electronic device 100 may display a service selection box 3311 shown in FIG. 33B . The service selection box 3311 can be used for the user to select the scenario-based services that Mate 40 and the electronic device 100 can provide in cooperation.
如图33B所示,服务选择框3311中可包含摄像头协同选项3311A、麦克风协同选项3311B。其中,服务选择框3311中包含的场景化服务的选项可以是根据电子设备100和Mate40的原子化服务来确定的。不限于上述摄像头协同选项3311A、麦克风协同选项3311B,服务选择框3311中还可以包含更多或更少的选项。如图33B所示,响应于对摄像头协同选项3311A的操作,电子设备100和Mate 40可以协同,提供摄像头协同的服务。例如,电子设备100可以调用Mate 40开启摄像头,来采集图像。As shown in FIG. 33B , the service selection box 3311 may include a camera cooperation option 3311A and a microphone cooperation option 3311B. Wherein, the option of the scenario-based service included in the service selection box 3311 may be determined according to the atomized service of the electronic device 100 and the Mate40. Not limited to the above-mentioned camera cooperation option 3311A and microphone cooperation option 3311B, the service selection box 3311 may also include more or less options. As shown in FIG. 33B, in response to the operation of the camera coordination option 3311A, the electronic device 100 and the Mate 40 can cooperate to provide a camera coordination service. For example, the electronic device 100 can call the Mate 40 to turn on the camera to collect images.
当电子设备和Mate 40协同,电子设备100可以显示如图33C所示的用户界面3010。在图33C中,超级终端功能卡片3011中可显示有Mate 40图标3011E和协同提示控件3011F。Mate 40图标3011E和图33A所示的Mate 40图标3011D的表现形式可以不同。例如Mate 40图标3011E可以显示为深色填充形式。上述协同提示控件3011F可用于提示用户Mate 40正在与电子设备100协同。When the electronic device cooperates with the Mate 40, the electronic device 100 can display a user interface 3010 as shown in FIG. 33C. In FIG. 33C, a Mate 40 icon 3011E and a cooperative prompt control 3011F can be displayed in the hyperterminal function card 3011. The representation forms of the Mate 40 icon 3011E and the Mate 40 icon 3011D shown in FIG. 33A may be different. For example, the Mate 40 icon 3011E can be displayed in a dark filled form. The above-mentioned cooperation prompt control 3011F can be used to prompt the user that the Mate 40 is cooperating with the electronic device 100.
由上述图33A~图33C所示的场景可知,用户可以在电子设备100的控制中心界面快速触发超级终端中的电子设备交互,从而提供场景化服务。超级终端中的电子设备提供的场景化服务可以是由用户选择的。上述触发超级终端中的电子设备协同的操作简便,可以提升用户使用多个电子设备交互的体验。From the scenarios shown in FIGS. 33A to 33C , the user can quickly trigger the electronic device interaction in the hyper terminal on the control center interface of the electronic device 100 , thereby providing scenario-based services. The scenario-based service provided by the electronic device in the hyper terminal may be selected by the user. The operation of triggering the coordination of the electronic devices in the hyper terminal is simple and convenient, which can improve the user's experience of interacting with multiple electronic devices.
在一些实施例中,打印机可以加入超级终端。电子设备100可以与打印机协同,利用打印机打印文件。In some embodiments, the printer can join HyperTerminal. The electronic device 100 may cooperate with the printer, and use the printer to print the file.
下面介绍本申请实施例提供的超级终端利用打印机提供协同服务的场景。The following describes the scenario where the HyperTerminal provides collaborative services using printers provided by the embodiment of the present application.
图34A~图34O示例性示出了超级终端利用打印机提供协同服务的场景示意图。FIG. 34A to FIG. 34O exemplarily show a schematic diagram of scenarios where a hyperterminal uses a printer to provide collaborative services.
如图34A所示,电子设备100可以显示用户界面2210。电子设备100可以在用户界面2210的设备连接状态图示2211中显示搜索到的电子设备的设备图标。As shown in FIG. 34A , the electronic device 100 may display a user interface 2210 . The electronic device 100 may display the device icon of the searched electronic device in the device connection state illustration 2211 of the user interface 2210 .
示例性地,电子设备100可以搜索到名称为PixLab X1打印机的电子设备(后续简称PixLab X1打印机)。设备连接状态图示2211中可显示有PixLab X1打印机图标3401。响应于图34A所示拖拽PixLab X1打印机图标3401至靠近手机图标505的操作,电子设备100可以显示图34B打印设置选项框3402。Exemplarily, the electronic device 100 may search for an electronic device named PixLab X1 printer (hereinafter referred to as PixLab X1 printer). A PixLab X1 printer icon 3401 may be displayed in the device connection status icon 2211. In response to the operation of dragging the PixLab X1 printer icon 3401 close to the mobile phone icon 505 shown in FIG. 34A , the electronic device 100 may display the print setting option box 3402 in FIG. 34B .
如图34B所示,设置选项框3402中可包含一项或多项用于指示打印机打印文件的设置选项。例如,份数选项、打印区域选项、打印纸张单/双侧选项、打印纸张横/纵向选项、打印纸张尺寸选项、页边距选项等等。As shown in FIG. 34B , the setting option box 3402 may contain one or more setting options for instructing the printer to print the file. For example, number of copies option, print area option, printing paper single/double sided option, printing paper landscape/vertical option, printing paper size option, page margin option, etc.
其中,上述份数选项可用于设置打印机对于接收到的需要打印的文件进行打印的份数。例如1份、2份等等。打印区域选项可用于设置文件中需要打印的区域。例如,需要打印的 区域可以是整个文档,或者可以是一个文档的第一页。打印纸张单/双侧选项可用于设置是单面打印还是双面打印。打印纸张横/纵向选项可用于设置是在纸张上横向打印还是纵向打印。打印纸张尺寸选项可用于设置用于打印的纸张的尺寸。例如,纸张的尺寸为A3、A4等等。页面局选项可用于设置打印的内容在纸张上的页边距。不限于图34B所示的设置选项,设置选项框3402还可包含更多或更少的选项。Wherein, the above-mentioned number of copies option can be used to set the number of copies that the printer prints for the received file that needs to be printed. For example, 1 part, 2 parts, etc. The print area option can be used to set the area to be printed in the file. For example, the area to be printed can be the entire document, or it can be the first page of a document. The Print Paper Single/Double Sided option can be used to set whether to print on one side or two sides. The Print Paper Landscape/Portrait option can be used to set whether to print in landscape or portrait orientation on the paper. The Print Paper Size option can be used to set the size of the paper used for printing. For example, the size of the paper is A3, A4, and so on. The page margin option can be used to set the margins of the printed content on the paper. Not limited to the setting options shown in FIG. 34B, the setting options box 3402 may also contain more or fewer options.
当电子设备100与上述PixLab X1打印机协同,电子设备100可以显示图34C所示的用户界面2210。在图34C所示的用户界面2210中,PixLab X1打印机图标3402与手机图标505吸附,可以表示PixLab X1打印机与电子设备100已经协同。PixLab X1打印机图标3402的表现形式可以与前述图34A所示的PixLab X1打印机图标3401的表现形式不同。例如,PixLab X1打印机图标3402可以显示为深色填充形式。用户界面2210还可包含打印悬浮球3405。打印悬浮球3405中可包含打印控件3405A。打印控件3405A可用于触发电子设备100将打印文件发送给PixLab X1打印机,进行打印。上述打印悬浮球3405可以悬浮于用户界面的最上层。When the electronic device 100 cooperates with the aforementioned PixLab X1 printer, the electronic device 100 can display the user interface 2210 shown in FIG. 34C. In the user interface 2210 shown in FIG. 34C, the PixLab X1 printer icon 3402 is attached to the mobile phone icon 505, which may indicate that the PixLab X1 printer and the electronic device 100 have been coordinated. The representation of the PixLab X1 printer icon 3402 may be different from the representation of the aforementioned PixLab X1 printer icon 3401 shown in FIG. 34A . For example, the PixLab X1 printer icon 3402 may appear as a dark fill. The user interface 2210 may also include a printing hover 3405 . Print control 3405A may be included in print hover 3405 . The print control 3405A can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to send the print file to the PixLab X1 printer for printing. The printing floating ball 3405 can be suspended on the top layer of the user interface.
在一些实施例中,在电子设备100与上述PixLab X1打印机协同的期间内,若在预设时间段内未检测到作用在打印悬浮球3405上的操作,电子设备100可以显示图34D所示的打印悬浮球3406。打印悬浮球3405和打印悬浮球3406的表现形式可以不同。例如,打印悬浮球3406显示的透明度可以比打印悬浮球3405显示的透明度低,且打印悬浮球3405的一部分被隐藏。也即是说,在用户长时间未使用PixLab X1打印机与电子设备100提供的协同服务的情况下,上述打印悬浮球可以仍然悬浮在用户界面,但显示的透明度以及占据的显示面积可以变小,从而减少用户使用用户界面中其它控件的影响。In some embodiments, during the cooperation between the electronic device 100 and the aforementioned PixLab X1 printer, if no operation on the printing floating ball 3405 is detected within a preset period of time, the electronic device 100 may display the display shown in FIG. 34D Print levitation ball 3406. The expression form of printing floating ball 3405 and printing floating ball 3406 may be different. For example, printed hover 3406 may be displayed with less transparency than printed hover 3405, with a portion of printed hover 3405 hidden. That is to say, when the user has not used the cooperative service provided by the PixLab X1 printer and the electronic device 100 for a long time, the above-mentioned printed floating ball can still be suspended on the user interface, but the transparency of the display and the display area occupied can be reduced. Thereby reducing the impact of the user using other controls in the user interface.
如图34E所示,在电子设备100与上述PixLab X1打印机协同的期间内,打印悬浮球可以持续悬浮在用户界面上。用户可以在电子设备100打开显示有需要打印的文件的用户界面。As shown in FIG. 34E , during the period when the electronic device 100 cooperates with the above-mentioned PixLab X1 printer, the printing floating ball can continuously float on the user interface. The user may open a user interface on the electronic device 100 displaying files to be printed.
示例性地,电子设备100可以显示图34E所示的用户界面3410。用户界面3410可以是图库应用的用户界面。用户界面3410可包含图片3411。用户界面3410上可悬浮有打印悬浮球3406。响应于对打印悬浮球3406的操作,电子设备100可以显示图34F所示的打印悬浮球3407。上述打印悬浮球3406可以相当于收缩悬浮球,即对前述图34C所示打印悬浮球3405进行收缩得到的。上述打印悬浮球3407可以相当于展开悬浮球,即对打印悬浮球3405进行展开得到的。Exemplarily, the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 3410 shown in FIG. 34E. The user interface 3410 may be a user interface of a gallery application. The user interface 3410 may include a picture 3411. A print hover 3406 may be suspended over the user interface 3410 . In response to the operation of printing the floating ball 3406, the electronic device 100 may display the printing floating ball 3407 shown in FIG. 34F. The above-mentioned printing suspension ball 3406 may be equivalent to shrinking the suspension ball, that is, it is obtained by shrinking the above-mentioned printing suspension ball 3405 shown in FIG. 34C . The above-mentioned printed floating ball 3407 may be equivalent to unfolding the floating ball, that is, it is obtained by expanding the printed floating ball 3405 .
如图34F所示,打印悬浮球3407可包含打印控件3405A。打印悬浮球3407还可包含文字提示“点击左侧控件可打印”,来提示用户如何使用打印悬浮球3407。响应于对打印控件3405A的操作,例如触摸操作,电子设备100可以将当前用户界面3410上显示的文件(即图片3411)发送给PixLab X1打印机进行打印。As shown in Figure 34F, print hover 3407 may contain print control 3405A. The printing floating ball 3407 may also include a text prompt "click the control on the left to print", to remind the user how to use the printing floating ball 3407. In response to an operation on the print control 3405A, such as a touch operation, the electronic device 100 can send the file currently displayed on the user interface 3410 (ie, the picture 3411 ) to the PixLab X1 printer for printing.
在电子设备100发送过文件交由PixLab X1打印机进行打印的情况下,电子设备100可以显示图34G所示的打印悬浮球3408。打印悬浮球3408中也可包含打印控件3405A。但打印悬浮球3408中包含的文字提示“打印中,点击查看打印任务”,与打印悬浮球3407中的文字提示不同。打印悬浮球3408中的文字提示可以提示用户如何利用打印悬浮球查看打印任务。可以理解的,在电子设备100和PixLab X1打印机之间没有打印任务的情况下,电子设备100可以显示上述图34F所示的打印悬浮球3407。在电子设备100和PixLab X1打印机之间有打印任务的情况下,电子设备100可以显示上述图34G所示的打印悬浮球3408。本申请实施例对上述不同情况下打印悬浮球的表现形式不作限定。例如,在上述不同的情况下,打印悬浮球的表现形式也可以相同。In the case that the electronic device 100 has sent the file to be printed by the PixLab X1 printer, the electronic device 100 can display the printing floating ball 3408 shown in FIG. 34G . Print control 3405A may also be included in print hover 3408 . However, the text prompt "printing, click to view the printing task" contained in the printing floating ball 3408 is different from the text prompt in the printing floating ball 3407. The text prompt in the printing floating ball 3408 can prompt the user how to use the printing floating ball to check the printing task. It can be understood that, when there is no printing task between the electronic device 100 and the PixLab X1 printer, the electronic device 100 can display the printing floating ball 3407 shown in FIG. 34F above. When there is a printing task between the electronic device 100 and the PixLab X1 printer, the electronic device 100 can display the printing floating ball 3408 shown in FIG. 34G above. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the expression forms of printing the floating ball under the above-mentioned different situations. For example, in the above different situations, the expression form of printing the floating ball can also be the same.
如图34F所示,用户可以通过作用在用户界面3410上向左或向右滑动的用户操作来查看不同的图片。示例性地,响应于作用在用户界面3410上向左滑动的用户操作,电子设备100可以显示图34H所示的用户界面3410。在图34H中,用户界面3410上可显示有图片3412。响应于对打印控件3405A的操作,电子设备100可以将当前用户界面上显示的文件(即图片3412)发送给PixLab X1打印机进行打印。As shown in FIG. 34F , the user can view different pictures through a user operation of sliding left or right on the user interface 3410 . Exemplarily, in response to a user operation of sliding left on the user interface 3410, the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 3410 shown in FIG. 34H. In FIG. 34H , a picture 3412 may be displayed on the user interface 3410 . In response to the operation on the print control 3405A, the electronic device 100 can send the file (ie, the picture 3412) currently displayed on the user interface to the PixLab X1 printer for printing.
如图34I所示,响应于作用在打印悬浮球3408中打印控件3405A之外的区域的操作,例如触摸操作,电子设备100可以显示图34J所示的打印任务列表3413。打印任务列表3413中可包含文件名称3414、打印状态3415、文件名称3416、暂停控件3417。其中,文件名称3414可以例如是cat.jpg,可以代表打印上述图34F所示图片3411的打印任务。打印状态3415可用于反映文件名称3414对应的打印任务的状态。例如,打印状态3415可以为已完成,可以表示PixLab X1打印机已完成对上述图片3411的打印。As shown in FIG. 34I , in response to an operation, such as a touch operation, on an area outside the print control 3405A in the print floating ball 3408 , the electronic device 100 may display a print job list 3413 as shown in FIG. 34J . The print task list 3413 may include a file name 3414 , a print status 3415 , a file name 3416 , and a pause control 3417 . Wherein, the file name 3414 may be, for example, cat.jpg, which may represent a print job for printing the picture 3411 shown in FIG. 34F. The print status 3415 can be used to reflect the status of the print job corresponding to the file name 3414 . For example, the printing status 3415 can be completed, which can indicate that the PixLab X1 printer has completed printing the above picture 3411.
文件名称3416可以例如是dog.jpg,可以代表打印上述图34H所示图片3412的打印任务。暂停控件3417可以表示文件名称3416对应的打印任务正在打印,还未完成。暂停控件3417可用于暂停文件名称3416对应的打印任务。示例性地,响应于作用在上述暂停控件3417上的操作,电子设备100可以向PixLab X1打印机发送暂停打印图片3412的指令。当上述图片3412打印完成,电子设备100可以将上述暂停控件3417变化为打印状态3415所示的控件,来提示用户PixLab X1打印机已完成对上述图片3412的打印。The file name 3416 may be, for example, dog.jpg, which may represent a print job for printing the picture 3412 shown in FIG. 34H. The pause control 3417 may indicate that the print task corresponding to the file name 3416 is being printed but not yet completed. The pause control 3417 can be used to pause the print job corresponding to the file name 3416 . Exemplarily, in response to the operation on the above-mentioned pause control 3417, the electronic device 100 may send an instruction to the PixLab X1 printer to pause printing the picture 3412. When the above picture 3412 is printed, the electronic device 100 can change the above pause control 3417 to the control shown in the print state 3415 to remind the user that the PixLab X1 printer has completed printing the above picture 3412.
本申请实施例对电子设备100和PixLab X1打印机协同提供打印服务的实现方法不作限定。例如,响应于作用在打印控件3405A上的操作,电子设备100可以将当前用户界面上显示的文件发送给PixLab X1打印机进行打印。上述当前用户界面上显示的文件不限于是图片,还可以是文字类型的文档、表格等等。再例如,响应于作用在打印控件3405A上的操作,电子设备100可以对当前显示的用户界面进行截屏操作,并将截屏操作得到的文件发送给PixLab X1打印机进行打印。The embodiment of the present application does not limit the implementation method for the electronic device 100 and the PixLab X1 printer to cooperate to provide printing services. For example, in response to the operation on the print control 3405A, the electronic device 100 can send the file currently displayed on the user interface to the PixLab X1 printer for printing. The above-mentioned files displayed on the current user interface are not limited to pictures, but may also be text-type documents, tables, and the like. For another example, in response to the operation on the print control 3405A, the electronic device 100 may perform a screenshot operation on the currently displayed user interface, and send the file obtained by the screenshot operation to the PixLab X1 printer for printing.
在一些实施例中,用户可以通过在图34C所示用户界面中将PixLab X1打印机图标3403拖拽至远离手机图标505的操作,来停止电子设备100与PixLab X1打印机协同。In some embodiments, the user can stop the electronic device 100 from cooperating with the PixLab X1 printer by dragging the PixLab X1 printer icon 3403 away from the phone icon 505 in the user interface shown in FIG. 34C .
在一些实施例中,用户还可以通过上述打印悬浮球来停止电子设备100与PixLab X1打印机协同。示例性地,如图34K所示,响应于作用在打印悬浮球3408上的操作,例如长按操作,电子设备100可以根据用户拖动打印悬浮球3408时的手指运动轨迹在用户界面上移动打印悬浮球。In some embodiments, the user can also stop the electronic device 100 from cooperating with the PixLab X1 printer by printing the floating ball as described above. Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 34K , in response to an operation on the printing floating ball 3408, such as a long press operation, the electronic device 100 can move and print on the user interface according to the finger movement track when the user drags the printing floating ball 3408. levitate ball.
其中,电子设备100可以显示图34L所示的打印悬浮球3409。打印悬浮球3409与打印悬浮球3408的表现形式可以不同。在打印悬浮球3409的显示位置随用户拖动轨迹而改变的过程中,电子设备100可以在用户界面3410显示图34L所示的删除控件3431。Wherein, the electronic device 100 may display the printed floating ball 3409 shown in FIG. 34L. The printed floating ball 3409 and the printed floating ball 3408 may have different expressions. During the process of changing the display position of the printed floating ball 3409 as the user drags the track, the electronic device 100 may display the delete control 3431 shown in FIG. 34L on the user interface 3410 .
如图34M所示,响应于将打印悬浮球3409拖拽至删除控件3431所在位置的操作,电子设备100可以停止电子设备100与PixLab X1打印机协同,并在用户界面上取消显示上述打印悬浮球。As shown in FIG. 34M , in response to the operation of dragging the printing floating ball 3409 to the location of the delete control 3431 , the electronic device 100 may stop the cooperation between the electronic device 100 and the PixLab X1 printer, and cancel the display of the printing floating ball on the user interface.
在一些实施例中,当接收到作用在上述打印控件3405A的操作,电子设备100可以获取当前显示的用户界面上可进行打印的文件。若当前显示的用户界面上没有可进行打印的文件,电子设备100可以提示用户当前页面没有可打印的内容。In some embodiments, when receiving an operation acting on the print control 3405A, the electronic device 100 may obtain a printable file on the currently displayed user interface. If there is no printable file on the currently displayed user interface, the electronic device 100 may prompt the user that there is no printable content on the current page.
示例性地,如图34N所示,在电子设备100和PixLab X1打印机协同的期间内,电子设备100可以显示用户界面3440。用户界面3440可以是电子设备100的桌面。用户界面3440上悬浮有打印悬浮球3407。响应于对打印悬浮球3407中的打印控件3405A的操作,电子设 备100可以显示图34O所示的提示框3441。提示框3441可用于提示用户界面3440上没有可进行打印的文件,无法执行打印操作。提示框3441中可包含打印须知控件3442。上述打印须知控件3442可用于触发电子设备100显示使用PixLab X1打印机进行打印的注意事项,从而帮助用户了解如何使用电子设备100和PixLab X1打印机协同提供的打印服务。本申请实施例对提示框3441中包含的内容不作限定。Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 34N , during the cooperation between the electronic device 100 and the PixLab X1 printer, the electronic device 100 may display a user interface 3440 . The user interface 3440 may be a desktop of the electronic device 100 . A print floating ball 3407 is suspended on the user interface 3440 . In response to the operation of the print control 3405A in the print floating ball 3407, the electronic device 100 may display a prompt box 3441 as shown in FIG. 34O. The prompt box 3441 may be used to prompt that there is no printable file on the user interface 3440 and the print operation cannot be performed. The prompt box 3441 may include a print reminder control 3442 . The above-mentioned printing notice control 3442 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to display the precautions for printing with the PixLab X1 printer, so as to help the user understand how to use the printing service provided by the electronic device 100 and the PixLab X1 printer. The embodiment of this application does not limit the content contained in the prompt box 3441.
在一些实施例中,PixLab X1打印机与电子设备100协同之前,可以先与电子设备100进行设备绑定。上述设备绑定的过程可以参考前述涉及设备绑定的实施例的介绍。这里不再赘述。In some embodiments, before the PixLab X1 printer cooperates with the electronic device 100, it can be bound with the electronic device 100 first. For the above device binding process, reference may be made to the introduction of the aforementioned embodiments related to device binding. I won't go into details here.
由上述图34A~图34O所示的场景可知,打印机可以加入超级终端,与超级终端中的其它电子设备协同,为用户提供打印服务。上述方法可以方便用户快速将电子设备100与打印机协同。并且,在上述电子设备100与打印机协同的期间内,用户可以浏览和查找需要打印的文件,并通过上述打印悬浮球实现快速打印。上述进行打印的用户操作简单方便,可以提高用户使用打印机进行协同的使用体验。当打印任务均完成,用户还可以通过上述打印悬浮球快速实现停止电子设备100与打印机的协同。It can be known from the scenarios shown in FIGS. 34A to 34O above that the printer can join the hyperterminal and cooperate with other electronic devices in the hyperterminal to provide users with printing services. The above method can facilitate the user to quickly coordinate the electronic device 100 with the printer. Moreover, during the period when the above-mentioned electronic device 100 is cooperating with the printer, the user can browse and search for files to be printed, and realize fast printing through the above-mentioned printing floating ball. The above-mentioned user operation for printing is simple and convenient, which can improve the user experience of using the printer for collaboration. When all the printing tasks are completed, the user can also quickly stop the coordination between the electronic device 100 and the printer through the printing suspension ball.
上述实施例所描述的实现方式仅为示例性说明,并不对本申请其他实施例构成任何限制。具体内部实现方式可能根据电子设备类型不同、所搭载的操作系统的不同、所使用的程序、所调用的接口的不同而不同,本申请实施例不作任何限制,可以实现本申请实施例所描述的特征功能即可。The implementation manners described in the foregoing embodiments are only exemplary illustrations, and do not constitute any limitation to other embodiments of the present application. The specific internal implementation may vary depending on the type of electronic device, the operating system installed, the program used, and the interface called. feature functions.
上述实施例中所用,根据上下文,术语“当…时”可以被解释为意思是“如果…”或“在…后”或“响应于确定…”或“响应于检测到…”。类似地,根据上下文,短语“在确定…时”或“如果检测到(所陈述的条件或事件)”可以被解释为意思是“如果确定…”或“响应于确定…”或“在检测到(所陈述的条件或事件)时”或“响应于检测到(所陈述的条件或事件)”。As used in the above embodiments, depending on the context, the term "when" may be interpreted to mean "if" or "after" or "in response to determining..." or "in response to detecting...". Similarly, depending on the context, the phrases "in determining" or "if detected (a stated condition or event)" may be interpreted to mean "if determining..." or "in response to determining..." or "on detecting (a stated condition or event)" or "in response to detecting (a stated condition or event)".
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线)或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质,(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如DVD)、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘)等。In the above embodiments, all or part of them may be implemented by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof. When implemented using software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions according to the embodiments of the present application will be generated in whole or in part. The computer can be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices. The computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server or data center Transmission to another website site, computer, server, or data center by wired (eg, coaxial cable, optical fiber, DSL) or wireless (eg, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) means. The computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer, or a data storage device such as a server or a data center integrated with one or more available media. The available media may be magnetic media (eg, floppy disk, hard disk, magnetic tape), optical media (eg, DVD), or semiconductor media (eg, solid state hard disk), etc.
本领域普通技术人员可以理解实现上述实施例方法中的全部或部分流程,该流程可以由计算机程序来指令相关的硬件完成,该程序可存储于计算机可读取存储介质中,该程序在执行时,可包括如上述各方法实施例的流程。而前述的存储介质包括:ROM或随机存储记忆体RAM、磁碟或者光盘等各种可存储程序代码的介质。Those of ordinary skill in the art can understand that all or part of the processes in the methods of the above embodiments are realized. The processes can be completed by computer programs to instruct related hardware. The programs can be stored in computer-readable storage media. When the programs are executed , may include the processes of the foregoing method embodiments. The aforementioned storage medium includes: ROM or random access memory RAM, magnetic disk or optical disk, and other various media that can store program codes.
以上实施例仅用以说明本申请的技术方案,而非对其限制;尽管参照前述实施例对本申请进行了详细的说明,本领域的普通技术人员应当理解:其依然可以对前述各实施例所记载的技术方案进行修改,或者对其中部分技术特征进行等同替换;而这些修改或者替换,并不使相应技术方案的本质脱离本申请各实施例技术方案的范围。The above embodiments are only used to illustrate the technical solutions of the present application, rather than to limit them; although the present application has been described in detail with reference to the foregoing embodiments, those of ordinary skill in the art should understand that: it can still apply to the foregoing embodiments Modifications are made to the recorded technical solutions, or equivalent replacements are made to some of the technical features; and these modifications or replacements do not make the essence of the corresponding technical solutions depart from the scope of the technical solutions of each embodiment of the application.

Claims (43)

  1. 一种设备交互方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A device interaction method, characterized in that the method comprises:
    第一设备显示第一界面,所述第一界面包括第一控件和第二控件,所述第一控件为指示所述第一设备的设备选项,所述第二控件为指示第二设备的设备选项,所述第二设备是所述第一设备发现的设备;The first device displays a first interface, the first interface includes a first control and a second control, the first control is a device option indicating the first device, and the second control is a device indicating a second device option, the second device is a device discovered by the first device;
    所述第一设备检测到第一用户操作,所述第一用户操作用于用户关联所述第一设备和所述第二设备;The first device detects a first user operation, and the first user operation is used for a user to associate the first device with the second device;
    所述第一设备显示第二界面,所述第二界面中显示有第一场景化服务的服务选项,所述第一场景化服务是所述第一用户操作所关联的所述第一设备和所述第二设备所协同支持的场景化服务;The first device displays a second interface, and the second interface displays service options of a first scenario-based service, and the first scenario-based service is the first device associated with the first user operation and Scenario-based services supported by the second device;
    所述第一设备检测到选择所述第一场景化服务的第二用户操作;The first device detects a second user operation for selecting the first scenario-based service;
    所述第一设备指示运行所述第二用户操作选中的所述第一场景化服务的运行。The first device instructs to run the first scenario-based service selected by the second user operation.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述第一界面中,所述第二控件分布在以所述第一控件为中心的圆周上,所述第一控件与所述第二控件为分开状态。The method according to claim 1, wherein in the first interface, the second controls are distributed on a circle centered on the first control, and the first control and the second Controls are detached.
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一用户操作包括所述第二控件被选中,或所述第一控件被选中,或所示第一控件和所述第二控件同时被选中的操作。The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the first user operation includes selecting the second control, or selecting the first control, or displaying the first control and the second control The operation in which controls are selected simultaneously.
  4. 根据权利要求1-3中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一用户操作为所述用户选中所述第二控件,并拖拽所述第二控件向着靠近所述第一控件的方向移动到指定区域后,释放所述第二控件的操作,所述指定区域为以所述第一控件为中心,半径为第一半径距离的圆形区域;所述第二界面还显示有所述第一控件与所述第二控件吸附在一起。The method according to any one of claims 1-3, wherein the first user operation is that the user selects the second control and drags the second control toward the first After the direction of the control moves to the specified area, release the operation of the second control, the specified area is a circular area with the first control as the center and the radius as the first radius distance; the second interface also displays The first control and the second control are adsorbed together.
  5. 根据权利要求1-3中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二界面中显示有悬浮控件,所述悬浮控件包括第一区域,所述第一区域显示所述第一场景化服务的服务选项;所述第二用户操作为所述用户拖拽所述第二控件至所述第一区域后,释放所述第二控件的操作,或者,所述第二用户操作为所述用户拖拽所述第二控件经由所述第一区域,向着靠近所述第一控件的方向移动到指定区域后,释放所述第二控件的操作,所述指定区域为以所述第一控件为中心,半径为第一半径距离的圆形区域。The method according to any one of claims 1-3, wherein a floating control is displayed in the second interface, the floating control includes a first area, and the first area displays the first scene The service option of the customized service; the second user operation is the operation of releasing the second control after the user drags the second control to the first area, or the second user operation is the operation of releasing the second control The user drags the second control through the first area, moves toward the direction close to the first control to a designated area, and then releases the operation of the second control, and the designated area is based on the first area. The control is a circular area with a center and a radius of the first radius distance.
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,所述悬浮控件包括多个圆形区域,或者多个矩形区域,或者多个扇形区域,或者多个扇环形区域,或者多个圆环形区域,或者多个多边形区域。The method according to claim 5, wherein the floating control includes multiple circular areas, or multiple rectangular areas, or multiple fan-shaped areas, or multiple fan-shaped ring areas, or multiple circular ring-shaped areas , or multiple polygonal regions.
  7. 根据权利要求1-6中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二界面中包括所述第一控件。The method according to any one of claims 1-6, wherein the second interface includes the first control.
  8. 根据权利要求1-7中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一界面中所述第一控件 与所述第二控件的位置关系指示所述第一设备与所述第二设备之间的以下一项或多项关系:连接关系,或方位关系,或距离关系,或信号强弱关系;The method according to any one of claims 1-7, wherein the positional relationship between the first control and the second control in the first interface indicates that the first device and the second One or more of the following relationships between devices: connection relationship, or orientation relationship, or distance relationship, or signal strength relationship;
    其中,所述第一控件与所述第二控件分开,指示所述第一设备与所述第二设备未连接,所述第一控件与所述第二控件相连,指示所述第一设备与所述第二设备已连接;Wherein, the first control is separated from the second control, indicating that the first device is not connected to the second device, and the first control is connected with the second control, indicating that the first device is not connected to the second control. said second device is connected;
    和/或,所述第二控件位于所述第一控件的左边,或右边,或上边,或下边,分别指示所述第二设备位于所述第一设备的左方,或右方,或前方,或后方;And/or, the second control is located on the left, or right, or above, or below the first control, respectively indicating that the second device is located on the left, or right, or in front of the first device , or rear;
    和/或,所述第一控件与所述第二控件之间的距离越远,指示所述第一设备与所述第二设备之间的距离越远,或者,所述第一设备与所述第二设备之间的信号越弱,所述第一控件与所述第二控件之间的距离越近,指示所述第一设备与所述第二设备之间的距离越近,或者,所述第一设备与所述第二设备之间的信号越强。And/or, the farther the distance between the first control and the second control is, it indicates that the distance between the first device and the second device is farther, or the distance between the first device and the second control is farther. The weaker the signal between the second device is, the closer the distance between the first control and the second control is, indicating that the closer the distance between the first device and the second device is, or, The stronger the signal between the first device and the second device.
  9. 根据权利要求1-8中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一场景化服务是从第一数据库中查询到的场景化服务,所述第一数据库记录了一个或多个设备组合所支持的一个或多个场景化服务,所述设备组合包括所述第一设备和其关联的所述第二设备构成的设备组合;The method according to any one of claims 1-8, wherein the first scenario-based service is a scenario-based service queried from a first database, and the first database records one or more One or more scenario-based services supported by a device combination, where the device combination includes a device combination composed of the first device and its associated second device;
    所述场景化服务通过以下一项或多项参数确定:所述设备组合的设备类型、设备特征、产品定位、设备用途、设备所处环境或场景、设备所处状态、最近运行的应用。The scenario-based service is determined by one or more of the following parameters: device type, device feature, product positioning, device usage, device environment or scene, device status, and recently run applications of the device combination.
  10. 根据权利要求1-8中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一场景化服务是从第二数据库中查询到的场景化服务,所述第二数据库记录了一个或多个原子化服务组合所支持的一个或多个场景化服务,所述原子化服务组合包括所述第一设备和其关联的所述第二设备所具有的原子能力构成的原子化服务组合;The method according to any one of claims 1-8, wherein the first scenario-based service is a scenario-based service queried from a second database, and the second database records one or more One or more scenario-based services supported by an atomic service combination, where the atomic service combination includes an atomic service combination composed of atomic capabilities possessed by the first device and its associated second device;
    所述原子能力包括以下一项或多项:音频输出能力、音频输入能力、显示能力、摄像能力、触控输入能力、键鼠输入能力。The atomic capabilities include one or more of the following: audio output capabilities, audio input capabilities, display capabilities, camera capabilities, touch input capabilities, and keyboard and mouse input capabilities.
  11. 根据权利要求1-10中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一场景化服务根据以下一项或多项参数计算被选中的概率:所述用户使用所述第一场景化服务的频率,所述用户设定的所述第一场景化服务的排序,所述第一设备和/或所述第二设备所处环境或场景,所述第一设备和/或所述第二设备所处状态,所述第一设备和/或所述第二设备最近运行的应用;被用户选中概率越高的所述第一场景化服务的服务选项,越优先推荐显示。The method according to any one of claims 1-10, wherein the first scenario-based service calculates the probability of being selected according to one or more of the following parameters: the user uses the first scenario-based service The frequency of the service, the ranking of the first scenario-based service set by the user, the environment or scenario where the first device and/or the second device are located, the first device and/or the second device The state of the second device, the most recently run application of the first device and/or the second device; the service option of the first scenario-based service with a higher probability of being selected by the user is recommended and displayed with higher priority.
  12. 根据权利要求5-11中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述悬浮控件的形状为圆环形或扇环形,其中多个圆环形区域或扇环形区域分别指示多个所述第一场景化服务,越靠近圆心的圆环形区域或扇环形区域所指示的所述第一场景化服务为更优先推荐的场景化服务。The method according to any one of claims 5-11, wherein the shape of the floating control is a circular ring or a fan ring, wherein a plurality of circular ring areas or fan ring areas respectively indicate a plurality of the For the first scenario-based service, the first scenario-based service indicated by the circular area or fan-shaped area closer to the center of the circle is a more preferentially recommended scenario-based service.
  13. 根据权利要求1-12中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二界面中还显示有第三设备的设备选项,所述第三设备是评估所述第一设备和其关联的所述第二设备的设备使用需求而推荐的设备。The method according to any one of claims 1-12, wherein the second interface also displays device options of a third device, and the third device evaluates the first device and its associated The second device is the recommended device according to the device usage requirements.
  14. 根据权利要求13所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第三设备是所述第一设备发现的设备,点击所述第三设备的设备选项,所述第一设备显示第二场景化服务的服务选项。The method according to claim 13, wherein the third device is a device discovered by the first device, and the device option of the third device is clicked, and the first device displays the information of the second scene-based service Service options.
  15. 根据权利要求13所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第三设备不是所述第一设备发现的设备,点击所述第三设备的设备选项,所述第一设备跳转显示第五界面,所述第五界面包括多个物品选项,所述多个物品选项来自于多个提供源,所述多个物品选项包括指示所述第三设备的物品选项。The method according to claim 13, wherein the third device is not the device discovered by the first device, and the device option of the third device is clicked, and the first device jumps to display the fifth interface, The fifth interface includes a plurality of item options, the plurality of item options come from multiple supply sources, and the plurality of item options include an item option indicating the third device.
  16. 根据权利要求13-15中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第三设备是基于一项或多项参数而推荐的设备:所述第一设备和/或其关联的所述第二设备的设备类型、设备特征、产品定位、设备用途、设备所处环境或场景、设备所处状态、最近运行的应用,或者所述第一场景化服务,或者预测可拓展的使用场景。The method according to any one of claims 13-15, wherein the third device is a device recommended based on one or more parameters: the first device and/or its associated The device type, device feature, product positioning, device use, device environment or scene, device state, recently run application of the second device, or the first scene-based service, or predictable and scalable use scene.
  17. 根据权利要求1-16中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一场景化服务由第一原子化服务组合支持运行,所述第一原子化服务组合包括所述第一设备提供的至少一个第一服务,和/或所述第二设备提供的至少一个第二服务。The method according to any one of claims 1-16, wherein the first scenario-based service is supported by a first atomic service composition, and the first atomic service composition includes the first device At least one first service provided, and/or at least one second service provided by the second device.
  18. 根据权利要求1-17中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-17, further comprising:
    所述第一设备运行所述第一场景化服务,和/或,与所述第一设备关联的所述第二设备运行所述第一场景化服务。The first device runs the first scenario-based service, and/or, the second device associated with the first device runs the first scenario-based service.
  19. 根据权利要求1-18中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一设备运行所述第一场景化服务所显示的第三界面与所述第二设备运行所述第一场景化服务所显示的第四界面不同。The method according to any one of claims 1-18, characterized in that the third interface displayed by the first device running the first scenario-based service is different from the second device running the first scenario The fourth interface displayed by the customized service is different.
  20. 根据权利要求19所述的方法,其特征在于,若所述第一场景化服务为投屏服务,所述第二设备为大屏设备,所述第四界面为视频或图像画面,所述第三界面为控制所述视频或图像画面显示功能的控制界面。The method according to claim 19, wherein if the first scenario-based service is a screen projection service, the second device is a large-screen device, the fourth interface is a video or image screen, and the second The third interface is a control interface for controlling the display function of the video or image screen.
  21. 根据权利要求19所述的方法,其特征在于,若所述第一场景化服务为运动监测服务,所述第二设备为可穿戴运动设备,所述第三界面为运动轨迹的画面,所述第四界面为检测到的所述用户的运动数据,所述运动数据包括:运动速度、运动距离、运动时间、心率。The method according to claim 19, wherein if the first scenario-based service is a sports monitoring service, the second device is a wearable sports device, the third interface is a picture of a sports track, and the The fourth interface is the detected exercise data of the user, and the exercise data includes: exercise speed, exercise distance, exercise time, and heart rate.
  22. 根据权利要求1-20中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-20, further comprising:
    在投屏场景下,所述第一设备根据释放所述拖拽操作时,所述第二控件与所述第一控件的相对位置,确定所述第一设备的屏幕界面投屏在所述第二设备屏幕中的位置。In the screen projection scenario, the first device determines that the screen interface of the first device is projected on the second control according to the relative position of the second control and the first control when the drag operation is released. The position in the screen of the second device.
  23. 根据权利要求22所述的方法,其特征在于,The method of claim 22, wherein,
    如果所述相对位置为所述第二控件在所述第一控件的左侧,那么所述第一设备的屏幕界面投屏在所述第二设备屏幕中的右侧;If the relative position is that the second control is on the left side of the first control, then the screen interface of the first device is projected on the right side of the screen of the second device;
    如果所述相对位置为所述第二控件在所述第一控件的右侧,那么所述第一设备的屏幕界面投屏在所述第二设备屏幕中的左侧;If the relative position is that the second control is on the right side of the first control, then the screen interface of the first device is projected on the left side of the screen of the second device;
    如果所述相对位置为所述第二控件在所述第一控件的中间,那么所述第一设备的屏幕界面全屏投屏在所述第二设备屏幕上。If the relative position is that the second control is in the middle of the first control, then the full screen of the screen interface of the first device is projected on the screen of the second device.
  24. 根据权利要求4、7-11、13-23中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 4, 7-11, 13-23, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述第一设备检测到作用于所述第二界面上的第三用户操作,所述第三用户操作用于关联所述第四设备和所述第一设备,所述第三用户操作包括选中指示所述第四设备的第三控件操作;The first device detects a third user operation acting on the second interface, the third user operation is used to associate the fourth device with the first device, and the third user operation includes selecting instructing the third control operation of the fourth device;
    响应于所述第三用户操作,所述第一设备显示第六界面,所述第六界面中显示有所述第一控件、所述第二控件、所述第三控件吸附在一起,所述第六界面中还显示有第三场景化服务选项,所述第三场景化服务选项是根据所述第一设备、所述第二设备和所述第四设备确定的,所述第三场景化服务选项与所述第一场景化服务选项不同。In response to the third user operation, the first device displays a sixth interface, the sixth interface displays the first control, the second control, and the third control are adsorbed together, the The sixth interface also displays a third scenario-based service option, the third scenario-based service option is determined according to the first device, the second device, and the fourth device, and the third scenario-based service option The service options are different from the first scenario-based service options.
  25. 根据权利要求1-24中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述第一设备指示所述第二用户操作选中的所述第一场景化服务的运行之后,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-24, characterized in that, after the first device instructs the second user to operate and select the operation of the first scenario-based service, the method further comprises :
    所述第一设备检测到第四用户操作,所述第四用户操作包括将所述第一控件与所述第二控件分开的操作;the first device detects a fourth user action, the fourth user action comprising an action to separate the first control from the second control;
    所述第一设备指示所述第二用户操作选中的所述第一场景化服务停止运行。The first device instructs the first scenario-based service selected by the second user to stop running.
  26. 根据权利要求25所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 25, further comprising:
    所述第一设备停止运行所述第二用户操作选中的所述第一场景化服务,和/或,所述第二设备停止运行所述第二用户操作选中的所述第一场景化服务。The first device stops running the first scenario-based service selected by the second user operation, and/or the second device stops running the first scenario-based service selected by the second user operation.
  27. 根据权利要求25或26所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第四用户操作为所述用户选中所述第二控件,并拖拽所述第二控件向着远离所述第一控件的方向移动,直到移动出所述指定区域后,释放所述第二控件的操作。The method according to claim 25 or 26, wherein the fourth user operation is that the user selects the second control and drags the second control to move away from the first control , until the operation of the second control is released after moving out of the specified area.
  28. 根据权利要求1-27中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一设备包括以下任意一项:手机、平板电脑、便携式/非便携式电脑、个人计算机、智能电视;所述第二设备包括以下任意一项:手机、平板电脑、便携式移动电脑、台式个人电脑、智能音箱、智能手表、智能手环、智能电视、耳机、智能眼镜、车机、智能座舱、游戏机、跑步机、动感单车、体重秤、体脂秤、热水器、灯具、空调、血糖仪、血氧饱和仪、心率仪、AR/VR设备、云主机/云服务器、智能可穿戴设备、智能家居设备、打印机。The method according to any one of claims 1-27, wherein the first device includes any one of the following: a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a portable/non-portable computer, a personal computer, and a smart TV; 2. Equipment includes any of the following: mobile phones, tablet computers, portable mobile computers, desktop personal computers, smart speakers, smart watches, smart bracelets, smart TVs, earphones, smart glasses, car machines, smart cockpits, game consoles, treadmills , spinning bikes, weight scales, body fat scales, water heaters, lamps, air conditioners, blood glucose meters, oximeters, heart rate meters, AR/VR devices, cloud hosts/cloud servers, smart wearable devices, smart home devices, printers.
  29. 根据权利要求1-28中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一场景化服务为打印服务,所述第二设备为打印机,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-28, wherein the first scenario-based service is a printing service, and the second device is a printer, and the method further includes:
    所述第一设备显示打印悬浮控件,所述打印悬浮控件是所述第一设备运行所述第一场景化服务显示的,所述打印悬浮控件悬浮显示在所述第一设备的用户界面上。The first device displays a floating printing control, the floating printing control is displayed by the first device running the first scene-based service, and the floating printing control is displayed on a user interface of the first device.
  30. 根据权利要求29所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 29, further comprising:
    所述第一设备检测到对所述打印悬浮控件的第五用户操作;The first device detects a fifth user operation on the print hover control;
    所述第一设备基于所述第五用户操作将第一打印文件发送给所述第二设备进行打印,所述第一打印文件是所述第一设备检测到所述第五用户操作时显示在所述第一设备上的内容。The first device sends a first print file to the second device for printing based on the fifth user operation, and the first print file is displayed on the screen when the first device detects the fifth user operation. content on the first device.
  31. 根据权利要求29或30所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 29 or 30, further comprising:
    所述第一设备检测到对所述打印悬浮控件的第六用户操作;The first device detects a sixth user operation on the print hover control;
    所述第一设备基于所述第六用户操作删除所述打印悬浮控件,并指示所述第一场景化服务停止运行。The first device deletes the printing suspension control based on the sixth user operation, and instructs the first scene-based service to stop running.
  32. 一种设备交互方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A device interaction method, characterized in that the method comprises:
    第一设备显示第一界面,所述第一界面包括第一控件和第二控件,所述第一控件为指示所述第一设备的设备选项,所述第二控件为指示第二设备的设备选项,所述第二设备是所述第一设备发现的设备;The first device displays a first interface, the first interface includes a first control and a second control, the first control is a device option indicating the first device, and the second control is a device indicating a second device option, the second device is a device discovered by the first device;
    所述第一设备检测到第一用户操作,所述第一用户操作用于关联所述第一设备和所述第二设备;The first device detects a first user operation, and the first user operation is used to associate the first device with the second device;
    所述第一设备根据所述第一用户操作,向所述第二设备发送第一绑定请求,并接收到所述第二设备的第一同意消息;The first device sends a first binding request to the second device according to the first user operation, and receives a first consent message from the second device;
    所述第一设备根据所述第一同意消息显示第二界面,所述第二界面中显示有第一场景化服务的服务选项,所述第一场景化服务是所述第一设备和所述第二设备协同支持的场景化服务。The first device displays a second interface according to the first consent message, and the second interface displays service options of a first scenario-based service, and the first scenario-based service is a combination of the first device and the Scenario-based services supported by the second device.
  33. 根据权利要求32所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一设备根据所述第一用户操作,向所述第二设备发送第一绑定请求,具体包括:The method according to claim 32, wherein the first device sends a first binding request to the second device according to the first user operation, specifically comprising:
    所述第一设备根据所述第一用户操作,显示连接码设置框,所述连接码设置框用于设置所述第一设备和所述第二设备进行绑定的连接码;The first device displays a connection code setting box according to the first user operation, and the connection code setting box is used to set a connection code for binding the first device and the second device;
    所述第一设备接收到在所述连接码设置框中输入的第一连接码,并向所述第二设备发送所述第一绑定请求;The first device receives the first connection code input in the connection code setting box, and sends the first binding request to the second device;
    其中,所述第一同意消息中包含所述第一连接码。Wherein, the first agreement message includes the first connection code.
  34. 根据权利要求32或33所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述第一界面中,所述第二控件分布在以所述第一控件为中心,半径为第一长度的圆周上,所述第一控件与所述第二控件为分开状态。The method according to claim 32 or 33, wherein in the first interface, the second controls are distributed on a circle with the first control as the center and a radius of the first length, the The first control is separated from the second control.
  35. 根据权利要求34所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一界面还包括第四控件,所述第四控件为指示第五设备的设备选项,所述第五设备是所述第一设备发现的设备,所述第五设备关联的账号与所述第一设备关联的账号相同;所述第四控件分布在以所述第一控件为中心,半径为第二长度的圆周上,所述第一控件与所述第四控件为分开状态,所述第一长度与所述第二长度不同。The method according to claim 34, wherein the first interface further includes a fourth control, the fourth control is a device option indicating a fifth device, and the fifth device is the first device discovered by the first device. device, the account associated with the fifth device is the same as the account associated with the first device; the fourth control is distributed on a circle whose center is the first control and whose radius is the second length; A control is separated from the fourth control, and the first length is different from the second length.
  36. 根据权利要求32-35中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一设备关联的账号与所述第二设备关联的账号不同,或者,所述第二设备无关联的账号。The method according to any one of claims 32-35, wherein the account associated with the first device is different from the account associated with the second device, or the second device has no associated account.
  37. 根据权利要求35或36所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一界面还包括第五控件,所述第五控件为指示第六设备的设备选项,所述第六设备是所述第一设备发现的设备,所述第五控件与所述第四控件为分开状态,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 35 or 36, wherein the first interface further includes a fifth control, the fifth control is a device option indicating a sixth device, and the sixth device is the first For the device discovered by the device, the fifth control is in a separate state from the fourth control, and the method further includes:
    所述第一设备检测到第七用户操作,所述第七用户操作用于关联所述第五设备和所述第六设备;The first device detects a seventh user operation for associating the fifth device with the sixth device;
    所述第一设备根据所述第七用户操作,指示所述第五设备请求与所述第六设备进行绑定,并接收到用于指示所述第六设备同意与所述第五设备绑定的第二同意消息;The first device instructs the fifth device to request to bind with the sixth device according to the seventh user operation, and receives a message indicating that the sixth device agrees to bind with the fifth device The second consent message of ;
    所述第一设备根据所述第二同意消息显示第八界面,在所述第八界面中,所述第四控件与所述第五控件吸附在一起。The first device displays an eighth interface according to the second consent message, and in the eighth interface, the fourth control and the fifth control are adsorbed together.
  38. 根据权利要求32-37中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 32-37, further comprising:
    所述第一设备检测到作用在所述第二控件的用户操作,在所述第一界面移除所述第二控件。The first device detects a user operation acting on the second control, and removes the second control on the first interface.
  39. 一种电子设备,其特征在于,所述电子设备包括:通信装置、显示装置、存储器以及耦合于所述存储器的处理器,以及一个或多个程序;所述通信装置用于通信,所述显示装置用于显示界面,所述存储器中存储有计算机可执行指令,所述处理器执行所述指令时使得所述电子设备实现如权利要求1至17、19至25、27至31中任一项所述的方法。An electronic device, characterized in that the electronic device includes: a communication device, a display device, a memory, a processor coupled to the memory, and one or more programs; the communication device is used for communication, and the display The device is used for displaying an interface, and computer-executable instructions are stored in the memory, and when the processor executes the instructions, the electronic device implements any one of claims 1-17, 19-25, 27-31 the method described.
  40. 一种计算机可读存储介质,包括指令,其特征在于,当所述指令在电子设备上运行时,使得所述电子设备执行如权利要求1至17、19至25、27至31中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, comprising instructions, characterized in that, when the instructions are run on an electronic device, the electronic device is made to perform any one of claims 1 to 17, 19 to 25, 27 to 31 the method described.
  41. 一种通信系统,所述通信系统包括第一设备和第二设备,其中,所述第一设备执行如权利要求1至17、19至25、27至31中任一项所述的方法。A communication system, the communication system comprising a first device and a second device, wherein the first device executes the method according to any one of claims 1-17, 19-25, 27-31.
  42. 一种电子设备,其特征在于,所述电子设备包括:通信装置、显示装置、存储器以及耦合于所述存储器的处理器,以及一个或多个程序;所述通信装置用于通信,所述显示装置用于显示界面,所述存储器中存储有计算机可执行指令,所述处理器执行所述指令时使得所述电子设备实现如权利要求32至38中任一项所述的方法。An electronic device, characterized in that the electronic device includes: a communication device, a display device, a memory, a processor coupled to the memory, and one or more programs; the communication device is used for communication, and the display The device is used for displaying an interface, and computer-executable instructions are stored in the memory, and when the processor executes the instructions, the electronic device implements the method according to any one of claims 32 to 38.
  43. 一种计算机可读存储介质,包括指令,其特征在于,当所述指令在电子设备上运行时,使得所述电子设备执行如权利要求32至38中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, comprising instructions, wherein when the instructions are run on an electronic device, the electronic device is made to execute the method according to any one of claims 32 to 38.
PCT/CN2022/115212 2021-08-31 2022-08-26 Device interaction method, electronic device and system WO2023030196A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202111016484 2021-08-31
CN202111016484.5 2021-08-31
CN202210270366.5A CN115729392A (en) 2021-08-31 2022-03-18 Equipment interaction method, electronic equipment and system
CN202210270366.5 2022-03-18

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2023030196A1 true WO2023030196A1 (en) 2023-03-09

Family

ID=85292348

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2022/115212 WO2023030196A1 (en) 2021-08-31 2022-08-26 Device interaction method, electronic device and system

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN115729392A (en)
WO (1) WO2023030196A1 (en)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN105302285A (en) * 2014-08-01 2016-02-03 福州瑞芯微电子股份有限公司 Multi-screen display method, equipment and system
CN111580764A (en) * 2020-04-18 2020-08-25 广州视源电子科技股份有限公司 Screen sharing method, device, equipment and storage medium of intelligent interactive tablet
CN112083867A (en) * 2020-07-29 2020-12-15 华为技术有限公司 Cross-device object dragging method and device
CN112698761A (en) * 2020-12-30 2021-04-23 维沃移动通信有限公司 Image display method and device and electronic equipment

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN105302285A (en) * 2014-08-01 2016-02-03 福州瑞芯微电子股份有限公司 Multi-screen display method, equipment and system
CN111580764A (en) * 2020-04-18 2020-08-25 广州视源电子科技股份有限公司 Screen sharing method, device, equipment and storage medium of intelligent interactive tablet
CN112083867A (en) * 2020-07-29 2020-12-15 华为技术有限公司 Cross-device object dragging method and device
CN112698761A (en) * 2020-12-30 2021-04-23 维沃移动通信有限公司 Image display method and device and electronic equipment

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN115729392A (en) 2023-03-03

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
KR102470275B1 (en) Voice control method and electronic device
WO2021052263A1 (en) Voice assistant display method and device
WO2021013158A1 (en) Display method and related apparatus
CN109814766B (en) Application display method and electronic equipment
WO2021063343A1 (en) Voice interaction method and device
WO2020177622A1 (en) Method for displaying ui assembly and electronic device
WO2021103981A1 (en) Split-screen display processing method and apparatus, and electronic device
CN111240547A (en) Interactive method for cross-device task processing, electronic device and storage medium
WO2021036770A1 (en) Split-screen processing method and terminal device
WO2021000804A1 (en) Display method and apparatus in locked state
WO2022068483A1 (en) Application startup method and apparatus, and electronic device
WO2021185244A1 (en) Device interaction method and electronic device
WO2022017393A1 (en) Display interaction system, display method, and device
WO2020238759A1 (en) Interface display method and electronic device
WO2022068819A1 (en) Interface display method and related apparatus
WO2022037726A1 (en) Split-screen display method and electronic device
WO2021078032A1 (en) User interface display method and electronic device
CN113986408A (en) Application page display method and electronic equipment
WO2023030099A1 (en) Cross-device interaction method and apparatus, and screen projection system and terminal
WO2021196980A1 (en) Multi-screen interaction method, electronic device, and computer-readable storage medium
WO2021143650A1 (en) Method for sharing data and electronic device
WO2021143391A1 (en) Video call-based screen sharing method and mobile device
WO2022135157A1 (en) Page display method and apparatus, and electronic device and readable storage medium
CN113448658A (en) Screen capture processing method, graphical user interface and terminal
WO2024045801A1 (en) Method for screenshotting, and electronic device, medium and program product

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 22863333

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 22863333

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1